JP2022086346A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (Pachinko game machine) and an enclosed-type game machine having a characteristic in a light emitting board.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a light emitting board LEB on which light emitting elements LED, LED' are mounted and a ball passage unit BU in which ball passages 2451, 2261, JR are formed through which a game ball passes. The light emitting boards LED, LED' are fixed to the ball passage unit BU.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 121

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and an enclosed game machine.

In pachinko machines and other game consoles, obstacles that change the direction in which the game ball falls, as well as winning openings, starting openings, and variable winning openings that allow the game balls to win are provided in the game area of the game board. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player, such as paying out the prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and the like).

In addition, some of these game consoles are equipped with a light emitting board.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-200320

However, in the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the light emitting substrate.

In view of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game table having a characteristic of a light emitting substrate.

The game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
A light emitting board on which a light emitting element is mounted and a light emitting board
A ball passage unit in which a ball passage through which a game ball passes is formed, and
It is a game table equipped with
The light emitting substrate is fixed to the ball passage unit.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game console of the present invention, it is possible to realize a game console having a characteristic of a light emitting substrate.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is a rear view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. (A) is a schematic front view of the game board as seen from the front side (player side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board arranged on the game board. It is a representation figure. It is a figure explaining the structure of the variable winning apparatus. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. As an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2, and (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol. An example of a decorative symbol is shown, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the result is normal, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figures 1 and 2 are present, and (c) is a diagram showing It is a figure which shows an example of the contents of the distribution table for special figure determination, and (d) is a figure explaining the specification of play time (b time saving state). It is a flowchart which shows the flow of processing in the 1st sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of processing in the 1st sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of an accessory ratio / setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a DIP switch board. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure look-ahead process. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead result storage part for special figure 1 and special figure 2. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting suggestion execution lottery table at the time of the first big hit end effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the first big hit end effect. (C) is a figure which shows an example of the contents of the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table at the end of play time. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting suggestion ball selection table before the play time, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting suggestion ball selection table after the play time. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the out-of-order variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which concerns on the decorative symbol variation display centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 18 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production in a big hit game centering on a decorative pattern display device step by step. It is a figure explaining an example of the display of the information about the play time at the time of power-on. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect to affect the decorative symbol variation display after the end of a normal big hit game centering on a decorative symbol display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect to affect the decorative symbol variation display in a revival mode centering on a decorative symbol display device step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect to affect the decorative symbol variation display in a sudden time saving state centering on a decorative symbol display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect to affect the decorative symbol variation display step by step in the case of suddenly shifting to play time during a sudden time saving state centered on a decorative symbol display device. It is a figure which shows one example of the effect to affect the decorative symbol variation display in the case of suddenly winning in a short time in the symbol variation display of the number of fittings which shifts to the play time centered on the decorative symbol display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion effect in the big hit game end effect centering on a decorative pattern display device. It is a figure which shows an example of setting suggestion effect centering on a decorative pattern display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which includes the notification which shifts to the play time centering on a decorative pattern display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which includes the notification which shifts to the play time centering on a decorative pattern display device step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of the look-ahead notice effect performed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which includes the notification which shifts to the play time centering on a decorative pattern display device step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of the look-ahead notice effect performed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of the advance notice effect performed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which this invention is applied. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to this invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) shows the mobile phone 3000 which has the storage part which stores the electronic data which realizes this invention. (D) shows a portable game machine 4000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (d) shows a household provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention. The video game machine 5000 for use is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is a rear view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. (A) is a schematic front view of the game board as seen from the front side (player side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board arranged on the game board. It is a representation figure. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. As an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special symbol 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special symbol 2, and (c) shows an example of the decorative symbol. An example is shown, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal symbol. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figures 1 and 2 are correct, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figure is correct. It is a figure which shows an example of the contents of the distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of processing in the 1st sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of processing in the 2nd sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, (c) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of an accessory ratio / setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a DIP switch board. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 41 step by step. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the hold icon displayed in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 41. It is a figure which shows the decorative body which the 2nd staging movable body 8 has. It is a figure which shows one example of the effect which the display mode of a variable icon and the display mode of the background in the display of a reach title are related step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which an animation is displayed on a sub liquid crystal display device step by step by a zone effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which super reach is performed step by step which the display mode of a hold icon and the light emission mode of a star-shaped effect lamp 206 are related. It is a figure which shows one example of the staging which the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the decorative body included in the 2nd staging movable body 8 are related step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the staging similar to the staging in which the 2nd staging movable body 8 shown in FIG. 58 is operated step by step. (A) is a diagram showing the title background color determination table of reach, (b) is a diagram showing the emission color determination table of the light emitting unit 71, and (c) is a diagram showing the kimono color determination table of the lord. .. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine to which this invention is applied seen from the front side (player side). It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is a rear view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front side (player side). It is a functional block diagram of the pachinko machine 100. As an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special symbol 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special symbol 2, and (c) shows an example of the decoration. An example of a symbol is shown, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal symbol. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of the process, and (c) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 2nd sub-control unit 500 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of processing, (c) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of an accessory ratio / setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a DIP switch board. (A) is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the game state after the jackpot game, and (b) is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62. It is a figure which shows the example in which the time-saving game state ends shortly before the end of the time-saving game state and shifts to the non-time-saving game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 73 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example which the period length of a pull-back period is different from the example shown in FIG. 74 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 75 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example in the case where there is no pullback period step by step. (A) is a diagram showing a list of music pieces that can be selected when a predetermined condition is not satisfied, and (b) is a diagram showing a list of music pieces selected when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is a figure which shows the list of music which is selected after the predetermined condition is satisfied even once. It is the figure which showed the example different from the example shown in FIG. 73 step by step following from FIG. 73 (h). It is a figure which shows the example in which the first hold icon h21 among the hold icons of special figure 2 at the time when the symbol variation display of the last special figure which can maintain a time saving game state is finished is a golden display mode. It is a figure which shows the example of operating the operation key unit 190 step by step in the state that the music selection display MC is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of operating the operation key unit 190 step by step during a big hit game started without satisfying a predetermined condition. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to this invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 8 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 85 as viewed from the back side. (A) is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front, (b) is an enlarged view of the main control lamp board 207, and (c) is a cover plate 231 of the special 1 start chucker 23. It is a figure which shows the state which looked at the back side of a from diagonally lower right. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a state in which the lower right transparent plate 2591, the upper right transparent plate 2592, and the left transparent plate 2591 are removed from the game board 200 shown in FIG. 87. It is a perspective view when the rotating body unit 28 is seen from the back side of a game board. It is a figure which shows the rotating body unit 28 shown in FIG. 89. It is a figure which shows the state of the electric distribution unit 26, and the state of a rotating body unit 28. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game ball as a result of making a left-handed strike. It is a figure which shows the example of the game explanation displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a figure which shows the other example of the game description displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification of the example shown in FIG. 92. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the 3rd ball direction change part 263 and the 1st ball direction change part 261. It is a figure which shows the example which changed the region 125 before distribution. It is a figure which shows the example which changed the upstream part of the 3rd ball path 2603 in the electric distribution unit 26. (A) is a partially enlarged perspective view when the third ball path 2603 is cross-sectionald in the vertical direction, and (b) is the third ball path 2603 when the inlet 2603s portion of the third ball path 2603 is cross-sectionald in the horizontal direction. It is a figure which shows the cross-sectional shape of. It is a partially enlarged side view when the third sphere path 2603 is cross-sectionald in the vertical direction. It is a figure which shows the process until the game ball entered the general winning opening 227 provided in the middle of the 3rd ball path 2603, and the state that it could not enter. It is a figure which shows the modification of the 3rd ball path 2603, and is the cross-sectional view when the 3rd ball path 2603 is cross-sectionald in the vertical direction, and the left side of a paper surface is a front side, and the right side of a paper surface is a rear side. It is a figure which shows the other example which provided the entrance of the game ball which opened toward the rear side (the back side) in the middle of a ball path. It is a figure which shows the example which moves the game ball laterally in the middle of a ball path, and then the game ball enters into the entrance of the game ball which opened toward the rear side (the back side).

(A) is a cross-sectional view when the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 and the fourth ball direction change portion 264 are cross-sectionald on a vertical plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and (b) is a game in the second upstream ball delay portion 2653. It is the figure which showed the trajectory of the ball schematically, (c) is the figure which showed the trajectory of the game ball in the ball behavior stabilizing part 266 schematically, and (d) is the game which passed through the ball behavior stabilizing part 266. It is a figure which showed the trajectory of a sphere schematically. It is a perspective view when the 2nd upstream ball delay part 2653 is seen from diagonally above. It is a partial cross-sectional view which shows the deformation example of a sphere delay part. It is sectional drawing which shows the modification of the sphere behavior stabilization part 266. It shows a state in which various members overlapping with the 1st 3D film effect body 271, the 2nd 3D film effect body 272, the 3rd 3D film effect body 273, and the 4th 3D film effect body 274 are removed from the game board 200. It is a figure. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a state in which the first three-dimensional film effector 271 and the third three-dimensional film effector 273 are removed from the state shown in FIG. 110. It is a figure which shows the 1st 3D film effect body 271 alone. It is a perspective view when the 2nd three-dimensional film staging body 272 is seen from a little right side. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance that the three-dimensional part 2712 of the first three-dimensional film effect body 271 is fixed to the mounting part 2723 of the second three-dimensional film effect body 272. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the mounting structure of the 3rd three-dimensional film staging body 273. It is a figure which shows the LED board attached to the frame plate. It is a figure which shows each lens mounting base mounted on each LED board 2772-2774. It is a figure which shows each lens mounted on each lens mounting base 2762-2764. It is a schematic block diagram of the attacker unit 25'. FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining measures for preventing the game ball that has fallen in the fall passage FR from bouncing back. The back ball passage 2451 for the out port, the back ball passage 2261 for the general winning opening, and the ball passage unit BU in which the merging back ball passage JR is formed as shown in FIG. 119, and the back ball passage 2326 for the electric chew also shown in FIG. 119. It is a figure which shows the formed sphere passage forming member BP. It is a figure which shows each of the ball passage unit BU, the ball passage forming member BP, the light emitting substrate LEB, and the light guide plate LGP. It is a figure which shows a part of the left side area of a game area 124. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game ball as a result of performing a left-handed strike in the example shown in FIG. 123. It is a figure which shows between the downstream end Rt1e of the 1st ball route Rt1 and the out port 240. It is a figure which shows the staging movable body unit which becomes an example. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect movable body unit 27U shown in FIG. 126. (A) is an external perspective view of the handle unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit. It is a figure which shows the dial 86. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a ball joint structure of a dial 86 and a transmission gear 842, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a transmission gear 842 and a volume gear 843 as viewed from the front side. It is a figure which shows typically the connection structure of a dial 86 and a handle base 82. (A) is a view (front view) of the glass frame unit viewed from the front side (player side), and (b) is a view (rear view) of the glass frame unit viewed from the rear side. (A) is a view (front view) of the front transparent plate member FG as viewed from the front side (player side), and FIG. 3 (b) shows the rear transparent plate member BG as the front transparent plate of (a). It is a view (front view) seen from the front side (player side) like the member FG. It is a figure which shows the state which looked at the game board through the glass frame unit GU. It is sectional drawing which showed the structure around the lap-less left end portion BGL in the rear side transparent plate member BG. It is a schematic diagram which looked at the front frame door 106 and the door 108 with a ball storage dish from the back side. It is a side view which shows typically the ball guide passage PAS and the ball removal passage BRC. (A) is a schematic view of a door 108 with a ball storage tray showing a door body for maintenance, and (b) is a removal of the fitting portion MD31 fitted to the fitted portion 1083 by the operation of one finger. It is a figure which shows the flow. It is a schematic diagram which shows the appearance that the window part MD1 opened 90 degrees or more. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which this invention is applied.

Hereinafter, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating body game machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 40 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 1 to 40, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 1 to 1 to 40 are used. In the description using FIG. 40, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 40 are given priority.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door 108 with a ball storage plate. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. A clerk at a game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member mounted on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 with respect to the lower side of the main body 104 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage dish is opened by pushing an open lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage dish for detecting that the door 108 with a ball storage dish has been opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that is guided to the launcher 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, an effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices by the operation of the player, and a chance button lamp that is built in the effect button 136 and causes the effect button 136 to emit light. 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store to lend a ball, and a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance. It is provided with a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full due to a game ball. Further, the operation key unit 190 is also provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching mallet 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. The launching device 110 launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player. It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 1, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the back side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game ball and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable and, when mounted at a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 5). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to give a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing related to the effect. A second sub-board case 166 for accommodating a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 5). A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes (see FIG. 5) and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launch of a game ball (FIG. 5). A power switch that configures a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices (see FIG. 5), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change key 192, the setting change button 194, and the accessory ratio / setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In the present embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change mode can be set to at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities. Can be migrated to. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner visible to the clerk. As shown in FIG. 12A, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 has double-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged one above the other, and one-digit 7-segment LEDs modularized on the right side. The bonus ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the bonus ratio (YH) and the continuous bonus ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a red monochromatic LED, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. It should be noted that at least a part of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that the player can see it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 3A is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. Here, the arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions in which the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand may be referred to as the right in front view. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher one may be referred to as upper and the lower one may be referred to as lower. Although not shown in FIG. 3, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side may be referred to as front or front, and the back side may be referred to as back or rear.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, the front left side portion 200a of the game board 200 is inserted into the front view left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the main body 104, and here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the game board 200 is rotated around the center of rotation and the right side portion 200b of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 to be set. With such a structure, workability can be improved. In some cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is formed of, for example, resin, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface displaying a character or the like of the pachinko machine 100. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which a character of the pachinko machine 100 or the like is printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged at the lower right of the main body 201. When it is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, game stop that makes it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached to and detached from the main body 104. Of the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the launched game ball.

Areas other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be referred to as a non-game area. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished from each other with the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes with the firing intensity of the game ball maximized can be referred to as at least the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area in which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of the effect device or the like in the game area 124. The game area 124 may be referred to as a flow area at the point where the game ball flows down during the game, and the non-game area may be referred to as the non-flow area at the point where the game ball does not flow down during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but an area in which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of a staging device or the like may be referred to as a non-flow-down area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the game area 124, and as shown in FIG. 3 (b), a normal symbol display device 210 and a first special symbol are provided on the main control lamp board 254. Display device 212, 2nd special symbol display device 214, normal symbol hold lamp 216, 1st special symbol hold lamp 218, 2nd special symbol hold lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp RK, electric support middle lamp An RD, a right-handed lamp RM, and a round display lamp RR are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , A 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is composed of two LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of two LEDs in the present embodiment.

The normal map holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding special figure variable games, and in this embodiment, holding up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure variable games. It is possible. Further, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure variable games, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible.

Further, the high-probability middle lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is in a high-probability state. The electric support lamp RD is a lamp for indicating that the variation display time of a normal symbol is shortened and the blade member 232a of the electric tulip, which will be described later, is in an electric support state where it is easy to open for a long time. The right-handed display lamp RM is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a jackpot game state, a probability change state, and an electric support state, and is in a state where the player can obtain the benefit by hitting right. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the big hit game related to the big hit when the big hit is made.

Around the decorative symbol display device 208, predetermined ball advance entrances, for example, general winning openings 226a and 226b, a normal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a jackpot generation gate 252 are arranged. Further, a variable winning device 2340 is provided in the lower right portion of the game area 124.

One or a plurality of general winning openings 226a and 226b are provided at appropriate positions in the game area 124. Here, the general winning opening arranged on the left side of the game area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226a, and the general winning opening arranged in the variable winning device 2340 is referred to as a general winning opening 226b. When a ball enters the general winning openings 226a and 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning openings 226a and 226b have won a prize, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4). The ball is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the winning. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of general winning openings are provided, the entry may be detected by different ball detection sensors, or each of the plurality of general winning openings may be entered. The ball passages that guide the ball may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Further, when a plurality of general winning openings are provided on the right side of the game area 124, the ball passages that guide the entered game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. However, they may be detected by different ball detection sensors. The balls that have entered the general winning openings 226a and 226b are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged in. Unlike the balls that have entered the general winning openings 226a and 226b, the balls that have passed through the starting port 228 are not discharged to the game island side, but when they are entered, a predetermined number (for example, one) is used. The prize ball may be paid out, and the entered game ball may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal map variation game by the normal map display device 210.

In the present embodiment, the first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of a ball into the first special figure start port 230, the payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are used as prize balls on the upper plate 126. At the same time as discharging, the special figure fluctuation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure starting port 230, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first special drawing starting port 230 when hitting to the right. Then, in the present embodiment, the specification is to start the variable display of the special figure 2 in preference to the special figure 1 (a pachinko machine having such a specification may be referred to as a "special 2 priority variable machine" or the like). Has been done. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special drawing starting port 230 does not change.

The second special figure start port 232 is composed of an electric tulip (electric chew), and only one is arranged below the first special figure start port 230, and a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed on the left and right is provided. While the 232a is closed, it is impossible for the ball to enter the ball, and when the tulip variable game is won and the tulip display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the blade member 232a has a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, one) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the normal drawing start opening 228 (due to the game nail (not shown)), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the normal drawing start opening 228 when hitting to the left. .. Therefore, during the left-handed strike, in principle, the player does not win the swing game, and therefore, in principle, the blade member 232a does not open or close. On the other hand, in the case of hitting to the right, since the game ball can be expected to enter the normal drawing start port 228, the blade member 232a may open and close by winning the normal drawing variable game. That is, it can be said that there is almost no possibility of winning a prize in the second special figure starting port 232 while hitting left, but there is a possibility of winning a prize in the second special drawing starting port 232 while hitting right.

Next, the configuration of the variable winning device 2340 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the variable winning device 2340. In addition, in FIG. 4, in order to briefly explain the internal structure of the variable prize-winning device 2340, the decorative member 2340b is transparently shown.

The variable winning device 2340 is provided with, for example, a flat plate-shaped mounting base 2340a for mounting on the front surface of the game board 200, and a decorative member 2340b mounted at a predetermined interval on the front surface of the mounting base 2340a. There is.

The mounting base 2340a has a rectangular opening substantially in the center near the upper end, and a plate-shaped first door member 2341a is mounted so as to cover the opening. The lower end side of the first door member 2341a is pivotally supported by the mounting base 2340a, and can be opened and closed forward by driving a solenoid (not shown) mounted on the rear side of the mounting base 2340a. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234a is configured as described above. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234a, a predetermined number (for example, eight) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a second variable winning opening 235a is formed between the mounting base 2340a and the decorative member 2340b as described below.

As shown in FIG. 4, the decorative member 2340b has a wall surface having a bottom surface 2340c, an upper surface 2340d, and a side surface 2340e erected rearward from the back surface of the plate surface 2340f. In the decorative member 2340b, a first rolling region SP1 and a second rolling region SP2 on which the game ball can roll are formed by the wall surface, and the open portion behind the first rolling region SP1 is closed by the front surface of the mounting base 2340a.

The upper part of the first rolling region SP1 is open, and a plate-shaped shutter member 2351a is provided so as to cover the open portion so as to be able to move forward and backward in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a. The shutter member 2351a is slightly downwardly inclined toward the front and is inclined from the right to the left, and is configured to be displaceable by the drive of the solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by a drive circuit 334 (see FIG. 5). That is, in the present embodiment, when the shutter member 2351a is in a state of advancing forward (closed state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the first rolling region SP1 is blocked, and the first of the game balls. When the entry to the rolling region SP1 is blocked and the game is retracted backward (open state), the first rolling region SP1 is released and the game ball enters the first rolling region SP1. Entry is allowed. Further, in the present embodiment, on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b, a plurality of ribs 2340i project rearward at substantially equal intervals so as to face the shutter member 2351a, and the shutter member is closed. The game ball is decelerated by colliding with the game ball rolling on the 2351a, and the residence time of the game ball on the shutter member 2351a is long. In the present embodiment, since it is configured in this way, a plurality of game balls mainly staying mainly on the shutter member 2351a can be secondly changed at the same time by opening the shutter member 2351a for a short time (for example, 0.06 seconds). It may be possible to enter the ball into the winning opening 235a. Further, in the present embodiment, since the shutter member 2351a is on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b, it is difficult for the player to see the shutter member 2351a.

A winning count switch SW1 for detecting the passage of a game ball is disposed at a position connecting the first rolling region SP1 and the second rolling region SP2, and enters the first rolling region SP1. When the game ball rolls on the bottom surface 2340c and is guided to the left, it passes through the winning count switch SW1. The winning count switch SW1 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that the detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the winning count switch SW1, it detects the winning of the second variable winning opening 235a and the number based on the winning (for example, 15). ) To pay out the prize ball. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning the second variable winning opening 235a is larger than the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning the first variable winning opening 234a, so that various playability is provided. You may be able to. The number of prize balls that can be obtained when the game ball wins in the first variable winning opening 234a and the number of prize balls that can be obtained when the game ball wins in the second variable winning opening 235a may be the same.

The game ball that has passed through the winning count switch SW1 is guided to the second rolling region SP2. The second rolling region SP2 is configured to be guided by the general passage 2340h and discharged downward. A discharge ball detection switch SW3 is arranged in the general passage 2340h, and the game ball guided to the general passage 2340h is configured to pass through the discharge ball detection switch SW3. The discharge ball detection switch SW3 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that the detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball through the discharge ball detection switch SW3, it detects that the game ball has passed through the general passage 2340h.

In the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, for example, the number of passages of the game ball of the prize count switch SW1 and the number of passages of the discharge ball detection switch SW3 are used to insert the game ball into the second variable winning opening 235a. By monitoring outs, it may be possible to monitor fraudulent winnings. Examples of fraudulent acts include acts using a ball with a thread or a game ball (so-called big ball) having a size larger than the regulation.

Further, in the game area 124, a disk-shaped ball striking direction changing member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting opening is provided. There is also an out port 240 for guiding the ball that did not win a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and drives the launch motor and the launch rod. It is launched into the game area 124 by passing through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the launching mallet. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail, or the like, and the winning openings (general winning openings 226a, 226b, first variable winning openings 234a, 2nd variable winning opening 235a) or starting opening (1st special drawing starting opening 230, 2nd special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or normal drawing start The out port 240 is reached only by passing through the mouth 228. Further, in the present embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed so as to open upward at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104. An out-ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of the game ball received at the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. The out-ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. In the present embodiment, all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including the game balls discharged from the out port 240 and the game balls winning in various winning openings) are accepted by the discharging ball receiving port. Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage, only the game balls discharged from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

Further, the staging device 2 is arranged at the upper part of the game area 124, the staging device 3 is arranged at the lower part, and the staging device 4 is arranged on the left side and the right side, respectively. Behind each staging device 4, a staging device 5 described later is arranged. In the case of this embodiment, these are supported by the main body 104.

Further, in the present embodiment, both the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a do not allow the game ball to enter in the closed state, but the winning may be possible, and at least from the open state. However, it suffices if it is difficult for the game ball to enter.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central portion of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (it is assumed that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor. Then, the sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 in the basic circuit 302, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc., and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the first 2. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, for example). To control the display of the normal figure hold lamp 216, special figure 1 hold lamp 218, special figure 2 hold lamp 220, high-accuracy middle lamp RK, electric support middle lamp RD, right-handed lamp RM, round display lamp RR, etc.) The door of the drive circuit 330, the drive means for driving a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 as a normal electric accessory, and the first variable winning opening 234a as a special electric accessory. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including a drive means for driving the shutter member 2351a of the member 2341a and the second variable winning opening 235a is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won a prize in the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 1. Remember in. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won a prize in the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly obtained. It is latched and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. is doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but the payout control unit 600 is configured so as not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the effect devices 2 to 5, and a sensor circuit. The 428 and the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the effect devices 2 to 5, and button sensors 426 that detect the pressing of various buttons constituting the effect buttons 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A VDP (video display processor) that reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is equipped with 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502. In the present embodiment, the memory 508 is used as the temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is composed of a recording medium (for example, EEPROM, flash memory, etc.) capable of holding the storage state even when the power supply is cut off. Thereby, for example, the information for displaying the display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or the setting is changed. A RAM whose stored information volatilizes when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. Ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor 1044 that detects that the main body 104 has opened, a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects that the front frame door 106 has opened, and the like, and includes the main body 104 and the front frame door. When the 106 is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the launching rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies balls from the precision plate 126 to the launching device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current and converts it into a predetermined voltage to control each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device by another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 6A to 6D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. Explain the types of special drawings and general drawings.

Special Figure 1 The variable game is started on condition that the first starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the ball enters the special drawing 2 starting port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 blinks a part of the lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) among the eight lamps. "Variable display" (special figure variable game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 blinks a part of the lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) among the eight lamps. 2 variable display ”(special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as a variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be performed multiple times in succession.

FIG. 6A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 6A, six types of special figures, “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F”, are shown. In FIG. 6A, a white portion in the figure indicates a lamp that is turned off, and a black portion indicates a lamp that is turned on.

In the present embodiment, four types of jackpot symbols (“Special Figure A” to “Special Figure D”) are prepared as the stop symbol modes of the special figure. "Special figure A" is a 5-round (R) normal jackpot symbol, and when "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234a shifts to a jackpot gaming state in which the first variable winning opening 234a is opened in all rounds, and the jackpot is concerned. After the game is completed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “a time saving state”). In addition, "special figure B" is a 5R probability variable big hit symbol, and when "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the second variable winning opening 235a shifts to the big hit game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. In addition, "special figure C" is a 10R probability variable big hit symbol, and when "special figure C" is stopped and displayed, the second variable winning opening 235a shifts to the big hit game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. In addition, "special figure D" is a 2R probability variable big hit symbol, and when "special figure D" is stopped and displayed, the second variable winning opening 235a shifts to the big hit game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "latent state"). The opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a in the case of a big hit of "Special Figure D" is as short as 0.2 seconds per 1R, and it is a big hit in which no ball can be expected. In this embodiment, four types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but it goes without saying that one type may be prepared, or two types, three types, or five or more types of jackpot symbols may be prepared. .. Further, a small hit symbol may be prepared.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether it is a normal big hit or a probable variable big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability variation jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the end of the big hit game, the time may be shortened (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in an electric support state and is in a high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal map, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal map than in the low-probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). For example, the winning probability of a normal-figure variable game is 0/100 (that is, it is always out of order) in the normal-figure low-probability state (non-electric support state), whereas the normal-figure high-probability state (electric support state). ) Will rise to 100/100 (that is, it will always be a hit). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variation short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the blade member 232a is more likely to open than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 232a, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. Further, in the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the opening period of the electric chew, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are all performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times of opening the electric chew is performed, which increases the probability of entering the starting port 232 of the special figure 2, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes into a winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when the "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the electric support state (a time saving state) is maintained while the special figure variable game is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter, 101. At the second time, it shifts to the non-electric support state (normal low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without electric support (for example, "Special Figure D") is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. Further, when "Special Figure B" or "Special Figure C" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure D" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a sudden time saving symbol that shifts to the electric support state without shifting to the big hit. "Special figure E" is a sudden time saving symbol. In the present embodiment, when "special figure E" is displayed and the state shifts to the electric support state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "c time saving state"), the electric support state is changed while the special figure variation game is performed 30 times. It is maintained, and at the 31st time, it shifts to the non-electric support state (normally low probability state). In this embodiment, when "special figure E" is stopped and displayed in the electric support state, the game shifts to the c time saving state regardless of the game state before the symbol is stopped, but in the electric support state, "special figure E" is set. When "Fig. E" is stopped and displayed, the gaming state before the symbol stop may be continued without shifting to the c time saving state. Further, a plurality of types of sudden time saving symbols may be prepared, and the number of times of symbol variation display in which the electric support state is maintained may differ depending on the symbol. For example, some of the plurality of types of sudden time saving symbols may be displayed. The number of times (for example, 1200 times, etc.) may be larger than the number of times (950 times) of the symbol variation display in which the play time is maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure F" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 6B shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 6 (b), five types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure e" are shown, and three kinds of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure a" to "special figure e". Figure c "). "Special figure a" is a 5R normal jackpot symbol, and when "special figure a" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234a shifts to a jackpot game state in which the first variable winning opening 234a is opened in all rounds, and the jackpot game is completed. After that, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. In the present embodiment, when the "special figure a" is stopped and displayed, the electric support state (a time reduction) is maintained while the special figure variable game is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter, and the 101st time. It shifts to the non-electric support state (low probability state in the normal figure). It should be noted that the number of times of the symbol variation display in the electric support state in which the jackpot shifts in the special figure 1 and the number of symbol fluctuation displays in the electric support state in which the jackpot shifts in the special figure 2 may be different. Set so that the number of symbol fluctuation displays in the electric support state is larger when the big hit is made in Fig. 2 and the state is changed to the electric support state than when the big hit is made in FIG. 1 and the state is changed to the electric support state. It may be set to be small or small. In addition, "special figure b" is a 5R probability variable big hit symbol, and when "special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the second variable winning opening 235a shifts to the big hit game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. Further, the "special figure c" is a 10R probability variable big hit symbol, and when the "special figure c" is stopped and displayed, the second variable winning opening 235a shifts to the big hit game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the big hit game is started. After the end, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit symbol, one type of stop symbol (“special symbol d”) is prepared as a small hit symbol. In the case of a small hit with "special figure d", the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a opens for 0.06 seconds 12 times after the symbol is stopped. That is, if a small hit is made with the "special figure d", many game balls can easily enter the second variable winning opening 235a, and a large number of balls can be obtained. The opening time and the number of times of opening the shutter member 2351a can be appropriately set. Further, there may be two or more types of small hit symbols. Further, in the small hit game, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) into the second variable winning opening 235a, or when a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired, the small hit game is performed. The hit game is completed, and the shutter member 2351a is not released after that. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

In this embodiment, as described above, since the machine is a simultaneous variable machine, there may be a situation in which the special figure 1 is displaying the variable when the special figure 2 becomes a small hit and the game shifts to the small hit game. .. In this case, when a small hit occurs in Special Figure 2, the variation display of Special Figure 1 is interrupted, and when the small hit game related to the small hit ends, the variation display of Special Figure 1 is restarted. In addition, when the special figure 1 becomes a big hit and shifts to the big hit game, the special figure 2 is in a variable display, or when the special figure 2 becomes a big hit and shifts to the big hit game, the special figure 1 changes and displays. In this case, if one of the special maps becomes a big hit, the variable display of the other special map is forcibly terminated, the result of the variable display is discarded, and the result of the deviation is displayed. It will be.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure e" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 6 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variation display of design" may be performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the variation of the special figure 1 is performed in the non-electric support state (the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state or the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state) in which the variation display is mainly performed. In the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state or special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) in which the decorative pattern is variablely displayed according to the display and the special figure 2 is mainly variable display, the special figure is special. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed according to the variable display of FIG. 2. On the other hand, in the non-electric support state, even if the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variation display is performed only in the fourth symbol and the second special symbol display device 214, which will be described later. In the electric support state, even if the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variation display is performed only on the fourth symbol or the first special symbol display device 212.

When the 1st special figure display device 212 or the 2nd special figure display device 214 notifies a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 10R probability variation jackpot, the same even number of decorative symbols is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of three decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 10R probability variation jackpot is notified by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is set in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. And a combination of three decorative symbols with the same odd number other than "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" (for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" and "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-" (Decoration 5 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. When the 10R probability variation jackpot is confirmed and notified by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. "Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, when the sudden time saving symbol of "special figure E" is notified, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Further, in the case of notifying any of the 2R probability variation big hit symbol of "special figure D", the small hit symbol of "special figure d", and the lost symbol of "special figure F" or "special figure e", the symbol display area. Combinations of decorative symbols (for example, loose stitches) other than the combinations of decorative symbols described so far are stopped and displayed on 208a to 208c.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol is referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol (in the case of "decorative symbol variable display"). There is also.). The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed by being controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 6D shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal map of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public map A" and a missed symbol "Public map B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 alternately lights two LEDs arranged one above the other. Perform "variable display" (normal map variable game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols of the hit symbol "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6D, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the lamp to be turned off, and the black-painted portion indicates the location of the lamp to be turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 stores a special figure random value, a special figure round determination random value, a special figure electric support determination random value, a special symbol symbol determination random value, and the like. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a reserved number storage area for special figures. Furthermore, the RAM 308 has start information for special figures divided into areas of the maximum number (4 each in special figure 1 and special figure 2 in this example) in which the start of the winning / failing determination (lottery) can be suspended. A storage unit is prepared, and a random number value storage area for a general drawing is also prepared. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored in the winning order (holding order) one set for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 7 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT 314 is set. Operation permission and initial value setting etc. are performed. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step is returned to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312 in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to the processing after step S113 in order to execute the initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state before the power failure is restored (step S109; No), the cause is whether the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is on (indicating that the operation has been performed). When it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115), and the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side. If it is determined that this is the case (step S115; Yes), the setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio / setting display 196 blinks indicating "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, every time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7-segment of the setting monitor is incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor indicates "6". Then, it returns to "1". In the present embodiment, at least one of settings 1 to 6 having different jackpot probabilities can be selected, and the setting is made by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. Is confirmed. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is erased. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the set value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In the present embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, but for example, it may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or notified by voice output. good. Further, in the present embodiment, the 6-step setting of the settings 1 to 6 is set, but the setting may be other than the 6-step setting, or the setting may not be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is cut off is retained and the retained setting value is displayed. May be good.

Further, in step S113, when it is not determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or when it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S113; No). Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, the initialization process is executed so as to bring the basic circuit 302 into the initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when this power status information is not information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (for example,). A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0). Is determined (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and when the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal). Executes the initialization process to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting (main setting) in the stack pointer, initialization of all storage areas of RAM 308, and the like are performed. In this embodiment, the set value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained even when the initialization is performed. Further, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command described later in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Further, in the present embodiment, when the initialization process is executed, a part of the storage area of the RAM 308 may be maintained in the state before the power failure without being initialized, for example, a big hit. Regarding the number of start times (TS) and the flag related to the execution of the play time (b time reduction state) described later, the specifications may not be cleared even if the setting is changed (including retyping the same setting). Further, even when the ram is not cleared, only predetermined data such as a flag related to the execution of the number of big hit start times (TS) and the play time (b time reduction state) may be cleared. In this case, the predetermined data may be arbitrarily cleared or may be forcibly cleared.

In step S121, after setting the interruption prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (this setting) to the stack pointer. Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has been restored to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once in about 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 5, including various ball detection sensors, are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area of this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned pre-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. When it matches with the general winning opening 226a, 226b, the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special drawing start opening 230 and the second special drawing starting opening 232. It is determined that the ball has entered the ball, or that the starting port 228 or the jackpot generation gate 252 has passed. That is, it is determined that there has been a prize in these winning openings 234a, 235a, 226a, 226b and these starting openings 230, 232, 228, 252. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first special figure start port sensor that detects the entry into the first special figure start port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first It is determined that the special figure start port 230 has won a prize, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port 230 is performed, but the detection for the past three times is performed. If the information on the presence or absence of the signal does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S121 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. Special figure Update the random number counter to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the normal figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random value has made one round next. I'll do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211 the staging random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a variable / stopped manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display fluctuation / stop, a timer for measuring a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter is updated. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 234a, 235a, 226a, 226b and the starting openings 230, 232, the RAM 308 stores the number of prize balls provided for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value of the area is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 5 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal map state update process in the middle of the normal map fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 alternately blink on and off. Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of a normal map (a variable game of a normal map).

In addition, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the normal map fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal map display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be a display mode of a lost symbol. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the two LEDs is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for making various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal diagram A shown in FIG. 6 (d)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 6 (d)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 232a is set to the setting area during operation, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid (332) of the 232a, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal map state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be non-operating. do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal number winning random number stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If a winning decision is made, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random value, and the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired normal figure timer random value. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol and the fluctuation time before the hit / fail determination process, and predetermines. The result (special figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. The details of the special figure look-ahead processing will be described later.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is specified. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed by repeating the lighting / extinguishing of the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 5R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a small hit flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal map probability fluctuation flag. .. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 10R jackpot flag is turned on, and the special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on and the normal map probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure c and 5R jackpot flags shown in Fig. 6 (b) are on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and the normal map probability fluctuation flag is also on. In the case, the special figure b, 5R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure a, and the small hit flag is on, the special figure d, loss. When the flag is on, the special figure e and the LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 are controlled to turn on / off so as to be in each mode, and the special figure 2 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate that. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 10R probability variable big hit symbol (special figure c), a 5R probability variable big hit symbol (special figure b), a 5R normal big hit symbol (special symbol a), and a small hit symbol (special figure a). Figure d) and one of the lost symbols (special symbol e) are confirmed and displayed. In this embodiment, the special 2 priority variable machine is described as an example, but it may be applied to a simultaneous variable machine in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 simultaneously change and display, and the pachinko machine 100 in this case may be applied. , The variation display of the special figure 1 may be performed during the variation display of the special figure 2, but if the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the variation display time of the special figure 2 has elapsed, the special figure 1 is displayed. Regardless of the lottery result, the lottery result is discarded in the special figure 1 at the timing of the big hit symbol display of the special figure 2, and the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed during the variation display of the special figure 2, even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the variation display time of the special figure 2 has elapsed, the special figure 2 is displayed. The lottery result of the special figure 1 may be discarded at the timing of the small hit symbol display, and the out-of-order symbol may be stopped and displayed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in the special figure 2, the symbol for stopping the variable display while additionally storing the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, a big hit standby state is set in order to wait for the game ball to pass through the big hit generation gate 252. In the present embodiment, no big hit occurs and no expiration date is set from the time when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by the big hit symbol until the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252. However, for example, the special figure 2 If the game ball does not pass through the jackpot generation gate 252 by the time when a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes or the like) elapses after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot may be extinguished. Further, if the big hit generation gate 252 is not provided and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2, the big hit may be generated.

When the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252, the jackpot flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process, the special figure 2 operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308, and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208. In order to wait for a period during which the image for notifying the player to start is displayed, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or the door member 2341a (second variable winning opening) of the first variable winning opening 234a until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning opening 234a or the second variable winning opening 235a. A signal for holding the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) in the open state is output to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the shutter member 2351a of 235a, and the door opening time management provided in the RAM 308 is managed. Set the information indicating the open period in the storage area of the timer. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) The door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) is closed to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a) of the first variable winning opening 234a. The signal to be held is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (10 rounds or 5 rounds in this exemplary embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, in order to set to wait for a period during which the image for notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed, the effect standby is performed in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the period. In the present embodiment, if the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, the probability change flag and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 are turned on at the same time as the end of this big hit game. If the figure probability fluctuation flag is off and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, the time reduction number of times (for example, 100 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on the flag.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal map, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal map is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal map. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the fluctuation time of the variable game of the normal map is shorter than that in the low-probability state of the normal map (normal map variation). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew spread). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal map. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is especially true until a predetermined number of game balls enter the first variable winning opening 234a (second variable winning opening 235a) during the big hit game when the probability is high. Fig. 2 There is a problem that many game balls enter the starting port 232 and the number of game balls (number of balls to be ejected) that can be acquired during the big hit increases, resulting in increased gambling. It is for solving. In addition, in this embodiment, since the number of prize balls for winning the prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232 is "1", the number of balls to be ejected during the big hit game does not substantially increase. You may also leave the time saving flag on.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operating state of the special figure 2 is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 1.

For example, in the special figure 1 state update process in the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 1 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is specified. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed by repeating the lighting / extinguishing of the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 (special figure 1 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 5R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a c time reduction transition flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal map probability fluctuation flag. There is. These flags are set to be on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 10R jackpot flag is turned on, and the special figure If the probability fluctuation flag is also on, if the normal map probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C and 5R jackpot flags are on, if the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, special figure B, When the 5R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure A and 2R jackpot flags are on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is off. In the case of, the special figure D and c time reduction transition flags are on, the special figure E is on when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and the special figure F is on when the loss flag is on. , The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the LED constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 1 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 has a 5R normal jackpot symbol (special figure A), a 5R probability variable jackpot symbol (special figure B), a 10R probability variable jackpot symbol (special figure C), and a 2R probability variable jackpot symbol (special figure C). A definite display of any one of the special figure D), the sudden time saving symbol (special figure E), and the lost symbol (special figure F) is performed. In the present embodiment, when the time saving symbol (special figure E) is suddenly displayed, the time saving flag is turned on, the predetermined number of times (30 times) is set in the time saving number of times, and the state shifts to the time saving state (c time saving state). do.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game with high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with low advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. Although the special figure 2 priority fluctuation is taken as an example, the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 1 is held in the special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested in preference to a hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the high-advantageous special figure 2 variable game or the low-advantage special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won a prize. It may be a variation in the starting opening winning order that starts in order. In the change in the starting order winning order, the upper limit of the number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the upper limit number of the hold is 4 in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Then, it may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of holds.

Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update is not limited to this. By independently performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing in the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special drawings may be configured to be changed at the same time (simultaneous variable machine). Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the display of 1 may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, it may be a simultaneous variable machine in which the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game are performed at the same time. In the pachinko machine, which is a simultaneous fluctuation machine, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 may be performed during the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, but the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the fluctuation display time of the special figure 1 has elapsed. In that case, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 2, the lottery result is discarded in the special figure 2 at the timing of the jackpot symbol display of the special figure 1, and the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the variation display time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, in the special figure 2 at the timing of the lost symbol display of the special figure 1, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 2. The lottery result may be discarded and the lost symbol may be stopped and displayed. Further, when the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed during the variation display of the special figure 1, the lottery result of the special figure 1 is discarded and lost at the timing when the variation display time of the special figure 2 has elapsed. The symbol may be stopped and displayed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the confirmed and displayed special figure 1 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described in detail later, the special map fluctuation display (sometimes referred to as a special prize inter-prize start (TS)) from the end of the big hit to the special figure low probability state to the big hit. The number of times is counted, and when the number of times reaches a predetermined number (750 times), the time saving flag is turned on, the predetermined number of times (950 times) is set to the time saving number, and the time saving state (b time saving state or "play time"" is set. In some cases, move to.).

Further, in the special figure 1, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 1 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, a big hit standby state is set in order to wait for the game ball to pass through the big hit generation gate 252. In the present embodiment, no big hit occurs and no expiration date is set from the time when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by the big hit symbol until the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252. However, for example, the special figure 1 If the game ball does not pass through the jackpot generation gate 252 by the time when a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes or the like) elapses after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot may be extinguished. Further, if the big hit generation gate 252 is not provided and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure 1, the big hit may be generated.

When the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252, the jackpot flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 1 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or the first variable winning opening 234a (second variable winning opening 235a) until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning opening 234a (second variable winning opening 235a). A signal for holding the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) in the open state is output to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a), and the door is opened in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the open period in the storage area of the time management timer. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) 1st variable winning opening 234a The door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) is held in a closed state by a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) of the 2nd variable winning opening 235a. The signal indicating the closing period is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, in order to set to wait for a period during which the image for notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed, the effect standby is performed in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the period. In the present embodiment, if the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, the probability change flag and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 are turned on at the same time as the end of this big hit game. If the figure probability fluctuation flag is off and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, the time reduction number of times (for example, 100 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction provided in the RAM 308 is set. If the flag is turned on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 1 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is suddenly shortened, the c time shorten transition flag is turned on. When this c time reduction transition flag is on, the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Then, in the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operating state of Special Figure 1 is set. At this time, the time reduction number (for example, 30 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operating state of Special Figure 1 is set. In the special figure 1 state update process in the case where the special figure 1 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the lottery process related to the special figure 2, the variable game of the special figure 2 is not performed, the state of the special figure 2 is not operating, the big hit game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not performed, and the game is suspended. It is executed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more. .. In the lottery process related to the special figure 1, neither the variable game of the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is performed, the states of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are inactive, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are inactive. Special Figure 1 random number value storage, provided that the number of special Figure 2 variable games is not reserved and the number of reserved Special Figure 1 variable games is 1 or more, which is not in any of the big hit games. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value in the area.

The notification of the result of the hit / miss determination of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic change state and the time saving state, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the above is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port 230. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 is prioritized over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 receives the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and ROM 306 is based on the special figure 2 winning random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308. The hit / fail judgment table stored in is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area and specially. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information taken out from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above description, the special figure 2 is configured to be prioritized over the special figure 1 in the above-mentioned special figure state update process and the special figure-related lottery process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure 1 and the special figure are not limited to this. By performing each of the two independently, a plurality of special figures may be configured to be changed at the same time.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in this example, basic command, winning opening winning command, out ball command, launch position command, special figure fluctuation start command, special figure fluctuation stop command, special figure hit start command, special figure hit end command, big prize Information that can specify the type of command such as mouth open command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, setting command, etc.), bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined corresponding to the command type) Information).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is a special figure fluctuation start command, information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, c time reduction transition flags, missed flags, timer numbers selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is added to the command data. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the special figure change start command is set, the stop symbol information that can specify the stop symbol is included. In the case of the special figure fluctuation stop command, various big hit flags, small hit flags, c time reduction transition flags, missed flag values, etc. are included, and in the case of the big hit round number specification command, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. .. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not a special figure 1 starting port 230 has won a prize, whether or not a special figure 2 starting port 232 has won a prize, and whether or not a first variable winning opening 234a has won a prize. Includes presence / absence, presence / absence of winning in the second variable winning opening 235a, and the like. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. If it is a setting command, it includes setting information and so on.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, c time reduction transition flags, missed flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure 2 stored in the RAM 308 are stored in the command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, c time reduction transition flags, loss flag values, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Set information indicating the number of variable games or special figure 2 variable games. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Set information indicating the number of variable games or special figure 2 variable games. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games, special figure 2 variable games, and the like is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games, special figure 2 variable games, and the like is set in the command data.

Further, in this step S233, a general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence / absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal drawing display device 210 and the special drawing 1 display device 212 are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. , The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 7 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as return data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

Next, it is used in the normal figure-related lottery process (step S223), the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The determination table will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct, and FIG. 9B is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figures 1 and 2 are correct. 9 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the distribution table for determining a special figure, and FIG. 9 (d) is a diagram for explaining the specifications of the play time (b time reduction state).

The table for determining whether or not a normal figure is correct or not shown in FIG. 9A is a table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct or not, which is used at the time of determining whether or not the normal figure is correct. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 9A, when this hit / fail determination table is used, there is no hit value in the low probability state of the normal figure, that is, the probability of hit is 0%, and the normal figure is shown in the normal figure. In the high probability state, the range in which random numbers can be taken is 0 to 99, and the winning value is 0 to 99. That is, the probability of winning is 100/100 (that is, 100%). It should be noted that, in the low probability state of the normal figure (when the time reduction is not activated), the hit may be made with a certain probability (for example, 1%), and in the high probability state of the normal figure (when the time reduction is activated), it is constant. The probability of (for example, 1%) may be different.

The special figure 1 and 2 hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 9B is a table referred to when the hit / fail judgment of the special figures 1 and 2 is performed, and which of the settings 1 to 6 is used. Select the record to be referenced depending on whether it is in the special figure low probability state or the special figure high probability state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 1, the big hit is selected with a probability of 218/65536 (about 1/300) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 2185/65536 (about 1/30).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 226/65536 (about 1/290) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 2260/65536 (about / 29).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 3, the big hit is selected with a probability of 234/65536 (about 1/280) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability (about / 28) of 2341/65536.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 4, the big hit is selected with a probability of 243/65536 (about 1/270) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 2427/65536 (about / 27).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 5, the big hit is selected with a probability of 252/65536 (about 1/260) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 2521/65536 (about / 26).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 6, the big hit is selected with a probability of 262/65536 (about 1/250) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability (about / 25) of 2621/65536.

Further, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether the special figure is in the high probability state or the special figure low probability state, the small hit is selected as the result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery in the special figure 1. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 2, the small hit is selected with a probability of 1966/65536 (about 3/100). It should be noted that the small hit may be generated in the special figure 1. Further, the probability of a small hit may be made different for each setting.

Further, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether the special figure is in the high probability state or the special figure low probability state, the result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery in the special figure 1 is 164/65536. Suddenly, the time reduction (c time reduction) is selected with a probability (about 1/400). On the other hand, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether the special figure is in the high probability state or the special figure low probability state, the time reduction is suddenly selected as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery in the special figure 2. Will not be done. It should be noted that the time may be suddenly shortened in the special figure 2. Further, the probability of sudden time reduction may be made different for each setting.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in any of the settings 1 to 6, the jackpot probability in the special figure high probability state is set to be higher than the jackpot probability in the special figure low probability state. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting, and the higher the setting, the easier the jackpot is, and the lower the setting, the more difficult the jackpot is.

FIG. 9C shows an example of a distribution table for determining a special figure, and as described above, a stop symbol is determined based on the result of determining whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is correct or not. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure determination distribution table, a random number range corresponding to the stop symbol mode of the special figure (see FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b)) is defined for each hit / fail determination result.

First, if the result of the special figure 1 hit / miss determination is a big hit, any one of "special figure A" to "special figure D" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure A" is a 5R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234a, and "Special Figure B" is a 5R probability variable jackpot opened by the second variable winning opening 235a. "Special Figure C" is a 10R probability variable jackpot opened by the second variable winning opening 235a, and "Special Figure D" is a 2R latent probability variable jackpot opened by the second variable winning opening 235a for a short time. Regardless of the setting, each selection rate has a probability of 40/100 for "Special Figure A", a probability of 50/100 for "Special Figure B", and a probability of 5/100 for "Special Figure C". , "Special figure D" has a probability of 5/100.

Next, if the result of the special figure 2 hit / miss determination is a big hit, any one of "special figure a" to "special figure c" is selected. As described above, "special figure a" is a 5R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234a, and "special figure b" is a 5R probability variable jackpot opened by the second variable winning opening 235a. "Special figure c" is a 10R probability variation jackpot opened by the second variable winning opening 235a. Each selection rate is 40/100 for "special figure a", 10/100 for "special figure b", and 50/100 for "special figure c" regardless of the setting.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the case of the big hit in the special figure 2 is easier to shift to the big hit game with a large number of balls than the case of the big hit in the special figure 1, and the big hit in the special figure 2 is advantageous. Therefore, for example, it may be possible to raise the expectation that a big hit will occur during the execution of play time or suddenly shortening the time. Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that there are more big hits in the case of the big hit in the special figure 2 than in the case of the big hit in the special figure 1 to shift to the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state.

FIG. 9D describes the specifications of the play time (b time reduction). The play time is a time-saving game state in which the game shifts to the special low probability state after the end of the big hit game, and then shifts without becoming a big hit when the symbol variation display is continuously performed 750 times without becoming a big hit. Is. In the present embodiment, for example, if the play time transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the c time reduction state described above, the play time is shifted regardless of the number of remaining fluctuations in the c time reduction state. It may be possible to shift to the play time after all the remaining fluctuation times are executed. In the present embodiment, once the play time is started and ended, the play time does not shift to the play time again until the big hit is reached again. In this case, if the time saving symbol is suddenly displayed in the special figure 1 after the end of the play time, the c time saving state is started.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 10A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 10A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. .. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309 following step S307, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is converted into the effect data according to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 according to the detection result. Perform the process to change to.

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is an instruction to various lamps 442,452 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. do.

In step S317 following step S315, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command to the staging devices 2 to 5 in the staging data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 10B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 10C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S343 following step S341, control commands are transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other effects random value value update processes are performed. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 11A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 11C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S443 following step S441, other processing for updating the random value for staging is performed.

FIG. 11D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 next to step S451, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 is input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP516 based on the end of image drawing is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. 12. Here, FIG. 12A is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198. Is.

As described above, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 is configured to have a bonus ratio monitor and a setting monitor, and the bonus ratio monitor includes a continuous bonus ratio (RY) and a bonus ratio (the bonus ratio). YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor displays the current setting value.

Here, the continuous bonus ratio is due to the operation of the bonus when the bonus is continuously operated among the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired (that is, the first in the big hit game). It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by opening the variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a and winning a prize. It should be noted that the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a to the number of out balls may be used. Further, the bonus ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the bonus (that is, the special figure start opening 232, the first variable winning opening 234a, and the second variable winning opening). It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by opening the 235a and winning a prize. It should be noted that the game acquired by winning the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special drawing starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232, and the general winning opening 226a, 226b with respect to the number of out balls. It may be a ratio of the number of spheres.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous bonus ratio exceeds 60% as a result of calculating the continuous bonus ratio, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the continuous bonus ratio is blinked and then displayed. A security signal (RY) is output to. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, it may be possible to smoothly carry out the type application test for the gaming machine.

If it is determined that the bonus ratio exceeds 70% as a result of calculating the bonus ratio, the double-digit 7-segment LED that displays the bonus ratio is blinked, and then the security signal (YH) is displayed. ) Is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is blinked, but for example, the emission color is changed. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 12B, eight DIP switches are arranged on the DIP switch substrate 198. Each DIP switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and the position of each DIP switch can be read when the power is turned on to change the appearance probability of the effect. The appearance rate, the entry rate of the effect mode, and the like can be set.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the hit / miss determination process, and predetermines the stop symbol (special). The pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit (see FIGS. 14A to 14C) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 1 look-ahead result stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 look-ahead result and the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit is specially shown. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing 1 pre-reading number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for the special figure 1 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 look-ahead decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 look-ahead result having the highest rank (first) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 look-ahead result is deleted. It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced by one. Further, as the number of special figure 1 look-ahead increases by one, new special figure 1 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 1 look-ahead result data having the lowest (last) rank.

Further, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 2 look-ahead results stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 look-ahead result and the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result. A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area for storing as a number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for the special figure 2 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 look-ahead result having the highest rank is deleted, and the order of the remaining special figure 2 look-ahead result data is deleted. Is processed so as to be incremented by one. Further, every time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 2 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 2 look-ahead result data having the lowest rank.

In the special figure look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing (step S501). The determination of whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area. Special figure 2 Perform by comparing with the number of look-aheads. When the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 look-ahead number, the main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 look-ahead number. If they are equal, it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S503, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 is not increased, the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S503, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is specially processed before the winning / failing determination processing in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random number value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, for example, the hit / fail determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail determination, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 2 related lottery. Prior to the hit / fail determination process in the process (step S229), a determination is made in advance. It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used for the hit / fail determination.

In step S505 following step S503, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S507, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing. Whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 look-ahead number storage as in the special figure 2. This is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 look-ahead number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S509, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 has not increased, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated and the main control unit. Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S509, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress based on various flags in the RAM 308. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S511, and if it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress (in the electric support (high probability state in the normal figure)), the process proceeds to step S515. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead notice includes conditions such as the existence of a hold that becomes a big hit and the fact that the big hit game is not in progress, in addition to the non-electric support.

In step S511, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value) is specially processed before the winning / failing determination processing in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, for example, the hit / fail determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail determination, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior to the hit / fail determination process in the process (step S231), a determination is made in advance. It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used for the hit / fail determination.

In step S513 following step S511, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure pre-reading process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

In step S515, the increased special figure 1 start information is not pre-read, and the "undetermined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-read is stored in the RAM 308 for the special figure 1 look-ahead result instead of the stop symbol information. Store in the first free space of the department. After that, the special figure pre-reading process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be performed. All the read-ahead results in the unit may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 13, the look-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2 and the look-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may decide, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold by lottery. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, the look-ahead is always executed and the look-ahead result is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit, and the look-ahead is stored. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the lottery and the effect using the look-ahead result.

FIG. 14 illustrates a state in which the look-ahead result information and the like are stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 14A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 14 (a), the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 14A, "special figure E" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and "special figure B" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 2". "(5R probability variation jackpot) is stored, and" undetermined "information is stored in the storage areas" hold 3 "and" hold 4 "instead of the stop symbol information.

FIG. 14B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 14 (b), the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 14B, the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage areas "hold 1" to "hold 4". In FIG. 14B, the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 14C shows an example of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 14 (c), "undetermined" information is stored in the storage area "holding 1" instead of the stop symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned stop symbol information, the hit / fail determination result, the variable timer number (variable time), the timer group described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit and the pre-reading result. It can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as information.

Next, various lottery tables used for executing the setting suggestion will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 16. Here, FIG. 15A is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting suggestion execution lottery table at the time of the first big hit end effect, and FIG. 15B is a diagram showing the contents of the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the first big hit end effect. It is a figure which shows an example, and the figure (c) is a figure which shows an example of the contents of the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table at the end of play time. Further, FIG. 16A is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting suggestion ball selection table before the play time, and FIG. 16B shows an example of the contents of the setting suggestion ball selection table after the play time. It is a figure.

The setting suggestion execution lottery table at the time of the first big hit end effect shown in FIG. 15A shows the big hit (first big hit) in the normal game state (including the b time reduction state and the c time reduction state). It is a table for deciding whether or not to execute an effect (see FIG. 29) suggesting a setting in the ending effect executed when the game ends. In this table, the execution probability of the suggestion effect differs depending on the selected setting and the execution status of the play time (b time reduction state).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15A, in setting 1, the setting suggestion effect is not executed before the start of the play time and during the play time, and the setting suggestion effect is always executed after the play time ends. .. Further, in setting 2, the setting suggestion effect is not executed before the start of the play time, the setting suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/8 during the play time, and the setting suggestion effect is always executed after the play time ends. .. Further, in setting 3, the setting suggestion effect is not executed before the start of the play time, the setting suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/6 during the play time, and the setting suggestion effect is always executed after the play time ends. .. Further, in setting 4, the setting suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/16 before the start of the play time, the setting suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/6 during the play time, and the setting suggestion effect is executed after the play time ends. Is always executed. Further, in setting 5, the setting suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/18 before the start of the play time, the setting suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/3 during the play time, and the setting suggestion effect is executed after the play time ends. Is always executed. Further, in setting 6, the setting suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/20 before the start of the play time, the setting suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/2 during the play time, and the setting suggestion effect is executed after the play time ends. Is always executed.

The setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the first big hit end effect shown in FIG. 15 (b) is a table referred to when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect by the table of FIG. 15 (a), and a plurality of tables are referred to by this table. The character that appears from the character is selected.

Specifically, there are characters "Chappy", "Grandfather", "Sabohani", "Copanda", "Bancho", and "Miss Machiko" as the characters that appear, and the appearance rate differs depending on the setting. As shown in FIG. 15B, the character of "Chappy" suggests that the setting is odd, the character of "Grandfather" suggests that the setting is even, and the character of "Sabohani" is set. Suggests that is 2 or more, the character of "Copanda" suggests that the setting is 4 or more, and the character of "Bancho" suggests that the setting is 5 or more, "Miss Machiko" Character suggests that setting 6 is rich.

As for the appearance rate, in setting 1, the character of "Chappy" always appears. In setting 2, the character of "old man" appears with a probability of 50/100, and the character of "Sabohani" appears with a probability of 50/100. In setting 3, the character of "Chappy" appears with a probability of 50/100, and the character of "Sabohani" appears with a probability of 50/100. In setting 4, the character of "old man" appears with a probability of 30/100, the character of "Sabohani" appears with a probability of 50/100, and the character of "Copanda" appears with a probability of 20/100. In setting 5, the character of "Chappy" appears with a probability of 30/100, the character of "Sabohani" appears with a probability of 20/100, the character of "Copanda" appears with a probability of 40/100, and " The character of "Bancho" appears with a probability of 10/100. In setting 6, the character of "old man" appears with a probability of 30/100, the character of "Sabohani" appears with a probability of 10/100, the character of "Copanda" appears with a probability of 30/100, and " The character of "Bancho" appears with a probability of 15/100, and the character of "Machiko-sensei" appears with a probability of 15/100.

Whether or not the lottery table for executing the setting suggestion effect at the end of the play time shown in FIG. 15C executes the setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 25 (w')) at the end of the symbol variation display at which the play time ends. It is a table used to determine. In this table, the execution probability of the suggestion effect differs depending on the selected setting.

As shown in FIG. 15 (c), the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the settings 1 to 3, the setting is executed with a probability of 1/6 in the setting 4, and is executed with a probability of 1/3 in the setting 5. In setting 6, it is executed with a probability of 1/2.

In the setting suggestion ball selection table shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, a star-shaped ball appears as an effect of suggesting a setting in a non-electric support state (low probability state in a normal figure). It is executed every 100G after the end, but it is a table for selecting which ball appears, and the pre-play time / setting suggestion ball selection table shown in FIG. The table is referred to before the play time, and the post-play time / setting suggestion ball selection table shown in FIG. 3B is a table that is referred to after the play time ends and before the big hit occurs.

Specifically, before the transition of the play time, a white ball always appears in the settings 1 to 3. In setting 4, a white ball appears with a probability of 90/100, and a blue ball appears with a probability of 10/100. In setting 5, a white ball appears with a probability of 90/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 5/100, a green ball appears with a probability of 4/100, and a red ball appears with a probability of 1/100. In setting 6, a white ball appears with a probability of 90/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 3/100, a green ball appears with a probability of 3/100, and a red ball appears with a probability of 2/100. A rainbow ball appears with a probability of 100.

Further, after the end of the play time, in setting 1, a white ball appears with a probability of 75/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 20/100, and a green ball appears with a probability of 5/100. In setting 2, a white ball appears with a probability of 45/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 50/100, and a green ball appears with a probability of 5/100. In setting 3, a white ball appears with a probability of 40/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 40/100, and a green ball appears with a probability of 20/100. In setting 4, a white ball appears with a probability of 19/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 30/100, a green ball appears with a probability of 25/100, a red ball appears with a probability of 25/100, and 1 /. A rainbow ball appears with a probability of 100. In setting 5, a white ball appears with a probability of 5/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 20/100, a green ball appears with a probability of 20/100, and a red ball appears with a probability of 50/100. A rainbow ball appears with a probability of 100. In setting 6, white balls do not appear, blue balls appear with a probability of 20/100, green balls appear with a probability of 30/100, red balls appear with a probability of 30/100, and a rainbow appears with a probability of 20/100. A ball appears.

FIG. 17 shows, for example, the most in the special figure 1 random value storage area (special figure 2 random value storage area) in the special figure-related lottery process (step S229, step S231) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is a fluctuation pattern table used when the fluctuation pattern is determined using the above-mentioned special figure 1 (special figure 2) winning random number value and special figure 1 (special figure 2) random value.

FIG. 17A is a loss-time variation pattern table used when the result of the jackpot determination is a miss, and the selection rate differs depending on the gaming state.

Specifically, in the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), no reach loss is selected with a probability of 15/16, normal reach loss is selected with a probability of 3/64, and SP reach loss is selected. It is selected with a probability of 1/64. In this embodiment, the same table as in the normal game state is used and the fluctuation pattern is selected even in the latent probability change state. Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the mode shifts to the revival mode, which is one of the effect modes, in the period from the end of the a time saving state to the time when the symbol variation display is performed 10 times. In the resurrection mode, the loss without reach is selected with a probability of 1/2, and in the resurrection mode, the loss is selected with a probability of 1/2. This outlier in the revival mode is an outlier without reach, but it is set as a variation pattern that gives the player a feeling of expectation for a big hit.

In addition, in the probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), the time saving loss is selected with a probability of 14/16, the time saving normal reach loss is selected with a probability of 1/32, and the time saving SP reach loss is 3 /. It is selected with a probability of 32. Further, in the a time saving state, the time saving loss is selected with a probability of 15/16, the time saving normal reach loss is selected with a probability of 3/64, and the time saving SP reach loss is selected with a probability of 1/64. Further, in the b time saving state, the time saving loss is selected with a probability of 15/16, the time saving normal reach loss is selected with a probability of 3/64, and the time saving SP reach loss is selected with a probability of 1/64. Further, in the c time saving state, the time saving loss is selected with a probability of 15/16, the time saving normal reach loss is selected with a probability of 1/32, and the time saving SP reach loss is selected with a probability of 1/32.

FIG. 17B is a jackpot variation pattern table used when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and the selection rate differs depending on the gaming state.

Specifically, in the normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the normal reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 1/16, and the SP reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 15/16. In this embodiment, the same table as in the normal game state is used and the fluctuation pattern is selected even in the latent probability change state. Also, in the resurrection mode, the SP reach jackpot is always selected.

Further, in the probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), the time saving normal reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 1/4, and the time saving SP reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 3/4. Further, in the a time saving state, the time saving normal reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 3/8, and the time saving SP reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 5/8. Further, in the b time saving state, the time saving normal reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 3/8, and the time saving SP reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 5/8. Further, in the c time saving state, the time saving SP reach jackpot is always selected.

The execution probability set above, the selection rate of the effect, and the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern are not limited to those described above, and can be appropriately set. Further, the variable pattern table to be used after the big hit game may be selected according to the big hit symbol.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 18 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

FIG. 18 shows a decorative symbol display device 208. The first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are not shown. ing.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18A, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, the default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left of the display area, and variable display and stop display are performed according to the decorative symbol displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) and notifying the number of holds, and the hold of special figure 1 is on the upper left of the display area. A number display area is provided, and a reserved number display area of Special Figure 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, a symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 is provided in the upper right of the display area, and a symbol changing notification area of special figure 2 is provided in the lower right. In addition, a notification area during symbol change of the normal map and a hold number display area of the normal map may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 1 is matched with the holding number shown in the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2 is the holding lamp 220 of the special drawing 2. Consistent with the number of holds indicated by. Further, in the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1, while the symbol of Special Figure 1 is stopped, for example, if it is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed as "○", and if it is a small hit, it is displayed as "△". If the time is suddenly shortened, the stop is displayed with "☆", and if the time is off, the stop is displayed with "x". Further, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is being performed. The display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 2 is the same as the display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 1, and this is a display mode corresponding to the symbol change display and the stop display of Special Figure 2. Changes. By changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the hold number display area, a pre-reading notice and a notice regarding the running symbol change display can be given. You may go.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 18 is a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state is provided with the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state, the designation of the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is represented by the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 of special figure 1 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of special figure 1, as well as the number of hold icons of special figure 1, and is represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. The number of holdings is represented by the number of lights of the holding lamp 220 of the special figure 2 and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2. It should be noted that it may also be represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 18A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both displayed. , Is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 18A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. ..

On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special figure 2. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 18 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because it is.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of symbol fluctuation displays since the end of the jackpot game is displayed in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the play time (b time reduction state) is displayed in the upper center of the display screen. The number of times the symbol variation is displayed before shifting to is displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a setting suggestion ball display area 285 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 280, and in this setting suggestion ball display area 285, four star-shaped setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 are displayed. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion ball is displayed every time the symbol variation display is executed 100 times in the normal game state, and the latest one is displayed on the leftmost side of the setting suggestion ball display area 285, 1 to 3 times before. The display position of the setting suggestion balls s12 to s14 displayed in is moved to the right side, respectively. In the present embodiment, setting suggestion balls of a plurality of colors may be displayed, and the player may be able to guess the setting by looking at the display history of the setting suggestion balls.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon display area of the special figure which is easy to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state). That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 18A, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the control state is the electric support state. In some cases, on the contrary, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be the same as the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2, or different display modes may be used. ..

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start of variation display of the fourth symbol → start or deletion of the movement animation of the hold icon → start of variation of the decorative symbol. However, this order may change.

In FIG. 18B, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is performed. The hold icon and decorative design have not changed yet.

In FIG. 18 (c), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern has not started.

In FIG. 18D, the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 18E, the hold icon, which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change, reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the fluctuation reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, but it is still displayed at this stage. The variable display of decorative icons has not started. When the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon may be viewed as the change icon h0. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

Then, in FIG. 18 (f), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 18 (g), the operation promotion notification image 136P urging the effect button 136 to be pressed within the valid period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 from which the variable display of the decorative symbol has been started. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 or the like. .. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 18H, the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 18I, the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 18J, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the reach state entry notice image 2071 in place of the operation promotion notification image 136P. .. In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the characters "Chance!" Are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

In FIG. 18 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes visible, and then the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. 18 (l). Even if the reach state entry notice image 2071 is displayed, it may not enter the reach state, but it may be made to enter without fail.

As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to the production that triggers the advance notice regarding the symbol variation display currently being performed.

In FIG. 18 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and reduced to be displayed in FIG. 18 (n). , SP (special) reach (swordsman reach) has developed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (n) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The animation of the scene is displayed.

The reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to the notice of entering the reach state, but may be a notice of development to SP reach.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 18 step by step.

In FIG. 19 (p) following from FIG. 18 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 19 (s). In FIG. 19 (s), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. 19 (t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 and the mini symbol. Instead of hiding, a different background image may be displayed. Alternatively, in this scene, the display of the setting suggestion may be displayed. Eventually, as shown in the figure (u), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed. The background here may be hidden or may be a different background image. Further, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini-designs, variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 19 (v), the decorative symbol starts to change and display again with the display of the characters "re-lottery !!", and the re-lottery effect is performed. In this re-lottery effect, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-", which are a combination of decorative patterns that are determined to be a big hit and shift to a probable change state advantageous to the player after the big hit game is completed. It fuels the expectation that the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7" will be finally displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 19 (w), the probability variation jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is confirmed from the combination of the jackpot of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". It is shown that a combination of decorative symbols indicating that is displayed. At this time, the effect display EF1 in which the star flashes is displayed around the decorative symbol after the stop, and it is notified that the combination of the so-called stopped jackpot decorative symbols has been upgraded.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (x), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" for which the 10R probability variation jackpot is confirmed is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 19 (x) is stopped and displayed by "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "777". In FIG. 19 (x), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 19 (y), as a big hit game start effect, the characters "Big chance big hit" are displayed together with the background image celebrating the big hit (omitted here), and the characters "Right hit!" Are displayed. Is urging right-handed. In the jackpot game start effect shown in FIG. 19 (y), a display including a setting suggestion may be displayed. In this case, only when a big hit that meets some conditions (for example, only in the case of the first big hit after the power is turned on), and only when a big hit of 5 consecutive chans or more occurs, among a plurality of big hits with different balls. The display including the setting suggestion may be displayed only in the case of the big hit with the largest number of balls (for example, only when the big hit is 10R big hit).

On the other hand, as a result of the re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 19 (v), for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (w') to 19 (y'), the combination of the decorative symbols does not change from that before the re-lottery. There is. That is, it may be produced that the re-lottery has failed. However, in the present embodiment, even if the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the probabilistic jackpot is confirmed is not stopped and displayed, for example, the promotion effect in the jackpot effect can be given a sense of expectation to the player. In some cases, expectations can be sustained.

In this embodiment, the mode of the re-lottery effect is one type, but there are a plurality of types, and the degree to which the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols changes before and after the re-lottery depends on the mode of the re-lottery effect executed. It may be changed, for example, re-lottery effect of the mode accompanied by the movement of the character> re-lottery effect by displaying the symbol change by frame advance> re-lottery effect by high-speed change> re-lottery effect by slow change. The expectation that the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit will change before and after the lottery may be high. The order and mode of the degree of expectation are not limited to those described above, and can be appropriately set.

FIG. 20 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in a big hit game centered on a decorative symbol display device. In FIG. 20, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the illustration of the general drawing hold lamp 216 is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (a), after the 5R probability variation jackpot (it is difficult to determine whether it is a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot in the production) in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. The transition to the first round is shown. In the first round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "Congratulations!" Along with the character of Miss Machiko on the slightly left side of the center of the display screen, congratulating the big hit. In addition, when it is confirmed that it is a probable variable jackpot by the combination of the decorative symbols at the time of the jackpot (for example, when the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" becomes a jackpot), As shown in FIG. 20 (a'), the characters "Congratulations on a big chance!" Are displayed instead of the characters "Congratulations!" Then, the number of big hits from the first big hit (sometimes called "continuous chan number display") is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and the big hit decorative pattern "decoration" is displayed in the upper left corner. 4 "is displayed. In addition, in the upper center of the display screen, the current number of rounds, "1R", is displayed as the number of rounds, and below that, the number of prize balls acquired in this jackpot game and the number of prizes won in this jackpot game are displayed. "60/750 get!" Is displayed to inform the expected number of prize balls. That is, since four game balls have entered the first variable winning opening 234a since the start of this big hit, the acquisition of the number of prize balls of 60 balls is notified, and the prize balls of 750 balls are announced in this big hit. It has been shown that acquisition can be expected. In addition, the total number of prize balls won from the first big hit is displayed in the lower right of the display screen, and this numerical value hits the number of prize balls won in the big hit and the small hit (big hit, small hit) ends. It will be added (counted up) each time. Therefore, during the big hit game related to the first big hit, the total number of prize balls won is not counted up until the big hit is completed, and the total number of prize balls remains "0pt". In addition, each time a prize ball is acquired in a hit, the number may be added to the total number of prize balls acquired. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls generated by winning a prize in the variable winning openings (first variable winning opening 234a, second variable winning opening 235a) is added, but to other winning openings. The number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize may also be added. For example, the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in a specific general winning opening that can be won by hitting right may be added. You may do it.

FIG. 20B shows how the third round of the game is being performed. In the present embodiment, since the combination of the jackpot symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" is a jackpot, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot. Therefore, in the third round, a promotion effect is performed to notify whether or not the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot. When the promotion effect is started, the characters "Promotion chance!" Are displayed in the center of the decorative pattern display device 208 to give a feeling of expectation that it will be a probable change jackpot. It should be noted that the promotion effect may not be performed, the promotion effect may or may not be performed, and the promotion effect may be performed without fail. In the present embodiment, when it is confirmed that the probability variation jackpot is due to the combination of the decorative symbols at the time of the jackpot (for example, when the probability variation jackpot is 10R), the promotion effect is not performed, but the promotion is performed. The effect may be performed, and in this case, the setting suggestion may be included. At the timing shown in FIG. 20B, it is shown that 22 game balls have entered the first variable winning opening 234a and 330 prize balls have been won in the third round. There is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (c), it is shown that the result of the promotion effect is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 20 (c), the successful promotion effect is shown, and the characters "promotion!" And "next small hit RUSH rush" are displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is notified that this big hit is a probable change big hit. On the other hand, if the promotion effect fails, the characters "sorry ..." are displayed as shown in FIG. 20 (c'). In addition, if the promotion effect fails, it may be confirmed that it is a normal big hit, or another promotion effect (for example, a reversal effect in the ending) may be expected, and it is still probable. It may not be clear whether it is a big hit or not. At the timing shown in FIG. 20 (c), it is shown that 22 game balls have entered the first variable winning opening 234a and 330 prize balls have been won in the third round. There is.

FIG. 20D shows how the fifth round is completed and the jackpot end effect is being performed. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 20 (d), it is shown that an effect that is confirmed to be a probabilistic jackpot is being performed. When the jackpot end effect starts, the characters "Probability change rush!" Are displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the state shifts to the probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state). In addition, an animation that counts up the total number of prize balls displayed at the bottom right of the display screen has started, and it is shown that the 750 prize balls won in this big hit are added. .. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the normal jackpot is normal, as shown in FIG. 20 (d'), the characters "big hit end" and "time saving rush!" Are displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed, and it is notified that the state shifts to the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state). In addition, the display showing the total number of prize balls won will be counted up in the same way as when it shifts to the probabilistic state even if it shifts to the electric support state, and the display of the total number of prize balls won after the count up is displayed. , It is displayed continuously until the electric support state ends, but in the case of a normal big hit, the total number of prize balls won may not be displayed.

It should be noted that the degree of expectation for success in the promotion effect during the jackpot game may be changed by combining the decorative symbols of the jackpot when the jackpot becomes a jackpot. For example, the jackpot in "decoration 3" or "decoration 7" (decoration 7) may be changed. Probability change confirmation)> Big hits with odd-numbered symbols other than "Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7"> Big hits with even-numbered symbols may be made easier to succeed in promotion.

FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of displaying information regarding play time when the power is turned on, and FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step.

In FIG. 21, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a general drawing are shown. The hold lamp 216 is shown.

FIG. 21A shows a state immediately after the power is turned on. After that, when the backup is restored, as shown in FIG. 3B, a symbol demo as an effect showing the standby state is displayed. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21B, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, all of the special figure 1, the special figure 2, and the normal figure are stopped and displayed with the outlier symbol, and the fourth symbol in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the hold number display area 284, the hold numbers of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 indicate “0”, and the stop display is indicated by “x” indicating an outlier symbol so as to indicate to that effect.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 21 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. .. Since the state shown in FIG. 21B is a standby state, the hold icon is not displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1.

In the present embodiment, on the standby display screen immediately after the power is turned on, "play time: not yet" and "number of fits: 432" are displayed at the upper center of the display screen (status display when the power is turned on). Therefore, the symbol variation display has been performed 432 times since the transition to the special figure low probability state after the end of the big hit, and it is notified that the play time has not started. This is a display for the clerk of the amusement park to confirm. For example, by not initializing it, the player can be in a state of shifting to the play time when the symbol change display is performed 318 times. By creating an advantageous state or initializing and resetting the number of fits, fairness may be ensured and an advantageous state may be created in the amusement park. If the play time has ended before the power is turned off, the display "play time: finished" is displayed as shown in FIG. 21 (b'), and a notification to that effect is given.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), "Information is erased by operating the effect button" is displayed at the lower part of the display screen, and as shown in FIG. 21 (c), the effect button 136 is displayed. Is operated, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (d), the implementation status of the play time and the number of times of fitting (play time information) are deleted, and instead, "____ times until the play time" (underscore). The part is displayed with a question mark.) Is displayed, and a notification for the player is made. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the number of symbol fluctuation displays until the start of the play time and the number of symbol fluctuation displays in the special symbol low probability state after the end of the big hit are not clarified, so that the game is played in the morning. It may be possible to prevent some people from having advantages / disadvantages.

In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the status display when the power is turned on so that the execution status of the play time and the number of symbol fluctuation displays after the big hit are recognizable, but the notification is made by voice. Also, for example, "Play time has been executed. It is recommended to clear the ram or change the setting." "It is 3 rotations until the play time." "200 rotations after the big hit." May be good. Further, the notification may be performed by a lamp or a 7-segment display.

In FIG. 22 (e) following FIG. 21 (d), the symbol demonstration effect is continuously performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (f), when the variable display of the special figure 1 is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in accordance with this. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (f), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is the default in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. One is displayed in the display mode.
Further, the setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are all displayed in a white display mode. In addition, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time has not been clarified yet.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In FIG. 22 (h), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and the change icon h0. It becomes. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time has not been clarified yet.

After that, in FIG. 22 (i), the decorative symbols of "decoration 7" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, a reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (i), two game balls enter the first special figure start port 230, two symbol variation displays of special figure 1 are held, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h11 and the second. Hold icon h12 is displayed.

In FIG. 22 (j), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and reduced to be displayed in FIG. 22 (k). , Has developed into SP reach (swordsman reach). After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 18 (o) to 19 (q) are performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (l), it is shown that the character of the lord is defeated and the decorative symbol sways and fluctuates due to the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". ing. After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (m), when the SP reach effect is changed to the default background image, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is clarified, and "421 times until the play time" is displayed. It is recognizable that the player will shift to the play time when the symbol variation display is executed 421 more times. If it is after the play time has ended, the display of "____ times until the play time" is erased, and the player can recognize that the play time has ended.

FIG. 22 (e ″) shows how the symbol demo effect is performed after the power is turned on, but it is different from FIG. 22 (e) in that the play time is being executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (e ″), a right-handed display is displayed in the upper left portion of the display screen, and it may be recognized that the time is shortened. After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (f ″), when the variable display of the special figure 1 is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in accordance with this. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (f''), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. One is displayed in the default display mode.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (g''), the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is reduced and displayed in the lower right portion, and the shoji is opened and the Gol grandfather appears. A balloon of "Da ..." is displayed. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that it is play time. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (h ″), the effect display of the Gol grandfather ends, and the normal background display is restored. In addition, a large message "Please hit right!" Is displayed in the center of the display screen to encourage the player to hit right.

In this embodiment, after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 100 that easily shifts to the play time is targeted by not notifying the execution status of the play time, which is advantageous / disadvantageous to the pachinko machine 100 in the morning state. It may be possible to improve the player's motivation to play by clarifying the execution status of the play time on condition that the SP reach is executed. In the present embodiment, as a condition for clarifying the execution status of the play time, an example is given that SP reach that is out of order is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a big hit or a big hit. The symbol variation display may be executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), a specific notice or a look-ahead notice may be given, or the execution status of the play time may be clarified by lottery. Alternatively, the execution status of the play time may be clarified by performing the mission production and succeeding in the mission.

Further, in the present embodiment, the power-on status display displayed after the power is turned on is erased by operating the effect button 136, but it may be erased by other means, for example, for a predetermined time ( For example, it may be erased after 5 minutes), when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated, when the power is turned on again, or when a predetermined switch provided on the back side of the gaming machine is operated. It may be erased on condition that at least one is performed, the operation key unit 190 is operated, the front frame door 106 is closed, and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time is displayed, but the number of symbol variation display times (TS) from the end of the jackpot may be displayed, or the number of symbol variation display counts up to the play time may be displayed. And the number of times the symbol variation is displayed (TS) from the end of the big hit may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is clearly indicated, but the mode may not be left clearly. For example, a predetermined mark, character, character, or the like is displayed and the color is displayed. It may be implied by changing it, or it may be implied by the appearance frequency of a certain character.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the execution status of the play time is removed and the mode is changed when a certain condition such as the execution of SP reach is satisfied, but the mode of change is not limited to the above-mentioned one, for example. The execution status of the play time may be hidden until a certain condition is satisfied, or it is implicitly represented by the color of characters or characters until a certain condition is satisfied, and when a certain condition is satisfied, the play time is reached. The number of times the symbol variation is displayed may be specified, or the color of characters or characters may not be changed until a certain condition is satisfied, and when a certain condition is satisfied, the color of characters or characters may be changed. It may be done to implicitly represent the execution status of the play time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the status display at the time of turning on the power and the display mode of the display of the execution status of the play time are different, but the same display mode may be used. A display screen may be displayed so that the clerk of the game hall can check the display of the execution status of the play time included therein and consider whether to carry out the ram clear.

FIG. 23 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect in the electric support state (a time saving state) centered on the decorative symbol display device. Also in FIG. 23, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the illustration of the general drawing hold lamp 216 is omitted.

FIG. 23A shows a state in which the big hit game related to the normal big hit is completed and the ending effect is executed, which is the first big hit. Further, in the 4th symbol / reserved number display area 284 displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, one symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is reserved, and the 4th symbol of the special figure 1 displays a big hit. However, in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2, the display of the out-of-order is displayed respectively. Since the effect shown in FIG. 23 (a) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 20 (d'), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (b), the ending effect is continued, and it is shown that the count-up of the total number of prize balls that has been counted up is completed. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen, the characters "If you defeat the panda, you will get a big hit!", Which is the explanation of the mission in the time saving state, are displayed. This mission is, for example, a mission in which a panda character appears in SP reach, and it is notified that a big hit will be obtained by defeating the panda. The content of the mission is not limited to this, and various things can be adopted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (c), the display was stopped at "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot displayed at the time of the jackpot, and the state was changed to the electric support state. The situation is shown. At this time, the right-handed display is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen, and in the upper center of the display screen, "Time reduction remaining: 100 times" indicating the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times in the electric support state (a time reduction state) is displayed. Below that, a display of "750 more times until the play time" is displayed, which indicates the number of times the symbol variation is displayed (the number of fits) necessary for shifting to the play time (b time reduction state). Furthermore, in the lower right part of the display screen, a state in which the character of the lord is running is displayed, suggesting that the character is in an electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, since the symbol variation display is performed centering on the special figure 2, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed together with the variation icon display area 280 in the lower left corner of the display screen. .. At the timing shown in FIG. 23 (c), one symbol variation display of special figure 1 is held, but the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is hidden, so that it corresponds to special figure 1. Since the hold icon is not displayed and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is not held, the hold icon is not displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (d), it is shown that the first symbol variation display has started after shifting to the electric support state (a time saving state). As described above, since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed in preference to the special figure 1, but the special figure 2 shows. Since there is no hold, the hold of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started. In addition, the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuations in the electric support state and the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed up to the play time have been updated, and "remaining time reduction: 99 times" and "749 times until the play time" are displayed, respectively. .. In addition, below the 4th symbol / hold number display area 284, a display showing the number of symbol fluctuation displays since the end of the big hit (display of the number of starts between special prizes) is displayed, and this time, after the end of the big hit, the special figure is displayed. Since the execution of the first symbol variation display is started after the low probability state is reached, the display of "START: first time" is made. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (d), since four or more game balls have entered the second special figure start opening 232, all four hold icons are the default in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. It is displayed in the mode. In the present embodiment, the number of times of symbol variation display until the transition to the play time is not counted in the probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state). In this production example, it is a special figure 2 priority variable machine, and if a big hit is made with a probabilistic symbol, the probable change state continues until the next big hit. For example, in the ST machine, ST ( When the state shifts to the probabilistic state as the Special Time) state, the symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times), and the normal gaming state is entered, the transition to the normal gaming state is followed by the play time. The number of times the symbol variation is displayed may be counted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (e), it is shown that the first symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is completed after the jackpot game is completed. Along with this, the decorative symbol displayed in the center of the display screen is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 6-Decoration 3-Decoration 8". In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "638" in accordance with this.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (f), it is shown that the jackpot game is completed and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 23 (f), the movement animation of the hold icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 is started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icons at the display positions of the second to fourth hold icons h22 to h24 move toward the display positions of the first to third hold icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2, respectively. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (f), the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuations in the electric support state and the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed up to the play time are updated, and "time reduction remaining: 98 times", respectively. "It is displayed that" 748 times until the play time ". In addition, the display of the number of starts between special prizes has also been updated to display "START: 2nd time".

In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 23 (g), the state when the symbol variation display is completed 100 times after the jackpot is completed is shown. Along with this, the decorative symbol displayed in the center of the display screen is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1". In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "638" in accordance with this. In addition, the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times in the electric support state and the display of the number of symbol fluctuation display times up to the play time are displayed as "time reduction remaining: 0 times" and "650 times until the play time", respectively. Further, the display of the number of start times between special prizes displayed below the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed as "START: 100th time". At this time, since the electric support state ends, the right-handed display displayed in the upper left part of the display screen and the character of the lord displayed in the lower right part of the display screen are also erased. After that, as shown in FIG. 23 (h), the total number of prize balls acquired in this series of advantageous states (the period from the first big hit to the end of the a time saving state) and the number of big hits (number of consecutive chans). Is displayed, and the results in a series of advantageous states are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 23 (h), the display of the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times in the electric support state is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (i), the electric support state (a time saving state) ends, the game shifts to the revival mode of 10 games, and the first symbol variation display (101st symbol variation from the end of the big hit). Display) is shown to have started. In addition, the revival mode is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), and since the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is mainly executed, the special figure 2 displayed in the electric support state The hold icon display area 282 is displayed by switching to the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. At this time, since there is one hold of the special figure 1, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. In the resurrection mode, the display mode of the hold icon in Special Figure 1 is different, and the display mode is white and triangular. It should be noted that this display mode is not a look-ahead notice display mode, but a display mode peculiar to the resurrection mode, and is a default display mode. Further, in the present embodiment, since it is a special figure 2 priority variable machine, the hold of special figure 2 is preferentially digested even in the symbol change display after the electric support state ends, and is shown in FIG. 23 (i). At the timing, the symbol change display based on the hold of the special figure 2 is started, and the display of "special 2 changing" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen, and the fact is notified. In addition, the characters "Entering the resurrection mode!" And "Big hit with SP reach!" Are displayed at the bottom center of the display screen, indicating that the jackpot is rich when SP reach is executed during the resurrection mode. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the resurrection mode, the SP reach may not be selected when the result is a loss, and the SP reach may be selected only when the jackpot is a big hit. Therefore, the SP reach may be selected. It can be said that it is suggested that it will be a big hit by executing. Further, the display of "Resurrection mode" is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen, so that it can be recognized that it is the resurrection mode. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (i), the electric support state has ended and the normal game state has been entered, so left-handed strike is recommended. Therefore, by displaying "Please hit left!" In the center of the display screen, the player is urged to hit left. The display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time is displayed as "649 times left until the play time", and the display of the number of start times between special prizes is displayed as "START: 101st time". After that, as shown in FIG. 23 (j), the display of "Please hit left!", The display of "Entering the resurrection mode!", And the display of "Big hit with SP reach!" Are deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (k), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed. Along with this, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns on the outskirts of "Decoration 8-Decoration 6-Decoration 3". In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "863" in accordance with this.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (l), since there are three reservations for the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started in preference to the special figure 1. It is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 23 (l), the hold icon of the special figure 2 is hidden, so that the movement animation is not performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (l), the display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated, and the display is "648 times until the play time" and "START: 102nd time", respectively. It is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (m), it is shown that the symbol variation display is executed for the 10th time after the transition to the revival mode. At the timing shown in FIG. 23 (m), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is executed, and two symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 are suspended. In addition, the display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are displayed as "640 times until the play time" and "START: 110th time", respectively.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (n), it is shown that the tenth symbol variation display is completed after the transition to the revival mode. Along with this, the decorative symbol displayed in the center of the display screen is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 1". In addition, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at "451" in accordance with this, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (n), since the revival mode is terminated in the symbol variation display this time, the display of the "revival mode" displayed in the lower right part of the display screen is erased, and the setting suggestion ball display area is deleted. 285 is displayed. The setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are all displayed in white.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (o), it is shown that the first symbol variation display is started after the revival mode is completed. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 changes to the display mode of the circle, and the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 and becomes the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, the display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "639 times until the play time" and "START: 111th time", respectively. After that, every time the symbol variation display starts, the display of the symbol variation display number until the play time is decremented, and the start between special prizes is incremented.

In this production example, the display of the number of symbol fluctuation display times up to the play time is displayed in the electric support state (a time saving state) that shifts after the end of the big hit, but it is not displayed during the execution of the a time saving state. You may. Further, the display of the number of start times between special prizes may not be displayed during the execution of the a time saving state.

In addition, in this production example, until the end of the electric support state (a time saving state) that shifts after the end of the big hit, the number of games acquired from the first big hit and the number of consecutive chans are displayed. Since it has nothing to do with a series of consecutive chans, it is hidden. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be performed at the end of the a time reduction state, and the setting suggestion effect may not be performed at the end of the play time. The effect set at the end may be performed.

FIG. 24 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect in the revival mode centered on the decorative symbol display device. In addition, also in FIG. 24, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the illustration of the general drawing hold lamp 216 is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (a), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is performed in the resurrection mode. In FIG. 24A, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, which is the default. Is displayed in the display mode (triangular non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode of the special figure 1. In addition, the display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "643 times until the play time" and "START: 107th time", respectively.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (b), two "decoration 4" are displayed and the state of entering the reach state is shown. After that, SP reach is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 18 (m) to 19 (y) to obtain a big hit, but the process shifts to SP reach and the decorative symbol display shown in FIGS. 24 (c) to 19 (d) is displayed. In the device 208, a grandfather's character appears in place of the lord's character, and it is shown that the swordsman's character is defeated. The grandfather's character is a premium character, and its appearance suggests that the jackpot is rich. In the SP reach in the resurrection mode, the grandfather's character may always appear, or the lord's character may appear.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step.

In FIG. 25 (p) following FIG. 23 (o), the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, and the special diagram 1. The holding lamp 218, the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, and the general drawing holding lamp 216 are not shown.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 25 (p), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 25 (p) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the number of hold of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the holding number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. It should be noted that it may also be represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 25 (p), four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 to these four special figures 1 are displayed. All of h14 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon.

In FIG. 25 (q), the hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the variable icon display area 280. It moves to become the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes. The second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h14 becomes the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of symbol variation display times (number of fits) after the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big hit reaches 750, the game shifts to the time-saving game until the symbol variation display is executed up to 950 times. It shifts to the play time (b time reduction state), but when it shifts from the symbol fluctuation display 10 times before the number of fits reaches 750 times to the play time precursor effect mode and shifts to the play time precursor effect mode, a predetermined look-ahead notice is given. And every time the symbol variation display is started, the countdown display of the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (q), the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big hit is started, and in response to this, “0” indicating that the next symbol variation display shifts to the play time. Is displayed in the center of the display screen. In addition, the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "0 more times until the play time" and "START: 750th time", respectively.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (r), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 8-decoration 6-decoration 3", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (r), since the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big hit is completed, the game shifts to the play time, and the "play time rush !!" is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. Characters are displayed to notify that fact, and the display of the symbol variation display rotation speed up to the play time is switched to the display showing the number of remaining symbol variation display times of the play time, and "remaining play time: 950 times" is displayed. ..

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (s) starts variable display of the decorative symbol. At the time of transition to the play time, since there is no hold of the special figure 2, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. At this time, since the state has shifted to the electric support state (b time saving state), the right-handed display is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen, and the characters "Right-handed!" Are displayed in the lower center of the display screen. It encourages the player to hit right and promotes the winning of the game ball to the second special figure start opening 232. Further, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is likely to be started in a time-saving state, the display of the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is switched to the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (s), four or more game balls have won a prize in the second special figure start opening 232, and the hold icon display area 282 in special figure 2 is the first in special figure 2. The hold icon to the fourth hold icon h21 to h24 are displayed. In addition, the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuations in the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "remaining play time: 949 times" and "START: 751st time", respectively. In addition, when the game shifts to play time, the setting suggestion ball display area 285 is erased, the characters "play time" is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen, and the character of the bancho is displayed, and the play time is in progress. It is shown that.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (t), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2. At the timing shown in FIG. 25 (t), the 1699th symbol variation display is being executed after the jackpot is finished, that is, the 949th symbol variation display is being executed after the play time is started. .. Therefore, the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuations in the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are displayed as "play time remaining: 1 time" and "START: 1699th time", respectively. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (u), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 8-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In FIG. 25 (v), the hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h21 is changed to the variable icon display area 280. It moves and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h22 becomes the first hold icon h21, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h23 becomes the second hold. The icon h22 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h24 becomes the third hold icon h23. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (v), the 950th symbol variation display is being executed after the play time is started, and therefore, a display indicating the number of remaining symbol variation display times of the play time and a special prize are given. The display of the number of inter-starts is displayed as "play time last" and "START: 1700th", respectively.

In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 25 (w), a state when the 950th symbol variation display is completed after the play time starts is shown. Along with this, the decorative symbol displayed in the center of the display screen is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 8-Decoration 6-Decoration 3". In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "863" in accordance with this. In addition, since the symbol variation display of 950 times, which is the end condition of the play time, was executed, the characters "play time end" are displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and the "play time last" displayed at the upper center is displayed. , And the character of "in play time" and the character of the bancho displayed in the lower right part were erased, and it was notified that the play time was over, and it was displayed in the upper left part of the display screen. The right-handed display is also erased. The display of the number of starts between special prizes is maintained, and is displayed as "START: 1700th time". Here, the display of the number of starts between special prizes may also be deleted. As mentioned above, the play time does not start until it becomes a big hit again. On the other hand, even after that, if the special figure 1 suddenly stops at the time saving symbol, the electric support state (c time saving state) is started. In addition, in the symbol variation display where the play time ends, setting suggestion may be made. For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (w'), the character of the lord with the character "opportunity" in the lower right part of the display screen. Appears, suggesting that the setting is 4 or higher.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (x), the electric support state (b time reduction state) is terminated, the game shifts to the normal gaming state, and the reserved symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. It is shown. In the normal game state, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is likely to be started, so that the display is switched from the second hold icon display area 282 to the first hold icon display area 281, and the display is centered on the display screen. The text "Please hit left!" Is displayed, and the player is urged to hit left. At this time, the setting suggestion ball display area 285 is also displayed. For example, the effect of urging the left-handed strike is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, but when it is detected that the right-handed strike is continuously performed, the effect of urging the left-handed strike continues. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the character appearing in the time saving state a and the character appearing in the time saving state b are at least different, that is, the type of the time saving state can be recognized by looking at the displayed character. be. In other words, it can be said that the staging mode is different between the a time saving state and the b time saving state. In this case, for example, the content and appearance rate of the background display, the notice of appearance, or the look-ahead notice may be different, or the content and appearance rate of the mission effect may be different. Further, the display mode of the hold icon may be different depending on the effect mode, or the hold icon may be hidden in a certain effect mode. The display mode of the display indicating the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times of the play time may change between the a time reduction state and the normal game state after the a time reduction state ends, and the display mode may be determined according to the setting. You may. Further, the display indicating the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times of the play time may be directly displayed numerically, or may be suggested by, for example, a change in a mode such as a color, a shape, or a size. In addition, a plurality of types of display modes for displaying the total number of acquired balls and displaying the number of consecutive chans may be prepared, and the mode to be displayed may be determined by the setting to suggest the setting.

FIG. 26 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect related to the decorative symbol variation display in a sudden time saving state (c time saving state) centered on the decorative symbol display device. In addition, also in FIG. 26, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the illustration of the general drawing hold lamp 216 is omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 26A, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 26 (a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the number of hold of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the holding number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 26A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both displayed. , Is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (a), the number of times the symbol variation is displayed (the number of fits) after the transition to the normal gaming state after the end of the big hit is the 263rd time, and the display of the number of symbol variation display until the play time and the special prize. The display of the number of inter-starts is displayed as "487 times until the play time" and "START: 263 times", respectively. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

In FIG. 26B, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, in the symbol change display this time, the time reduction (c time reduction) was suddenly won. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 26B, two game balls are won in the first special drawing start opening 230, and the number of holdings is three. In addition, since the number of fits increased by 1 to 263, the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed until the play time and the display of the number of starts between special prizes were "487 times until the play time" and "START: 263 times", respectively. It is updated and displayed. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 26 (c) to 26 (d), it is shown that a copanda group notice is performed in which a large number of copandas run from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen. ing. The Copanda group notice is a notice that suggests the possibility of suddenly shortening the time, and gives the player a sense of expectation that the time will suddenly be shortened. It should be noted that the copanda group notice may be a case of notifying that a big hit will be obtained by displaying the symbol change during execution, or may be a pre-reading notice.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (e), "decoration 1" is stopped on the left symbol, then "decoration 3" is stopped on the right symbol, and the characters "petit chance!" Are displayed. It is directing that there is a possibility that the time will be shortened suddenly. After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (f), the "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the result of the variable display of the special figure 1 is suddenly shortened. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (f), the characters "Time reduction 30 rushes!" Are displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and "Time reduction 30 times" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen. Character is displayed, and it is notified that the state shifts to the electric support state (c time saving state). In the present embodiment, when the c time reduction state is entered, the electric support state is maintained until the symbol variation display is performed 30 times, but the electric support state may be performed at other times, and a plurality of types of symbols are suddenly provided. , The number of times of symbol variation display in which the electric support state is maintained may be different depending on the stopped symbol.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (g) starts variable display of the decorative symbol. At the time of transition to the electric support state, since there is no hold of special figure 2, the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started. At this time, since the state has shifted to the electric support state (c time saving state), the right-handed display is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen, and the characters "Right-handed!" Are displayed in the lower center of the display screen. It encourages the player to hit right and promotes the winning of the game ball to the second special figure start opening 232. At this time, the setting suggestion ball display area 285 displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen is erased, and the character of Sabohani is displayed, suggesting that the c time is shortened. Even in the electric support state, the setting suggestion ball display area 285 may be continuously displayed. Further, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is likely to be started in a time-saving state, the display of the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is switched to the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (g), three game balls have won a prize in the second special figure start opening 232, and the hold icon display area 282 in special figure 2 has the first hold icon in special figure 2. -Third hold icons h21 to h23 are displayed. In addition, the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuations in the electric support state and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "remaining time reduction: 29 times" and "START: 265th time", respectively. Furthermore, since the game state is a special figure low probability state, the number of times the change of the special figure that shifts to the play time is displayed is also updated, and the number of times the symbol change is displayed until the play time is displayed as "485 times until the play time". It is updated and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (h), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2. At the timing shown in FIG. 26 (h), the 29th symbol variation display is being executed after shifting to the c time saving state. Therefore, the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuations in the electric support state, the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed until the play time, and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are "remaining time reduction: 1 time", "45 more times until the play time", and " START: 293th time "is displayed. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (i), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 8-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In FIG. 26 (j), the hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h21 is changed to the variable icon display area 280. It moves and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h22 becomes the first hold icon h21, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h23 becomes the second hold. The icon h22 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h24 becomes the third hold icon h23. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (j), the symbol variation display is being executed for the 30th time after shifting to the c time saving state, and therefore, a display indicating the number of remaining symbol variation display times in the electric support state is being executed. , The display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are displayed as "time saving last", "456 times until the play time", and "START: 294th time", respectively.

In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 26 (k), a state when the 30th symbol variation display is completed after the c time reduction state is started is shown. Along with this, the decorative symbol displayed in the center of the display screen is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 8-Decoration 6-Decoration 3". In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "863" in accordance with this. In addition, since the symbol variation display was executed 30 times, which is the end condition of the c time reduction state, the characters "time reduction end" were displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and the "time reduction last" displayed at the upper center. And the character of Sabohani displayed in the lower right part are deleted, and it is notified that the c time saving state has ended, and the right-handed display displayed in the upper left part of the display screen is also deleted. The display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are maintained, and are displayed as "456 times until the play time" and "START: 294th time", respectively. In addition, in this embodiment, the setting suggestion may be given when the c time saving state is completed, or it may be always done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (l), the electric support state (c time saving state) is terminated, the game shifts to the normal gaming state, and the reserved symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. It is shown. In the normal game state, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is likely to be started, so that the display is switched from the second hold icon display area 282 to the first hold icon display area 281, and the display is centered on the display screen. The text "Please hit left!" Is displayed, and the player is urged to hit left. At this time, the setting suggestion ball display area 285 is also displayed. For example, the effect of urging the left-handed strike is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, but when it is detected that the right-handed strike is continuously performed, the effect of urging the left-handed strike continues. Will be done.

FIG. 27 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect related to the decorative symbol variation display in the case of shifting to the play time (b time reduction state) during the sudden time reduction state (c time reduction state) centered on the decorative symbol display device. be. In addition, also in FIG. 27, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the illustration of the general drawing hold lamp 216 is omitted. Further, the effects shown in FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (g) are different from those shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (g), except that the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the jackpot is completed is different. Since it is the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (h), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2. At the timing shown in FIG. 27 (h), the 13th symbol variation display is being executed after shifting to the c time saving state. In addition, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the big hit is finished is the 749th time. Therefore, the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuations in the electric support state, the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed up to the play time, and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are "remaining time reduction: 13 times", "one more time until the play time", and " START: 749th time "is displayed. In addition, the symbol variation display 10 times before the number of fits reaches 750 is shifted to the play time precursor effect mode, and the countdown display of the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time is performed, and the center of the display screen is displayed. , "1" indicating the number of times of the remaining symbol fluctuation display until the play time is displayed. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (i), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 8-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In FIG. 27 (j), the hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h21 is changed to the variable icon display area 280. It moves and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h22 becomes the first hold icon h21, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h23 becomes the second hold. The icon h22 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h24 becomes the third hold icon h23. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (j), since the number of symbol variation displays after the jackpot is completed is the 750th, the next symbol variation display is shifted to the play time. Therefore, "0" is displayed as a countdown display in the play time precursor effect mode, suggesting that the game shifts to the play time. The display of the number of times and the display of the number of starts between special prizes are displayed as "remaining time reduction: 12 times", "0 more times until play time", and "START: 750th time", respectively.

In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 27 (k), the state when the 750th symbol variation display (c 18th symbol variation display after the start of the time saving state) is completed after the big hit is completed is shown. ing. Along with this, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns on the outskirts of "Decoration 8-Decoration 6-Decoration 3". In addition, the mini-design is also stopped and displayed at "863" in accordance with this, and the display result of the out-of-order is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (k), since the 750th symbol variation display is completed after the big hit is completed, the game shifts to the play time, and the lower center of the display screen is "Enter the play time! Character is displayed to notify that fact, and the display of the symbol variation display rotation speed up to the play time is switched to the display showing the number of remaining symbol variation display times of the play time, and "remaining play time: 950 times" is displayed. Will be done. Further, in this production example, the number of times of the symbol variation display in which the electric support state as the c time reduction state is changed to the electric support state as the play time (b time reduction state) and the electric support state is maintained is also 12 to 950 times. As it increases to, the characters "Addition !!" are displayed to liven up the production.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (l), the hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 were moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and were at the display position of the first hold icon h21. The hold icon moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h22 becomes the first hold icon h21, and the hold icon becomes the display position of the third hold icon h23. The existing hold icon becomes the second hold icon h22, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h24 becomes the third hold icon h23. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, since the game state has changed from the c time reduction state to the play time (b time reduction state), the character of the bancho is displayed at the lower right of the display screen together with the characters "play time in progress", and the game state has changed to the play time. Is being notified. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (l), the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuations in the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "remaining play time: 949 times" and "START: 751 times", respectively. ing.

In this production example, when the play time transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the c time reduction state, the play time is shifted from the c time reduction state, whereas in the present embodiment, the time reduction symbol is suddenly only in the special figure 1. Since it is not displayed, it can be said that it is a rare case that the time saving symbol is suddenly displayed during the playing time in the present embodiment in which the game is played by hitting right during the playing time, but in this embodiment, the time is suddenly shortened during the playing time. When the symbol is displayed, the play time ends and the state shifts to the c time reduction state. Even if the time reduction symbol is suddenly displayed during the play time, the play time may continue and the c time reduction state may not be entered. Similarly, it is also a rare case that a time saving symbol is suddenly displayed in the a time saving state that shifts after the end of the big hit. Even if the time saving symbol is suddenly displayed in the state, the c time saving state may not be changed. Further, when the time reduction symbol is suddenly displayed in the play time, the c time reduction state may be entered after the symbol variation display is performed 950 times after the play time starts, or conversely, c. When the condition for shifting to the play time is satisfied in the time saving state, the game time is shifted to the play time after the symbol variation display of the number of times that can be executed in the time saving state (30 times in this production example) is completed. May be good. Further, when the time saving symbol is suddenly displayed in the time saving state, the state shifts to the c time saving state after the symbol variation display of the number of times that can be executed in the time saving state (100 times in this effect example) is completed. You may do it. Further, when the time saving symbol is suddenly displayed during the play time, the state may be shifted to or continued in the electric support state with the larger number of remaining time saving times. In addition, it is also a rare case that the time saving symbol is suddenly displayed in the c time saving state. In this case as well, the c time saving state being executed ends and the c time saving state starts again, but it is being executed. It is also possible that the c time saving state continues and does not shift to the c time saving state based on the displayed sudden time saving symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of symbol variation displays that can be executed in the c time reduction state (30 times) is smaller than the number of symbol variation displays that can be executed in the time reduction state (100 times), and the number of symbol variation displays that can be executed in the c time reduction state is smaller (30 times). It is set that the number of times of the symbol variation display (950 times) that can be executed in the play time (b time reduction state) is larger than the number of times of the symbol variation display that can be executed (30 times), but it is not limited to these. , The number of times the symbol variation is displayed in each electric support state can be set arbitrarily.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect in the electric support state (c time reduction state) and the effect in the play time (b time reduction state), in which the time reduction symbol is suddenly displayed and transitioned, are different, but they are the same effect. May be good.

FIG. 28 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect related to the decorative symbol variation display when the symbol variation display of the number of fittings shifting to the play time centered on the decorative symbol display device is suddenly won in a short time. In addition, also in FIG. 28, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the illustration of the general drawing hold lamp 216 is omitted. Further, the effect shown in FIG. 28 (a) is the same as that of FIG. 26 (a) except that the number of times of the symbol variation display after the big hit is completed is different, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 28B, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the variable icon display area 280. It moves to become the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes. The second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h14 becomes the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed (the number of fits) after the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big hit is the 750th time, the play time precursor effect mode is being executed, and the symbols up to the play time are being executed. A countdown display of the number of variable display times is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (b), the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big hit is started, and in response to this, “0” indicating that the next symbol variation display shifts to the play time. Is displayed in the center of the display screen. In addition, the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "0 more times until the play time" and "START: 750th time", respectively. In addition, in this production example, the time reduction is suddenly won in the symbol variation display this time. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 28 (c) to 28 (e) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 28 (c) to 28 (e) are different from those shown in FIGS. 26 (c) to 26 (e), except that the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the jackpot is completed is different. Since it is the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (f), the "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the result of the variable display of the special figure 1 is suddenly shortened. However, in this production example, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the big hit is finished is the 750th time, and at the same time, the condition for shifting to the play time is satisfied. In this case, the play time (b time reduction state) is prioritized over the c time reduction state, the play time shifts to the play time, and the sudden time reduction becomes substantially invalid. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (f), the character of the copanda is displayed, and the characters "Entering play time !!" are displayed at the lower center of the display screen. It has been notified that the time will shift. If the time reduction and the transition to the play time are suddenly established at the same time, the shift to the c time reduction state may be given priority to the play time, or the c time reduction state is first shifted to and the c time reduction state ends. After that, it may be possible to shift to play time.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (g) starts variable display of the decorative symbol. At the time of transition to the play time, since there is no hold of the special figure 2, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. At this time, since the state has shifted to the electric support state (b time saving state), the right-handed display is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen, and the characters "Right-handed!" Are displayed in the lower center of the display screen. It encourages the player to hit right and promotes the winning of the game ball to the second special figure start opening 232. Further, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is likely to be started in a time-saving state, the display of the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is switched to the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (g), three game balls have won a prize in the second special figure start opening 232, and the hold icon display area 282 in special figure 2 has the first hold icon in special figure 2. -Third hold icons h21 to h23 are displayed. In addition, the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuations in the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "remaining play time: 949 times" and "START: 751 times", respectively. In addition, when the game shifts to play time, the setting suggestion ball display area 285 is erased, the characters "play time" is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen, and the character of the bancho is displayed, and the play time is in progress. It is shown that.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect in the jackpot game end effect centered on the decorative symbol display device. In addition, also in FIG. 29, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the illustration of the general drawing hold lamp 216 is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (a), it is shown that the fifth round in the jackpot game related to the 5R probability variation jackpot is being executed. In the present embodiment, the combination of the jackpot symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is a jackpot, so that the player can recognize that it is a probabilistic jackpot. In addition, during the big hit game, a promotion effect for notifying whether or not the 10R probability variation big hit may be performed may be performed, and the promotion effect may include a setting suggestion. At the timing shown in FIG. 29 (a), it is shown that 48 game balls have entered the first variable winning opening 234a and 720 prize balls have been won in the fifth round. There is.

FIG. 29B shows how 10 game balls have won a prize in the second variable winning opening 235a in the fifth round. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (b), 10 game balls win in the second variable winning opening 235a, and when the second variable winning opening 235a is closed, the lower right portion of the display screen shows "Big hit end". "Is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit will end. At this time, the character may be displayed in the center of the display screen. As the characters appearing here, the tables shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B are used to determine whether or not the characters can appear and the type of character to be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 29 (b), the character TDR of the Bancho is displayed together with the line of "Oh !!", that is, it is suggested to the player that the setting is 5 or more. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 29 (b1) to (b5), the Chappy character CYP is displayed along with the line "Afro nasai", suggesting that it is an odd number setting. The display of the grandfather's character GYJ along with the words "!" Suggests that the setting is even, and the display of the Sabohani character SBH along with the characters "!!!!!" suggests that the setting is 2 or higher. It is suggested that the setting is 4 or more by displaying the character KPD of Copanda along with the line of "Chance!", And setting by displaying the character MCK of Mr. Machiko along with the line of "Saikou ne!" It is suggested that 6 is rich.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (c), it is shown that the fifth round is completed and the jackpot end effect is being performed. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 29 (c), it is shown that an effect that is confirmed to be a probabilistic jackpot is being performed. When the jackpot end effect starts, the characters "Probability change rush!" Are displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the state shifts to the probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state). In addition, an animation that counts up the total number of prize balls displayed at the bottom right of the display screen has started, and it is shown that the 750 prize balls won in this big hit are added. ..

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect centered on a decorative symbol display device. Also in FIG. 30, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the illustration of the general drawing hold lamp 216 is omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 30A, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 30A is a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the holding number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 30A, four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11, of these four special figures 1 are displayed. All of h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 30A, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed (the number of fits) after the transition to the normal gaming state after the end of the big hit is the 199th time, and the display of the number of symbol variation display up to the play time and the special prize. The display of the number of inter-starts is displayed as "551 times until the play time" and "START: 199th time", respectively. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

In FIG. 30B, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the variable icon display area 280. It moves and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes. The second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h14 becomes the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, since the number of fits has increased by 1 to 200, the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed until the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are "550 times until the play time" and "START: 200th", respectively. It is updated and displayed. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (c), the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the symbol variation display this time is the 200th rotation after the big hit ends, and the condition that the setting suggestion ball that appears every 100 rotations after the big hit ends is satisfied. Therefore, the color of the setting suggestion ball that appears using the table shown in FIGS. 16A or 16B is selected. At the timing shown in FIG. 30 (c), since it is a normal gaming state before shifting to the play time, the pre-play time / setting suggestion ball selection table shown in FIG. 16 (a) is referred to, and a lottery is performed based on the setting. Is selected by. As shown in FIGS. 30 (c) to 30 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the star-shaped setting suggestion ball moves from the upper left corner of the display screen toward the lower right. There is. The setting suggestion balls shown in FIGS. 30 (c) to 30 (e) are blue setting suggestion balls, and appear only at setting 4 or higher before the play time, suggesting that the setting is 4 or higher. It can be said that it has been done. The appearing setting suggestion ball is reflected in the display position of the first setting suggestion ball s11 in the setting suggestion ball display area 285, and the displayed first setting suggestion ball s11 to the third setting suggestion ball s13 are the first, respectively. The second setting suggestion ball s12 to the fourth setting suggestion ball s14 are displayed, and the displayed fourth setting suggestion ball s14 is erased. That is, the history of the setting suggestion balls up to the latest 4 times among the setting suggestion balls that have appeared is displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285. In this embodiment, it is in a non-electric support state and appears every 100 games after the big hit is completed. In addition, it may appear even in the electric support state. Further, the appearance condition of the setting suggestion ball is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and for example, an appearance lottery may be performed for each symbol variation display, and the setting suggestion ball may appear when the setting suggestion ball is won. It may be made to appear when a fluctuation pattern (for example, SP reach) is executed. In addition, points are added each time any of a plurality of types of game execution conditions (for example, winning a game ball to the first special figure start port 230, executing a reach effect, executing a notice effect, etc.) is satisfied, and points are added. The setting suggestion ball may appear every time the number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 200 points). In this case, for example, the points to be added may be different depending on the game execution condition (for example, 2 points are added when the first special figure start port 230 is won, and 10 points when the reach effect is executed. Is added, and 15 points are added when the notice effect is executed). Further, in the present embodiment, the appearance rate of each color of the setting suggestion ball is different between before the play time and after the play time, but it may be the same. After that, the symbol variation display ends at the timing shown in FIG. 30 (f), and the decorative symbol displayed in the center of the display screen is also the decorative symbol on the outskirts of "Decoration 6-Decoration 8-Decoration 3". The stop display is displayed in combination. In addition, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at "683" in accordance with this.

FIG. 31 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect including notification of shifting to play time centered on a decorative symbol display device. Even in FIG. 31, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the illustration of the general drawing hold lamp 216 is omitted.

The staging examples shown in FIGS. 31 (a1) to 31 (a4) show that a variation pattern without reach and without variation is executed without shortening the variation. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (a1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 31 (a1), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown to that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 31 (a1) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the holding number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 31 (a1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both displayed. , Is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (a1), the number of symbol variation display times (number of fits) after the transition to the normal gaming state after the end of the big hit is the 749th time, and the display of the symbol variation display number until the play time and the special prize. The display of the number of inter-starts is displayed as "one more time until the play time" and "START: 749th time", respectively. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

In FIG. 31 (a2), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of symbol variation display times (number of fits) after the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big hit reaches 750, the game shifts to the time-saving game until the symbol variation display is executed up to 950 times. It shifts to the play time (b time reduction state), but when it shifts from the symbol fluctuation display 10 times before the number of fits reaches 750 times to the play time precursor effect mode and shifts to the play time precursor effect mode, a predetermined look-ahead notice is given. And every time the symbol variation display is started, the countdown display of the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (a2), the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big hit is started, and in response to this, “0” indicating that the next symbol variation display shifts to the play time. Is displayed in the center of the display screen. In addition, the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "0 more times until the play time" and "START: 750th time", respectively.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (a3), it is shown that the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed. The display of "0" in the countdown has been erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31 (a4), when the fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds) of the variation pattern without reach without the variation shortening elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 4-decoration 5-”. It is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (a4), since the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big hit is completed, the game shifts to the play time, and the "play time rush !!" is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. Characters are displayed to notify that fact, and the display of the symbol variation display rotation speed up to the play time is switched to the display showing the number of remaining symbol variation display times of the play time, and "remaining play time: 950 times" is displayed. ..

The staging examples shown in FIGS. 31 (b1) to 31 (b4) show that a variation pattern without reach and with variation shortening is executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (b1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 31 (b1), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown to that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 31 (b1) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the holding number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 31 (b1), four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11, of these four special figures 1 are displayed. All of h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (b1), the number of symbol variation display times (number of fits) after the transition to the normal gaming state after the end of the big hit is the 749th time, and the display of the symbol variation display number until the play time and the special prize. The display of the number of inter-starts is displayed as "one more time until the play time" and "START: 749th time", respectively. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

In FIG. 31 (b2), the hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the variable icon display area 280. It moves and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes. The second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h14 becomes the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of symbol variation display times (number of fits) after the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big hit reaches 750, the game shifts to the time-saving game until the symbol variation display is executed up to 950 times. It shifts to the play time (b time reduction state), but when it shifts from the symbol fluctuation display 10 times before the number of fits reaches 750 times to the play time precursor effect mode and shifts to the play time precursor effect mode, a predetermined look-ahead notice is given. And every time the symbol variation display is started, the countdown display of the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (b2), the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big hit is started, and in response to this, “0” indicating that the next symbol variation display shifts to the play time. Is displayed in the center of the display screen. In addition, the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "0 more times until the play time" and "START: 750th time", respectively.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31 (b3), when the fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) of the variation pattern of the reachless deviation accompanied by the variation shortening elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration”. The combination of the decorative symbols of "1" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the out-of-order is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (b3), since the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big hit is completed, the game shifts to the play time, and the "play time rush !!" is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. Characters are displayed to notify that fact, and the display of the symbol variation display rotation speed up to the play time is switched to the display showing the number of remaining symbol variation display times of the play time, and "remaining play time: 950 times" is displayed. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to notify that the play time shifts to the play time at the end of the symbol variation display, the fluctuation time of the 750th symbol change display, which is a condition for shifting to the play time after the jackpot ends. Therefore, it can be said that the time from the start of the symbol variation display to the notification of the transition to the play time is different.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect including notification of shifting to play time centered on a decorative symbol display device. Even in FIG. 31, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the illustration of the general drawing hold lamp 216 is omitted.

The effect example shown in FIG. 32 shows that the fluctuation pattern of the SP reach deviation is executed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (b) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (a1) and 31 (a2), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, to enter the reach state. After that, as shown in FIGS. 32 (c) to 32 (e), the SP reach effect is started. Since the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 32 (c) to 32 (e) is the same as the effect shown in FIGS. 18 (l) to 19 (q), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (f), it is shown that the character of the lord is defeated and the decorative symbol sways and fluctuates due to the combination of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4". ing. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (g), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "Entering play time !!" are displayed on the display screen in a display mode in which the characters "Enter play time !!" are surrounded by a frame and tilted downward to the right. It is notified that the symbol variation display is changed to the play time. Here, for example, in the case of a predetermined setting (for example, setting 4 or more), as shown in FIG. 32 (g'), the characters "Entering play time !!" are surrounded by a frame and rise to the right. It may be displayed in a tilted display mode to notify that the play time has begun and to suggest a setting. In addition, in this embodiment, when the notification of the transition to the play time is executed, the effect of suggesting the setting may be included without fail. In this case, a plurality of types of notification modes may be prepared, and the content of the setting suggestion may differ depending on the type of the executed notification mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (h), the SP reach effect is shifted to the default background image, and at the timing shown in FIG. Confirm with. In addition, the characters "Entering play time !!" are continuously displayed until the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed. In this way, when the SP reach effect is executed, the notification mode of shifting to the play time is different. Even when the SP reach effect is performed, for example, the shift to the play time may be notified in the manner shown in FIG. 31 (a4).

The effect example shown in FIGS. 32 (f2) to 32 (i2) is an effect example following FIG. 32 (e), and is an effect example in which the number of times of the symbol variation display after the end of the big hit becomes the big hit at the 750th time. Is shown. In this case, since there is no shift to the play time, the effects shown in FIGS. 32 (f2) to (i2) are shown in FIGS. 19 (s) to 19 (v) and (w') to the same. The same effect as that shown in FIG. (Y') is performed, and the notification of the transition to the play time is not performed.

In the present embodiment, the notification of the transition to the play time is different depending on the fluctuation pattern of the symbol variation display that shifts to the play time, such as the time after the symbol variation display starts and the display mode. However, the notification mode may be different depending on other methods, and for example, the length for executing the notification of shifting to the play time may be different. In addition, in the symbol variation display that shifts to the play time, the play time shifts before the decorative symbol that is out of alignment is displayed, that is, before the player can recognize that the play time is out of alignment. It may be made to notify the fact.

Further, in this effect example, when the fluctuation pattern of the symbol variation display that shifts to the play time is a fluctuation pattern that shifts in the SP reach, when the notification of the shift to the play time is displayed. However, for example, when the SP reach that is out of order is executed, the notification of the shift to the play time is not performed, and the shift to the play time is performed in the first symbol variation display that shifts to the play time. It may be notified of the fact. As a result, it is recognized that the SP reach is off and the next fluctuation that is disappointing suddenly shifts to the play time, and the production can be sharpened, and the game may be lively.

In addition, for example, when a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected, such as the variation pattern of the symbol variation display that shifts to the play time is shifted in SP reach, the effect content is changed, and the pseudo-ream is lost. The content of the production may be replaced with the production of.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a look-ahead notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In addition, also in FIG. 33, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the illustration of the general drawing hold lamp 216 is omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 33A, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown to that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 33 (a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the holding number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 33A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both displayed. , Is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (a), the number of symbol variation display times (number of fits) after the transition to the normal gaming state after the end of the big hit is the 294th time, and the display of the symbol variation display number until the play time and the special prize. The display of the number of inter-starts is displayed as "456 times until the play time" and "START: 294th time", respectively. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

In FIG. 33 (b), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (b), one game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start opening 230, and the number of holdings is two. Further, in this winning, the result of pre-reading the jackpot random number value is a jackpot result, and the pre-reading result information command is output from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and as a result, Machiko is used as a pre-reading notice at the time of winning. The teacher's character is displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani as a hold notice. The character of Miss Machiko is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) and then erased. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 of the display mode of Sabohani is continuously displayed until the holdd symbol variation display is completed. In addition, since the number of fits increased by 1 to 295, the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed until the play time and the display of the number of starts between special prizes were "455 times until the play time" and "START: 295th", respectively. It is updated and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (c), it is shown that the symbol variation display is digested twice from the timing shown in FIG. 33 (b), and the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice is executed. Has been done. The variable icon h0 does not change from the one displayed in the display mode of the Sabohani at the time of winning the prize in the first special figure starting port 230. It should be noted that the display mode may change until the symbol variation display, which is the target of the pre-reading notice, is started. As a result, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation for a big hit. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (c), there are three hold icons of special figure 1, and three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1. In addition, the number of fits is 297, and the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed until the play time and the display of the number of starts between special prizes are updated and displayed as "453 more times until the play time" and "START: 297th", respectively. There is.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (d), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, indicating that the user has entered the reach state. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 33 (d) to 33 (h) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 33 (d) to 33 (h) are performed in the same manner as in FIGS. 18 (l) to 19 (s), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (i), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" for which the 10R probability variation jackpot is confirmed is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 33 (i) is stopped and displayed by "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "777".

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is shown that at least one of a plurality of types of pre-reading notices may be executed in the normal gaming state.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect including notification of shifting to play time centered on a decorative symbol display device. In addition, also in FIG. 34, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the illustration of the general drawing hold lamp 216 is omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 34 (a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown to that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 34 (a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the holding number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 34A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 is the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is suddenly pre-reading the time-saving symbol, the display mode is displayed with a blue circle, and the pre-reading notice is given. It is done.

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (a), the number of times the symbol variation is displayed (the number of fits) after the transition to the normal gaming state after the end of the big hit is the 748th time, and the display of the number of symbol variation display up to the play time and the special prize. The display of the number of inter-starts is displayed as "two more times until the play time" and "START: 748th time", respectively. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

In FIG. 34 (b), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of symbol variation display times (number of fits) after the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big hit reaches 750, the game shifts to the time-saving game until the symbol variation display is executed up to 950 times. It shifts to the play time (b time reduction state), but shifts from the symbol fluctuation display 10 times before the number of fits reaches 750 times to the play time precursor effect mode, shifts to the play time precursor effect mode, and ends with the play time. The countdown display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (b), the 749th symbol variation display after the end of the big hit is started, and in response to this, "1" indicating that the next symbol variation display shifts to the play time. Is displayed in the center of the display screen. In addition, the display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "one more time until the play time" and "START: 749th time", respectively. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (b), two or more game balls have won a prize in the first special drawing start port 230, and the holding of special drawing 1 is four. In addition, the fourth hold of the special figure 1 is a state in which the symbol variation display which becomes a big hit is held, and for convenience of explanation, the fourth hold icon h14 is hatched, but in the default display mode. It is displayed. This is because when the first hold of Special Figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol variation display ends, the play time shifts and the symbol variation display of Special Figure 2 is likely to start, so avoid this and aim for a big hit. Therefore, in order to prevent the inconvenience of stopping the launch, the hold notice is restricted. In this embodiment, when the mode shifts to the play time precursor effect mode, the implementation of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning shown in FIG. 34 (b) is restricted, but the hold notice is not restricted and can be implemented. The execution of the look-ahead notice regarding the symbol variation display that is suspended after the symbol variation display that triggers the change of the state is restricted.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In FIG. 34 (d), the hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the variable icon display area 280. Moved to become the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold. The icon h12 is used, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h14 becomes the third hold icon h13. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (d), since the number of symbol variation displays after the jackpot is completed is the 750th, the next symbol variation display is shifted to the play time. Therefore, "0" is displayed as a countdown display in the play time precursor effect mode, suggesting that the game shifts to the play time. "0 more times until play time" and "START: 750th time" are displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 3", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (e), since the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big hit is completed, the game shifts to the play time, and the lower center of the display screen shows "Play time rushes !!". Characters are displayed to notify that fact, and the display of the symbol variation display rotation speed up to the play time is switched to the display showing the number of remaining symbol variation display times of the play time, and "remaining play time: 950 times" is displayed. ..

In the present embodiment, the execution of the look-ahead notice is restricted for the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that is suspended after the symbol variation display that shifts to the play time, but the time-saving symbol is suddenly won. The execution of the pre-reading notice is also restricted for the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that is suspended after the symbol variation display is suspended. As a result, for example, after shifting to the electric support state, it may be possible to prevent the game from being impaired by being targeted by a big hit in Special Figure 1.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a look-ahead notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Also in FIG. 35, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the illustration of the general drawing hold lamp 216 is omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 35 (a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown to that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 35 (a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the holding number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 35A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both displayed. , Is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (a), the number of times the symbol variation is displayed (the number of fits) after the transition to the normal gaming state after the end of the big hit is the 739th time, and the display of the number of symbol variation display up to the play time and the special prize. The display of the number of inter-starts is displayed as "11 more times until the play time" and "START: 739th time", respectively. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

In FIG. 35 (b), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (b), the number of symbol fluctuation displays until the transition to the play time is 10 times remaining. Is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "10" indicating that the play time is started after 10 more symbol variation displays is displayed in the center of the display screen. In addition, the display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "10 more times until the play time" and "START: 740th time", respectively. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (b), one game ball has won a prize in the first special drawing start port 230, and the special drawing 1 has two reservations. Further, a look-ahead notice is given for the second hold of the special figure 1, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the display mode of the Sabohani. In the present embodiment, when the mode shifts to the play time precursor effect mode, the implementation of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning shown in FIG. 35 (b) is restricted, but the hold notice is not limited and can be implemented. That is, some of the plurality of types of pre-reading notices are restricted. It should be noted that the execution of all types of pre-reading notices may be restricted when the mode shifts to the play time precursor effect mode. Further, in the play time precursor effect mode, the pre-reading notice is not performed, but the setting suggestion may be performed. Further, when a certain notice (for example, a hold notice) that is allowed to be executed is performed in the play time precursor effect mode and a big hit is made, the game may shift to a probable change big hit with electric support. Further, for example, while the symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times (for example, 10 times, etc.), a certain kind of look-ahead notice may be executed. When the mode is changed to the effect mode, the read-ahead mode may not be changed. That is, when the number of times of the symbol variation display until the transition to the play time is 10 times remaining, the shift to the look-ahead mode may not be performed. The look-ahead mode may be performed while the symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, four times, etc.), and the look-ahead mode itself may function as a look-ahead notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (c), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (c), the 742th symbol variation display is being executed after the big hit is completed. That is, the mode shifts to the play time precursor effect mode, and the third symbol variation display is being executed. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "8" indicating that the play time is shifted to the play time after eight more symbol variation displays is displayed in the center of the display screen. In addition, the display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "8 more times until the play time" and "START: 742th time", respectively. Further, between the timing shown in FIG. 35 (b) and the timing shown in FIG. 35 (c), three or more game balls have won a prize in the first special figure starting port 230, and at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (c). , There are three reservations for Special Figure 1. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (c), the symbol variation display, which is the target of the pre-reading notice, is performed, and the variation icon h0 is the display mode of the Sabohani. After that, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is reached. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 35 (d) to 35 (i) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 33 (d) to 33 (i), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the production of a mini game executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In addition, also in FIG. 36, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the illustration of the general drawing hold lamp 216 is omitted. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (b) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 30 (a) to 30 (b), the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (c) shows that the first mini-game is started. When the first mini-game is started, an animation of pressing the effect button 136 is displayed in the center of the display screen along with the display of the characters "Repeat hit!", The remaining time meter is displayed below it, and the effect button 136 is displayed. Shows the operation acceptance period.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (d), it is shown that a second mini-game different from the first mini-game is started during the execution of the first mini-game. There is. The second mini-game is an Omikuji mini-game, and the display area of the second mini-game is displayed on the display screen, with the words "Press the button!" And "Lucky with Daikichi!", "Kokichi", "Nakayoshi", and "Nakayoshi". The items of "Daikichi" are displayed side by side, and by stopping and displaying the hand-shaped cursor whose display position changes at high speed at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated, either "Kokichi", "Nakayoshi", or "Daikichi" is displayed. Point to the item of. The second mini-game is a mini-game that suggests the degree of expectation for the result of the first mini-game in the order of "Daikichi", "Nakayoshi", and "Kokichi", that is, "Daikichi", "Nakayoshi", and "Kokichi". It can be said that expectations for big hits are high in the order of "Kokichi". In this production example, the second mini-game started after the first mini-game is a mini-game in which the result is displayed in preference to the first mini-game.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (e) and the cursor points to "Daikichi", in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (f), the items "Kokichi" and "Nakayoshi" are displayed. Is deleted and only the item of "Daikichi" is displayed, and the display of "Lucky with Daikichi!" Is switched to "Lucky! Strong cut-in!".

After that, when the second mini-game is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (g) shows that the first mini-game is restarted. Then, when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit by the player, the cut-in image is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (h). This cut-in image is a production in which the character of the lord is displayed up with a balloon of the characters "Game!", And in the cut-in image shown in FIG. 36 (h), many faces of the bancho are displayed in the balloon. It is a strong cut-in image made. In addition, a weak cut-in image of the display that does not include the face of the bancho may be displayed in the balloon, and it is final when the strong cut-in image is displayed than when the weak cut-in image is displayed. The jackpot design is easy to display. After that, when the strong cut-in image is erased, the effects shown in FIGS. 36 (i) to 36 (o) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 36 (i) to 19 (o) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 18 (l) to 19 (v) and 19 (w') to 19 (y'). Therefore, the description is omitted.

In the present embodiment, the mini-game may be played in the normal gaming state, but the mini-game is not played after the remaining 10 times of the symbol variation display until the play time is reached. The player may be focused on the transition to play time. That is, in the normal gaming state, there is a period in which a plurality of mini-games are executed in an overlapping manner, but after shifting to the above-mentioned play time precursor effect mode, the plurality of mini-games may not be executed in an overlapping manner.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a notice effect performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Also in FIG. 37, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the illustration of the general drawing hold lamp 216 is omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 37 (a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown to that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 37 (a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the holding number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 37A, four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11, of these four special figures 1 are displayed. Of h12, h13, and h14, the second hold icon h12 to the fourth hold icon h14 are all default display modes (round, non-patterned and white display mode), but the first hold icon. h11 is a display mode of Sabohani, and a hold notice (look-ahead notice) is given.

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (a), the number of times the symbol variation is displayed (the number of fits) after the transition to the normal gaming state after the end of the big hit is the 325th time, and the display of the number of symbol variation display up to the play time and the special prize. The display of the number of inter-starts is displayed as "426 times until the play time" and "START: 324 times", respectively. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

In FIG. 37 (b), the hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the variable icon display area 280. It moves and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes. The second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h14 becomes the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (b), the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the big hit is finished is the 325th time. "425 times until the time" and "START: 325th time" are updated and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), a notice display effect may be performed in which the display mode of the display of the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time changes for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). In this production example, the notice is given by changing the color of the display of the number of times the symbol changes are displayed until the play time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be changed in other modes, for example, the size. May change, the display position may be changed, or it may be erased for a predetermined time. In addition, a plurality of types of change modes may be prepared so that the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the change mode. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (c'), at least a part of the characters may be changed in the display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 37 (c'), the color of the display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time is also changed, but the color is not changed and only the characters are changed. good. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (c ″), a big hit notice may be given by changing the display mode of the start number display between special prizes. Here, the variation mode is not limited to that shown in FIG. 37 (c ″), and various variation modes as described above can be adopted. Further, depending on the mode of change, it may be suggested that the jackpot is rich or the probability variation jackpot is rich, and for example, it may be suggested that winning in the c time reduction is rich. Further, it goes without saying that the above-mentioned jackpot notice may be given even in the a time reduction state and the c time reduction state before the transition to the play time, and for example, the remaining symbol variation display in the c time reduction state shown in FIG. 26 (g). The jackpot notice may be given by applying the display of the number of times and the display of the number of times of the remaining symbol fluctuation display in the a time saving state shown in FIG. 23 (c). In this case, the execution mode of the big hit notice in the a time saving state or the c time saving state may be different from the execution mode of the big hit notice in the normal gaming state. Further, in this effect example, the big hit notice in the symbol variation display being executed has been described, but it may be executed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the above-mentioned jackpot notice is given and then the jackpot shifts to the jackpot, after the jackpot game for the jackpot is completed, the game is executed in the normal effect mode (default mode). Further, the above-mentioned jackpot notice effect may not be executed in the play time precursor effect mode. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 37 (d) to 37 (j) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 37 (d) to 37 (j) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 36 (i) to 36 (o), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, a hold notice is given as a look-ahead notice by displaying a hold icon, which is a display mode of Sabohani, but the look-ahead notice mode is not limited to this, and for example, a character appears for each symbol variation display. It may be a continuous notice in which a predetermined effect such as is executed, or it may be a look-ahead notice in which it is executed only once. Further, it is needless to say that a plurality of types of display modes of the hold notice can be displayed, and the degree of expectation of the jackpot may differ depending on the displayed mode.

Further, in this effect example, an example of executing the game before shifting to the play time is shown, but at least one of the above-mentioned big hit notice effect and the look-ahead notice may not be executed during the play time, or the big hit may be executed. Both the advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice may be executed.

Further, in this effect example, it may be executed before the play time when the display of the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time is displayed, and may not be executed after the play time ends, or after the play time ends. A big hit notice may be given by changing the display mode of the start number display between special prizes.

In the embodiment described above, the display of the number of times of symbol variation display up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but a display device different from the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example). , Sub-display device, etc.) may be provided, and the display of the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes may be displayed on this display device.

In the above description,
"Character display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means that can control the game state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
A notification means capable of executing a plurality of notifications [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of controlling a low probability state [for example, a special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [for example, a special figure high probability state, etc.].
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state), etc.].
The second time saving state is the number of times (hereinafter, "" It is a time-saving state that may shift when the number of times of fitting (referred to as) becomes the first number of times [for example, 750 times].
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time is displayed. The time saving state is over,
From the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, the second time saving state is not started [for example, after shifting to the play time and the play time ends, the big hit is achieved. Will not shift to play time again, etc.],
One of the plurality of notifications is the first notification [for example, the play time information display shown in FIG. 21B].
The first notification is a notification recognizable about the execution status of the second time saving state [for example, as shown in FIG. 21B, whether or not the play time is executed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Information indicating whether or not, and information indicating the number of times the symbol change is displayed after the big hit is displayed],
The notification means is a means capable of executing the first notification in relation to the power being turned on [for example, as shown in FIGS. 21A to 21B, the power is turned on. Then, the play time information display is displayed, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the notification means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the notification means.

Further, according to this game table, the clerk of the game field may be able to determine whether or not to initialize by referring to the information of the notification regarding the second time saving state.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing display other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling a state other than the game state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the notification means may be capable of executing only a plurality of notifications, or may be capable of executing notifications other than a plurality of notifications. Further, the notification means may be one that always executes a plurality of notifications, or may not execute a plurality of notifications.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may be controllable to a state other than the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not be controlled to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low probability state, or the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a jackpot than the low probability state. It may be in a state where the probability other than the probability of becoming is high. In addition, the high-probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit is always higher than that in the low-probability state, and the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a jackpot than the low-probability state. It may not be in a state where the probability of becoming is high.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may be one that always starts the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

In addition, in the second time saving state, only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state is the first. It may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of order is displayed continuously without becoming a jackpot. It may be the one that may shift when the number of times other than the number of times becomes the first number of times. In addition, after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit is always changed to the first number. It may be there, or it will shift when the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is displayed is the first number of times without becoming a big hit after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may not be the one that may not be.

In addition, even if only the second time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the state other than the second time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

Further, it is not necessary to start only the second time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, or from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. It is not necessary to start a state other than the second time saving state. Further, it is not always necessary to start the second time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. A second time saving condition may be initiated.

Further, it is not necessary to start the second time saving state only from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and other than from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. Also, the second time saving state does not have to be started.

Further, the first notification may be recognizable only for the execution status of the second time saving state, or may be recognizable for situations other than the execution status of the second time saving state. May be good. Further, the first notification may be such that the execution status of the second time saving state is always recognized, or may not be recognized about the execution status of the second time saving state.

Further, the notification means may be capable of executing only the first notification in relation to the power being turned on, or the notification other than the first notification in relation to the power being turned on. May also be feasible. Further, the notification means may always execute the first notification in connection with the power being turned on, or may not execute the first notification in relation to the power being turned on. It may be something that has.

Further, "The first notification is at least recognizable notification before the start of the second time reduction state and after the end of the second time reduction state [for example, FIG. As shown in 21 (b) and FIG. 21 (b'), information indicating whether or not the play time has been executed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the clerk at the game hall may be able to take various actions depending on the situation when the power is turned on. For example, after the second time saving state is completed, the player can feel at ease by initializing it. While it is possible to create a situation in which the player can play, the second time saving state is not executed until the big hit by not initializing it, which is disadvantageous to the player but may contribute to sales. Further, for example, during the execution of the second time saving state, it is possible to prevent the player from suddenly starting in a state advantageous to the player by initializing it, and it is possible to maintain fairness, but by not initializing it, it is possible to maintain fairness. In some cases, it may be possible to provide the player with a service immediately after the store opens. Further, for example, before the execution of the second time saving state, the symbol variation display can increase the fit up to the predetermined rotation speed by initializing, while the predetermined rotation of the symbol variation display can be increased by not initializing. It may be possible to reduce the fit up to the number by the number of revolutions for the previous day.

Here, the first notification may be recognizable only before the start of the second time saving state and after the end of the second time saving state, or the second. It may be recognizable other than before the time saving state of is started and after the second time saving state is finished. Further, the first notification may be at least surely made to recognize that it is before the start of the second time saving state and after the end of the second time saving state, and the second notification may be made. It may be at least unaware that it is before the start of the time saving state and after the end of the second time saving state.

Further, "The first notification is a notification that may include information on the number of times of fitting before the power is cut off [for example, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 is used. , Information indicating the number of times the symbol variation is displayed (number of fits) after the end of the big hit before the power is turned off is displayed],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first notification may include only information on the number of fits before the power is turned off, or information other than the information on the number of fits before the power is turned off. May also be included. Further, the first notification may always include information on the number of fits before the power is turned off, or may not include information on the number of fits before the power is turned off. There may be.

Further, when "after the first notification is executed, the first condition [for example, the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 21 (c)" is satisfied, the first notification is sent. End [For example, as shown in FIG. 21 (c), when the effect button 136 is operated after the play time information is displayed, the play time information is deleted, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, if the first condition is satisfied after the first notification is executed, only the first notification may be terminated, or after the first notification is executed, the first condition is satisfied. Then, the notification other than the first notification may be terminated. Further, if the first condition is satisfied after the first notification is executed, the first notification may always end, or if the first condition is satisfied after the first notification is executed. , The first notification may not be completed.

Further, after the first notification is executed, the first notification may be terminated only when the first condition is satisfied, and after the first notification is executed, other than the first condition. Even if the condition of is satisfied, the first notification may be terminated. Further, if the first condition is satisfied only after the first notification is executed, the first notification may be terminated, and the first condition may be terminated other than after the first notification is executed. If is satisfied, the first notification may be terminated.

Further, "the notification of one of the plurality of notifications is the second notification [for example, the display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time shown in FIG. 18 (a)].
The second notification is different from the first notification, and is different from the first notification.
The second notification is a notification of information regarding the second time saving state to the player [for example, as shown in FIG. 18A, information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is notified. etc],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player may be able to select a game table to play with reference to the information of the second notification.

Here, the second notification may be notification of only the information regarding the second time saving state to the player, or may be notification including information other than the information regarding the second time saving state to the player. good. Further, the second notification may be a notification that always includes information on the second time saving state for the player, or may be a notification that may not include information on the second time saving state for the player. good.

The second notification may be completely different from the first notification, or may be partially different from the first notification.

Further, "The second notification is a notification including information that at least suggests the number of times of fitting [for example, as shown in FIG. 18A, information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time is notified. Etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second notification may be a notification including information suggesting only the number of fits, or a notification including information suggesting other than the number of fits. Further, the second notification may be a notification including information that at least always suggests the number of fits, or may be a notification that may not include information that suggests the number of fits.

Further, "The second notification is a notification including information that at least suggests the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, in FIG. 18 (a). As shown, information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS) has been notified, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Here, the second notification may be a notification including at least information suggesting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the number of fittings becomes the first number, or the number of fittings is the first number. The notification may include information other than information that at least suggests the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until it becomes. Further, the second notification may be a notification that always includes information that at least suggests the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the number of fittings becomes the first number, and the number of fittings is the first number. It may be a notification that may not include at least information suggesting the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until it becomes.

Further, "The second notification is a notification that can take one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is not clearly displayed]. can be,
One of the plurality of embodiments is the second embodiment [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is clearly displayed, etc.]. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
The second notification may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on [for example, as shown in FIG. 21D, after the power is turned on, the symbol variation display until the play time is displayed. Information about the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
When the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. 22, the off-limit SP reach is executed, etc.] is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the second condition is satisfied. The notification changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (g) to 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is unclear. When the out-of-SP reach is executed in the state shown in the embodiment, the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear embodiment, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, until the second condition is satisfied, the player may be able to play the game while paying attention to the player by obscuring the information regarding the second time saving state.

Here, the second notification may be capable of taking only one aspect of the plurality of aspects, or may be capable of taking an aspect other than one of the plurality of aspects. It may be anything. In addition, the second notification may always take one of a plurality of aspects, or may not take one of a plurality of aspects.

Further, only the second notification may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the notification other than the second notification may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second notification may always be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second notification may not be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be good.

Further, the second notification may be executed only in the first mode after the power is turned on, or the second notification may be executed in a mode other than the first mode after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second notification may be executed in the first mode only after the power is turned on, and the second notification may be executed in the first mode even after the power is turned on. May be done.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the second notification may be changed only from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the second notification may be changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the second notification may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect without fail. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the second notification may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, only the second notification may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the notification other than the second notification may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Further, if only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the second notification may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If a condition other than the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the second notification may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the second notification may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied except after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the second notification may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started only in the first aspect, the second notification may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the first aspect may be changed. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the aspect other than the first aspect, the second notification may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "the game control means has a first time saving state [for example, an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time saving state) that shifts after the big hit game for a normal big hit is completed]. It ’s a startable means,
The first time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the first time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the first time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

Further, the first time saving state may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the big hit game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. Further, the first time saving state may be always started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may be a thing.

Further, "the game control means can start a third time saving state [for example, an electric support state in which a time saving symbol is suddenly displayed and transitions (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time saving state)]. Means,
The third time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when a time saving symbol [for example, "special symbol E" etc.] is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol.
The time saving symbol is a symbol different from the jackpot symbol,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the third time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the third time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the third time saving state, or may not start the third time saving state.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may be started in a case other than the case where is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be started whenever the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol is displayed as the result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may not be started.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Character display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means capable of controlling a game state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of controlling a low probability state [for example, a special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [for example, a special figure high probability state, etc.].
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state), etc.].
The game control means is a means capable of starting a third time saving state [for example, an electric support state in which a time saving symbol is suddenly displayed and transitions (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time saving state), etc.]. ,
In the second time saving state, the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of order is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter, "fitting"). When the number of times (referred to as "number of times") becomes the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.], it is a time-saving state that may shift.
The third time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when a time saving symbol [for example, "special figure E" etc.] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol.
The time-saving symbol is a symbol different from the jackpot symbol.
In the second time saving state, the third time saving state is not started [For example, in the play time, the game is played by right-handed hitting, so that the normal game ball wins in the first special figure starting port 230 during right-handed hitting. Therefore, "Special Figure E", which is displayed only in Special Figure 1, is not displayed, and therefore the c time saving state is not started, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the game control means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the game control means.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing display other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling a state other than the game state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may be controllable to a state other than the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not be controlled to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low probability state, or the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a jackpot than the low probability state. It may be in a state where the probability other than the probability of becoming is high. In addition, the high-probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit is always higher than that in the low-probability state, and the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a jackpot than the low-probability state. It may not be in a state where the probability of becoming is high.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may be one that always starts the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the third time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the third time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the third time saving state, or may not start the third time saving state.

In addition, in the second time saving state, only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state is the first. It may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of order is displayed continuously without becoming a jackpot. It may be the one that may shift when the number of times other than the number of times becomes the first number of times. In addition, after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit is always changed to the first number. It may be there, or it will shift when the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is displayed is the first number of times without becoming a big hit after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may be started in cases other than the case where is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be started whenever the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol as the result of the variation display of the special symbol is displayed. May not be started.

Further, only the third time saving state may not be started in the second time saving state, and the state other than the third time saving state may not be started in the second time saving state. Further, the third time saving state may not always be started in the second time saving state, or the third time saving state may be started in the second time saving state.

In addition, "when the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the second time is displayed. The second time saving state is over,
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the third number of times [for example, 30 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the third time reduction state, the third time reduction state is displayed. The state is over,
Of the second number and the third number, the third number is smaller.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, even if only the second time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the state other than the second time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

In addition, even if only the third time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started. Well, after the third time saving state is started, the state other than the third time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the third time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started. Well, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started, the third time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the third time saving state ends, if only the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started. Well, after the third time saving state is started, the third time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

In addition, "the game control means has a first time saving state [for example, an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time saving state) that shifts after the big hit game for a normal big hit is completed]. It ’s a startable means,
The first time-saving state is a time-saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low-probability state.
The number of fittings is the number of times including the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol is displayed after the first time saving state is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 23, in the time saving state. The number of starts between special prizes is updated and displayed, etc.],
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times [for example, 100 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time reduction state is started, the first time reduction state is displayed. The state is over,
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time reduction state is started, the second time reduction state is displayed. The state is over,
Of the second number and the fourth number, the second number is the larger number.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since it is counted in the number of times of fitting even during the execution of the first time saving state, the player may be able to position it as a happy function. On the other hand, since the second time saving state is not started during the execution of the first time saving state, it may be possible to prevent the player from becoming too advantageous.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the first time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the first time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

Further, the first time saving state may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the big hit game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. Further, the first time saving state may be always started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may be a thing.

Further, the number of times of fitting may be only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol is displayed after the first time saving state is started, or after the first time saving state is started. The number of times other than the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed may be included. Further, the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol after the start of the first time saving state is always included may be included, or the special time after the first time saving state is started. The number of times that the result of the variable display of the symbol is displayed may not be included.

In addition, even if only the first time saving state ends when the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, after the first time saving state is started, the state other than the first time saving state ends when the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the first time saving state is always terminated when the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the fourth number of misses is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the first time saving state ends, if only the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the fourth number of misses is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

In addition, even if only the second time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the state other than the second time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

Further, "the symbol display means is a means including a first symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212 or the like] and a second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214 or the like]. can be,
The variable display of the special symbol by the second symbol display means (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variable display”) is the variable display of the special symbol by the first symbol display means (hereinafter, “first symbol”). It is a symbol variation display that can be executed with priority over "variation display".
As a result of executing the first symbol variation display, the time-saving symbol [for example, "special symbol E" etc.] may be displayed.
The time saving symbol may not be displayed as a result of executing the second symbol variation display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the symbol display means may include only the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, and the symbol display means other than the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means may also be included. It may be included. Further, the symbol display means may always include the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, or may not include the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means. It may be a thing.

Further, the second symbol variation display may be executed with priority over only the first symbol variation display, or may be executed with priority over the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. It may be possible. Further, the second symbol variation display may always be executed with priority over the first symbol variation display, or may not be executed with priority over the first symbol variation display. There may be.

Further, only the time-saving symbol may be displayed as a result of executing the first symbol variation display, or symbols other than the time-saving symbol may be displayed as a result of executing the first symbol variation display. There may be cases. Further, the time-saving symbol may always be displayed as a result of executing the first symbol variation display, or the time-saving symbol may not be displayed as a result of executing the first symbol variation display.

Further, the time saving symbol may be displayed only as a result of executing the first symbol variation display, or the time saving symbol may be displayed as a result other than the result of executing the first symbol variation display. There may be cases.

Further, it is not necessary that only the time-saving symbol is displayed as a result of executing the second symbol variation display, and as a result of executing the second symbol variation display, symbols other than the time-saving symbol are also displayed. It does not have to be the case. Further, the time saving symbol may not always be displayed as a result of executing the second symbol variation display, or the time saving symbol may be displayed as a result of executing the second symbol variation display. ..

Further, the time saving symbol may not be displayed only as a result of executing the second symbol variation display, and the time saving symbol is displayed as a result other than the result of executing the second symbol variation display. It does not have to be the case.

In addition, "after the second time saving state is started and the second time saving state is completed without a big hit, the game shifts to a normal gaming state [for example, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, etc.]. ,
From the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, the second time saving state is not started.
From the end of the second time reduction state to the big hit, the third time reduction state may be started [for example, even after the play time is over, "Special Figure E" is displayed in Special Figure 1. When it is displayed, it shifts to the c time saving state, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the second time saving state is started and the second time saving state ends without becoming a big hit, it may shift only to the normal gaming state, or the second time saving state is started and the big hit. After the second time saving state is completed without the above, the game state may be changed to a game state other than the normal game state. In addition, after the second time saving state is started and the second time saving state is completed without becoming a big hit, it may always shift to the normal gaming state, or the second time saving state is started and the big hit. After the second time saving state is completed without becoming, the normal gaming state may not be entered.

Further, the normal gaming state may be entered only after the second time saving state is started and the second time saving state is completed without becoming a big hit, or the second time saving state is started and the big hit. It is also possible to shift to the normal gaming state even after the second time saving state is completed without becoming. Further, only the second time saving state is started, and after the second time saving state is completed without becoming a big hit, the normal gaming state may be started, or the gaming state other than the second time saving state is started. After the second time saving state is completed without becoming a big hit, the normal gaming state may be entered.

Further, it is not necessary to start only the second time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, or from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. It is not necessary to start a gaming state other than the second time saving state. Further, it is not always necessary to start the second time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. A second time saving condition may be initiated.

Further, it is not necessary to start the second time saving state only from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and other than from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. Also, the second time saving state does not have to be started.

Further, from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, only the third time saving state may be started, or from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. A gaming state other than the third time saving state may be started. Further, the third time saving state may be always started from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, or the third time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. The state may not start.

In addition, the third time saving state may be started only from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, or from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. In addition, a third time saving state may be started.

In addition, "the third time saving state may be started before the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, as shown in FIG. 27, the c time saving state is set before shifting to the play time. May be migrated, etc.],
In the third time saving state, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, the second time saving state starts [for example, as shown in FIG. 27, the symbol variation display after the end of the jackpot in the c time saving state. When is executed 750 times, it shifts to play time, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the third time saving state may be started before the number of fittings becomes the first number, or other than the third time saving state before the number of fittings becomes the first number. The gaming state may be started. In addition, the third time saving state may always be started before the number of fittings becomes the first number, and the third time saving state may not be started before the number of fittings becomes the first number. May be good.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only before the number of fittings becomes the first number, and the third time saving state may be started other than before the number of fittings becomes the first number. It may be started.

In addition, "a staging means capable of executing a plurality of staging [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided.
One of the plurality of effects is the second effect.
The second effect is an effect that at least suggests information about the second time saving state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the staging means may be one that can execute only a plurality of staging, or may be one that can execute a staging other than the plurality of staging. Further, the staging means may be one that always executes a plurality of staging, or may not perform a plurality of staging.

Further, the second effect may suggest only the information regarding the second time saving state, or may suggest information other than the information regarding the second time saving state. Further, the second effect may always suggest information about the second time saving state, or may not suggest information about the second time saving state.

Further, "the second effect is an effect including at least information suggesting the number of fits [for example, information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS) as shown in FIG. 18 (a)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of fits, or may include information other than the information suggesting the number of fits. Further, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of fits, or may not include information suggesting the number of fits.

Further, "The second effect is information that at least suggests the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, as shown in FIG. 18A, play time. Information on the number of times the symbol changes are displayed up to]]
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the number of fittings becomes the first number, or the number of fittings becomes the first number. It may include information other than the information suggesting the number of times of variation display of the special symbol up to. Further, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of fittings becomes the first number, and the number of fittings becomes the first number. It may not include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol up to.

Further, "The second effect is an effect that can be performed in one of a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is not clearly displayed]. can be,
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (m), information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is clearly displayed, etc.]. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
The second effect may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on [for example, as shown in FIG. 21D, after the power is turned on, the symbol variation display until the play time is displayed. Information about the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
When the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. 22, the off-target SP reach is executed, etc.] is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second condition is satisfied. The effect of the above changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (g) to 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is unclear. When the out-of-SP reach is executed in the state shown in the embodiment, the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear embodiment, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be feasible only in one of a plurality of aspects, or may be feasible in a mode other than one of the plurality of aspects. You may. Further, the second effect may be always executed in one of a plurality of embodiments, or may not be executed in one of a plurality of embodiments. ..

Further, only the second effect may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the notification other than the second effect in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may always be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may not be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be good.

Further, the second effect may be executed only in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in an aspect other than the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may be executed in the first aspect only after the power is turned on, and the second effect may be executed in the first aspect other than after the power is turned on. May be done.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed only from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect without fail. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, only the second effect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the effects other than the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Further, if only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If a condition other than the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied except after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started only in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the first aspect may be changed. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in an aspect other than the above aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Character display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means capable of controlling a game state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of controlling a low probability state [for example, a special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [for example, a special figure high probability state, etc.].
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state), etc.].
The game control means is a means capable of starting a third time saving state [for example, an electric support state in which a time saving symbol is suddenly displayed and transitions (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time saving state), etc.]. ,
The game control means is a means capable of starting a normal game state [for example, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, etc.].
In the second time saving state, the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the outlier is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter, "fitting"). When the number of times (referred to as "number of times") becomes the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.], it is a time-saving state that may shift.
The third time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when a time saving symbol [for example, "special figure E" etc.] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol.
The time-saving symbol is a symbol different from the jackpot symbol.
The normal gaming state is a gaming state that is the low probability state and is a non-electric support state.
In the normal gaming state, when the number of fittings becomes the first number and the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol (hereinafter, "the first case [for example, in FIG. 28]. As shown, when the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the big hit is the transition condition of the play time, the time-saving symbol is suddenly displayed at the 750th rotation, etc.] ".
In the first case, the third time saving state is not started, and the second time saving state is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 (f) to (g), in the idle time. If the symbol change display that satisfies the transition condition is suddenly stopped and displayed with a time-saving symbol, c does not shift to the time-saving state, but shifts to play time, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the game control means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the game control means.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing display other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling a state other than the game state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may be controllable to a state other than the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not be controlled to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low probability state, or the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a jackpot than the low probability state. It may be in a state where the probability other than the probability of becoming is high. In addition, the high-probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit is always higher than that in the low-probability state, and the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a jackpot than the low-probability state. It may not be in a state where the probability of becoming is high.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may be one that always starts the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the third time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the third time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the third time saving state, or may not start the third time saving state.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only a normal game state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the normal game state. Further, the game control means may be one that always starts the normal game state, or may not start the normal game state.

In addition, in the second time saving state, only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state is the first. It may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of order is displayed continuously without becoming a jackpot. It may be the one that may shift when the number of times other than the number of times becomes the first number of times. In addition, after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit is always changed to the first number. It may be there, or it will shift when the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is displayed is the first number of times without becoming a big hit after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may be started in cases other than the case where is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be started whenever the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol as the result of the variation display of the special symbol is displayed. May not be started.

Further, in the normal gaming state, the number of fittings may be the first number, and as a result of the variable display of the special symbol, only the time-saving symbol may be displayed, or in the normal gaming state, the number of fittings may be the number of fittings. It may be the first number of times, and as a result of the variable display of the special symbol, a symbol other than the time-saving symbol may be displayed. Further, in the normal gaming state, the number of fittings may be the first number, and the time-saving symbol may always be displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol, and in the normal gaming state, the number of fittings is the first number. In addition, the time saving symbol may not be displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, only in the normal gaming state, the number of fittings may be the first number, and the time-saving symbol may be displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol, or in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state. However, the number of fittings may be the first number, and the time-saving symbol may be displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, in the first case, the third time saving state may not be started and only the second time saving state may be started, and in the first case, the third time saving state may not be started and the second time saving state may be started. A gaming state other than the time saving state of may be started. Further, in the first case, the third time saving state may not be started and the second time saving state may be started without fail, and in the first case, the third time saving state is not started and the second time saving state is not started. The time saving state of may not be started.

Further, in the first case, only the third time saving state may not be started, and the second time saving state may be started, and in the first case, the gaming state other than the third time saving state is started. Instead, the second time saving state may be started. Further, only in the first case, the third time saving state may not be started and the second time saving state may be started, and in cases other than the first case, the third time saving state is not started. , The second time saving state may be started.

In addition, "when the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the second time is displayed. The second time saving state is over,
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the third number of times [for example, 30 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the third time reduction state, the third time reduction state is displayed. The state is over,
Of the second number and the third number, the third number is smaller.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, even if only the second time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the state other than the second time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

In addition, even if only the third time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started. Well, after the third time saving state is started, the state other than the third time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the third time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started. Well, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started, the third time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the third time saving state ends, if only the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started. Well, after the third time saving state is started, the third time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

In addition, "in the third time saving state, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, the third time saving state shifts to the second time saving state [for example, FIGS. 27 (i) to 27 (i). As shown in the figure (l), the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the big hit is completed in the c time saving state shifts to the play time when the symbol variation display is executed for the 750th time],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed in the electric support state increases, so that the interest of the game may be improved.

Here, in the third time saving state, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number, the transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state may be performed, or in the third time saving state, the fitting may be performed. When the number of times becomes the first number, the game state other than the second time saving state may be changed from the third time saving state. Further, in the third time saving state, when the number of fittings becomes the first number, the transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state may be made without fail, and in the third time saving state, the number of fittings may be performed. May not shift from the third time saving state to the second time saving state when the first number of times is reached.

Further, in the third time saving state, the transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state may be performed only when the number of fittings becomes the first number of times, and in the third time saving state, the number of fittings may be changed. In cases other than the case where is the first number of times, the third time saving state may be changed to the second time saving state. Further, only in the third time saving state, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, the third time saving state may be changed to the second time saving state, or the gaming state other than the third time saving state may be changed. Also, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number, the third time saving state may be changed to the second time saving state.

In addition, "In the second time saving state, the second time saving state does not shift to the third time saving state. Since the normal game ball is not won in the starting port 230 in the figure, the "special figure E" displayed only in the special figure 1 is not displayed, and therefore the c time saving state is not started, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there is a case that there is no disadvantage due to the downgrade of the game state.

Here, in the second time saving state, it is not necessary to shift only from the second time saving state to the third time saving state, and in the second time saving state, other than the second time saving state to the third time saving state. It is not necessary to shift to the game state of. Further, in the second time saving state, it is not always necessary to shift from the second time saving state to the third time saving state, and in the second time saving state, the transition from the second time saving state to the third time saving state is performed. May be done.

Further, it is not necessary to shift from the second time saving state to the third time saving state only in the second time saving state, and even in the gaming state other than the second time saving state, the second time saving state is changed to the third. It is not necessary to shift to the time saving state of.

Further, "In the third time saving state, the third time saving state is not restarted. [For example, in the c time saving state, the game is played by right-handed hitting, so that the first special drawing start port 230 is used during right-handed hitting. Since the normal game ball does not win a prize, the "special figure E" displayed only in the special figure 1 is not displayed, and therefore, the c time saving state is not started again in the c time saving state, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the third time saving state, only the third time saving state may not be restarted, and in the third time saving state, the gaming state other than the third time saving state may not be restarted. .. Further, in the third time saving state, the third time saving state may not always be restarted, and in the third time saving state, the third time saving state may be restarted.

Further, the third time saving state may not be restarted only in the third time saving state, and the third time saving state may not be restarted even in the gaming state other than the third time saving state. ..

In addition, "the game control means has a first time saving state [for example, an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time saving state) that shifts after the big hit game for a normal big hit is completed]. It ’s a startable means,
The first time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state.
The number of fittings is the number of times including the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol is displayed after the first time saving state is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 23, in the time saving state. The number of starts between special prizes is updated and displayed, etc.],
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times [for example, 100 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time reduction state is started, the first time reduction state is displayed. The state is over,
Of the first number and the fourth number, the fourth number is smaller.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the first time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the first time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

Further, the first time saving state may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the big hit game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. Further, the first time saving state may be always started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may be a thing.

Further, the number of times of fitting may be only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol is displayed after the first time saving state is started, or after the first time saving state is started. The number of times other than the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed may be included. Further, the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol after the start of the first time saving state is always included may be included, or the special time after the first time saving state is started. The number of times that the result of the variable display of the symbol is displayed may not be included.

In addition, even if only the first time saving state ends when the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, after the first time saving state is started, the state other than the first time saving state ends when the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the first time saving state is always terminated when the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the fourth number of misses is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the first time saving state ends, if only the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the fourth number of misses is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

In addition, "a staging means capable of executing a plurality of staging [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided.
One of the plurality of effects is the second effect.
The second effect is an effect that at least suggests information about the second time saving state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the staging means may be one that can execute only a plurality of staging, or may be one that can execute a staging other than the plurality of staging. Further, the staging means may be one that always executes a plurality of staging, or may not perform a plurality of staging.

Further, the second effect may suggest only the information regarding the second time saving state, or may suggest information other than the information regarding the second time saving state. Further, the second effect may always suggest information about the second time saving state, or may not suggest information about the second time saving state.

Further, "the second effect is an effect including at least information suggesting the number of fits [for example, information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS) as shown in FIG. 18 (a)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of fits, or may include information other than the information suggesting the number of fits. Further, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of fits, or may not include information suggesting the number of fits.

Further, "The second effect is information that at least suggests the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, as shown in FIG. 18A, play time. Information on the number of times the symbol changes are displayed up to]]
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the number of fittings becomes the first number, or the number of fittings becomes the first number. It may include information other than the information suggesting the number of times of variation display of the special symbol up to. Further, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of fittings becomes the first number, and the number of fittings becomes the first number. It may not include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol up to.

Further, "The second effect is an effect that can be performed in one of a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is not clearly displayed]. can be,
One of the plurality of embodiments is the second embodiment [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is clearly displayed, etc.]. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
The second effect may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on [for example, as shown in FIG. 21D, after the power is turned on, the symbol variation display until the play time is displayed. Information about the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
When the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. 22, the off-target SP reach is executed, etc.] is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second condition is satisfied. The effect of the above changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (g) to 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is unclear. When the out-of-SP reach is executed in the state shown in the embodiment, the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear embodiment, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be feasible only in one of a plurality of aspects, or may be feasible in a mode other than one of the plurality of aspects. You may. Further, the second effect may be always executed in one of a plurality of embodiments, or may not be executed in one of a plurality of embodiments. ..

Further, only the second effect may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the notification other than the second effect in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may always be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may not be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be good.

Further, the second effect may be executed only in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in an aspect other than the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may be executed in the first aspect only after the power is turned on, and the second effect may be executed in the first aspect other than after the power is turned on. May be done.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed only from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect without fail. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, only the second effect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the effects other than the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Further, if only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If a condition other than the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied except after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started only in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the first aspect may be changed. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in an aspect other than the above aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Character display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means that can control the game state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of controlling a low probability state [for example, a special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [for example, a special figure high probability state, etc.].
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state), etc.].
The game control means is a means capable of starting a third time saving state [for example, an electric support state in which a time saving symbol is suddenly displayed and transitions (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time saving state), etc.]. ,
In the second time saving state, the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the outlier is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter, "fitting"). When the number of times (referred to as "number of times") becomes the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.], it is a time-saving state that may shift.
The third time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when a time saving symbol [for example, "special figure E" etc.] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol.
The time-saving symbol is a symbol different from the jackpot symbol.
In the third time saving state, the third time saving state may shift to the second time saving state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 27 (i) to 27 (l), a big hit in the c time saving state. The number of times the symbol variation display has been completed since the end of is 750th, and when the symbol variation display is executed, the play time shifts to play time, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the game control means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the game control means.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing display other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling a state other than the game state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may be controllable to a state other than the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not be controlled to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low probability state, or the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a jackpot than the low probability state. It may be in a state where the probability other than the probability of becoming is high. In addition, the high-probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit is always higher than that in the low-probability state, and the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a jackpot than the low-probability state. It may not be in a state where the probability of becoming is high.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may be one that always starts the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the third time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the third time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the third time saving state, or may not start the third time saving state.

In addition, in the second time saving state, only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state is the first. It may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of order is displayed continuously without becoming a jackpot. It may be the one that may shift when the number of times other than the number of times becomes the first number of times. In addition, after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit is always changed to the first number. It may be there, or it will shift when the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is displayed is the first number of times without becoming a big hit after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may be started in cases other than the case where is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be started whenever the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol as the result of the variation display of the special symbol is displayed. May not be started.

Further, in the third time saving state, there may be a case where only the third time saving state is changed to the second time saving state, and in the third time saving state, the third time saving state is other than the second time saving state. It may also shift to the gaming state. Further, in the third time saving state, the third time saving state may be surely changed to the second time saving state, and in the third time saving state, the third time saving state may not be changed to the second time saving state. There may be.

Further, in the third time saving state, there may be a case where only the third time saving state is changed to the second time saving state, and in the third time saving state, the gaming state other than the third time saving state is changed to the second time saving state. It may shift to a time saving state. Further, there may be a case where the third time saving state is changed to the second time saving state only in the third time saving state, and the third time saving state is changed to the second in the gaming state other than the third time saving state. It may shift to the time saving state of.

In addition, "the number of fittings is the number of times including the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol after the start of the third time saving state is displayed [for example, FIGS. 26 (f) to FIG. As shown in (k), the number of start times between special prizes is updated and displayed even in the c time saving state],
When the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times in the third time saving state, the transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state [for example, FIGS. 27 (i) to 27 (l). ), The number of symbol variation displays since the end of the jackpot in the c time saving state shifts to play time when the 750th symbol variation display is executed, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed in the electric support state increases, so that the interest of the game may be improved.

Here, the number of fits may be only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol is displayed after the third time saving state is started, or after the third time saving state is started. The number of times other than the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol of is displayed may be included. Further, the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol after the start of the third time reduction state is always included may be included, or the special time after the start of the third time reduction state may be included. The number of times that the result of the variable display of the symbol is displayed may not be included.

Further, in the third time saving state, when the number of fittings becomes the first number, the transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state may be performed, or in the third time saving state, the number of fittings may be performed. When becomes the first number of times, the game state may be changed from the third time saving state to the gaming state other than the second time saving state. Further, in the third time saving state, when the number of fittings becomes the first number, the transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state may be made without fail, and in the third time saving state, the number of fittings may be performed. May not shift from the third time saving state to the second time saving state when the first number of times is reached.

Further, in the third time saving state, the transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state may be performed only when the number of fittings becomes the first number of times, and in the third time saving state, the number of fittings may be changed. In cases other than the case where is the first number of times, the third time saving state may be changed to the second time saving state. Further, only in the third time saving state, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, the third time saving state may be changed to the second time saving state, or the gaming state other than the third time saving state may be changed. Also, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number, the third time saving state may be changed to the second time saving state.

In addition, "when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times in the third time saving state, the change display of the special symbol next to the first number of times changes from the third time saving state to the second time saving state. Transition [For example, as shown in FIGS. 27 (i) to 27 (l), when the number of symbol variation displays after the end of the jackpot in the c time saving state is the 750th symbol variation display is executed, play is performed. Shift to time, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the number of fittings becomes the first number in the third time saving state, the transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state may be performed only in the variable display of the special symbol next to the first number of times. However, when the number of fits becomes the first number in the third time saving state, the game state shifts from the third time saving state to the gaming state other than the second time saving state by the variable display of the special symbol next to the first number of times. Alternatively, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number in the third time saving state, the change display of the special symbol next to the first number of times always shifts from the third time saving state to the second time saving state. Alternatively, if the number of fits becomes the first number in the third time reduction state, the change display of the special symbol next to the first number of times may not shift from the third time reduction state to the second time reduction state. You may.

Further, when the number of fittings becomes the first number in the third time saving state, the change display of the special symbol next to the first number of times may shift from only the third time saving state to the second time saving state. , When the number of fits becomes the first number in the third time saving state, even if the game state other than the third time saving state is changed to the second time saving state by the variable display of the special symbol next to the first number of times. good.

Further, when the number of fittings becomes the first number in the third time saving state, the third time saving state may be changed to the second time saving state only by the variable display of the special symbol next to the first number of times. , When the number of fits becomes the first number in the third time reduction state, even if the variation display other than the variation display of the special symbol next to the first number is changed from the third time reduction state to the second time reduction state. good.

Further, when the number of fittings becomes the first number only in the third time saving state, the third time saving state may be changed to the second time saving state by the variable display of the special symbol next to the first number of times. , When the number of fits becomes the first number in the game state other than the third time reduction state, even if the change display of the special symbol next to the first number of times shifts from the third time reduction state to the second time reduction state. good.

In addition, "when the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the second time is displayed. The second time saving state is over,
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the third number of times [for example, 30 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the third time reduction state, the third time reduction state is displayed. The state is over,
Of the second number and the third number, the third number is smaller.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the number of times the symbol variation of the electric support state is displayed increases, so that the interest of the game may be improved.

Here, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of misses is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, only the second time saving state ends. Or, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of misses is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the state other than the second time saving state is displayed. You may finish. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

In addition, even if only the third time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started. Well, after the third time saving state is started, the state other than the third time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the third time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started. Well, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started, the third time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the third time saving state ends, if only the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started. Well, after the third time saving state is started, the third time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

Further, "the symbol display means is a means including a first symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212 or the like] and a second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214 or the like]. can be,
The variable display of the special symbol by the second symbol display means (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variable display”) is the variable display of the special symbol by the first symbol display means (hereinafter, “first symbol”). It is a symbol variation display that can be executed with priority over "variation display".
As a result of executing the first symbol variation display, the time-saving symbol [for example, "special symbol E" etc.] may be displayed.
The time saving symbol may not be displayed as a result of executing the second symbol variation display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the symbol display means may include only the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, and the symbol display means other than the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means may also be included. It may be included. Further, the symbol display means may always include the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, or may not include the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means. It may be a thing.

Further, the second symbol variation display may be executed with priority over only the first symbol variation display, or may be executed with priority over the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. It may be possible. Further, the second symbol variation display may always be executed with priority over the first symbol variation display, or may not be executed with priority over the first symbol variation display. There may be.

Further, only the time-saving symbol may be displayed as a result of executing the first symbol variation display, or symbols other than the time-saving symbol may be displayed as a result of executing the first symbol variation display. There may be cases. Further, the time-saving symbol may always be displayed as a result of executing the first symbol variation display, or the time-saving symbol may not be displayed as a result of executing the first symbol variation display.

Further, the time saving symbol may be displayed only as a result of executing the first symbol variation display, or the time saving symbol may be displayed as a result other than the result of executing the first symbol variation display. There may be cases.

Further, it is not necessary that only the time-saving symbol is displayed as a result of executing the second symbol variation display, and as a result of executing the second symbol variation display, symbols other than the time-saving symbol are also displayed. It does not have to be the case. Further, the time saving symbol may not always be displayed as a result of executing the second symbol variation display, or the time saving symbol may be displayed as a result of executing the second symbol variation display. ..

Further, the time saving symbol may not be displayed only as a result of executing the second symbol variation display, and the time saving symbol is displayed as a result other than the result of executing the second symbol variation display. It does not have to be the case.

In addition, "the game control means has a first time saving state [for example, an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time saving state) that shifts after the big hit game for a normal big hit is completed]. It ’s a startable means,
The first time-saving state is a time-saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low-probability state.
The number of fittings is the number of times including the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol is displayed after the first time saving state is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 23, in the time saving state. The number of starts between special prizes is updated and displayed, etc.],
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times [for example, 100 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time reduction state is started, the first time reduction state is displayed. The state is over,
Of the first number and the fourth number, the fourth number is smaller.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the symbol variation display is misaligned during the execution of the first time saving state, it is counted as the number of fittings, so that it may be positioned as a function that the player is happy with. On the other hand, since the second time saving state is not started during the execution of the first time saving state, it may be possible to prevent the player from becoming too advantageous.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the first time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the first time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

Further, the first time saving state may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the big hit game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. Further, the first time saving state may be always started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may be a thing.

Further, the number of times of fitting may be only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol is displayed after the first time saving state is started, or after the first time saving state is started. The number of times other than the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed may be included. Further, the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol after the start of the first time saving state is always included may be included, or the special time after the first time saving state is started. The number of times that the result of the variable display of the symbol is displayed may not be included.

In addition, even if only the first time saving state ends when the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, after the first time saving state is started, the state other than the first time saving state ends when the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the first time saving state is always terminated when the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the fourth number of misses is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the first time saving state ends, if only the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the fourth number of misses is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

In addition, "a staging means capable of executing a plurality of staging [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided.
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, an effect in which the character of the bancho is displayed together with the characters “during play time” shown in FIG. 25 (s)].
One of the plurality of effects is a fourth effect [for example, an effect in which the character of Sabohani shown in FIG. 26 (g) is displayed].
The third effect is an effect that may be executed in the second time saving state.
The fourth effect is an effect that may be executed in the third time saving state.
The third aspect of the effect and the fourth aspect of the effect are at least partially different.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the staging means may be one that can execute only a plurality of staging, or may be one that can execute a staging other than the plurality of staging. Further, the staging means may be one that always executes a plurality of staging, or may not perform a plurality of staging.

Further, the third effect may be executed only in the second time saving state, or may be executed in a gaming state other than the second time saving state. May be good. Further, the third effect may be always executed in the second time saving state, or may not be executed in the second time saving state.

Further, the fourth effect may be executed only in the third time saving state, or may be executed in a gaming state other than the third time saving state. May be good. Further, the fourth effect may be always executed in the third time saving state, or may not be executed in the third time saving state.

In addition, in the aspect of the third effect and the aspect of the fourth effect, a part may be different, or the whole may be different. Moreover, the aspect of the third effect and the aspect of the fourth effect may be the same.

In addition, "a staging means capable of executing a plurality of staging [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided.
One of the plurality of effects is the second effect.
The second effect is an effect that at least suggests information regarding the second time saving state [for example, information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time, as shown in FIG. 18A].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the staging means may be one that can execute only a plurality of staging, or may be one that can execute a staging other than the plurality of staging. Further, the staging means may be one that always executes a plurality of staging, or may not perform a plurality of staging.

Further, the second effect may suggest only the information regarding the second time saving state, or may suggest information other than the information regarding the second time saving state. Further, the second effect may always suggest information about the second time saving state, or may not suggest information about the second time saving state.

Further, "the second effect is an effect including at least information suggesting the number of fits [for example, information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS) as shown in FIG. 18 (a)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of fits, or may include information other than the information suggesting the number of fits. Further, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of fits, or may not include information suggesting the number of fits.

Further, "The second effect is information that at least suggests the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, as shown in FIG. 18A, play time. Information on the number of times the symbol changes are displayed up to]]
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the number of fittings becomes the first number, or the number of fittings becomes the first number. It may include information other than the information suggesting the number of times of variation display of the special symbol up to. Further, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of fittings becomes the first number, and the number of fittings becomes the first number. It may not include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol up to.

Further, "The second effect is an effect that can be performed in one of a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is not clearly displayed]. can be,
One of the plurality of embodiments is the second embodiment [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is clearly displayed, etc.]. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
The second effect may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on [for example, as shown in FIG. 21D, after the power is turned on, the symbol variation display until the play time is displayed. Information about the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
When the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. 22, the off-target SP reach is executed, etc.] is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second condition is satisfied. The effect of the above changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (g) to 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is unclear. When the out-of-SP reach is executed in the state shown in the embodiment, the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear embodiment, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be feasible only in one of a plurality of aspects, or may be feasible in a mode other than one of the plurality of aspects. You may. Further, the second effect may be always executed in one of a plurality of embodiments, or may not be executed in one of a plurality of embodiments. ..

Further, only the second effect may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the notification other than the second effect in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may always be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may not be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be good.

Further, the second effect may be executed only in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in an aspect other than the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may be executed in the first aspect only after the power is turned on, and the second effect may be executed in the first aspect other than after the power is turned on. May be done.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed only from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect without fail. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, only the second effect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the effects other than the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Further, if only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If a condition other than the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied except after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started only in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the first aspect may be changed. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in an aspect other than the above aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "after the second time saving state is started and the second time saving state ends without becoming a big hit, the game may shift to the normal gaming state [for example, shifting to the play time and the play". After the time is over, it shifts to the special low probability normal figure low probability state, etc.],
From the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, the second time saving state is not started [for example, after shifting to the play time and the play time ends, the big hit is achieved. Will not shift to play time again, etc.],
The third time saving state may be started from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit [for example, even after the play time is finished, the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is If it is suddenly displayed with a time saving symbol ("Special figure E"), it will shift to the c time saving state, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the second time saving state is started and the second time saving state ends without becoming a big hit, it may shift only to the normal gaming state, or the second time saving state starts. After the second time saving state is completed without becoming a big hit, it may shift to a gaming state other than the normal gaming state. In addition, after the second time saving state is started and the second time saving state is completed without becoming a big hit, it may always shift to the normal gaming state, or the second time saving state is started and the big hit. After the second time saving state is completed without becoming, the normal gaming state may not be entered.

Further, the normal gaming state may be started only after the second time saving state is started and the second time saving state is completed without becoming a big hit, or the second time saving state is started and the second time saving state is started. There may be a case where the game shifts to the normal gaming state other than after the second time saving state is completed without becoming a big hit. Further, only the second time saving state is started, and after the second time saving state is completed without becoming a big hit, the game may shift to the normal game state, or a game other than the second time saving state. After the state is started and the second time saving state is completed without becoming a big hit, it may shift to the normal gaming state.

Further, it is not necessary to start only the second time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, or from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. It is not necessary to start a gaming state other than the second time saving state. Further, it is not always necessary to start the second time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. A second time saving condition may be initiated.

Further, it is not necessary to start the second time saving state only from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and other than from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. Also, the second time saving state does not have to be started.

Further, from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, only the third time saving state may be started, or from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. A gaming state other than the third time saving state may be started. Further, the third time saving state may be always started from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, or the third time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. The state may not start.

In addition, the third time saving state may be started only from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, or from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. In addition, a third time saving state may be started.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Character display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means that can control the game state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
A staging means capable of executing a plurality of staging [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
When the probability setting change operation is accepted, any one of the probability settings is selected from the plurality of probability settings [for example, in the setting change process (step S117) of the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 7, the setting change button is selected. It is possible to set one of multiple settings by pressing 194], etc.
The game control means is a means capable of controlling a low probability state [for example, a special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [for example, a special figure high probability state, etc.].
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state), etc.].
In the second time saving state, the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the outlier is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter, "fitting"). When the number of times (referred to as "number of times") becomes the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.], it is a time-saving state that may shift.
The effect means is a means capable of performing a setting suggestion effect [for example, displaying a character that may appear at the end of the big hit game shown in FIG. 29] that suggests information about the setting.
The appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is different before the second time reduction state is started and after the second time reduction state is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 15A, the first big hit end effect. The setting suggestion effect that may be executed at times is easier to be executed after the play time starts than before the play time starts. As shown in FIG. 16, in the appearance of the setting suggestion ball, the setting suggestion ball appears more than before the play time shifts. After the transition, setting suggestion balls such as blue and green are more likely to appear],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the staging means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the staging means.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing display other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling a state other than the game state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the staging means may be one that can execute only a plurality of staging, or may be one that can execute a staging other than the plurality of staging. Further, the staging means may be one that always executes a plurality of staging, or may not perform a plurality of staging.

Further, when the probability setting operation is accepted, only one of the probability settings may be selected from the plurality of probability settings, and when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the plurality of probability settings may be selected. Settings other than the two probability settings may be selected. Further, when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the probability settings may be always selected from the plurality of probability settings, and when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the plurality of probability settings may be selected. One probability setting may not be selected.

Further, when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the probability settings may be selected from only a plurality of probability settings, and when the probability setting operation is accepted, the settings other than the plurality of probability settings may be selected. Any one probability setting may be selected. Further, only when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the probability settings may be selected from the plurality of probability settings, and even when the probability setting operation is not accepted, the plurality of probability settings may be selected. Any one of the probability settings may be selected from.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may be controllable to a state other than the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not be controlled to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low probability state, or the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a jackpot than the low probability state. It may be in a state where the probability other than the probability of becoming is high. In addition, the high-probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit is always higher than that in the low-probability state, and the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a jackpot than the low-probability state. It may not be in a state where the probability of becoming is high.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may be one that always starts the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

In addition, in the second time saving state, only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state is the first. It may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of order is displayed continuously without becoming a jackpot. It may be the one that may shift when the number of times other than the number of times becomes the first number of times. In addition, after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit is always changed to the first number. It may be there, or it will shift when the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is displayed is the first number of times without becoming a big hit after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the staging means may be capable of executing only the setting suggestion effect suggesting the information regarding the setting, or may be capable of executing the effect other than the setting suggestion effect suggesting the information regarding the setting. .. Further, the staging means may always execute the setting suggestion effect suggesting the information about the setting, or may not execute the setting suggestion effect suggesting the information about the setting.

Further, the staging means may be capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests only information related to the setting, or may be capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests information other than the information related to the setting. ..

Further, only the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect may be different before the second time saving state is started and after the second time saving state is started, and before the second time saving state is started and the first. Probabilities other than the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect may be different after the second time saving state is started. Further, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect may always be different before the second time saving state is started and after the second time saving state is started, and before the second time saving state is started and after the second time saving state is started. The appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect may not be different after the second time saving state is started.

Further, "The setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed after the second time saving state is started than before the second time saving state is started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to increase the appearance rate of the setting suggestion so as not to impair the player's willingness to continue the game when the deviation continues.

Here, it may be easier to execute only the setting suggestion effect after the second time saving state is started than before the second time saving state is started, or the second time saving state is started. It may be easier to perform an effect other than the setting suggestion effect after the second time saving state is started than before. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be more easily executed after the second time saving state is started than before the second time saving state is started, and the second time saving state is started. It may be easier to execute the setting suggestion effect after the second time saving state is started than before.

It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect may be more easily executed before the second time saving state is started than after the second time saving state is started.

In addition, "when the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the second time is displayed. The second time saving state is over,
The setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be executed in the third aspect [for example, a white setting suggestion ball, etc.].
The setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be executed in the fourth aspect [for example, a blue setting suggestion ball, etc.].
The third aspect and the fourth aspect are at least partially the same aspect [for example, the setting suggestion ball has a star shape, etc.].
After the second time saving state is completed, the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed in the fourth aspect than before the second time saving state is started [for example,]. , In setting 1, the blue setting suggestion ball is more likely to be displayed after the end of the play time than before the transition of the play time],
The setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed in the third aspect than after the second time saving state is started before the second time saving state is started [for example, after the second time saving state is finished. , In setting 1, white setting suggestion balls are more likely to be displayed before the end of the play time than after the transition of the play time],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of misses is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, only the second time saving state ends. Or, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of misses is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time reduction state is started, the game state other than the second time reduction state is displayed. May also end. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed only in the third aspect, or may be executed in an aspect other than the third aspect. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be always executed in the third aspect, or may not be executed in the third aspect.

Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed only in the fourth aspect, or may be executed in an aspect other than the fourth aspect. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be always executed in the fourth aspect, or may not be executed in the fourth aspect.

Further, it may be easier to execute only the setting suggestion effect in the fourth aspect than in the third aspect after the end of the second time reduction state than before the start of the second time reduction state. , It may be easier to perform an effect other than the setting suggestion effect in the fourth aspect than in the third aspect after the end of the second time reduction state than before the start of the second time reduction state. .. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be more easily executed in the fourth aspect than in the third aspect after the second time reduction state is completed than before the second time reduction state is started. , Even if the setting suggestion effect may not be more easily executed in the fourth aspect than in the third aspect after the end of the second time reduction state than before the start of the second time reduction state. good.

Further, it may be easier to execute the setting suggestion effect only in the fourth aspect than in the third aspect after the end of the second time reduction state than before the start of the second time reduction state. , It may be easier to execute the setting suggestion effect in a mode other than the fourth aspect than in the third aspect after the second time saving state is completed than before the second time saving state is started. .. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be more easily executed in the fourth aspect than in the third aspect only after the second time reduction state is completed than before the second time reduction state is started. , The setting suggestion effect may be more easily executed in the fourth aspect than in the third aspect except before the second time saving state is completed than before the second time saving state is started.

Further, it may be easier to execute only the setting suggestion effect in the third aspect than in the fourth aspect before the second time saving state is started than after the second time saving state is finished. , It may be easier to perform an effect other than the setting suggestion effect in the third aspect rather than the fourth aspect before the start of the second time reduction state than after the end of the second time reduction state. .. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be more easily executed in the third aspect than in the fourth aspect before the second time reduction state is started than after the second time reduction state is completed. Even if the setting suggestion effect may not be more easily executed in the third aspect than in the fourth aspect before the start of the second time reduction state than after the end of the second time reduction state. good.

Further, it may be easier to execute the setting suggestion effect only in the third aspect than in the fourth aspect before the second time saving state is started than after the second time saving state is finished. , It may be easier to execute the setting suggestion effect in a mode other than the third aspect than in the fourth aspect before the second time saving state is started than after the second time saving state is finished. .. Further, it may be easier to execute the setting suggestion effect in the third aspect than in the fourth aspect only before the second time saving state is started than after the second time saving state is finished. , It may be easier to execute the setting suggestion effect in the third aspect than in the fourth aspect except before the second time saving state is started than after the second time saving state is finished.

In addition, a part of the third aspect and the fourth aspect may be the same, or all of them may be the same. Moreover, all may be different aspects.

In addition, "when the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the second time is displayed. The second time saving state is over,
The setting suggestion effect may be executed in connection with the end of the second time saving state [for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (w'), when the symbol variation display at which the play time ends ends. The character of the lord is displayed along with the characters "Opportunity", suggesting that the setting is 4 or higher],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to tackle the game with the goal of a second time saving state, even if it is a little addictive.

Here, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of misses is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, only the second time saving state ends. Or, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of misses is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the state other than the second time saving state is displayed. You may finish. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

In addition, only the setting suggestion effect may be executed in connection with the end of the second time saving state, or the effect other than the setting suggestion effect may be executed in connection with the end of the second time saving state. May also be executed. In addition, the setting suggestion effect may always be executed in connection with the end of the second time reduction state, or the setting suggestion effect may not be executed in connection with the end of the second time reduction state. May be good.

Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed only in relation to the end of the second time reduction state, or the setting suggestion effect may be executed in relation to something other than the end of the second time reduction state. May be executed. In addition, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in connection with the end of only the second time reduction state, or the setting suggestion in connection with the end of the game state other than the second time reduction state. The production may be performed.

Further, "The setting suggestion effect may be executed when the big hit game ends [For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the setting suggestion is performed by displaying the character at the end of the first big hit game. etc],
The setting suggestion effect is more when the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state ends. Easy to execute [For example, as shown in FIG. 15A, the setting suggestion effect that may be executed at the time of the first big hit end effect is more likely to be executed after the play time starts than before the play time starts]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to maintain the motivation to continue the game until a big hit even after the end of the second time saving state because the setting suggestion effect is easy to appear.

Further, according to this game table, the opportunity for suggesting the setting may be easily understood and set as the goal of the player's game.

Here, only the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the big hit game ends, or an effect other than the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the big hit game ends. Further, the setting suggestion effect may always be executed when the big hit game ends, or the setting suggestion effect may not be executed when the big hit game ends.

Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed only when the big hit game is finished, or the setting suggestion effect may be executed only when the big hit game is not finished. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when only the big hit game is completed, or the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the game other than the big hit game is completed.

In addition, only the setting suggestion effect is performed when the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state ends. It may be easier to execute, and when the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state starts. However, it may be easy to execute an effect other than the setting suggestion effect. In addition, the setting suggestion effect is always performed when the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state ends. It may be easier to execute, and when the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state starts. However, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

Also, the setting suggestion effect is only when the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state ends. It may be easier to execute, except when the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state ends. It may be easier to execute the setting suggestion effect when. Also, the setting suggestion effect is better when the jackpot game started after only the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state ends. It may be easier to execute, or the jackpot game started after the game state other than the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state starts ends. It may be easier to execute the setting suggestion effect when this is done.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect is more when the jackpot game started after the second time reduction state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time reduction state ends. It may be easier to execute, or the jackpot game started after the second time saving state has ended than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state has ended has ended. It may be easier to execute the setting suggestion effect when. In addition, the setting suggestion effect is more when the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before only the second time saving state ends. It may be easier to execute, and the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the game state other than the second time saving state starts ends. It may be easier to execute the setting suggestion effect when this is done.

Further, "when the probability setting change operation is accepted, the initial state is set when the power is restored. [For example, as shown in steps S113 to S119 of FIG. 7, the initialization process is executed when the setting is changed. Will be, etc.],
Even when the power is restored to the initial state, the number of fittings before the power is cut off can be maintained.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, for example, if the number of fits on the previous day is maintained, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the transition to the second time saving state on the day is shortened, so that a little service is given to the player. May be possible.

In addition, although a low setting may be detected depending on the fit or the transition to the second time saving state, shortening the number of times the symbol variation display is performed does not mean that the setting is deferred, so the player has expectations. It may be possible to make it.

In addition, "One of the plurality of effects is the second effect.
The second effect includes at least information on the second time saving state [for example, information on the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time, information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS), etc. shown in FIG. 18A]. It is a suggestive production,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, the second effect may suggest only the information regarding the second time saving state, or may suggest information other than the information regarding the second time saving state. Further, the second effect may always suggest information about the second time saving state, or may not suggest information about the second time saving state.

Further, "the second effect is an effect including at least information suggesting the number of fits [for example, information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS) shown in FIG. 18A]".
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of fits, or may include information other than the information suggesting the number of fits. Further, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of fits, or may not include information suggesting the number of fits.

Further, "The second effect is information that at least suggests the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, up to the play time shown in FIG. 18A. Information including the number of times the symbol changes are displayed]
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the number of fittings becomes the first number, or the number of fittings becomes the first number. It may include information other than the information suggesting the number of times of variation display of the special symbol up to. Further, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of fittings becomes the first number, and the number of fittings becomes the first number. It may not include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol up to.

Further, "The second effect is an effect that can be performed in one of a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is not clearly displayed]. can be,
One of the plurality of embodiments is the second embodiment [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is clearly displayed, etc.]. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
The second effect may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on [for example, as shown in FIG. 21D, after the power is turned on, the symbol variation display until the play time is displayed. Information about the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
When the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. 22, the off-target SP reach is executed, etc.] is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second condition is satisfied. The effect of the above changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (g) to 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is unclear. When the out-of-SP reach is executed in the state shown in the embodiment, the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear embodiment, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be feasible only in one of a plurality of aspects, or may be feasible in a mode other than one of the plurality of aspects. You may. Further, the second effect may be always executed in one of a plurality of embodiments, or may not be executed in one of a plurality of embodiments. ..

Further, only the second effect may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the notification other than the second effect in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may always be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may not be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be good.

Further, the second effect may be executed only in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in an aspect other than the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may be executed in the first aspect only after the power is turned on, and the second effect may be executed in the first aspect other than after the power is turned on. May be done.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed only from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect without fail. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, only the second effect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the effects other than the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Further, if only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If a condition other than the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied except after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started only in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the first aspect may be changed. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in an aspect other than the above aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "the game control means has a first time saving state [for example, an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time saving state) that shifts after the big hit game for a normal big hit is completed]. It ’s a startable means,
The first time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the first time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the first time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

Further, the first time saving state may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the big hit game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. Further, the first time saving state may be always started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may be a thing.

Further, "the game control means can start a third time saving state [for example, an electric support state in which a time saving symbol is suddenly displayed and transitions (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time saving state)]. Means,
The third time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when a time saving symbol [for example, "special figure E" etc.] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol.
The time saving symbol is a symbol different from the jackpot symbol,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the third time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the third time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the third time saving state, or may not start the third time saving state.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may be started in a case other than the case where is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be started whenever the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol is displayed as the result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may not be started.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Character display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means that can control the game state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
A staging means capable of executing a plurality of staging [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of controlling a low probability state [for example, a special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [for example, a special figure high probability state, etc.].
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state.
The game control means can start a first time saving state [for example, an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time saving state) that shifts after the big hit game for a normal big hit is completed]. Means,
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state), etc.].
The first time-saving state is a time-saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low-probability state.
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times [for example, 100 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time reduction state is started, the first time reduction state is displayed. The state is over,
In the second time saving state, the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of order is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter, "fitting"). When the number of times (referred to as "number of times") becomes the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.], it is a time-saving state that may shift.
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time reduction state is started, the second time reduction state is displayed. The state is over,
From the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, the second time saving state is not started.
The effect executed in the first time saving state and the effect executed in the second time saving state are different [for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), in the a time saving state, at the lower right of the display screen. The character of the lord is displayed, but as shown in FIG. 25 (s), in the b time saving state, the character of the bancho is displayed at the lower right of the display screen, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the staging means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the staging means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to give a variation to the production related to the time saving state.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing display other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling a state other than the game state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the staging means may be one that can execute only a plurality of staging, or may be one that can execute a staging other than the plurality of staging. Further, the staging means may be one that always executes a plurality of staging, or may not perform a plurality of staging.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may be controllable to a state other than the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not be controlled to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low probability state, or the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a jackpot than the low probability state. It may be in a state where the probability other than the probability of becoming is high. In addition, the high-probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit is always higher than that in the low-probability state, and the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a jackpot than the low-probability state. It may not be in a state where the probability of becoming is high.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the first time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the first time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may be one that always starts the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

Further, the first time saving state may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the big hit game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. Further, the first time saving state may be always started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may be a thing.

In addition, even if only the first time saving state ends when the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, after the first time saving state is started, the state other than the first time saving state ends when the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the first time saving state is always terminated when the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the fourth number of misses is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the first time saving state ends, if only the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the fourth number of misses is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

In addition, in the second time saving state, only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state is the first. It may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of order is displayed continuously without becoming a jackpot. It may be the one that may shift when the number of times other than the number of times becomes the first number of times. In addition, after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit is always changed to the first number. It may be there, or it will shift when the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is displayed is the first number of times without becoming a big hit after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may not be the one that may not be.

Here, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of misses is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, only the second time saving state ends. Or, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of misses is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the state other than the second time saving state is displayed. You may finish. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

Further, it is not necessary to start only the second time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, or from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. It is not necessary to start a state other than the second time saving state. Further, it is not always necessary to start the second time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. A second time saving condition may be initiated.

Further, it is not necessary to start the second time saving state only from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and other than from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. Also, the second time saving state does not have to be started.

It should be noted that a part of the effect executed in the first time saving state and a part of the effect executed in the second time saving state may be different, or all of them may be different. Further, the effect executed in the first time saving state and the effect executed in the second time saving state may be the same.

Further, "one of the plurality of effects is the first suggestive effect [for example, an effect including information on the remaining number of times of the symbol variation display until the end of the time saving state shown in FIG. 23 (c), etc." ], And
One of the plurality of effects is a second suggestive effect [for example, an effect including information on the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time shown in FIG. 23 (c) and information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS). Etc.]
One of the plurality of effects is a third suggestive effect [for example, an effect including information on the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time shown in FIG. 25 (c) ends].
The first suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting the number of times of variation display of the special symbol in the first time saving state.
The second suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting the number of times of fitting.
The third suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting the number of times of variation display of the special symbol in the second time saving state.
In the first time saving state, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are executed [for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), in the a time reduction state, the symbol variation until the a time reduction ends. An effect including information on the number of times of display, information on the number of times of symbol change display until play time, and an effect including information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS) are performed],.
The third suggestion effect is executed in the second time saving state [for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the b time saving state, the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time ends is included. Directing is being done, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first suggestion effect may only suggest the number of times the special symbol is varied and displayed in the first time-saving state, or may be related to the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed in the first time-saving state. Suggestions other than suggestions may also be made. Further, the first suggestion effect may always give a suggestion regarding the number of times the special symbol is varied and displayed in the first time-saving state, or the suggestion regarding the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed in the first time-saving state. May not be performed.

Further, the second suggestion effect may be a suggestion only regarding the number of fits, or may be a suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the number of fits. Further, the second suggestion effect may be one that always gives a suggestion regarding the number of fits, or may not give a suggestion regarding the number of fits.

Further, the third suggestion effect may only suggest the number of times the special symbol is varied and displayed in the second time-saving state, or the suggestion regarding the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed in the second time-saving state. Other suggestions may also be made. Further, the third suggestion effect may always give a suggestion regarding the number of times the special symbol is varied and displayed in the second time-saving state, or the suggestion regarding the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed in the second time-saving state. May not be performed.

Further, only the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may be executed in the first time-saving state, and the effects other than the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are also executed in the first time-saving state. May be done. Further, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may always be executed in the first time reduction state, and the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may not be executed in the first time reduction state. There may be.

Further, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may be executed only in the first time reduction state, and the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may be executed even in the gaming state other than the first time reduction state. May be executed.

Further, only the third suggestion effect may be executed in the second time saving state, or the effect other than the third suggestion effect may be executed in the second time saving state. Further, the third suggestion effect may always be executed in the second time reduction state, or the third suggestion effect may not be executed in the second time reduction state.

Further, the third suggestion effect may be executed only in the second time reduction state, or the third suggestion effect may be executed in a gaming state other than the second time reduction state.

Further, "one of the plurality of effects is a second suggestive effect [for example, information on the number of start times (TS) between special prizes shown in FIG. 23 (c)].
The second suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting the number of times of fitting.
The second suggestion effect may be executed in a normal game state [for example, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, etc.] [For example, in the normal game state, the number of start times between special prizes shown in FIG. 23 (c). There is a production that includes information about (TS)],
The second suggestive effect is executed in the normal gaming state shifted after the first time saving state is completed.
The second suggestive effect is not executed in the normal gaming state shifted after the second time saving state is completed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second suggestion effect may be a suggestion only regarding the number of fits, or may be a suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the number of fits. Further, the second suggestion effect may be one that always gives a suggestion regarding the number of fits, or may not give a suggestion regarding the number of fits.

Further, in the normal gaming state, only the second suggestion effect may be executed, or in the normal game state, an effect other than the second suggestion effect may be executed. Further, the second suggestion effect may always be executed in the normal gaming state, or the second suggestion effect may not be executed in the normal game state.

Further, the second suggestion effect may be executed only in the normal gaming state, or the second suggestion effect may be executed in a game state other than the normal gaming state.

Further, only the second suggestion effect may be executed in the normal gaming state shifted after the first time saving state ends, or the second suggestion in the normal gaming state shifted after the first time saving state ends. A production other than the production may be performed. Further, the second suggestion effect may always be executed in the normal gaming state shifted after the first time saving state ends, or the second suggestion in the normal gaming state shifted after the first time saving state ends. The effect may not be executed.

Further, the second suggestion effect may be executed only in the normal gaming state shifted after the first time saving state ends, or in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state shifted after the first time saving state ends. Also, the second suggestive effect may be performed. Further, the second suggestion effect may be executed in the normal gaming state shifted only after the first time saving state is completed, or the second suggestive effect may be executed in the normal gaming state shifted after the first time saving state is finished. The second suggestive effect may be performed.

Further, only the second suggestion effect does not have to be executed in the normal gaming state shifted after the second time saving state ends, and the second suggestive effect does not have to be executed in the normal gaming state shifted after the second time saving state ends. It is not necessary to execute an effect other than the suggestion effect. Further, the second suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be executed in the normal gaming state shifted after the second time saving state ends, and the second suggestion effect does not have to be executed in the normal gaming state shifted after the second time saving state ends. Suggestion staging may be performed.

Further, the second suggestion effect may not be executed only in the normal gaming state shifted after the second time saving state ends, and the gaming state other than the normal gaming state shifted after the second time saving state ends. However, the second suggestive effect does not have to be executed. Further, the second suggestion effect may not be executed in the normal gaming state shifted only after the second time saving state ends, and in the normal gaming state shifted after the transition other than after the second time saving state ends. The second suggestion effect does not have to be performed.

Further, "one of the plurality of effects includes the display of the fifth effect [for example, the total number of prize balls acquired in the series of advantageous states shown in FIG. 23 (h) and the number of times a big hit occurs. Direction, etc.]
The fifth effect is an effect including at least a display indicating the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired in a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game.
The fifth effect is executed in relation to the fourth number of times [for example, 100 times, etc.] of the variation display of the special symbol, which is shifted in the first time saving state [for example, the figure. As shown in 23 (g) to FIG. 23 (h), when the time saving state ends, the production including the display of the total number of prize balls acquired in the series of advantageous states and the number of times the big hit occurs is started.] ,
The fifth effect is not executed in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that is shifted in the second time saving state becomes the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, even if the fifth effect is an effect that includes only a display showing the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired in a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game. Alternatively, the effect may include a display other than the display indicating the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired in a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game. Further, the fifth effect may be an effect that always includes a display showing the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired in a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game. However, the effect may not include a display indicating the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired in a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game.

Further, even if the fifth effect is an effect that includes at least a display showing the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired only in a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game. Alternatively, the effect may include at least a display indicating the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired even in a state other than a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game.

Further, only the fifth effect may be executed in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that is shifted in the first time saving state becomes the fourth number, or in the first time saving state. An effect other than the fifth effect may be executed in connection with the fact that the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that is out of alignment becomes the fourth number. In addition, the fifth effect may always be executed in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that is shifted in the first time saving state becomes the fourth number, or in the first time saving state. In some cases, the fifth effect may not be executed in connection with the fact that the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that is out of alignment becomes the fourth number.

Further, the fifth effect may be executed only in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that is shifted in the first time saving state becomes the fourth number, or in the first time saving state. The fifth effect may be executed in relation to the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of alignment becomes the fourth number of times. Further, the fifth effect may be executed in relation to the fact that only the number of times of variation display of the special symbol, which is shifted in the first time saving state, becomes the fourth number, or in the first time saving state. A fifth effect may be executed in relation to the fact that the number of times other than the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that is out of alignment becomes the fourth number of times.

In addition, the fifth effect may be executed in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that is off only in the first time saving state becomes the fourth number, and other than the first time saving state. The fifth effect may be executed in relation to the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol which is shifted in the game state of the fourth number.

In addition, it is not necessary to execute only the fifth effect in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that is shifted in the second time saving state becomes the second number, and the second time saving state. Then, it is not necessary to execute an effect other than the fifth effect in relation to the fact that the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of alignment becomes the second number. In addition, the fifth effect does not necessarily have to be executed in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that is shifted in the second time saving state becomes the second number, and the second time saving state. Then, the fifth effect may be executed in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that is out of alignment becomes the second number of times.

In addition, the fifth effect does not have to be executed only in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that is shifted in the second time saving state becomes the second number, and the second time saving state. Then, it is not necessary to execute the fifth effect in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that is out of alignment is the second number. In addition, the fifth effect may not be executed in relation to the fact that only the number of times of variation display of the special symbol, which is shifted in the second time saving state, becomes the second number of times, and the second time saving state. Then, it is not necessary to execute the fifth effect in relation to the second number of times other than the number of times of variable display of the special symbol that is out of alignment.

In addition, the fifth effect may not be executed in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that is off only in the second time saving state becomes the second number, and the second time saving state. It is not necessary to execute the fifth effect in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that is shifted in the game state other than the second number.

In addition, "In the first time saving state, the first effect mode [for example, the effect mode in which the character of the lord is sprinting and defeating the panda, as shown in FIGS. 23 (b) to 23 (h), etc." ] To execute the production,
In the second time saving state, the effect is executed in the second effect mode [for example, the effect mode in which the character of the bancho appears, as shown in FIGS. 25 (c) to 25 (w)].
The effect mode in the first effect mode and the effect mode in the second effect mode are different effect modes.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to increase the variation in the time saving state by changing the appearance.

Here, in the first time-saving state, the effect may be executed only in the first effect mode, or in the first time-saving state, the effect may be executed in an effect mode other than the first effect mode. Further, in the first time saving state, the effect may always be executed in the first effect mode, or in the first time saving state, the effect may not be executed in the first effect mode.

Further, the effect may be executed in the first effect mode only in the first time reduction state, or the effect may be executed in the first effect mode in a gaming state other than the first time reduction state.

Further, in the second time saving state, the effect may be executed only in the second effect mode, and in the second time saving state, the effect may be executed in an effect mode other than the second effect mode. Further, in the second time saving state, the effect may always be executed in the second effect mode, and in the second time saving state, the effect may not be executed in the second effect mode.

Further, the effect may be executed in the second effect mode only in the second time reduction state, or the effect may be executed in the second effect mode in a gaming state other than the second time reduction state.

Further, "a fluctuation time determining means capable of determining one fluctuation time from a plurality of fluctuation times [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, etc.]"
A plurality of fluctuation time tables [for example, a fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 17] and
Equipped with
The fluctuation time determining means is the fifth number of times [for example, 10 times] after the start of the normal gaming state [for example, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state etc.] that has shifted after the first time saving state is completed. Etc.] until the variable display of the special symbol is executed, from the first variable time table among the plurality of variable time tables [for example, the table of "normal time (revival mode)" shown in FIG. 17]. Select the fluctuation time of
The fluctuation time determining means is the second of the plurality of fluctuation time tables in the normal gaming state [for example, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, etc.] that has shifted after the end of the second time saving state. Select one fluctuation time from the fluctuation time table [for example, the "normal time" table shown in FIG. 17].
The first variable time table is a variable time table that is not selected when the power is turned on.
The first fluctuation time table and the second fluctuation time table are different fluctuation time tables.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the variable time determining means may be capable of determining only one variable time from a plurality of variable times, or can also determine a variable time other than one variable time from a plurality of variable times. It may be anything. Further, the variable time determining means may always determine one variable time from a plurality of variable times, or may not determine one variable time from a plurality of variable times. There may be.

Further, the variable time determining means is among a plurality of variable time tables from the start of the transitioned normal gaming state after the end of the first time saving state to the execution of the variable display of the fifth number of special symbols. Only one variation time may be selected from the first variation time table of, or the variation display of the fifth number of special symbols after the transitioned normal gaming state is started after the first time reduction state ends. May be selected from the first variable time table among the plurality of variable time tables until the variable time other than one variable time is executed. Further, the variable time determining means is among a plurality of variable time tables from the start of the transitioned normal gaming state after the end of the first time saving state to the execution of the variable display of the fifth number of special symbols. You may always select one variation time from the first variation time table of, or the variation display of the fifth number of special symbols after the start of the normal gaming state that was transferred after the end of the first time saving state. May not be selected from the first variation time table of the plurality of variation time tables until is executed.

Further, the variable time determining means is among a plurality of variable time tables from the start of the transitioned normal gaming state after the end of the first time saving state to the execution of the variable display of the fifth number of special symbols. One variation time may be selected only from the first variation time table of, or the variation display of the fifth number of special symbols after the transitioned normal gaming state is started after the first time reduction state ends. May be selected from a table other than the first variable time table among the plurality of variable time tables until is executed.

Further, the variable time determining means is used for a plurality of variable time tables only from the start of the transitioned normal gaming state after the end of the first time saving state to the execution of the variable display of the fifth special symbol. One variation time may be selected from the first variation time table, or the variation display of the fifth number of special symbols after the transition to the normal gaming state after the end of the first time saving state is started. You may select one variation time from the first variation time table among the plurality of variation time tables until the display other than is executed.

Further, the variable time determining means is used for a plurality of variable time tables from the start of the transitioned normal gaming state after the end of the first time saving state until the variation display of the fifth special symbol is executed. One variable time may be selected from the first variable time table, or the fifth special number of times since the game state other than the normal game state shifted after the first time saving state is completed is started. One variation time may be selected from the first variation time table among the plurality of variation time tables until the variation display of the symbol is executed.

Further, the variable time determining means is a plurality of variable time tables from the start of the transitioned normal gaming state only after the end of the first time saving state to the execution of the variable display of the fifth special symbol. One variable time may be selected from the first variable time table, or the fifth special number of times since the transitioned normal gaming state is started after the gaming state other than the first time saving state is completed. One variation time may be selected from the first variation time table among the plurality of variation time tables until the variation display of the symbol is executed.

Further, the variable time determining means may select only one variable time from the second variable time table among the plurality of variable time tables in the normal gaming state shifted after the second time saving state ends. Then, in the normal gaming state shifted after the end of the second time saving state, a fluctuation time other than one fluctuation time may be selected from the second fluctuation time table among the plurality of fluctuation time tables. Further, the variable time determining means may always select one variable time from the second variable time table among the plurality of variable time tables in the normal gaming state shifted after the second time saving state ends. However, in the normal gaming state shifted after the end of the second time saving state, one fluctuation time may not be selected from the second fluctuation time table among the plurality of fluctuation time tables.

Further, the variable time determining means may select one variable time from only the second variable time table among the plurality of variable time tables in the normal gaming state shifted after the second time saving state ends. Then, in the normal gaming state shifted after the end of the second time saving state, one fluctuation time may be selected from the tables other than the second fluctuation time table among the plurality of fluctuation time tables.

Further, the variable time determining means may select one variable time from the second variable time table among the plurality of variable time tables only in the normal gaming state shifted after the second time saving state ends. However, even in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state that has transitioned after the end of the second time saving state, one variation time may be selected from the second variation time table among the plurality of variation time tables.

Further, the variable time determining means may select one variable time from the second variable time table among the plurality of variable time tables in the normal gaming state in which the transition is made only after the second time saving state is completed. Then, in the normal gaming state shifted after the gaming state other than the second time saving state is completed, one variation time may be selected from the second variation time table among the plurality of variation time tables.

Further, the first variable time table may be a variable time table that is not selected only when the power is turned on, or may be a variable time table that is not selected only when the power is turned on. Further, the first variable time table may be a variable time table that is not always selected when the power is turned on, or may be a variable time table that may be selected when the power is turned on.

The first fluctuation time table and the second fluctuation time table may be partially different fluctuation time tables or all may be different fluctuation time tables.

In addition, "One of the plurality of effects is the second effect.
The second effect includes at least information on the second time saving state [for example, information on the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time, information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS), etc. shown in FIG. 18A]. It is a suggestive production,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may suggest only the information regarding the second time saving state, or may suggest information other than the information regarding the second time saving state. Further, the second effect may always suggest information about the second time saving state, or may not suggest information about the second time saving state.

Further, "the second effect is an effect including at least information suggesting the number of fits [for example, information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS) as shown in FIG. 18 (a)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of fits, or may include information other than the information suggesting the number of fits. Further, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of fits, or may not include information suggesting the number of fits.

Further, "The second effect is information that at least suggests the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, as shown in FIG. 18A, play time. Information on the number of times the symbol changes are displayed up to]]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the number of fittings becomes the first number, or the number of fittings becomes the first number. It may include information other than the information suggesting the number of times of variation display of the special symbol up to. Further, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of fittings becomes the first number, and the number of fittings becomes the first number. It may not include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol up to.

Further, "The second effect is an effect that can be performed in one of a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is not clearly displayed]. can be,
One of the plurality of embodiments is the second embodiment [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is clearly displayed, etc.]. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
The second effect may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on [for example, as shown in FIG. 21D, after the power is turned on, the symbol variation display until the play time is displayed. Information about the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
When the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. 22, the off-target SP reach is executed, etc.] is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second condition is satisfied. The effect of the above changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (g) to 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is unclear. When the out-of-SP reach is executed in the state shown in the embodiment, the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear embodiment, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be feasible only in one of a plurality of aspects, or may be feasible in a mode other than one of the plurality of aspects. You may. Further, the second effect may be always executed in one of a plurality of embodiments, or may not be executed in one of a plurality of embodiments. ..

Further, only the second effect may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the notification other than the second effect in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may always be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may not be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be good.

Further, the second effect may be executed only in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in an aspect other than the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may be executed in the first aspect only after the power is turned on, and the second effect may be executed in the first aspect other than after the power is turned on. May be done.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed only from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect without fail. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, only the second effect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the effects other than the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Further, if only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If a condition other than the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied except after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started only in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the first aspect may be changed. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in an aspect other than the above aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, "the game control means can start a third time saving state [for example, an electric support state in which a time saving symbol is suddenly displayed and transitions (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time saving state)]. Means,
The third time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when a time saving symbol [for example, "special figure E" etc.] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol.
The time-saving symbol is a symbol different from the jackpot symbol.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the third time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the third time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the third time saving state, or may not start the third time saving state.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may be started in a case other than the case where is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be started whenever the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol is displayed as the result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may not be started.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Character display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means capable of controlling a game state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
A fluctuation time determining means capable of determining one fluctuation time from a plurality of fluctuation times [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
A staging means capable of executing a plurality of staging [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of controlling a low probability state [for example, a special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [for example, a special figure high probability state, etc.].
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state), etc.].
In the second time saving state, the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the outlier is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter, "fitting"). When the number of times (referred to as "number of times") becomes the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.], it is a time-saving state that may shift.
Variation display of a certain special symbol (hereinafter, "certain special symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 31 (a2) to (a4) and FIGS. 31 (b2) to (b3). In the symbol variation display shown and referred to as “Fig. 32 (b) to FIG. (I)]”), an effect of notifying the start of the second time saving state (hereinafter, “notification effect [for example, FIG. 31”). (A4) and the display of the characters "play time rush !!" shown in FIG. 31 (b3) and the display of the characters "play time rush !!" shown in FIG. 32 (g)] ") are executed. May be
The certain symbol variation display is a variation display of a special symbol executed immediately before the transition to the second time saving state.
The fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed at the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determination means.
The fluctuation time of one of the plurality of fluctuation times is the first fluctuation time [for example, 5 seconds, etc.].
The fluctuation time of one of the plurality of fluctuation times is the second fluctuation time [for example, 10 seconds, etc.].
The length of the first fluctuation time and the length of the second fluctuation time are different lengths.
When the certain symbol variation display is executed in the first variation time, the first execution mode [for example, "play time rushes !!" 5 seconds after the symbol variation display of special figure 1 starts. The notification effect is executed in the mode in which the characters of
When the certain symbol variation display is executed in the second variation time, the second execution mode [for example, "play time rushes !!" 10 seconds after the symbol variation display of special figure 1 starts. The notification effect is executed in the mode in which the characters of
The first embodiment and the second embodiment are different embodiments.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the staging means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the staging means.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing display other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling a state other than the game state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the variable time determining means may be capable of determining only one variable time from a plurality of variable times, or can determine a variable time other than one variable time from a plurality of variable times. It may be a thing. Further, the variable time determining means may always determine one variable time from a plurality of variable times, or may not determine one variable time from a plurality of variable times. There may be.

Further, the staging means may be one that can execute only a plurality of staging, or may be one that can execute a staging other than the plurality of staging. Further, the staging means may be one that always executes a plurality of staging, or may not perform a plurality of staging.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may be controllable to a state other than the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not be controlled to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low probability state, or the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a jackpot than the low probability state. It may be in a state where the probability other than the probability of becoming is high. In addition, the high-probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit is always higher than that in the low-probability state, and the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a jackpot than the low-probability state. It may not be in a state where the probability of becoming is high.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may be one that always starts the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

In addition, in the second time saving state, only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state is the first. It may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of order is displayed continuously without becoming a jackpot. It may be the one that may shift when the number of times other than the number of times becomes the first number of times. In addition, after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit is always changed to the first number. It may be there, or it will shift when the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is displayed is the first number of times without becoming a big hit after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, there may be a case where only the effect of notifying that the second time saving state is started in the variable display of a certain special symbol is executed, or the second time saving state in the variable display of a certain special symbol is executed. There may be cases where an effect other than the effect of notifying that is started is also executed. In addition, an effect of notifying that the second time saving state is started in the variable display of a certain special symbol may be always executed, or the second time saving state is started in the variable display of a certain special symbol. In some cases, the effect of notifying that is not executed.

Further, there may be a case where an effect of notifying that only the second time saving state is started is executed in the variation display of a certain special symbol, or the second time saving state in the variation display of a certain special symbol. There may be a case where an effect for notifying that a game state other than the above is started is executed.
In addition, an effect of notifying that the second time saving state is started may be executed only in the variation display of a certain special symbol, or the variation of the special symbol other than the variation display of the special symbol may be executed. Also in the display, an effect of notifying that the second time saving state is started may be executed.

Further, only the variation display of the special symbol may be executed in the variation time determined by the variation time determining means, or the display other than the variation display of the special symbol is executed in the variation time determined by the variation time determination means. May be good. Further, the variation display of the special symbol may always be executed in the variation time determined by the variation time determining means, or the variation display of the special symbol may not be executed in the variation time determined by the variation time determination means. May be good.

Further, the variable display of the special symbol may be executed only in the variable time determined by the variable time determining means, or the variable display of the special symbol is executed in the variable time other than the variable time determined by the variable time determining means. You may.

Further, when a certain symbol variation display is executed in the first variation time, the notification effect may be executed only in the first execution mode, or a certain symbol variation display is executed in the first variation time. If so, the notification effect may be executed in an execution mode other than the first execution mode. Further, when a certain symbol variation display is executed in the first variation time, the notification effect may always be executed in the first execution mode, or a certain symbol variation display is executed in the first variation time. If so, the notification effect may not be executed in the first execution mode.

Further, the notification effect may be executed in the first execution mode only when a certain symbol variation display is executed in the first variation time, or a certain symbol variation display is executed in the first variation time. Even in cases other than the above, the notification effect may be executed in the first execution mode.

Further, when a certain symbol variation display is executed in the second variation time, the notification effect may be executed only in the second execution mode, or a certain symbol variation display is executed in the second variation time. If so, the notification effect may be executed in an execution mode other than the second execution mode. Further, when a certain symbol variation display is executed in the second variation time, the notification effect may always be executed in the second execution mode, or a certain symbol variation display is executed in the second variation time. If so, the notification effect may not be executed in the second execution mode.

Further, the notification effect may be executed in the second execution mode only when a certain symbol variation display is executed in the second variation time, or a certain symbol variation display is executed in the second variation time. Even in cases other than the case where it is performed, the notification effect may be executed in the second execution mode.

The length of the first fluctuation time and the length of the second fluctuation time may be partially different lengths or all may be different lengths. Further, the length of the first fluctuation time and the length of the second fluctuation time may be the same.

Further, the first execution mode and the second execution mode may be partially different modes or all may be different modes. Moreover, the first execution mode and the second execution mode may be the same.

In addition, "the length of the second fluctuation time is longer than the length of the first fluctuation time,
The first execution mode is that the notification effect is performed at the first timing after the start of the certain symbol variation display [for example, 5 seconds after the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1]. It is an execution mode to be started.
The second execution mode is that the notification effect starts at the second timing after the start of the certain symbol variation display [for example, 10 seconds after the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1]. It is an execution mode to be performed.
The period from the start of the certain symbol variation display to the second timing is longer than the period from the start of the certain symbol variation display to the first timing. Is,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "In the variable display of the special symbol of the first variable time, an effect that is out of alignment without a certain reach effect is executed.
In the variation display of the special symbol of the second variation time, an effect of deviation is executed after the certain reach effect is performed [for example, the deviation SP shown in FIGS. 32 (c) to 32 (i). Reach production, etc.],
A state in which the player can recognize at least that the reach effect is performed in the certain symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 32 (f), the character of the lord becomes the character of the swordsman. It will be the second timing after the player can recognize that it is a mistake by performing the defeated production].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there is a case where a certain reach production can be expected to the end by including the possibility of a big hit.

Here, in the variable display of the special symbol of the first variable time, only the staging that is out of alignment without a certain reach effect may be executed, and in the variable display of the special symbol of the first variable time, the variable display may be performed. An effect other than an effect that is not accompanied by a certain reach effect may be executed. Further, in the variable display of the special symbol of the first variable time, an effect that is out of alignment without a certain reach effect may be executed without fail, and in the variable display of the special symbol of the first variable time, or There may be cases where an out-of-order effect is not executed without a reach effect.

Further, in the variable display of the special symbol of the first variable time, an effect that is out of alignment may be executed without being accompanied only by a certain reach effect, and in the variable display of the special symbol of the first variable time, or A staggered staging may be performed without a staging other than the reach staging. Further, the staging that is different without a certain reach effect may be executed only in the variable display of the special symbol of the first variable time, or the variable display of the special symbol other than the first variable time may be performed. An out-of-order effect may be performed without a certain reach effect.

Further, in the variable display of the special symbol of the second variable time, only the effect that is out of alignment after a certain reach effect is performed may be executed, and in the variable display of the special symbol of the second variable time, the variable display may be performed. , An effect other than an effect that is out of alignment after a certain reach effect is performed may be executed. Further, in the variable display of the special symbol of the second variable time, an effect that is shifted after a certain reach effect is performed may always be executed, and in the variable display of the special symbol of the second variable time, the effect may be shifted. , After a certain reach effect is performed, the effect that is out of alignment may not be executed.

Further, in the variable display of the special symbol of the second variable time, an effect that is off may be executed only after a certain reach effect is performed, and in the variable display of the special symbol of the second variable time, the effect may be performed. , An out-of-order effect may be performed even after a certain reach effect has been performed. Further, only in the variable display of the special symbol of the second variable time, an effect that is different after a certain reach effect is performed may be executed, or the variable display of the special symbol other than the second variable time may be executed. However, after a certain reach effect is performed, an effect that is out of alignment may be executed.

Further, the second timing may be set only after a certain reach effect is performed in a certain symbol variation display and at least it becomes recognizable to the player that it is out of alignment, or a certain symbol variation display may be performed. The second timing may be set other than after a certain reach effect is performed and at least the player can recognize that the reach is out of alignment. Further, the second timing may always be set after a certain reach effect is performed in a certain symbol variation display and at least it becomes recognizable to the player that it is out of alignment, or a certain symbol variation display may be performed. In some cases, the second timing may not be reached after a certain reach effect is performed and at least it becomes recognizable to the player.

Further, the second timing may be set after a certain reach effect is performed in a certain symbol variation display and at least the deviation is recognizable only by the player, or a certain symbol variation display may be performed. In, the second timing may be set after a certain reach effect is performed and at least it becomes recognizable to other than the player. Further, the second timing may be set after the player can recognize only that a certain reach effect is performed in a certain symbol variation display and the player can recognize it, or in a certain symbol variation display. The second timing may be set after the player can recognize something other than the fact that a certain reach effect is performed and the player is out of order.

Further, the second timing may be set after the player can recognize that only a certain reach effect is performed in a certain symbol variation display and at least it is out of alignment, or a certain symbol variation display. In, the second timing may be set after an effect other than a certain reach effect is performed and at least the player can recognize that the effect is off. Further, the second timing may be set after a certain reach effect is performed only in a certain symbol variation display and at least it becomes recognizable to the player that it is out of alignment, or a certain symbol variation display. Even in the symbol variation display other than the above, the second timing may be set after a certain reach effect is performed and at least it becomes recognizable to the player that it is out of alignment.

Further, "when the certain symbol variation display is a variation display of a special symbol that is a big hit, the notification effect is not executed [for example, FIGS. 32 (a) to (e) and (f2) to FIG. As shown in (i2), if there is a big hit in the symbol variation display that will shift to the play time, the notification that the play time will shift is not given, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make the player expect that the notification effect is not performed in a certain symbol variation display by functioning as a big hit notice.

Here, when a certain symbol variation display is a variation display of a special symbol that is a big hit, it is not necessary to execute only the notification effect, and a certain symbol variation display is a variation display of a special symbol that is a big hit. In that case, it is not necessary to execute an effect other than the notification effect. Further, when a certain symbol variation display is a variation display of a special symbol which is a big hit, the notification effect does not necessarily have to be executed, and when a certain symbol variation display is a variation display of a special symbol which is a big hit. May execute a notification effect.

Further, the notification effect does not have to be executed only when a certain symbol variation display is a variation display of a special symbol which is a big hit, and when a certain symbol variation display is a variation display of a special symbol which is a big hit. In other cases, the notification effect may not be executed.

Further, "when the probability setting change operation is accepted, any one of the probability settings is selected from the plurality of probability settings [for example, in the setting change process (step S117) of the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 7). It is possible to set one of multiple settings by pressing the setting change button 194], etc.
The notification effect is an effect that may suggest information about the setting [for example, as shown in FIG. 32 (f'), the display of "play time rush !!" is displayed in a direction different from the usual direction. Suggests that the setting is 4 or more],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, dissatisfaction with the fit up to a predetermined rotation may be reduced by giving the setting information to the player.

Here, when the probability setting operation is accepted, only one of the probability settings may be selected from the plurality of probability settings, or when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the plurality of probability settings may be selected. Settings other than one probability setting may be selected. Further, when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the probability settings may be always selected from the plurality of probability settings, and when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the plurality of probability settings may be selected. One probability setting may not be selected.

Further, when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the probability settings may be selected from only a plurality of probability settings, and when the probability setting operation is accepted, the settings other than the plurality of probability settings may be selected. Any one probability setting may be selected. Further, only when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the probability settings may be selected from the plurality of probability settings, and even when the probability setting operation is not accepted, the plurality of probability settings may be selected. Any one of the probability settings may be selected from.

Further, the notification effect may suggest only information about the setting, or may suggest information other than the information about the setting. Further, the notification effect may always suggest information about the setting, or may not suggest the information about the setting.

In addition, "One of the plurality of effects is the second effect.
The second effect is information on the period until the start of the second time saving state [for example, information on the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time shown in FIG. 18A, the number of start times between special prizes (TS). Information about] at least suggesting,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may suggest only the information about the period until the second time saving state starts, or the information other than the information about the period until the second time saving state starts. May also suggest. Further, the second effect may always suggest information on the period until the second time saving state starts, or does not suggest information on the period until the second time saving state starts. It may be something that has.

Further, "the second effect is an effect including at least information suggesting the number of fits [for example, information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS) shown in FIG. 18A]".
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of fits, or may include information other than the information suggesting the number of fits. Further, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of fits, or may not include information suggesting the number of fits.

Further, "The second effect is information that at least suggests the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, up to the play time shown in FIG. 18A. Information including the number of times the symbol changes are displayed]
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the number of fittings becomes the first number, or the number of fittings becomes the first number. It may include information other than the information suggesting the number of times of variation display of the special symbol up to. Further, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of fittings becomes the first number, and the number of fittings becomes the first number. It may not include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol up to.

Further, "The second effect is an effect that can be performed in one of a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is not clearly displayed]. can be,
One of the plurality of embodiments is the second embodiment [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is clearly displayed, etc.]. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
The second effect may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on [for example, as shown in FIG. 21D, after the power is turned on, the symbol variation display until the play time is displayed. Information about the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
When the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. 22, the off-target SP reach is executed, etc.] is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second condition is satisfied. The effect of the above changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (g) to 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is unclear. When the out-of-SP reach is executed in the state shown in the embodiment, the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear embodiment, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be feasible only in one of a plurality of aspects, or may be feasible in a mode other than one of the plurality of aspects. You may. Further, the second effect may be always executed in one of a plurality of embodiments, or may not be executed in one of a plurality of embodiments. ..

Further, only the second effect may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the notification other than the second effect in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may always be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may not be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be good.

Further, the second effect may be executed only in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in an aspect other than the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may be executed in the first aspect only after the power is turned on, and the second effect may be executed in the first aspect other than after the power is turned on. May be done.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed only from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect without fail. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, only the second effect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the effects other than the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Further, if only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If a condition other than the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied except after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started only in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the first aspect may be changed. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in an aspect other than the above aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "the game control means has a first time saving state [for example, an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time saving state) that shifts after the big hit game for a normal big hit is completed]. It ’s a startable means,
The first time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the first time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the first time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

Further, the first time saving state may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the big hit game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. Further, the first time saving state may be always started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may be a thing.

Further, "the game control means can start a third time saving state [for example, an electric support state in which a time saving symbol is suddenly displayed and transitions (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time saving state)]. Means,
The third time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when a time saving symbol [for example, "special figure E" etc.] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol.
The time-saving symbol is a symbol different from the jackpot symbol.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the third time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the third time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the third time saving state, or may not start the third time saving state.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may be started in a case other than the case where is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be started whenever the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol is displayed as the result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may not be started.

In addition, "when the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the second time is displayed. The second time saving state ends,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of misses is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, only the second time saving state ends. Or, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of misses is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the state other than the second time saving state is displayed. You may finish. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Character display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means that can control the game state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
A look-ahead notice means that can execute a look-ahead notice [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means that can be controlled to a first game state [for example, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, etc.].
The game control means is a means that can be controlled to a second game state [for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, etc.].
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
A certain condition [for example, the symbol variation display was executed 750 times after the jackpot was completed, or as a result of the symbol variation display of special figure 1, a time-saving symbol (“special symbol E”) was suddenly displayed. When the variation display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "a certain special symbol variation display") is executed, the first gaming state is changed to the second gaming state without a big hit. Migrate and
The look-ahead notice means is a means for not executing the look-ahead notice regarding the variable display of the special symbol whose start is suspended after the start of the certain special symbol variable display is suspended [for example, as shown in FIG. 34. In addition, there is no pre-reading notice regarding the symbol variation display that was suspended after the symbol variation display that will shift to play time],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the look-ahead notice means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the look-ahead notice means.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing display other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling a state other than the game state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the look-ahead notice means may be capable of executing only the look-ahead notice, or may be capable of executing other than the look-ahead notice. Further, the look-ahead notice means may be one that always executes the look-ahead notice, or may be one that does not execute the look-ahead notice.

Further, the game control means may be one that can be controlled only in the first game state, or may be controllable in a game state other than the first game state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the first game state, or may not be controlled only in the first game state.

Further, the game control means may be one that can be controlled only in the second gaming state, or may be one that can be controlled in a gaming state other than the second gaming state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the second gaming state, or may not be controlled only in the second gaming state.

Further, the second gaming state may be more advantageous than only the first gaming state, or may be more advantageous than the gaming states other than the first gaming state. Further, the second gaming state may be always more advantageous than the first gaming state, or may be less advantageous than the first gaming state.

Further, when the variable display of the special symbol that satisfies a certain condition is executed, the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state may be performed without becoming a big hit, and a certain condition is satisfied. When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the game state may be changed from the first game state to a game state other than the second game state without becoming a big hit. Further, when the variable display of the special symbol that satisfies a certain condition is executed, the first gaming state may be surely changed to the second gaming state without becoming a big hit, and a certain condition is satisfied. When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, it may not shift from the first gaming state to the second gaming state without becoming a big hit.

Further, when the variable display of the special symbol that satisfies a certain condition is executed, the transition from only the first gaming state to the second gaming state may be performed without becoming a big hit, and a certain condition is satisfied. When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the game state other than the first game state may be changed to the second game state without becoming a big hit. Further, only when the variable display of the special symbol that satisfies a certain condition is executed, the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state may be performed without becoming a big hit, and a certain condition is satisfied. In cases other than the case where the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the first gaming state may be changed to the second gaming state without becoming a big hit.

Further, if the variable display of the special symbol is executed only when a certain condition is satisfied, the first gaming state may be changed to the second gaming state without becoming a big hit, or other than a certain condition. If the variable display of the special symbol is executed even when the condition of is satisfied, the first gaming state may be changed to the second gaming state without becoming a big hit.

Further, the pre-reading notice means may not execute only the pre-reading notice regarding the variable display of the special symbol whose start is suspended after the start of the special symbol variable display is suspended. The notice other than the pre-reading notice regarding the change display of the special symbol whose start is suspended after the start of the special symbol variation display is suspended may not be executed. Further, the pre-reading notice means may not always execute the pre-reading notice regarding the variable display of the special symbol whose start is suspended after the start of the special symbol variable display is suspended. In some cases, a look-ahead notice regarding the variable display of the special symbol whose start is suspended after the start of the special symbol variable display is suspended may be executed.

Further, the pre-reading notice means may not execute the pre-reading notice only for the variable display of the special symbol whose start is suspended after the start of the special symbol variable display is suspended. The pre-reading notice regarding the variable display of the special symbol other than the variable display of the special symbol whose start is suspended after the start of the special symbol variable display is suspended may not be executed. Further, the pre-reading notice means may not execute the pre-reading notice regarding the variable display of the special symbol whose start is suspended after only the start of a certain special symbol variable display is suspended. The pre-reading notice regarding the variable display of the special symbol whose start is suspended after the start of the variable display of the special symbol other than the special symbol variable display is suspended may not be executed.

Further, "the symbol display means is a means including a first symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212 or the like] and a second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214 or the like]. can be,
The variable display of the special symbol by the second symbol display means (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variable display”) is the variable display of the special symbol by the first symbol display means (hereinafter, “first symbol”). It is a symbol variation display that can be executed with priority over "variation display".
The first game state is a game state in which the first symbol variation display is more likely to be started than the second symbol variation display.
The second gaming state is a gaming state in which the second symbol variation display is more likely to be started than the first symbol variation display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust by not giving a pre-reading notice to the first symbol change display remaining in the first game state due to the change in the game state. In some cases.

Here, the symbol display means may include only the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, and the symbol display means other than the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means may also be included. It may be included. Further, the symbol display means may always include the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, or may not include the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means. It may be a thing.

Further, the second symbol variation display may be executed with priority over only the first symbol variation display, or may be executed with priority over the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. It may be possible. Further, the second symbol variation display may always be executed with priority over the first symbol variation display, or may not be executed with priority over the first symbol variation display. There may be.

Further, the first gaming state may be one in which only the first symbol variation display is easier to start than the second symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation display is easier than the second symbol variation display. A symbol variation display other than the variation display may be easier to start. Further, the first game state may be such that the first symbol variation display is more likely to be started than the second symbol variation display, and the first symbol variation display is easier than the second symbol variation display. The variable display may not be easier to start.

Further, the second gaming state may be one in which only the second symbol variation display is more likely to be started than the first symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display is easier than the first symbol variation display. A symbol variation display other than the variation display may be easier to start. Further, the second game state may be such that the second symbol variation display is more likely to be started than the first symbol variation display, and the second symbol variation display is easier than the first symbol variation display. The variable display may not be easier to start.

Further, "The second symbol variation display is more likely to be an advantageous jackpot when it is a jackpot than the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 9 (c), special figure 1 It is easier to get a 10R probability variation big hit when it gets a big hit in Special Figure 2 than when it gets a big hit in.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the big hit just before the game state shifts is pleasing to the player, but there is also a feeling that he wanted the big hit with the advantageous second symbol variation display, so it will not be fanned by excessive production. It may be possible to do so.

Here, the second symbol variation display may be more likely to be an advantageous jackpot only when it becomes a jackpot than the first symbol variation display, and the second symbol may be more likely to be a second symbol than the first symbol variation display. The variable display may be more likely to be an advantageous jackpot in cases other than the case where the jackpot is a jackpot. In addition, the second symbol variation display may be more likely to be an advantageous jackpot in the event of a jackpot than the first symbol variation display, and the second symbol variation may be more likely than the first symbol variation display. In some cases, the display may not be more likely to be an advantageous jackpot when it is a jackpot.

Further, only the second symbol variation display may be more likely to be an advantageous jackpot in the case of a jackpot than the first symbol variation display, and the second symbol variation may be more likely than the first symbol variation display. The symbol variation display other than the display may be more likely to be an advantageous big hit when it becomes a big hit.

In addition, "the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game is completed and the state shifts to the first game state (hereinafter referred to as" the number of fits "). When the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.] is reached, the above-mentioned certain condition is satisfied.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, there is a case where the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state becomes the first number of times. Only the condition may be satisfied, or the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state is the first. When the number of times is one, a condition other than a certain condition may be satisfied. In addition, it is a certain condition that the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state becomes the first number of times. May always be established, and the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state is the first. When the number of times is reached, a certain condition may not be satisfied.

In addition, when the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state becomes the first number of times. However, a certain condition may be satisfied, and the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of order is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state. A certain condition may be satisfied in cases other than the case where is the first number of times.

In addition, it is possible that only the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state becomes the first number of times. The condition may be satisfied, or the number of times other than the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state. When is the first number of times, a certain condition may be satisfied.

In addition, there is a case where the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit only after the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state becomes the first number of times. The condition may be satisfied, or after the big hit game ends and the game state shifts to a game state other than the first game state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the game is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit. When the number of times becomes the first number, a certain condition may be satisfied. In addition, there is a case where the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after only the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state becomes the first number of times. The condition may be satisfied, and after the game state other than the big hit game ends and the game state shifts to the first game state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the game is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit. When the number of times becomes the first number, a certain condition may be satisfied.

In addition, "the pre-reading notice means shifts from the symbol variation display executed 10 times before the symbol variation display to shift to the play time to the play time" in the first period [for example, the symbol variation to shift to the play time. It is a means that does not execute the look-ahead notice in [Period until display, etc.]
The first period is the period after the execution of the variation display of the special symbol is started a certain number of times [for example, 10 times, etc.] before the certain special symbol variation display, and then the certain special symbol variation display ends. It is the period until
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the big hit just before the game state shifts is pleasing to the player, but there is also a feeling that he wanted the big hit with the advantageous second symbol variation display, so it will not be fanned by excessive production. It may be possible to do so.

Here, the look-ahead notice means may not execute only the look-ahead notice in the first period, or may not execute anything other than the look-ahead notice in the first period. Further, the look-ahead notice means may not always execute the look-ahead notice in the first period, or may execute the look-ahead notice in the first period. Further, the look-ahead notice means may not execute the look-ahead notice only in the first period, or may not execute the look-ahead notice in a period other than the first period.

Further, "The pre-reading notice means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of pre-reading notices.
The look-ahead notice means is a look-ahead notice of at least one of the plurality of types of look-ahead notices in the first period [for example, a look-ahead notice at the time of winning in which the character of Mr. Machiko shown in FIG. 33 (b) appears]. Is a means of not doing
The first period means that the certain special symbol variation display ends after the execution of the special symbol variation display is started a certain number of times before the certain special symbol variation display [for example, 10 times, etc.]. It is the period until
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the look-ahead notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of look-ahead notices, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of look-ahead notices. Further, the look-ahead notice means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of look-ahead notices, or may not execute a plurality of types of look-ahead notices.

Further, the look-ahead notice means may not execute only at least one kind of look-ahead notice among a plurality of types of look-ahead notices in the first period, or may be a device that does not execute only one kind of look-ahead notice in the first period. It may not execute anything other than at least one of the look-ahead notices. Further, the look-ahead notice means may not always execute at least one kind of look-ahead notice among a plurality of types of look-ahead notices in the first period, or may be a device that does not always execute the look-ahead notice of a plurality of types of look-ahead notices in the first period. It may be one that may perform at least one of these look-ahead notices.

Further, the look-ahead notice means may not execute the look-ahead notice of only one of the plurality of types of look-ahead notices in the first period, or may be one of the plurality of types of look-ahead notices in the first period. It may not execute a look-ahead notice of a type other than one type. Further, the look-ahead notice means may not execute at least one kind of look-ahead notice among the plurality of types of look-ahead notice only in the first period, or may be a plurality of types in a period other than the first period. It may not execute at least one kind of look-ahead notice.

Further, "when the first period starts, a certain effect mode [for example, a play time precursor effect mode that starts after the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 35 (b) is started] is started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the first period starts, only a certain effect mode may be started, or when the first period starts, an effect mode other than a certain effect mode may be started. Further, when the first period starts, a certain effect mode may be started without fail, and when the first period starts, a certain effect mode may not start.

Further, when only the first period starts, a certain effect mode may be started, or when a period other than the first period starts, a certain effect mode may be started.

Further, "in the first gaming state, when a time-saving symbol [for example," special symbol E "etc.] is displayed as a result of variable display of the special symbol, the above-mentioned certain condition is satisfied.
The time saving symbol is a symbol different from the jackpot symbol,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the first gaming state, if the time-saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, only a certain condition may be satisfied, or in the first gaming state, the variation display of the special symbol may be satisfied. As a result, when the time saving symbol is displayed, a condition other than a certain condition may be satisfied. Further, in the first gaming state, a certain condition may always be satisfied when the time-saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or in the first gaming state, the result of the variation display of the special symbol. When the time saving symbol is displayed, a certain condition may not be satisfied.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain condition may be satisfied only when the time-saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, and in the first gaming state, the result of the variation display of the special symbol. A certain condition may be satisfied in cases other than the case where the time saving symbol is displayed. Further, a certain condition may be satisfied when the time-saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol only in the first gaming state, and the special symbol may be satisfied even in the gaming state other than the first gaming state. A certain condition may be satisfied when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Character display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means that can control the game state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
A staging means capable of executing a plurality of staging [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of controlling a low probability state [for example, a special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [for example, a special figure high probability state, etc.].
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state), etc.].
In the second time saving state, the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the outlier is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter, "fitting"). When the number of times (referred to as "number of times") becomes the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.], it is a time-saving state that may shift.
One of the plurality of effects is the second effect.
The second effect includes at least information on the second time saving state [for example, information on the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time, information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS), etc. shown in FIG. 18A]. It is a suggestive production
The second effect may be executed in the notice mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), the display mode of the information regarding the number of symbol variation display times until the play time is changed and the symbol is being executed. A big hit notice regarding the fluctuation display has been made, etc.],
By executing the second effect in the above-mentioned notice mode, it is notified that there is a possibility of a big hit.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the staging means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the staging means.

Further, according to this game table, by making the suggestion effect function as a notice, it may be possible to always pay attention to the upper part up to the second time saving state.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing display other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling a state other than the game state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the staging means may be one that can execute only a plurality of staging, or may be one that can execute a staging other than the plurality of staging. Further, the staging means may be one that always executes a plurality of staging, or may not perform a plurality of staging.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may be controllable to a state other than the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not be controlled to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low probability state, or the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a jackpot than the low probability state. It may be in a state where the probability other than the probability of becoming is high. In addition, the high-probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit is always higher than that in the low-probability state, and the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a jackpot than the low-probability state. It may not be in a state where the probability of becoming is high.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may be one that always starts the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

In addition, in the second time saving state, only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state is the first. It may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of order is displayed continuously without becoming a jackpot. It may be the one that may shift when the number of times other than the number of times becomes the first number of times. In addition, after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit is always changed to the first number. It may be there, or it will shift when the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is displayed is the first number of times without becoming a big hit after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the second effect may suggest only the information regarding the second time saving state, or may suggest information other than the information regarding the second time saving state. Further, the second effect may always suggest information about the second time saving state, or may not suggest information about the second time saving state.

Further, the second effect may be executed only in the notice mode, or the second effect may be executed in a mode other than the notice mode. Further, the second effect may always be executed in the notice mode, or the second effect may not be executed in the notice mode.

Further, it may be notified only that there is a possibility of a big hit by executing the second effect in the notice mode, or it becomes a big hit by executing the second effect in the notice mode. You may also be informed of things other than the possibility. In addition, it may be notified that there is a possibility of a big hit by executing the second effect in the notice mode, or it becomes a big hit by executing the second effect in the notice mode. It may not be notified that there is a possibility.

In addition, "during the execution of the special symbol variation display, the mode of the second effect changes to the notice mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), the symbol variation display up to the play time during the symbol variation display". The display mode of information about the number of times has changed],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the mode of the second effect may be changed only to the notice mode during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, or the mode of the second effect is other than the notice mode during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It may also change in mode. Further, the mode of the second effect may always change to the notice mode during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the mode of the second effect does not change to the notice mode during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. There may be cases.

In addition, "By executing the second effect in the above-mentioned notice mode, the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit.
One of the plurality of effects is a look-ahead advance notice effect [for example, a hold notice due to the display of the Sabohani icon shown in FIG. 37 (a)].
The certain look-ahead notice effect is started before the variation display of the special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "preliminary target symbol variation display") in which the second effect is executed in the advance notice mode is started. It is started during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and is also executed during the execution of the variable display of the target symbol [for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), the icon of Sabohani is displayed as a variable icon and is also executed. The display mode of the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time has changed, and a big hit notice regarding the running symbol variation display has been given, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to excite the game with the expectation that a combination of the second effect according to the advance notice mode will be performed at the time when a certain look-ahead advance notice effect is started.

Here, by executing the second effect in the notice mode, it may be notified only that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit, or the second effect in the notice mode may be notified. By executing the effect of, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit. In addition, by executing the second effect in the notice mode, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit, and the second effect in the notice mode may be used. By executing the effect, it may not be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit.

Further, by executing the second effect in the notice mode, it may be notified that only the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit, or the second effect in the notice mode may be notified. By executing the effect, it may be notified that a result other than the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit. Further, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit only by executing the second effect in the notice mode, or the second effect in the notice mode. Other than the execution of the effect, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit.

Further, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit only when the second effect is executed in the notice mode, and the second effect in the notice mode may be notified. Other than the effect being executed, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit. Further, by executing only the second effect in the notice mode, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit, or the second effect in the notice mode may be used. By executing an effect other than the effect, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit.

Further, by executing the second effect only in the notice mode, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit, or in a mode other than the notice mode. By executing the second effect, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit.

Further, a certain look-ahead notice effect is started during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol that is started before the variation display of the special symbol in which the second effect is executed in the advance mode is started, and is subject to the advance notice. It may be executed only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or during the execution of the special symbol variation display that is started before the special symbol variation display is started in which the second effect is executed in the notice mode. It may be executed even when the notice target symbol variation display is not being executed. Further, a certain look-ahead notice effect is started during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol that is started before the variation display of the special symbol in which the second effect is executed in the advance mode is started, and is subject to the advance notice. It may be executed without fail during the execution of the symbol variation display, or during the execution of the special symbol variation display that is started before the special symbol variation display is started in which the second effect is executed in the notice mode. It may not be executed even during the execution of the symbol change display subject to the notice.

Further, a certain look-ahead notice effect is started only during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol that is started before the variation display of the special symbol in which the second effect is executed in the advance mode is started, and the notice is given. The target symbol variation display may be executed even during execution, or the second effect is executed in the advance notice mode. It may also be started during the execution of the notice target symbol variation display.

Further, a certain look-ahead notice effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, which is started only before the variable display of the special symbol in which the second effect is executed in the notice mode is started. The target symbol variation display may be executed even during execution, or the special symbol variation display that is started other than before the start of the special symbol variation display in which the second effect is executed in the notice mode is being executed. It may be executed even during the execution of the notice target symbol variation display.

Further, the "information regarding the second time saving state" is "information regarding the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, shown in FIG. 18A. Information on the number of times the symbol changes are displayed until the play time] ”.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second effect may be executed in a normal mode [for example, a display mode of displaying the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time shown in FIG. 37 (b)].
The notice mode is a mode in which at least one of the color, size, and display area modes is different from the normal mode.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be performed only in the normal mode, or the second effect may be performed in a mode other than the normal mode. Further, the second effect may always be performed in the normal mode, or the second effect may not be performed in the normal mode.

Further, only the second effect may be executed in the normal mode, or the effects other than the second effect may be performed in the normal mode.

In addition, "when the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the second time is displayed. The second time saving state is over,
The second effect is not executed during the period from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit [for example, after shifting to the play time and the play time ends, the big hit It will not shift to play time again until it becomes],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of misses is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, only the second time saving state ends. Or, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of misses is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the state other than the second time saving state is displayed. You may finish. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, if the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

Further, it is not necessary that only the second effect is executed during the period from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. It is not necessary to perform an effect other than the second effect during the period of. In addition, the second effect does not necessarily have to be executed during the period from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. The second effect may be performed during the period of.

Further, the second effect may not be executed only during the period from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. The second effect may not be executed even in a period other than the period of. Further, the second effect may not be executed during the period from the end of only the second time reduction state to the big hit, and after the game state other than the second time reduction state is completed. It is not necessary that the second effect is executed in the period until the big hit.

In addition, "the second effect is not executed in the period from the start of the second time reduction state to the big hit [for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (w), the play time ends. Then, the information about the number of times the symbol change is displayed until the play time is deleted, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it is not necessary that only the second effect is executed in the period from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and the big hit is obtained after the second time saving state ends. It is not necessary to perform an effect other than the second effect during the period up to. In addition, the second effect does not necessarily have to be executed during the period from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. The second effect may be performed during the period of.

Further, the second effect may not be executed only during the period from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. The second effect may not be executed even in a period other than the period of. Further, the second effect may not be executed during the period from the end of only the second time reduction state to the big hit, and after the game state other than the second time reduction state is completed. It is not necessary that the second effect is executed in the period until the big hit.

Further, "The second effect is an effect that is started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state [for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), the big hit game ends and a time is shortened. When the state (special figure low probability state) is entered, information about the number of times the symbol changes are displayed until the play time is displayed],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be started only when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or other than the case where the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may also be initiated in some cases. Further, the second effect may be always started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state. May be.

In addition, "the game control means has a first time saving state [for example, an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time saving state) that shifts after the big hit game for a normal big hit is completed]. It ’s a startable means,
The first time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the first time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the first time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

Further, the first time saving state may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the big hit game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. Further, the first time saving state may be always started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may be a thing.

Further, "the game control means can start a third time saving state [for example, an electric support state in which a time saving symbol is suddenly displayed and transitions (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time saving state)]. Means,
The third time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol.
The time saving symbol is a symbol different from the jackpot symbol,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the third time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the third time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the third time saving state, or may not start the third time saving state.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may be started in a case other than the case where is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be started whenever the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol is displayed as the result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may not be started.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 0)
A symbol display means that can execute variable display of special symbols,
A game control means that can control the game state,
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means that can be controlled into a low-probability state and a high-probability state.
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state.
The second time saving state is the number of times (hereinafter, "" It is a time-saving state that may shift when the number of fits is the first.
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of misses is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the second time saving state ends.
The second time saving state is not started from the end of the second time saving state until a big hit.
A game table featuring that.

FIG. 38 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 38, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the gaming area 902 is discharged from the gaming area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned display means 903 may be further provided on the upper plate 126 of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, and further, the above-mentioned display means 903 is provided with a touch panel. You may. That is, the touch panel provided on the display means 903 can function as an operation means. Then, the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, the continuous press operation, or the long press operation by the touch panel, or when the long press auto continuous press function is in the effective state, the touch panel. May be configured to perform a pseudo-continuous hitting operation on the touch panel while the touch panel is continuously touched. Further, it may be configured so as not to enable the long press auto continuous striking function. Further, in some productions, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press auto-striking function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured to have many effects to be activated, or may be configured to have few effects. .. Further, there are a plurality of effects by the continuous striking operation on the touch panel, and when the touch panel is used, the long press auto continuous striking function may be configured so as not to be effective in many cases, or may be configured to be less effective. ..

As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 38 is used by enclosing a ball and circulating the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine. The enclosed ball is used as a launching ball and the ball is discharged. May be performed by credit.

Next, a slot machine (rotary body gaming machine) as a gaming table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 39. Here, FIG. 39 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 39 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 39), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored, and the slot machine 1000 has. It is configured to be able to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 1010 to 1012. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting part and the light receiving part of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 medals are bet and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a downhill winning line and an upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for staging.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, a maximum of three medals are inserted each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. It is designed to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize in some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of the operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel subject to the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, the reel subject to the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel subject to the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 1034 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of the operating means. The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states as in the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In this embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operating means.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided at the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, and the title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the bottom of the title panel 1062, a medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1060 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 composed of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The game console according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 40 (a), "a bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 2002, a lottery is executed based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operations, and the lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 2008. However, at the time of winning, the number of privilege coins is added to the number of remaining credits, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits. " May be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 3C, electronic data for realizing the present invention. It may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the present invention, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data according to the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in the figure (b) has an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game through the mobile phone line, and data related to the acquired game (book). It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 4000 in the figure (c) has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game (the present invention). It is provided with a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the above, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in the figure (d) has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game ( It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 3D via an Internet line.

Further, the present invention can be applied to execute a game even in a game program in which the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home-use game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as the recording medium for recording the game program.

Further, the present invention has given an example of a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. It should be noted that even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be the other embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendices, etc. are applied to other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, appendices, etc., it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating body game machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 41 to 61. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 41 to 61 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 41 to 61, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 41 to 41 to 61 are used. In the description using FIG. 61, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 41 to 61 are given priority.
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 41. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door 108 with a ball storage plate. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. A clerk at a game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and the speaker 120, the left frame lamp 122L, the right frame lamp 122R, and the upper frame lamp 122U are provided on the front side. Is attached. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. The front frame door 106 corresponds to an example of a door body. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member mounted on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 with respect to the lower side of the main body 104 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage dish is opened by pushing an open lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage dish for detecting that the door 108 with a ball storage dish has been opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate 126 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A ball removal button 130 for ejecting the game ball stored in the ball storage plate 126 from the ball storage plate 126 by the player's operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation on the game board. A ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, an effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices by the operation of the player, and a button lamp 138 that is built in the effect button 136 and emits light of the effect button 136. , A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store is provided. Further, although not shown in FIG. 41, a return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance is also provided on the right side of the ball lending operation button 140. Further, it also has an operation key unit 190 in which a cross key and an enter button are arranged.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching mallet 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. The launching device 110 launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player. It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means.

42 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 41 as viewed from the back side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game ball and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable and, when mounted at a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 44). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the ball storage dish 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to reach a predetermined state. Based on the fact that the granting condition is satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the granting condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 44) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 44) that performs control processing related to the effect. A second sub-board case 166 for accommodating a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 44) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 44). A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes (see FIG. 44) and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launch of a game ball (FIG. 44). A power switch that configures a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices (see FIG. 44), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The interface unit 606 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change key 192, the setting change button 194, and the accessory ratio / setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In the present embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change mode can be set to at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities. Can be migrated to. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner visible to the clerk. As shown in FIG. 411 (A), the accessory ratio / setting display 196 has double-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged one above the other, and one-digit 7-segment LEDs modularized on the right side. The bonus ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the bonus ratio (YH) and the continuous bonus ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a red monochromatic LED, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. It should be noted that at least a part of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that the player can see it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 43A is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. Here, the arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions in which the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand may be referred to as the right in front view. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher one may be referred to as upper and the lower one may be referred to as lower. Although not shown in FIG. 43, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side to be the player side may be referred to as the front side or the front side, and the back side may be referred to as the rear side. Or it may be called the back side.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, the front left side portion 200a of the game board 200 is inserted into the front view left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the main body 104, and here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the game board 200 is rotated around the center of rotation and the right side portion 200b of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 to be set. With such a structure, workability can be improved. In some cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to the game board 201 which is a plate-shaped main body. The game board 201 is formed of, for example, resin, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface displaying a character or the like of the pachinko machine 100. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which a character of the pachinko machine 100 or the like is printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged at the lower right of the game plate 201. When it is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, game stop that makes it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached to and detached from the main body 104. Of the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the launched game ball.

Areas other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be referred to as a non-game area. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished from each other with the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes with the firing intensity of the game ball maximized can be referred to as at least the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area in which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of the effect device or the like in the game area 124. The game area 124 may be referred to as a flow area at the point where the game ball flows down during the game, and the non-game area may be referred to as the non-flow area at the point where the game ball does not flow down during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but an area in which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of a staging device or the like may be referred to as a non-flow-down area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , A 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the game area 124.

FIG. 43B is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board 254.

As shown in FIG. 43 (b), the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the normal symbol hold lamp 216 are on the main control lamp board 254. , The special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp RK, the electric support middle lamp RD, the right-handed lamp RM, and the round display lamp RR are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and in this embodiment, it is composed of two vertical LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, they are each composed of two upper and lower stages, for a total of eight LEDs.

The normal map holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure variable games held, and in the present embodiment, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure variable games. It is supposed to be. Further, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure variable games held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). Is possible.

Further, the high-probability middle lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is in a high-probability state. The electric support lamp RD is a lamp for indicating that the blade member 2311 of the electric tulip (electric chew), which will be described later, is in an electric support state where it is easy to open for a long time, while the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is shortened. .. The right-handed display lamp RM is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a jackpot game state, a probability change state, and an electric support state, and is in a state where the player can obtain the benefit by hitting right. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the big hit game related to the big hit when the big hit is made.

The game board 200 shown in FIG. 43 (a) is provided with a warp device 242 and a stage 244 in a rollable area of the game ball. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the warp outlet 242b to the stage 244. The stage 244 is provided below and in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is a stage in which the game ball passing through the warp device 242 shows movements such as reciprocating motion and rotational motion. In this stage 244, the game ball reciprocates or rotates, so that the residence time of the game ball becomes long.

Further, in the upper part of the game area 124, the first staging movable body 7 is arranged supported by the main body 104. The first staging movable body 7 is provided with a rectangular light emitting portion 71 in which a plurality of light emitting diodes capable of emitting light in full color are arranged. Further, on the right side of the game area 124, a second staging movable body 8 imitating the right arm of a person is arranged. The second effect movable body 8 is composed of an upper arm portion 81 and a forearm portion 82, and has an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm portion at the shoulder position and a forearm portion (not shown) that rotates the forearm portion at the elbow position. It includes a motor and a finger motor (not shown) that bends and stretches five fingers. The second staging movable body 8 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a movable area by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

As shown in FIG. 43 (a), a part of the upper part of the game area 124 is covered with the decorative cover 203. Further, the upper right portion of the game area 124 is covered with the decorative upper right cover 205, and the normal drawing start opening 228 is arranged at the back (rear side) of the decorative upper right cover 205. The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged in. Balls that have passed through the starting port 228 are not discharged to the game island side, but when they enter, a predetermined number (for example, one) of prize balls are paid out and the entered game balls are ejected. It may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal map variation game by the normal map display device 210.

Further, in the present embodiment, one first special drawing start port 230 is arranged in the lower center of the game board 200. A star-shaped effect lamp 206 is arranged directly below the first special drawing start port 230. Further, a sub liquid crystal display device 207 is arranged on the left side of the first special drawing start port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of a ball into the first special figure start port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 42 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls is stored as a prize ball. At the same time as discharging to the plate 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Further, in the present embodiment, the attacker unit 23 is provided in the lower right portion of the game area 124, and the attacker unit 23 is also separately provided with the first special drawing start port of the electric chew type. Hereinafter, the first special figure start port 230 provided in the lower center of the game board 200 is referred to as the first special figure start port (fixed) 230, and the first special figure start of the electric chew type separately provided in the attacker unit 23. The mouth may be referred to as the first special figure starting port (variable) 231 to distinguish between the two. The blade member 2311 of the first special figure start port (variable) 231 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, forms a ball passage in a state of advancing, and is in a state where it is difficult to win a prize, and in a state of retreating, a state in which a prize is easily won. In the following description, the advancement of the blade member 2311 may be referred to as closing, and the retracting may be referred to as opening. Further, a light emitting diode (not shown) capable of emitting full color light is also arranged in the attacker unit 23.

Further, in addition to the first special figure starting port (variable) 231, the attacker unit 23 is also provided with a second special drawing starting port 232, a first variable winning opening 234, and a second variable winning opening 235. These variable winning openings may be referred to as "attackers". The first door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening (attacker) 234 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, forms a ball passage in the advanced state, and is in a difficult-to-win state, and in the retracted state, the winning is easy. In the following description, when the first door member 2341 is advanced, it may be referred to as closing, and when it is retracting, it may be referred to as opening. The second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening (attacker) 235 also advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, but unlike the first door member 2341, in the advanced state, it is in a state where it is easy to win while forming a ball passage, and it retreats. If you do, it will be difficult to win a prize. In the following description, when the second door member 2351 is advanced, it may be referred to as opening, and when it is retracting, it may be referred to as closing.

The first special drawing start port (fixed) 230 provided in the lower center shown in FIG. 43 (a) has a configuration in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter when hitting to the right due to its arrangement. .. On the other hand, in the central portion of the above-mentioned stage 244, there is a special route 244a that makes it easy for the ball that has reached the stage 244 to enter the first special figure start opening (fixed) 230 provided in the lower center of the game board 200. It is provided. It is also possible to aim at the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 from the left side without going through the stage 244. Therefore, the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230 provided at the lower center of the game board 200 is a starting port where a ball can be expected to enter by hitting left.

Further, although not shown, the game area 124 is provided with a plurality of general winning openings. When a ball enters the general winning opening, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning opening has won a prize, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls is used as a winning ball. Discharge to the ball storage dish 126. The ball that has entered the general winning opening is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In addition, a disk-shaped ball striking direction changing member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged in the game area 124, and any winning opening or start is provided at the bottom of the inner rail 204. An out port 240 is provided for guiding the ball that did not win a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the ball storage dish 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the hammer. And, it is launched into the game area 124 through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the launching mallet. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail, or the like, and wins a prize at various winning openings or starting openings. The out port 240 is reached without winning a prize at the start port or only by passing through the start port 228. Further, in the present embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed so as to open upward at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104. An out-ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of the game ball received at the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. The out-ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. In the present embodiment, all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including the game balls discharged from the out port 240 and the game balls winning in various winning openings) are accepted by the discharging ball receiving port. Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage, only the game balls discharged from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 44. The figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central portion of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (it is assumed that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a ball storage tray full tank sensor. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving and outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 in the basic circuit 302, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc., and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the second special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example,). , General figure hold lamp 216, special figure 1 hold lamp 218, special figure 2 hold lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp RK, electric support middle lamp RD, right-handed lamp RM, round display lamp RR, etc.) Drive circuit 330 and a drive means for driving a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 2311 of the first special figure start port (variable) 231 as an ordinary electric accessory, or a first variable prize as a special electric accessory. It is connected to a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including a drive means for driving the first door member 2341 of the port 234 and the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning port 235. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has won a prize in the first special figure starting ports 230 and 231, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output to. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, 231 and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1. Stored in the register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won a prize in the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly obtained. It is latched and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. is doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but the payout control unit 600 is configured so as not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. The game board lamp 442 includes a star-shaped effect lamp 206, a light emitting unit 71 provided in the first effect movable body 7, a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23, and the like. There is. Further, the game table frame lamp 452 includes a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, an upper frame lamp 122U, a button lamp 138 for emitting the effect button 136, and the like.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier), a first effect movable body 7 on the upper side shown in FIG. 43 (a), and a second on the right side. A drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of various effect devices such as the effect movable body 8, a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 is a basic circuit based on detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of various effect devices and the button sensor 426 that detects the pressing of various buttons constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. VDP (VDP) that reads out the image data or the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub liquid crystal display device 207. It is equipped with a video display processor) 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502. In the present embodiment, the memory 508 is used as the temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is composed of a recording medium (for example, EEPROM, flash memory, etc.) capable of holding the storage state even when the power supply is cut off. Thereby, for example, the information for displaying the display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or the setting is changed. A RAM whose stored information volatilizes when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. Ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor 1041 that detects that the main body 104 has opened, a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects that the front frame door 106 has opened, and the like, and includes the main body 104 and the front frame door. When the 106 is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the amount, the control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the launching rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and the ball feeding device 634 that supplies balls from the ball storage tray 126 to the launching device 110. Take control.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current and converts it into a predetermined voltage to control each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device by another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. Explain the types of special drawings and general drawings.

On condition that the first starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the starting ports 230 and 231 of the special figure 1, the variable game of the special figure 1 is started, and the ball is inserted at the starting port 232 of the special figure 2. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 blinks a part of the lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) among the eight lamps. "Variable display" (special figure variable game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 blinks a part of the lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) among the eight lamps. 2 variable display ”(special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as a variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be performed multiple times in succession.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specification for starting the variable display of the special figure in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 regardless of whether or not one special figure displays the variable display of the other special figure (such as this). Pachinko machines with various specifications are sometimes called "simultaneous fluctuation machines").

FIG. 45A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 45 (a), four types of special figures, "special figure A" to "special figure D", are shown. In FIG. 45A, a white portion in the figure indicates a lamp that is turned off, and a black portion indicates a lamp that is turned on.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols (“Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B”) are prepared as the stop symbol modes of Special Figure 1. "Special figure A" is a 6-round (R) normal jackpot symbol, and when "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to a jackpot game state in which the first variable winning opening 234 opens, and the jackpot game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. Further, "special figure B" is a 6R probability variable big hit symbol, and when "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 is opened to shift to a big hit game state, and control is performed after the big hit game is completed. The state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but it goes without saying that three or more types of jackpot symbols may be prepared. In addition, a big hit may be prepared in which it is practically difficult to win a prize in some rounds (for example, it is difficult to win a prize due to a short opening).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether it is a normal big hit or a probable variable big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability variation jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In this embodiment, as will be described later, there is almost no difference in the jackpot probability between the special figure low probability state and the special figure high probability state, and the special figure changes between the special figure low probability state and the special figure high probability state. The times are configured to vary greatly. In addition, after the end of the big hit game, the time may be shortened (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game is completed. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in an electric support state and is in a high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal map, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal map than in the low-probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). For example, the winning probability of a normal-figure variable game is 0/100 (that is, it is always out of order) in the normal-figure low-probability state (non-electric support state), whereas the normal-figure high-probability state (electric support state). ) Will rise to 100/100 (that is, it will always be a hit). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variation short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the blade member 2311 is more likely to open than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 2311, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because the game ball is picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and the prize of the game ball to the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235 is reduced. This is because there may be a disadvantage. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the opening period of the electric chew, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are all performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either of the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times of electric chew opening is performed, the probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is increased, and the electric support state (time saving state) is established. May be good. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 changes into a winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "Special Figure A" is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained for 50 times of the special figure variable game after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter, and the non-electric state is maintained at the 51st time. It shifts to the support state (normal low probability state). On the other hand, if a big hit without electric support (“Special Figure B”) is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. Further, when the "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, for the special figure 1, a small hit symbol (“special figure C”) is prepared in addition to the big hit symbol. In the case of a small hit with "Special Figure C", the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 opens for 0.06 seconds 12 times after the symbol is stopped. The opening time and the number of times of opening the second door member 2351 can be appropriately set. In the small hit game, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) into the second variable winning opening 235, or when a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired, the small hit game Is completed, and the second door member 2351 is not opened after that. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

In this embodiment, as described above, since the machine is a simultaneous variable machine, there may be a situation in which the special figure 2 is displaying the variable when the special figure 1 becomes a small hit and the game shifts to the small hit game. .. In this case, when a small hit occurs in Special Figure 1, the variable display of Special Figure 2 is interrupted, and when the small hit game related to the small hit ends, the variable display of Special Figure 2 is restarted. In addition, when the special figure 1 becomes a big hit and shifts to the big hit game, the special figure 2 is in a variable display, or when the special figure 2 becomes a big hit and shifts to the big hit game, the special figure 1 changes and displays. In this case, if one of the special maps becomes a big hit, the variable display of the other special map is forcibly terminated, the result of the variable display is discarded, and the result of the deviation is displayed. It will be.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure D" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 45B shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 45 (b), five types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure e" are shown, and three kinds of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure a" to "special figure e". Figure c "). "Special figure a" is a 6R normal jackpot symbol, and when "special figure a" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 opens to a jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game ends, a control state. Is in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. Further, "special figure b" is a 6R probability variable big hit symbol, and when "special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 is opened to shift to a big hit game state, and control is performed after the big hit game is completed. The state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. The "special figure c" is a 10R probability variable big hit symbol, and when the "special figure c" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 opens to the big hit game state, and after the big hit game is completed, The control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. It should be noted that a big hit may be prepared in which it is practically difficult to win a prize in some rounds (for example, it is difficult to win a prize due to a short opening). Further, in the special figure 2, three types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but three or more types of jackpot symbols may be prepared.

Further, also in the special figure 2, a small hit symbol (“special figure d”) is prepared in addition to the big hit symbol. In the case of a small hit with "special figure d", the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 opens for 0.06 seconds only once after the symbol is stopped. Here, when compared with the small hit symbol of Special Figure 1 (“Special Figure C”), the small hit in Special Figure 1 (special figure 1) is compared with the case of small hit in Special Figure 2 (“Special Figure d” is stopped and displayed). When "Fig. C" is stopped and displayed), more game balls can easily enter the second variable winning opening 235, and more balls can be obtained. In other words, the game is such that the small hit of the special figure 2 does not give the ball, but the small hit of the special figure 1 gives the ball. The opening time and the number of times of opening the second door member 2351 can be appropriately set.

Further, also in Special Figure 2, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure e" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 45 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The ball has won a prize in the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230, the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231 or the special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230 or the special figure 1 start port. (Variable) On condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the (variable) 231 or the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 2 start port 232. , "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... In some cases, "variable display of decorative symbols" is performed, in which the display is switched in the order of "decoration 9"-> "decoration 10"-> "decoration 1"-> .... That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state and the electric support state in which the special figure 1 is mainly displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in accordance with the variable display in the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 is mainly used. In the probabilistic state in which the variation display is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 2. On the other hand, in the normal game state and the electric support state, even if the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variation display is performed only in the fourth symbol and the second special symbol display device 214, which will be described later. In the probabilistic state, even if the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variation display is performed only on the fourth symbol and the first special symbol display device 212.

A mode other than the case where the 1st special figure display device 212 confirms and notifies the 6R probability variation jackpot in the normal game state or the electric support state, and the case where the 2nd special figure display device 214 confirms that the 6R probability variation jackpot is in the probability variation state. In the case of notifying a big hit or a small hit, there are 3 decorative symbols having the same numbers other than "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of the decorative patterns arranged side by side (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot (“Special Figure B”) is definitely notified by the first special figure display device 212 in the normal game state or the electric support state, the 10R probability variation jackpot (“Special Figure B”) is confirmed by the second special figure display device 214 in the probability variation state. In the case of confirming that it is "special figure c"), "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol D" or "special symbol e", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described so far (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol is referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol (in the case of "decorative symbol variable display"). There is also.). The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed by being controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 45 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal map of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public map A" and a missed symbol "Public map B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 alternately lights two LEDs arranged one above the other. Perform "variable display" (normal map variable game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols of the hit symbol "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 45 (d), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the lamp to be turned off, and the black-painted portion indicates the location of the lamp to be turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 44 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 44 stores a special figure random value, a special figure round determination random value, a special figure electric support determination random value, a special symbol symbol determination random value, and the like. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a reserved number storage area for special figures. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures divided into a maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of a win / fail judgment (lottery) can be suspended. A random number value storage area for ordinary figures is also prepared. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored in the winning order (holding order) one set for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 44 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 46 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT 314 is set. Operation permission and initial value setting etc. are performed. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step is returned to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312 in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to the processing after step S113 in order to execute the initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state before the power failure is restored (step S109; No), the cause is whether the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 42 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is on (indicating that the operation has been performed). When it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115), and the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side. If it is determined that this is the case (step S115; Yes), the setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio / setting display 196 blinks indicating "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, every time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7-segment of the setting monitor is incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor indicates "6". Then, it returns to "1". In the present embodiment, at least one of settings 1 to 6 having different jackpot probabilities can be selected, and the setting is made by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. Is confirmed. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is erased. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the set value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In the present embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, but for example, it may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or notified by voice output. good. Further, in the present embodiment, the 6-step setting of the settings 1 to 6 is set, but the setting may be other than the 6-step setting, or the setting may not be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is cut off is retained and the retained setting value is displayed. May be good.

Further, in step S113, when it is not determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or when it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S113; No). Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, the initialization process is executed so as to bring the basic circuit 302 into the initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when this power status information is not information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (for example,). A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0). Is determined (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and when the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal). Executes the initialization process to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting (main setting) in the stack pointer, initialization of all storage areas of RAM 308, and the like are performed. In this embodiment, the set value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained even when the initialization is performed. Further, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command described later in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S121, after setting the interruption prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (this setting) to the stack pointer. Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 42 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has been restored to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 44 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once in about 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 44 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned pre-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 44 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. (Information indicating that), the general winning opening, the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the first special drawing start opening (fixed) 230, and the first special drawing starting opening (variable). ) 231 and the second special figure start port 232, or the normal figure start port 228 is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that the ball has entered the general winning opening, these variable winning openings 234, 235, and these starting openings 230, 231, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects the entry of the ball into the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first 1 It is determined that there is a prize in the special figure start port (fixed) 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area is detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent prize in the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 is performed. However, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 is not performed. Branch to subsequent processing. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S121 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. Special figure Update the random number counter to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the normal figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random value has made one round next. I'll keep it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211 the staging random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a variable / stopped manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display fluctuation / stop, a timer for measuring a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter is updated. In this prize opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 231, 232, the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 44 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal map state update process in the middle of the normal map fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 alternately blink on and off. Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of a normal map (a variable game of a normal map).

In addition, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the normal map fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal map display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be a display mode of a lost symbol. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the two LEDs is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for making various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal diagram A shown in FIG. 45 (d)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 45 (d)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on as described later. When this solenoid hit flag is on, in the solenoid state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for managing the solenoid stop time changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 Solenoids for opening / closing the blade member 2311 of the first special figure start port (variable) 231 (various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 44) are set in the setting area while the normal drawing is in operation and for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2311 in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the attacker unit has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2311 in the closed state is sent to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 44) for driving the opening / closing of the blade member 2311 of the first special drawing start port (variable) 231 provided in the 23. At the same time as outputting, information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal map state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be non-operating. do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the opening / closing control of the first special figure start port (variable) 231 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure is on hold. When the number of fluctuating games is 1 or more, the result of the fluctuating game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number storage area. A hit determination is made to determine whether or not, and if a winner is to be won, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random value, and the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired normal figure timer random value. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol and the fluctuation time before the hit / fail determination process, and predetermines. The result (special figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is specified. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed by repeating the lighting / extinguishing of the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R big hit flag, a 6R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 10R jackpot flag is turned on, and the special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on and the normal map probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure c and 6R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 45 (b) are on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is off. In case, special figure b, 6R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure a, small hit flag is on, special figure d, loss. When the flag is on, the lighting / extinguishing drive control of the LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is performed so as to be in each mode of the special figure e, and the special figure 2 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate that. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 10R probable change big hit symbol (special figure e), a 6R probable change big hit symbol (special figure b), a 6R normal big hit symbol (special figure a), and a small hit symbol (special figure a). Figure d) and one of the lost symbols (special symbol e) are confirmed and displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is a simultaneous variable machine, the variable display of the special figure 1 may be performed during the variable display of the special figure 2, but the variable display time of the special figure 2 has elapsed. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing, the lottery result is discarded and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of the jackpot symbol display of the special figure 2, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1. Will be done. Further, when the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed during the variation display of the special figure 2, and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the variation display time of the special figure 2 has elapsed, the special figure 2 is displayed. The progress of the variation display time of the special figure 1 is interrupted at the timing of the small hit symbol display, and as a result, from the start of the variation display of the special figure 1 to the stop display of the symbol of the special figure 1. The time is extended by the time from the stop display of the small hit symbol of the special figure 2 to the end of the small hit game.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in the special figure 2, the symbol for stopping the variable display while additionally storing the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 While setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, the player waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or a solenoid for opening / closing drive the first door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 (until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning opening 234) (shown in FIG. 44). A signal for holding the first door member 2341 in the open state (retracted state) is output to (a part of various solenoids 332), and information indicating the opening period is output to the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the first door member 2341 in the closed state (advanced state) is output to the solenoid for opening / closing the opening / closing drive of the first door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 44). At the same time, information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (10 rounds or 6 rounds in this exemplary embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, in order to set to wait for a period during which the image for notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed, the effect standby is performed in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the period. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time reduction number of times (for example, 50 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction number is provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. If the special figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on at the same time as the end of the big hit game.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal map, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal map is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal map. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the fluctuation time of the variable game of the normal map is shorter than that in the low-probability state of the normal map (normal map variation). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2311 of the special drawing 1 starting port (variable) 231 tends to be longer (extension of the electric chew) than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the blade member 2311 is more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal map. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the big hit game, a predetermined number of the first variable winning openings 234 will be entered during the big hit game, and the special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231 will be reached until the game balls enter. There is a problem that many game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit (number of balls out) increases and the gambling probability increases, and this is to solve this problem. Is. In this embodiment, since the number of prize balls for winning the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is "1", the number of balls released during the big hit game does not substantially increase, so that the big hit You may leave the time saving flag on even during the game.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

The example of the big hit game using the first variable winning opening 234 has been described above, but the same applies to the small hit game using the second variable winning opening 235.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. In the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the variable game of special figure 2 is not performed, the state of special figure 2 is not operating, and neither the big hit game of special figure 1 nor the big hit game of special figure 2 is performed. And, on the condition that the number of the reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area are used. Is executed. In the lottery process related to the special figure 1, the variable game of the special figure 1 is not performed, the state of the special figure 1 is not operating, the big hit game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not performed, and the game is suspended. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of special figure 1 variable games is 1 or more. .. That is, in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 can start the variable game regardless of whether or not the special figure 2 is in the variable game, and in the special figure 2, the special figure 1 is in the variable game. It is configured to be able to start a variable game with or without it (simultaneous variable machine).

The notification of the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is awarded a prize. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231. And in the time saving state, the notification of the lottery result based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port (fixed) 230 and the special drawing 1 starting port (variable) 231 is notified of the lottery based on the winning of the special drawing 2 starting port 232. It is given priority over the notification of the lottery result. However, if the lottery result of the special figure 1 variable game in the probable change state becomes a big hit, the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 start opening 232 is notified, or once the special figure 2 is started. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the mouth 232 is interrupted, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is executed. May occur. In addition, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 variable game in the normal game state and the time saving state is a big hit, the lottery is based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231. In parallel with the notification of the lottery result, or by interrupting the notification of the lottery result based on the winning of the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231 to start special figure 2. Notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the mouth 232 may be executed.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 receives the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and ROM 306 is based on the special figure 2 winning random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308. The hit / fail judgment table stored in is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area and specially. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information taken out from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above description, by performing the above-mentioned special figure state update process and special figure-related lottery process independently for special figure 1 and special figure 2, a plurality of special figures are configured to be changed at the same time. It is not limited to the above, and the lottery process or the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure may not be performed according to the state of one special figure. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is made to display an effect according to the variable display of the special figure 1 in the normal game state and the time saving state. On the other hand, the effect display is not performed for the variable display of the special figure 2, and in the probabilistic state, the decorative symbol display device 208 is made to perform the effect display according to the variable display of the special figure 2, while the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed. Although the effect display is not performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or a plurality of decorative symbol display devices for displaying the lottery results of each special figure. May be provided and each lottery result may be displayed separately. Further, when the fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in this example, basic command, winning opening winning command, out ball command, launch position command, special figure fluctuation start command, special figure fluctuation stop command, special figure stop type command (special figure 1 and special figure 2) A command sent at the start of fluctuation, which specifies whether one of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed first), special figure hit start command, special figure hit end command, big winning opening open Command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, setting command, and other information that can identify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) ).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a special figure fluctuation start command, the command data includes information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, timer numbers selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the form, when the special symbol change start command is set, the stop symbol information that can specify the stop symbol is included. In the case of the special figure fluctuation stop command, the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, etc. are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230 has won a prize, whether or not the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231 has won a prize, and special figure 2 start. It includes whether or not there is a prize in the mouth 232, whether or not there is a prize in the first variable winning mouth 234, whether or not there is a prize in the second variable winning mouth 235, and the like. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. If it is a setting command, it includes setting information and so on.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data is selected by the various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process, and special figure 2 related lottery process stored in the RAM 308. Set the timer number, the information indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flag values, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub liquid crystal display device 207, various lamps (442,452), and the speaker 120, which are stored in the RAM 308, during the winning effect period. The effect control information, the information indicating the number of the reserved special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub liquid crystal display device 207, various lamps (442,452), and the speaker 120, which are stored in the RAM 308, during the effect standby period. The effect control information, the information indicating the number of the reserved special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games, special figure 2 variable games, and the like is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games, special figure 2 variable games, and the like is set in the command data.

Further, in this step S233, a general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a ball storage dish full tank error. do. When a front frame door opening error or a ball storage dish full tank error is detected, a device indicating whether or not a front frame door opening error or a ball storage dish full tank error is present in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Set the information. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the first special figure start port (variable) 231 and the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, or via drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the normal figure display device 210, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like are set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 46 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as return data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

Next, it is used in the normal figure-related lottery process (step S223), the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 47. The determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 48. Here, FIG. 48 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct, and FIG. 48 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figures 1 and 2 are correct. Yes, FIG. 48 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the distribution table for determining a special figure.

The table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct is shown in FIG. 48 (a), and is a table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct or not, which is used when determining whether or not the normal figure is correct. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 48 (a), when this hit / fail determination table is used, there is no hit value in the low probability state of the normal figure, that is, the probability of hit is 0%, and the normal figure is shown in the normal figure. In the high probability state, the range in which random numbers can be taken is 0 to 65535, and the winning value is 0 to 65535. That is, the probability of winning is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). It should be noted that, in the low probability state of the normal figure (when the time reduction is not activated), the hit may be made with a certain probability (for example, 1%), and in the high probability state of the normal figure (when the time reduction is activated), it is constant. The probability of (for example, 1%) may be different.

The special figure 1 and 2 hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 48 (b) is a table referred to when the hit / fail judgment of the special figures 1 and 2 is performed, and which of the settings 1 to 6 is used. Select the record to be referenced depending on whether it is in the special figure low probability state or the special figure high probability state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 1, the big hit is selected with a probability of 329/65536 (about 1/200) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 330/65536 (about 1/199).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 341/65536 (about 1/193) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 342/65536 (about 1/192).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 3, the big hit is selected with a probability of 363/65536 (about 1/181) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 364/65536 (about 1/180).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 4, the big hit is selected with a probability of 375/65536 (about 1/175) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 377/65536 (about 1/174).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 5, the big hit is selected with a probability of 451/65536 (about 1/146) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 452/65536 (about 1/145).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 6, the big hit is selected with a probability of 701/65536 (about 1/94) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 703/65536 (about 1/93).

Further, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether the special figure is in the high probability state or the special figure low probability state, the result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 is 6580/65536. A small hit that opens and closes 12 times is selected with a probability (about 1/10), and a small hit that opens and closes once is selected with a probability of 6580/65536 (about 1/10) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery shown in FIG. Will be done. It should be noted that the small hit may be prevented from occurring in the special figure 1 and the small hit (the small hit opened 12 times and the small hit opened once) may be generated only in the special figure 2. Further, the probability of a small hit may be made different for each setting.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in any of the settings 1 to 6, the jackpot probability in the special figure high probability state is slightly higher than the jackpot probability in the special figure low probability state, but they are regarded as almost the same probability. It is set to be probable. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting, and the higher the setting, the easier the jackpot is, and the lower the setting, the more difficult the jackpot is. Therefore, the lower the setting, the less likely it is that a big hit will occur, but when the game shifts to a probable change state, the number of small hits tends to occur more than in the high setting, and it may be possible to give different game characteristics.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is set to be almost the same in the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state in any of the settings, but the major difference is that the variable display time of the special figure 2 is mentioned. Be done. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure high probability state is selected, for example, the fluctuation time of 1 to 5 seconds. In the special figure high probability state, when hitting to the right, it is easy for a large number of game balls to enter the second special figure start opening 232, and a large number of fluctuation displays of the special figure 2 can be performed, and as a result. , The mechanism is such that the frequency of small hits increases. In the present embodiment, it can be said that the frequency of small hits increases in the special figure high probability state, so that it may be called "small hit rush". In addition, in the state where there are four (full tanks) of the reserved symbol variation displays of the special figure 2, the time required to digest all the symbol variation displays of the special figure 2 is one time of the special figure 1. Since it takes longer to digest the symbol variation display, it is less likely that a big hit will occur in Special Figure 1. On the other hand, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability state, for example, the fluctuation time of 580 seconds is selected. Therefore, in the special figure low probability state, if you hit right, the frequency of entering the special figure 2 start port 232 and the small hit probability do not change, but the time until the result of the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed is approximately. Since it is every 10 minutes, even if you hit right, it is practically disadvantageous for the player. The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability state is set to 580 seconds in the case of a miss and a small hit, but the fluctuation time in the case of a big hit is shorter than that, for example. It is set to 227 seconds.

FIG. 48C shows an example of a distribution table for determining a special figure, and as described above, a stop symbol is determined based on the result of determining whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is correct or not. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure determination distribution table, a random number range corresponding to the stop symbol mode of the special figure (see FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b)) is defined for each hit / fail determination result.

First, if the result of the special figure 1 hit / miss determination is a big hit, either "special figure A" or "special figure B" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure A" is a 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234, and "Special Figure B" is a 6R probability variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234. Each selection rate is 1/2 regardless of the setting.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 hit / miss determination is a small hit, "special figure C" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure C" is a small hit in which the second variable winning opening 235 repeats short opening 12 times at the maximum.

Next, if the result of the special figure 2 hit / miss determination is a big hit, any one of "special figure a" to "special figure c" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure a" is a 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234, and "Special Figure b" is a 6R probability variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234. "Special figure c" is a 10R probability variation jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234. Each selection rate is 60/100 for "special figure a", 5/100 for "special figure b", and 35/100 for "special figure c" regardless of the setting.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 hit / miss determination is a small hit, "special figure d" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure d" is a small hit in which the second variable winning opening 235 is short-opened once.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 49A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 49 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. .. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309 following step S307, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is converted into the effect data according to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 according to the detection result. Perform the process to change to.

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is an instruction to various lamps 442,452 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. do. In this way, the button lamp 138 that emits the effect button 136, the star-shaped effect lamp 206, the light emitting unit 71 provided in the first effect movable body 7, and the light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23. Light emission control is performed.

In step S317 following step S315, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command to the upper first effect movable body 7 shown in FIG. 43 (a) or the second effect movable body 8 arranged on the right side in the effect data read in step S309, This command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 49B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 49 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S343 following step S341, control commands are transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other effects random value value update processes are performed. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 50A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 50A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, the effect data corresponding to this command (effect data displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 or effect data displayed by the sub liquid crystal display device 207) is stored in the ROM (. Processing such as reading from (not shown) is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 50B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 50C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S443 following step S441, other processing for updating the random value for staging is performed.

FIG. 50D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub liquid crystal display device 207. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 next to step S451, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 is input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP516 based on the end of image drawing is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. Here, FIG. 51 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and FIG. 51 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198. Is.

As described above, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 is configured to have a bonus ratio monitor and a setting monitor, and the bonus ratio monitor includes a continuous bonus ratio (RY) and a bonus ratio (the bonus ratio). YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor displays the current setting value.

Here, the continuous bonus ratio is due to the operation of the bonus when the bonus is continuously operated among the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired (that is, the first in the big hit game). It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by opening the variable winning opening 234 and winning a prize. It should be noted that the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning the first variable winning opening 234 to the number of out balls may be used. Further, the bonus ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the bonus (that is, the first special figure start opening (variable) 231 and the first variable winning opening 234 and the first. 2 The ratio of the number of game balls acquired by opening the variable winning opening 235 and winning a prize). The first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the first special drawing starting port (fixed) 230, the first special drawing starting port (variable) 231 and the second special drawing starting opening 232 with respect to the number of out balls. And may be the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning a prize in the general winning slot.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous bonus ratio exceeds 60% as a result of calculating the continuous bonus ratio, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the continuous bonus ratio is blinked and then displayed. A security signal (RY) is output to. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, it may be possible to smoothly carry out the type application test for the gaming machine.

If it is determined that the bonus ratio exceeds 70% as a result of calculating the bonus ratio, the double-digit 7-segment LED that displays the bonus ratio is blinked, and then the security signal (YH) is displayed. ) Is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is blinked, but for example, the emission color is changed. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 51 (B), eight DIP switches are arranged on the DIP switch substrate 198. Each DIP switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and the position of each DIP switch can be read when the power is turned on to change the appearance probability of the effect. The appearance rate, the entry rate of the effect mode, and the like can be set.

In the pachinko machine 100 described above, the attacker of the second variable winning opening 235 was not opened in the big hit game, but was opened only in the small hit game, but a big hit opened by the attacker of the second variable winning opening 235 was prepared. You may. For example, as the jackpot of the special figure 2, instead of the attacker of the first variable winning opening 234, a 3R jackpot (substantially 1R jackpot) opened by the attacker of the second variable winning opening 235, a 6R jackpot, or the like may be prepared. ..

Further, although the small hits are prepared for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the small hits may be provided only for the special figure 2. That is, only in the special figure 2, the second variable winning opening 235 may be provided with a small hit that repeats a short opening a certain number of times (for example, 12 times) and a small hit that is short-opened only once. .. By doing so, in the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is not in the winning easy state, and the attacker of the first variable winning opening 234 is in the winning difficult state. If the attacker of the 2 variable winning opening 235 is also in a difficult-to-win state, most of the right-handed game balls enter the 2nd special figure starting opening 232 and win a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 2 variable game. be able to. In particular, since the winning probability of the small hit game is higher than the winning probability of the big hit game (for example, about 10 times higher), the second variable winning opening 235 has a maximum number of times (for example, 12 times). It is easy to win a small hit that repeats short opening, and you can expect to earn a ball in this small hit game.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 41 will be described.

FIG. 52 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 41.

FIG. 52 shows the decorative symbol display device 208. The first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are not shown. (The same applies to the example shown in FIG. 59).

Further, FIG. 52 shows a star-shaped effect lamp 206, which is one of the game board lamps 442.

Further, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. The background here is a white background with no pattern, but the default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is a white background and there is no pattern, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left of the display area, and variable display and stop display are performed according to the decorative symbol displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) and notifying the number of holds, and the hold of special figure 1 is on the upper left of the display area. A number display area is provided, and a reserved number display area of Special Figure 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, a symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 is provided in the upper right of the display area, and a symbol changing notification area of special figure 2 is provided in the lower right. In addition, a notification area during symbol change of the normal map and a hold number display area of the normal map may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 1 is matched with the holding number shown in the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2 is the holding lamp 220 of the special drawing 2. Consistent with the number of holds indicated by. Further, in the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1, while the symbol of Special Figure 1 is stopped, for example, if it is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed as "○", and if it is a small hit, it is displayed as "△". Is displayed as a stop, and if it is off, it is displayed as a stop with "x". Further, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is being performed. The display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 2 is the same as the display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 1, and this is a display mode corresponding to the symbol change display and the stop display of Special Figure 2. Changes. By changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the hold number display area, a pre-reading notice and a notice regarding the running symbol change display can be given. You may go. The same applies to the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 described above up to the example shown in FIG. 59.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. In the variation icon display area 280, a variation icon corresponding to the currently performed symbol variation is displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 52 is a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state is provided with the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 59). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state, the designation of the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is represented by the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 of special figure 1 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of special figure 1, as well as the number of hold icons of special figure 1, and is represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. The number of holdings is represented by the number of lights of the holding lamp 220 of the special figure 2 and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2. It should be noted that it may also be represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 52A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both displayed. , Is displayed in the default display mode (normal display mode).

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a display mode of the hold icon displayed in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 41. The hold icons shown in FIG. 53 are all round, but may be transformed from this round shape, for example, may be transformed into a character icon.

FIG. 53A shows a hold icon for display mode A (default display mode). The display mode A (default display mode) is a non-patterned and white display mode. On the drawing, white is represented by hatching facing diagonally downward to the left. The hold icon suggests the expectation of a big hit of the look-ahead notice depending on the display mode. That is, it suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display performed by digesting the hold represented by the hold icon. Display mode A (default display mode) suggests that the jackpot expectation is 5%. It may be suggested that the jackpot expectation is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit in the first place.

FIG. 53B shows the hold icon of the display mode B. The display mode B is a non-patterned and green display mode. On the drawing, green is represented by hatching facing diagonally downward to the right. This display mode B suggests that the jackpot expectation is 25%.

FIG. 53 (c) shows the hold icon of the display mode C. The display mode C is a non-patterned and red display mode. On the drawing, red is represented by diagonal cross-hatching. This display mode C suggests that the jackpot expectation is 50%.

FIG. 53 (d) shows the hold icon of the display mode D. The display mode D is a display mode composed of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer's pattern) on a white background. In the drawing, yellow is represented by vertical hatching. This display mode D is a display mode that symbolizes the pachinko machine manufacturer (company) that manufactured the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 41. That is, when looking at this second display mode, it is a display mode in which many players imagine a specific pachinko machine manufacturer, and it can be said that the display mode is recognizable by the pachinko machine manufacturer. In other words, it is a well-known display mode for use by certain pachinko machine manufacturers. Further, it can be said that it is a display mode peculiar to the pachinko machine manufacturer, and if the pachinko machine manufacturer is the same, it can be said that the same manufacturer pattern is commonly used across a plurality of models. This second display mode is referred to as a maker pattern. There are multiple maker patterns such as animal patterns, animal patterns, plant patterns such as flowers and fruits, fireworks patterns, striped patterns (striped patterns), plaid patterns (lattice patterns), and other geometric patterns. A repeating pattern or the like in which the constituent units of the above are regularly (or irregularly) arranged can be mentioned. Further, since the maker pattern is a pattern expressed using a plurality of colors, it is included in "color" in a broad sense. In some cases, one specific color symbolizes the pachinko machine manufacturer, and in this case, it is the manufacturer's color. This second display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 75%. In addition to the pachinko machine manufacturer, it may be a pachinko machine sales maker (company), and further, it may be a model (model pattern) instead of a maker.

FIG. 53 (e) shows the hold icon of the display mode E. The display mode E is a rainbow-colored display mode. This rainbow color is a mode in which each of the seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple) constituting the rainbow is displayed by continuously changing the display color one by one. However, here, it refers to a mode in which the seven colors constituting the rainbow are displayed by dividing the display area at one time. On the drawing, this rainbow color is represented by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines. This display mode E suggests that the jackpot expectation is 100%. That is, it suggests that the jackpot is confirmed.

In addition, as the display mode F, a display mode that is unpatterned and golden and suggests that the jackpot expectation is 70% may be further prepared.

The higher the expectation of the jackpot, the lower the frequency of appearance of the five display modes described above, but the frequency of appearance is lower in the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) than in the display mode E (rainbow color). May be good. That is, the hold icon of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may appear at the lowest frequency.

Further, the five display modes shown in FIG. 53 are also used for the variable icon in which the hold icon changes, and function as a notice (normal notice) of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable icon.

Further, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 provided directly below the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 can emit light in a light emitting mode indicating the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon.

At the right end of FIG. 53, a light emitting mode of the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is shown. The effect lamp 206 can emit light in a light emitting mode A (white light emitting mode) representing the display mode A (default display mode) of the hold icon and the variable icon. Further, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in the light emitting mode B (green light emitting mode) representing the display mode B (green display mode) of the hold icon and the variable icon. Further, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode) representing the display mode C (red display mode) of the hold icon and the variable icon. Further, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow-colored light-emitting mode) representing the display mode E (rainbow-colored display mode) of the hold icon and the variable icon. The rainbow-colored light emitting mode of the effect lamp 206 is a mode in which the seven colors constituting the rainbow are emitted and displayed at once by dividing the light emitting region. These light emission modes also suggest the same jackpot expectations as the display modes of the hold icon and the variable icon.

Strictly speaking, the colors displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, that is, the colors of the hold icon and the variable icon, and the emission color of the effect lamp 206 are different because the display medium is different. Both colors are also described as being included in the same or similar range.

On the other hand, the staging lamp 206 does not have a light emitting mode indicating the second display mode (maker pattern) of the hold icon and the variable icon, and the staging lamp 206 emits light in the same or similar light emitting mode as the maker pattern. There is no.

As the light emitting mode E, a golden light emitting mode, which suggests that the jackpot expectation is 70%, may be further prepared.

Further, in other display (for example, background display of the title) on the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be displayed using the display mode shown in FIG. 53. In other displays, the expected degree of jackpot may be suggested by the display mode, and the display mode in the other display may be irrelevant to the expected degree of jackpot.

Further, the display on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 (for example, a kimono of a lord) may also be displayed using the display mode shown in FIG. 53 excluding the second display mode (manufacturer's pattern). Also in the display on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be suggested depending on the display mode, or may be irrelevant to the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Further, lamps other than the effect lamp 206 (the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 shown in FIG. 44) can also emit light in a light emitting mode representing other display modes except the second display mode. For example, a light emitting unit 71 provided in the first staging movable body 7 and a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23 can also emit white, green, red, and rainbow colors. As for the rainbow color, in addition to the case where the seven colors constituting the rainbow are emitted and displayed by dividing the emission region at one time, the emission color is continuously changed by one color, and each of the seven colors constituting the rainbow is used. It may be displayed as a light emission. Such rainbow-colored change light emission may be performed as the light emission mode D of the effect lamp 206. The light emitting mode of the lamps other than the effect lamp 206 may also suggest the same jackpot expectation as the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon, and the light emission mode of the lamps other than the effect lamp 206 may indicate the jackpot expectation. It may be a light emitting mode unrelated to.

Further, it is also used as the color of the decorative body except for the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) and the display mode E (rainbow color).

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a decorative body included in the second staging movable body 8.

In the second staging movable body 8 that imitates the right arm of a person, four fingers excluding the fifth finger (pinkie) are decorative bodies. All of these four fingers are difficult to see when bent, but when extended, the decoration provided on the palm side becomes visible.

FIG. 54A shows a second staging movable body 8 in which the fourth finger (ring finger) 824 is extended with the forearm portion 82 lifted. In the second staging movable body 8 shown in FIG. 54 (a), the decoration A (white) is applied to the palm side of the fourth finger 824. That is, it is painted white.

FIG. 54 (b) shows the second staging movable body 8 in which the third finger (middle finger) 823 is extended while the forearm portion 82 is lifted. In the second staging movable body 8 shown in FIG. 54 (b), the decoration B (green) is applied to the palm side of the third finger 823. That is, it is painted green.

FIG. 54 (c) shows the second staging movable body 8 in which the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended with the forearm portion 82 lifted. In the second staging movable body 8 shown in FIG. 54 (c), the decoration C (red) is applied to the palm side of the second finger 822. That is, it is painted red.

FIG. 54 (d) shows the second staging movable body 8 in which the first finger (thumb) 821 is extended while the forearm portion 82 is lifted. In the second staging movable body 8 shown in FIG. 54 (d), the decoration D (gold) is applied to the palm side of the first finger 821. That is, it is painted in gold.

In the second staging movable body 8, nothing is decorated on the palm side of the fifth finger (pinkie) 825.

Strictly speaking, the color displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the color of the decorative body are different in hue because the display medium is different, but these colors are included in the same or similar range. I will explain it as if it were.

Further, each decoration applied to the second staging movable body 8 suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, like the hold icon and the variable icon. Therefore, it is suggested that when the 4th finger (ring finger) 824 is extended, the expectation of the jackpot is 5%, and when the 3rd finger (middle finger) 823 is extended, the expectation of the jackpot is 25%. It is suggested that there is, and it is suggested that the expectation of the jackpot is 50% when the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended, and the expectation of the jackpot when the first finger (thumb) 821 is extended. Is suggested to be 70%.

On the other hand, as the decorative body, the decorative body of the maker pattern and the rainbow-colored decorative body are not provided. Therefore, in the notice by the decorative body, the high probability notice that the big hit expectation degree is 75% or more is not given.

As with the hold icon and the variable icon, the expected degree of the jackpot is suggested, but the value of the expected degree may be different from the value of the hold icon and the variable icon. For example, decoration B (green) may be 30%, decoration C (red) may be 60%, and decoration D (gold) may be 90%.

Returning to FIG. 52 and continuing the explanation, in FIG. 52, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, they are not actually displayed. The hold icon is also shown with a dotted line.

On the other hand, the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 0, and there is no hold of the special figure 2. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 52 is a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), so that the variation display time of special figure 2 is almost always ( This is because it is extremely long (for example, 500 seconds), and it does not make much sense to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. In the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in FIG. 52, the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 remains 0, and the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 remains the stop display of “x”. ..

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon display area of the special figure on which the display result is easily displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state). That is, in the present embodiment, when the control state is a normal gaming state or an electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), as described above, the display result of special figure 1 is likely to be displayed. , As shown in FIG. 52 (a), when the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d and the control state is a probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state). On the contrary, the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is the same as the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1, but may be different.

Further, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 52 (a) is lit in the default light emitting mode (white light emitting mode) which is the light emitting mode indicating the display mode of the hold icons h11 and h12.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start of variation display of the fourth symbol → start or deletion of the movement animation of the hold icon → start of variation of the decorative symbol. However, this order may change.

In FIG. 52 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which was the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280.

In FIG. 52 (c), one ball is won in the first special figure start port (fixed) 230, and the hold icon of special figure 1 is increasing. The increased hold icon is displayed in red (display mode C) at the display position of the second hold icon h12, and functions as a look-ahead notice. A production sound (appearing sound) represented by an eighth note is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the timing of starting the display of the red hold icon h12 (display mode C). Further, in response to the increase in the hold represented by the red (display mode C) hold icon h12, the number of star-shaped effect lamps 206 that have been emitting light in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode) has increased. It changes to the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode) showing the display mode of the hold icon h12 representing the hold. That is, the light emitting mode of the effect lamp 206 is a light emitting mode having the same or similar color as the red color of the hold icon h12. The timing of starting the display of the red (display mode C) hold icon h12 and the timing of changing the star-shaped effect lamp 206 to the light emission mode C may be the same, or the hold icon h12 may be earlier. Alternatively, the effect lamp 206 may be faster (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 59). In the figure, the size of the hold icon h12 and the size of the effect lamp 206 are described to the same extent, but in reality, the effect lamp 206 is larger. Therefore, the effect lamp 206 is more conspicuous than the hold icon h12, and if the change timing of the effect lamp 206 is earlier, the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the red color may be given to the player more strongly. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is increased by one to 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (d), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "358". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light according to the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode).

In FIG. 52 (e), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. The red (display mode C) hold icon is moved by one and displayed at the display position of the first hold icon (hold icon h11). Further, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light according to the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (f), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "814". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light according to the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode).

In FIG. 52 (g), the hold represented by the red (display mode C) hold icon is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and the red (display mode C) hold icon is displayed as the red (display mode C) variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. Further, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 still continues to emit light according to the light emitting mode C. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 0, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 52 (h), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in FIG. 52 (i), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the special figure 1 are shown. The hold icon display area 281 has disappeared. That is, in FIG. 52 (i), the red (display mode C) variable icon h0 is hidden, and the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is also turned off in response to the non-display of the variable icon h0. In FIGS. 52 to 57, the state in which the effect lamp 206 is turned off is represented by a plain state without hatching. The timing at which the variable icon h0 is hidden and the timing at which the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is turned off may be the same, the variable icon h0 may be earlier, or the effect lamp 206 may be earlier. It may be (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 59). The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, has been moved to the lower right corner and reduced. On the other hand, the mini design on the upper left is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 52 (j), it has developed into a super reach. The reach title LT1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (j). The display of the reach title LT1 here is described as "jii reach" in black characters on a green background display. In this reach title LT1, the background is the same color as or similar to green, which suggests the expectation of a big hit with a hold icon or a decorative body, but as shown in FIG. 60, the reach title LT1 of "Ji Reach" As the background color, a color other than green is not selected. That is, it can be said that the type of background color of the reach title LT1 does not suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit, and this green color does not indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit.

An old man's character appears on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (k), and then an animation of the old man's character is displayed. Following the animation display of the grandfather character, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (l) displays the grandfather character that appears to be depressed. Further, in the variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is displayed. The display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, but the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini-designs, variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (m), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are combined with the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "434". In FIG. 52 (m), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

The star-shaped effect lamp 206, which is turned off in response to the non-display of the variable icon h0, maintains the off state until the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, but until it develops into super reach (FIG. 52 (j)). (Until the timing) The light emission according to the light emission mode C may be continued. Alternatively, the light emission according to the light emission mode C may be continued until the background display is switched and the variation display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed in the lower right corner starts to fluctuate (until the timing of FIG. 52 (l)). Further, the light emission according to the light emission mode C may be continued until the final display of the decorative symbol is performed (until the timing of FIG. 52 (m)).

The example shown in FIG. 52 described above is an example in which the display mode of the hold icon is related to the light emission mode of the star-shaped effect lamp 206, which is one of the game board lamps 442.

FIG. 55 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in which the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the background in the display of the reach title are related.

FIG. 55 also shows the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect lamp 206. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed.

Further, in FIG. 55 (a), one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is in the default display mode. It is displayed. Further, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 55 (a) is lit in the default light emitting mode A (white light emitting mode) which is the light emitting mode indicating the display mode of the hold icon h11.

In FIG. 55 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 has changed from 1 to 0, and the display of “−” has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which has been in the display position of the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. When the hold icon h11, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, that is, when the variable icon h0 changes, the display mode changes to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the variable icon h0 is displayed. It is displayed in aspect D (manufacturer pattern). The variable icon h0 changed to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) usually functions as a notice. A production sound (change sound) represented by a quarter note is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the display start timing (timing of change in display mode) of the variation icon h0 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern). Further, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the default light emitting mode A (white light emitting mode) has a light emitting mode C (red) in response to the appearance of the variable icon h0 in the display mode D (manufacturer pattern). The light emission mode) has changed. That is, the effect lamp 206 has changed to a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode representing the display mode of the variable icon h0, and does not emit light in a light emitting mode having the same or similar pattern as the display mode D (manufacturer pattern). .. More specifically, the effect lamp 206 is changed to a light emitting mode that suggests an expectation degree lower than the expectation degree of the jackpot suggested by the display mode D of the variable icon h0. The effect lamp 206 may be changed to a light emitting mode (light emitting mode D (rainbow color)) suggesting a higher expectation level than the expectation level of the jackpot suggested by the display mode D of the variable icon h0, or the hold icon. The color may be emitted in a color not used in the or variable icon, or the color used in the hold icon or the variable icon may be emitted in a different emission mode (for example, red). Flashing light, etc.). Further, the timing of the display start of the variable icon h0 and the timing of the change of the effect lamp 206 may be simultaneous, the variable icon h0 may be earlier, or the effect lamp 206 may be earlier. (The same applies to the example shown in FIG. 59). In the figure, the size of the variable icon h0 and the size of the effect lamp 206 are described to the same extent as the hold icon, but the effect lamp 206 is actually larger. Therefore, if the effect lamp 206 is more conspicuous than the variable icon h0 and the change timing of the effect lamp 206 is earlier, the player first recognizes the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the red color, and then the variable icon. By looking at the maker pattern of h0, the expectation of a big hit is further increased. Further, in the staging lamp 206, by not emitting light in the same or similar pattern as the display mode D (maker pattern), the rarity of the maker pattern with high expectation is improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the maker pattern are improved. Can be enhanced.

In FIG. 55 (c), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in FIG. 55 (d), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the special figure 1 are shown. The hold icon display area 281 has disappeared. That is, in FIG. 55 (d), the variable icon h0 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is hidden, and the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is also turned off in response to the non-display of the variable icon h0. The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, has been moved to the lower right corner and reduced. On the other hand, the mini design on the upper left is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 55 (e), it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The reach title LT2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (e). The display of the reach title LT2 here is written in black letters on a rainbow-colored background display as "Swordsman Reach". That is, the same display mode as that used as the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon is also used for the background display of the reach title LT2, suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit. Further, the first staging movable body 7 arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208 is lowered to a position overlapping the display screen on the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the rectangular light emitting unit 71 arranged in the first staging movable body 7 is lit in a light emitting mode D (rainbow color light emitting mode) representing a rainbow color. That is, the light emitting unit 71 of the first staging movable body 7 emits light in the same or similar light emitting mode as the rainbow color of the background display of the reach title LT2, suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit. Further, the background display of the reach title LT2 may be a display mode representing the display mode E (rainbow color), which is a display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. That is, the background display of the reach title LT2 is the same as or similar to the display mode E (rainbow color), and is one color from the display mode E (rainbow color) used as the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon, for example. Even if the shape of the display area is slightly different, if the player can imagine the display mode E (rainbow color), the display mode is similar to the display mode E (rainbow color) (FIG. 57 (j) described later). The same applies to the reach title LT3 in.

As shown in FIG. 60 (a), the background color of the reach title LT2 is selected from "white", "red", "maker pattern", and "rainbow color", and is "white". The expectation of the jackpot is "20%", the expectation of the jackpot of "red" is "35%", the expectation of the jackpot of "maker pattern" is "75%", and the expectation of the jackpot of "rainbow color" is " It is "100%". That is, unlike the above-mentioned "jii reach", the degree of expectation of a big hit is suggested depending on the type of background color of the reach title LT2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the emission color of the light emitting unit 71 is selected from "white", "red", and "rainbow color", and the degree of expectation of a big hit of "white". The expectation of the jackpot of "20%" and "red" is "45%", and the expectation of the jackpot of "rainbow color" is "100%". That is, unlike the type of background color of the reach title LT2, the "maker pattern" is not set for the type of emission color of the light emitting unit 71. The background color of the reach title LT2 and the emission color of the light emitting unit 71 may be related (same color) to each other. However, even in that case, the "maker pattern" is not set as the emission color of the light emitting unit 71, and the light is emitted in another color (for example, "golden lighting" or "gold lighting" or "gold lighting" instead of the "maker pattern". Set "blinking red").

In the state shown in FIG. 55 (e), the descending first staging movable body 7 does not overlap the background display in the reach title LT2, but the first staging movable body 7 overlaps the background display. If the display mode of the background display is the manufacturer's pattern, it will only descend to a position that does not overlap the background display. Further, not only the background display but also the hold icon and the variable icon of the maker pattern are configured so that the effect movable body is not covered.

The display mode of the background display in the reach title LT2 may be a maker pattern, but the light emitting unit 71 in the first staging movable body 7 cannot be lit in the light emitting mode representing the maker pattern, and in addition, It may not be possible to turn on the light even in the light emitting mode expressing the rainbow color. In such a case, the light emitting unit 71 may be left off or may emit light in a light emitting mode representing red.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (f), the animation of the duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy has started to be displayed. This animation continues until FIG. 55 (i). In Fig. 55 (i), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in the variable display of the decorative pattern displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" Is displayed. The display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, but the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini-designs, variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (j), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are combined with the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "444". In FIG. 55 (j), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect in which an animation is displayed on a sub-liquid crystal display device by a zone effect.

FIG. 56 also shows the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect lamp 206. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 56A is in a state of being turned off. In addition, FIG. 56 also displays a sub-liquid crystal display device 207 arranged on the left side of the first special drawing start port (fixed) 230. The sub-liquid crystal display device 207 shown in FIG. 56A is in a state where nothing is displayed.

Further, in FIG. 56A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and these two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both are displayed in the default display mode.

In FIG. 56 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, and the movement of the hold icon is finished. The hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which was the first hold icon until then, remains the default display mode in the variable icon display area 280 in this example, the variable icon h0. Is displayed as. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (b), variable display of decorative symbols is started in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The zone title ZT representing the title of the zone effect is displayed so as to overlap the variable display of the symbol, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is difficult to see. The display of the zone title ZT is written in red letters on an elliptical blue plain background as "training zone". In this zone title ZT, the hold icon or decoration is described as "training zone" in the same or similar color as red, which suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit. However, this red color does not indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit. That is, when this zone title ZT is displayed, it is always described as "training zone" in red letters, and is not described as "training zone" in other colors. Neither the character color of the reach title LT1 shown in FIG. 52 (j) nor the character color of this zone title ZT suggests the expectation of a big hit, but the character color indicates the expectation of a big hit. It may be suggested. On the other hand, the maker pattern only suggests the expectation of a big hit, and may not suggest the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, the manufacturer pattern may be used for displaying various settings that can be changed by the player on the game console (for example, the tone from the speaker 120, the game mode, etc.), the number of games played, and the number of consecutive villas of the jackpot. do not have. When the manufacturer pattern is displayed, the degree of expectation of a big hit is always suggested, and a big hit can be expected with a fairly high probability. If a manufacturer with a high expectation is used when the expectation of a big hit is not suggested, the player misunderstands that the expectation of a big hit is high and expects it excessively. If the degree is not suggested, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the expectation of the big hit is high by not using the manufacturer's pattern with high expectation, and the expectation is excessively fueled. That can be alleviated.

In FIG. 56 (b) in which the zone title ZT described above is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, the display of the zone effect animation is started on the sub liquid crystal display device 207, and the main character wearing a red kimono is displayed. An animation of the lord training in swordsmanship is displayed. As shown in Fig. 60 (c), the color of this lord's kimono is selected from "white", "green", "red", and "rainbow color", and is a big hit of "white". Expectation is "20%", "green" jackpot expectation is "30%", "red" jackpot expectation is "45%", "rainbow color" jackpot expectation is "100%" It has become. In addition, it is not displayed in "Manufacturer pattern". This animation continues until FIG. 56 (i). The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 shown in FIG. 56 (b) is changed from 2 to 1, and "-" is displayed in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Has started blinking.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (c), the background display is switched to the background display of the wilderness, which is the background display of the training zone. The background display of this wilderness continues until FIG. 56 (i). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (c), the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c can be visually recognized. .. Further, in FIG. 56 (c), one ball is won in the first special figure start port (fixed) 230, and the hold icon of special figure 1 is increasing. The increased hold icon h12 is displayed in green (display mode B) at the display position of the second hold icon, and functions as a look-ahead notice. A production sound (appearing sound) represented by a sixteenth note is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the timing of starting the display of the green (display mode B) hold icon h12. In this example, the effect lamp 206 does not turn on in response to the increase in the hold represented by the green (fifth display mode) hold icon h12, and the effect lamp 206 remains off. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is increased by one to 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (d), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "358". The star-shaped staging lamp 206 remains off.

In FIG. 56 (e), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. The green (display mode B) hold icon is moved by one and displayed at the display position of the first hold icon (hold icon h11). Also, the star-shaped staging lamp 206 remains off.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (f), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "814". The star-shaped staging lamp 206 is still off.

In FIG. 56 (g), the hold represented by the green (display mode B) hold icon is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and the green (display mode B) hold icon is displayed as the green (display mode B) variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. The star-shaped effect lamp 206, which has been turned off, responds to the start of the symbol variation display by the first special figure display device 212 based on the hold represented by the green (display mode B) hold icon that has been displayed so far. , The light emission according to the light emission mode B (green light emission mode) representing the green color (display mode B) is started. That is, the effect lamp 206 starts emitting light in the same or similar color as the green color of the variable icon h0. In this example, the staging lamp 206 does not start emitting light until the fluctuation subject to the notice is started. The timing of the display start of the green (display mode B) variable icon h0 and the timing of the start of light emission by the light emitting mode B of the star-shaped effect lamp 206 may be the same, and the variable icon h0 is earlier. Alternatively, the staging lamp 206 may be faster. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 0, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 56 (h), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, but in this example, it does not develop into the super reach, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (i), “decoration 4-decoration”. The combination of the missing decorative symbols of "3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "434". Further, the green (fifth display mode) variation icon h0 is hidden when the symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 212 ends. The end timing of the symbol variation display and the timing at which the variation icon h0 is hidden may be simultaneous, the symbol variation display may be earlier, or the variation icon h0 may be earlier. Further, the effect lamp 206 is also turned off according to the non-display of the green (display mode B) variation icon h0.

The effect executed by the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 (second display means) is not limited to the display of the animation of the zone effect described above, and various effects may be performed. For example, when the decorative pattern that was temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo continuous notice is changed again, the lord is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207, and the color of the kimono of the lord suggests the expectation of a big hit. You may. Even in this case, it should not be displayed in "Manufacturer pattern". That is, the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 does not display the "manufacturer pattern" under any circumstances. In this way, by not displaying the "maker pattern" in the sub liquid crystal display device 207, the rarity of the maker pattern with high expectation can be improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the maker pattern can be enhanced. .. In addition, "pseudo continuous notice" means a notice that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and then changed again during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to one big hit lottery. It is a notice that the variable display and the temporary stop display may be performed multiple times.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon and the light emission mode of the star-shaped effect lamp 206 are related and further super reach is performed.

FIG. 57 also shows the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect lamp 206. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed.

Further, in FIG. 57 (a), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and these two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both are displayed in the default display mode.

Further, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 57A is lit in the default light emitting mode (white light emitting mode) which is the light emitting mode indicating the display mode of the hold icons h11 and h12.

In FIG. 57 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 has changed from 2 to 1, and the display of “−” has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which was the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280.

In FIG. 57 (c), one ball is won in the first special figure start port (fixed) 230, and the hold icon of special figure 1 is increasing. The increased hold icon is displayed in red (display mode C) at the display position of the second hold icon h12, and functions as a look-ahead notice. A production sound (appearing sound) represented by an eighth note is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the timing of starting the display of the red hold icon h12 (display mode C). Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 52, in this example as well, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the default light emitting mode (white light emitting mode) has a display mode of the hold icon h12 indicating the increased hold. It changes to the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode) representing. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is increased by one to 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (d), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "358". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light according to the light emitting mode C.

In FIG. 57 (e), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. The red (display mode C) hold icon is moved by one and displayed at the display position of the first hold icon (hold icon h11). When the hold icon that was red (display mode C) is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon, the display mode changes to display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the hold icon h11 is displayed in display mode D (maker pattern). ) Is displayed. A production sound (change sound) represented by a quarter note is output from the speaker 120 according to the change timing of the display mode of the hold icon. On the other hand, the effect lamp 206 that has emitted light in the red light emitting mode (light emitting mode C) maintains the light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode does not change even if the display mode of the hold icon changes. The effect lamp 206, which is more conspicuous than the hold icon, does not change its light emitting mode, but when viewed closely, the hold icon h11 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), which has the lowest appearance frequency, is displayed, and the player who discovered this is displayed. May greatly improve the interest of the game. In addition, in response to the change of the hold icon h11 to the display mode D (maker pattern), the staging lamp 206 also has a light emission mode different from the light emission mode representing the display mode D (maker pattern) (for example, light emission mode F (gold color). It may change to the light emitting mode)).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (f), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "814". The hold icon h11 is displayed in the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emitting mode C.

In FIG. 57 (g), the hold represented by the hold icon h11 in the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (g), the variable display of the decorative symbol has started, and the hold icon h11 is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. In this example, when the hold icon h11 which was the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, that is, when the display mode changes to the variable icon h0, the display mode changes to the display mode E (rainbow color). , The variable icon h0 is displayed in the display mode E (rainbow color). The variable icon h0 in the display mode E (rainbow color) functions as a normal notice for confirming the jackpot. Even in accordance with the change timing of the display mode of the hold icon here, the effect sound (change sound) represented by the half note is output from the speaker 120. Further, in response to the appearance of the variation icon h0 of the display mode E (rainbow color), the star-shaped effect lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the light emission mode C so far has a light emission mode D representing the rainbow color (display mode E). It changes to (rainbow-colored light emission mode). That is, the light emission with the same or similar color as the rainbow color of the variable icon h0 is started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 0, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1.

In this example, the display mode is changed from the display mode D (maker pattern) to the display mode E (rainbow color), but the display mode is changed from the display mode D (maker pattern) to the display mode E (rainbow color). It does not change (change rate is 0%), and display mode E (display mode E (default display mode, display mode B, display mode C, display mode F) only from other display modes (default display mode, display mode B, display mode C, display mode F) except display mode D (manufacturer pattern). It may be changed to rainbow color). Alternatively, the rate of change from the above other display mode to display mode E (rainbow color) may be higher than the rate of change from display mode D (maker pattern) to display mode E (rainbow color).

In FIG. 57 (h), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in FIG. 57 (i), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the special figure 1 are shown. The hold icon display area 281 has disappeared. In FIG. 57 (i), the variable icon h0 of the display mode E (rainbow color) is hidden, but the star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light according to the light emission mode D (rainbow color light emission mode). As described above, the effect lamp 206 may continue to emit light even if the variable icon h0 is hidden, only when the effect lamp 206 emits light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow-colored light emitting mode) in which the big hit is confirmed. The effect lamp 206 may continue to emit light or may be turned off based on the result of the effect lottery, regardless of the mode of light emission. The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, has been moved to the lower right corner and reduced. On the other hand, the mini design on the upper left is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 57 (j), it has developed into a super reach (Den reach). The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow color). Further, the reach title LT3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (j). The display of the reach title LT3 here is written in black letters on a rainbow-colored background display as "Den reach". As shown in FIG. 60 (a), the background color of the reach title LT3 is selected from "white", "red", "maker pattern", and "rainbow color", and is "white". The expectation of the jackpot is "20%", the expectation of the jackpot of "red" is "35%", the expectation of the jackpot of the manufacturer pattern is "75%", and the expectation of the jackpot of "rainbow color" is "100". % ”. That is, unlike the above-mentioned "jii reach", the degree of expectation of a big hit is suggested depending on the type of background color of the reach title LT3. Further, the light emitting mode D (rainbow-colored light emitting mode), which is the light emitting mode of the effect lamp 206, is the same as or similar to the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT3.

An animation of the character of the palace is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (k), and the character of the palace that looks proud is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (l). ing. Further, in the variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed. The display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, but the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini-designs, variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (m), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are combined with the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "444". In FIG. 57 (m), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 57, the staging lamp 206, which continued to emit light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow color) even when the super reach (rainbow color) was started, emits light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow color) even during the super reach. Is continued, and even if the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, the light emission is further continued, and the light emission according to the light emission mode D (rainbow color) is continued until the subsequent big hit game start effect is started. The effect lamp 206 may be turned off at the end of the symbol variation display by the first special figure display device 212.

FIG. 58 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the decorative body included in the second effect movable body 8 are related.

FIG. 58 also shows the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIG. 58, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is not shown, and instead, a second effect movable body 8 arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. As for the effect lamp, as described above, the light emitting mode may be changed according to the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon to emit light. Alternatively, in this example, the effect lamp 206 may remain off or may remain in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode).

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in FIG. 58A, one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is in the default display mode. It is displayed.

The second staging movable body 8 shown in FIG. 58 (a) is located at the initial position. The second staging movable body 8 located at the initial position does not overlap the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the front side, and is located at a position avoiding the display screen, whether it is the upper arm portion 81 or the forearm portion 82. It is facing down.

In FIG. 58 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 has changed from 1 to 0, and the display of “−” has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which has been in the display position of the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. The hold icon h11, which was the default display mode, remains in the default display mode even if it changes to the variable icon h0.

The second staging movable body 8 shown in FIG. 58 (b) remains positioned at the initial position.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the button effect is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (c) displays an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the valid period. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, the image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and the remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the lord. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 or the like. .. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 58 (d), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 58 (e), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, the success / failure result of the button effect is notified. In this example, if the display mode of the variable icon h0 is ranked up, it is successful, and in the variable icon display area 280 shown in FIG. 58 (f), the variable icon changed from the default display mode to the display mode C (red). h0 is displayed. That is, the button production has been successful, and the normal notice has started. A production sound (change sound) represented by an eighth note is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the change timing of the display mode of the variable icon h0. Further, the button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 may also emit light in a red light emitting mode. If the button effect fails, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change even if the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period. In addition to this, in the button production, a notice of entering the reach state may be notified if it succeeds.

As shown in FIG. 58 (f), even if the success / failure result of the button effect is notified, the second effect movable body 8 is still in the initial position, but as shown in FIG. 58 (g). When the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the second effect movable body 8 starts to operate. That is, the upper arm portion 81 starts to rotate upward, and the forearm portion 82 also starts to rotate upward. As a result, the second staging movable body 8 starts to overlap a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the front side. In the following FIG. 58 (h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. As a result, the variable icon h0 in the display mode C (red) is also hidden. The upper arm portion 81 of the second staging movable body 8 further rotates upward, and the forearm portion 82 is greatly lifted. The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, has been moved to the lower right corner and reduced. On the other hand, the mini design on the upper left is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 58 (i), it has developed into a super reach (Den reach). The reach title LT4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (i). The display of the reach title LT4 here is written in black letters on a red background display as "Den reach". Further, in the second staging movable body 8 shown in FIG. 58 (i), the forearm portion 82 vibrates in a state where the forearm portion 82 is lifted high, and the second finger (index finger) 822 is further extended to decorate C (red). Is visible. This decoration C is a display mode showing red, and is the same as or similar to the display mode C (red), which is the display mode of the variable icon h0 changed by the button effect. The decoration on the second finger (index finger) 822 also suggests the expectation of a big hit. In this example, the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT4 and the display mode of the decorative body of the second staging movable body 8 are the same or similar display modes, but may be different display modes.

Further, the background display of the reach title LT4 may be a display mode representing red. That is, the background display of the reach title LT4 is the same as or similar to the display mode C (red), and has a slightly different hue from the display mode C (red), which is a display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon, for example. However, if the player can imagine the display mode C (red), the display mode is similar to the display mode C (red).

An animation of the character of the palace is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (j), and the second effect in which the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended while the forearm 82 is lifted high. The movable body 8 has started a return operation toward the initial position. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (k), the character of the palace that looks proud is displayed, and the second staging movable body 8 has returned to the initial position. Further, in the variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed. The display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, but the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini-designs, variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (l), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are combined with the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "444". In FIG. 58 (l), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect similar to the effect in which the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 58 operates, and the differences from the example of the effect shown in FIG. 58 will be mainly described. ..

FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (e) are the same as those from FIG. 58 (a) to FIG. 58 (e), and the button effect is executed.

Also in FIG. 59 (f), the button effect was successful, and the variable icon h0 changed from the default display mode to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. Further, the effect sound (change sound) represented by a quarter note is output from the speaker 120 according to the change timing of the display mode of the variable icon h0. The button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 does not emit light in a light emitting mode representing the manufacturer's pattern, but may emit light in a red light emitting mode.

In the following FIG. 59 (g), as in FIG. 58 (g), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the second staging movable body 8 has started the operation. For example, when the variable icon h0 is displayed in the display mode B (green), the second staging movable body 8 may not operate and may still remain stationary at the initial position. That is, when the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is displayed, the operation effect of the second effect movable body 8 is more likely to be performed than when the display mode B (green) is displayed. You may. Further, when the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is displayed, the second effect movable body is displayed as compared with the display mode C (red) shown in FIG. 58 (g). The operation effect of 8 may be easily performed. That is, it is preferable that the higher the expectation of the big hit, the easier it is for the operation effect of the second effect movable body 8 to be performed. When the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is displayed, the operation effect of the second effect movable body 8 may be performed without fail.

In FIG. 59 (h), as in FIG. 58 (h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and in this example, the variable icon h0 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is also hidden. It has become. Further, as in FIG. 58 (h), the forearm portion 82 of the second staging movable body 8 is greatly lifted.

In FIG. 59 (i), it has evolved into a super reach (Den reach), and the reach title LT5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display of the reach title LT5 here is written in black letters on the background display of the maker pattern as "Den reach". Further, in the second staging movable body 8 shown in FIG. 59 (j), the forearm portion 82 vibrates with the forearm portion 82 lifted high, as in the second staging movable body 8 shown in FIG. 58 (j). Further, the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended. As a result, the decoration C becomes visible, but the decoration C has a display mode D (manufacturer pattern) which is a display mode showing red and is a display mode of the variable icon h0 changed by the button effect. Is a different form of decoration. That is, the decoration is one step lower in terms of the expectation of a big hit. The first finger (thumb) 821 may be extended so that the decoration D (see FIG. 54 (e)) having a 70% expectation of a big hit can be visually recognized. However, even in this case, it is lower than the jackpot expectation (75%) suggested by the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern). Since the player can see the variable icon h0 of the display mode D (maker pattern) having the lowest appearance frequency, and can also see the maker pattern in the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT5. The feeling is sufficiently hot, and the decoration of the second staging movable body 8 may calm the player's feelings a little.

The background display of the reach title LT5 may be a display mode representing the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), which is a display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. That is, the background display of the reach title LT5 is the same as or similar to the maker pattern, and for example, the shape of the polka dots is slightly different from the display mode D (maker pattern) which is the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. Even if there is, if the player can imagine the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), the display mode is similar to the display mode D (maker pattern).

Subsequent FIGS. 59 (i) to (l) are the same as those of FIGS. 58 (i) to (l), and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is the same. Stop is displayed and it becomes a big hit.

FIG. 60A is a diagram showing a reach title background color determination table stored in ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500.

The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines the background color using the reach title background color determination table shown in FIG. 60 (a) in the effect control process (step S409) shown in FIG. 50 (a). At this time, as described above, green is always selected as the background color of the reach title LT1 of "Ji Reach", and this background color does not suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit. On the other hand, the background color of the reach title LT2 of "Swordsman Reach" and the background color of the reach title LT3 (LT4) of "Den Reach" suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit, and the CPU 504 is the first sub-control unit 400. Determine the background color based on the command received from. Both the reach title LT2 of "Swordsman Reach" and the reach title LT3 of "Den Reach" include the maker pattern in the background color. In both reach titles LT2 and LT3, a common one is used as the relationship between the background color and the jackpot expectation degree, but different ones may be used.

FIG. 60B is a diagram showing an emission color determination table stored in ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 49 (a), the CPU 0404 of the first sub control unit 400 uses the emission color determination table shown in FIG. 60 (b) to emit light in the first effect movable body 7. The emission color of 71 is determined. The emission color of the light emitting unit 71 suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, and the CPU 404 determines the emission color based on the command received from the main control unit 300. The emission colors are white, red, and rainbow colors, and the emission colors of the manufacturer's pattern are not prepared. Further, the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the red emission color and the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the red background color of the reach title described above are different in magnitude of expectation. Further, the magnitude of the expectation is different from the jackpot expectation suggested by the red display mode in the hold icon and the variable icon described with reference to FIG. 53.

FIG. 60 (c) is a diagram showing a kimono color determination table of the lord stored in ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500.

This determination table is a table for determining the color of the kimono of the lord displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 in the zone effect described with reference to FIG. 56. Similar to the determination of the background color described above, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 is the kimono of the lord based on the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 in the staging control process (step S409) shown in FIG. 50 (a). Determine the color of. At this time, the determination table shown in FIG. 60 (c) is used. As described above, since the maker pattern is not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207, the maker pattern is not prepared as the color of the kimono of the lord. The color of the lord's kimono also suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.

In the above description, the effect sounds such as the appearance sound of the hold icon and the variable icon and the change sound of the display mode are output from the speaker 120, but the shortest 16th note corresponds to the display mode B (green). A production sound is output (FIG. 56 (c)), and a short production sound of eighth notes is output corresponding to the display mode C (red) (FIG. 52 (c), FIG. 57 (c), FIG. 58 (FIG. 58). f)), a long production sound of quarter notes is output corresponding to the display mode D (maker pattern) (FIG. 55 (b), FIG. 57 (e), FIG. 59 (f)), display mode E ( The longest production sound of the half note was output corresponding to (rainbow color) (FIG. 57 (g)). That is, the higher the expectation of the big hit, the longer the output time of the production sound is output. Although the effect sound was different for each display mode, the display mode in which the expectation of the jackpot was relatively high (display mode D and the display mode E higher than 50%) and the display in which the expectation of the jackpot was relatively low were displayed. The staging sound may be different depending on the mode (display mode B and display mode C of 50% or less). That is, a special effect sound may be output only when the expectation of the big hit is relatively high. Furthermore, only the appearance sound of the hold icon and the variable icon of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) and the change sound to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) are output, and the specific effect sound different from that of the other display modes is output. You may try to do it. The specific effect sound here may be an effect sound related to the display mode D (maker pattern) or an effect sound representing the display mode D (maker pattern). For example, when the maker pattern is an animal pattern, the specific effect sound may be an effect sound. , The bark of the animal with the animal pattern may be output as a specific production sound.

Further, in the above description, the character color of the reach title LT1 shown in FIG. 52 (j) and the character color of the zone title ZT shown in FIG. 56 (b) do not suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit, and conversely. , The background display of the reach title LT2 shown in FIG. 55 (e), the background display of the reach title LT3 shown in FIG. 57 (j), the background display of the reach title LT4 shown in FIG. 58 (i), and the background display of the reach title LT 4 shown in FIG. 59 (i). The background display of the reach title LT5 suggested the degree of expectation of a big hit. However, the display mode of the characters in the title may indicate the degree of expectation of the jackpot, and in this case, the characters of the title will be displayed in different display modes according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot. .. On the contrary, the background display of the title may not suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit. In this case, the background display of the title is always displayed in the same display mode.

Furthermore, in addition to the display mode of the title text and background display, the display mode of the cut-in notice display text, background display, and frame display, or the display mode of the dialogue notice text, background display, and balloon line display are the hold icon and the display mode. The display mode (color or pattern) of the variable icon may indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, in these notices, the display of the second display mode (manufacturer pattern) appears. On the other hand, the display of the second display mode (manufacturer pattern) does not appear during the demonstration production.

Further, during the big hit game, the light emitting means (effect lamp 206, the light emitting unit 71 of the first effect movable body 7, the game board lamp 442 such as a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23, the left frame lamp 122L, The right frame lamp 122R, the upper frame lamp 122U, the game table frame lamp 452 such as the button lamp 138, etc.) may emit light in a rainbow-colored light emitting mode. Therefore, the rainbow-colored light emitting mode (light emitting mode D) may not suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit unless the symbol variation is displayed. Even during the big hit game, the light emitting means does not emit light in a light emitting mode representing the maker pattern (display mode D).

Further, the appearance frequency of the maker pattern may be higher in the second gaming state (for example, the special figure high probability state) than in the first gaming state (for example, the special figure low probability state). Further, the appearance frequency of the maker pattern may be a specification that cannot be changed by the setting operation of the player, but if the specification can be changed in the custom mode, the first mode (for example, the non-custom mode (normal mode)). )) In the second mode (for example, custom mode), the appearance frequency of the manufacturer pattern may be higher.

Further, if the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is hit right in a low probability state of the special figure, it takes a long time until the result of the variation display of the special figure 2 is displayed, which is disadvantageous to the player. A maker pattern may appear in a special figure high probability state where a small hit rush can be expected without appearing. Alternatively, in the 1-type and 2-type mixer that wins a V prize via a small hit, the manufacturer pattern does not appear in the variable staging where the small hit is won in the normal game state, and the small hit is won in the short-time game state. In the variable production, there is a possibility that the maker pattern may appear.

Further, although the maker pattern has the lowest appearance frequency, the appearance frequency may be the same as the appearance frequency of the rainbow color. Alternatively, the frequency of appearance of the maker pattern may be lower than the frequency of appearance of red but higher than the frequency of appearance of rainbow color. As described above, the frequency of appearance may be changeable depending on the setting operation of the player.

Further, what has been displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207, or may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207 instead of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Further, as a display means instead of the sub liquid crystal display device 207, a transparent or translucent light guide plate (second display means) covering the game board 200 or the game area 124 is installed in front of the game board 200 or the game area 124. You may. This light guide plate is an optical member that emits light incident from the side toward the front, and the light emitting mode can be switched depending on the color of the incident light. It is possible to display a picture. Even when the light guide plate is used instead of the sub liquid crystal display device 207, the manufacturer's pattern is not displayed.

Further, in the description from FIG. 52 to FIG. 59, the expectation of the big hit may be expressed (may not be expressed), white, green, red, gold, rainbow color, and the manufacturer's pattern that always indicates the expectation of the big hit. Although it is described using blue, which does not represent the degree of expectation of a big hit, other colors and patterns may be used respectively.

Further, when the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon is changed, the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is prevented from changing from the default display mode, while the display mode E (rainbow color) is changed from the default display mode. It may be changed, and in this case, the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may be changed only from the display mode C (red), or the display mode C (red) may be changed. And it may be possible to change from the display mode B (green). On the contrary, even if the default display mode is not changed to the display mode E (rainbow color), the default display mode may be changed to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern). good. In this case, the display mode E (rainbow color) may be changed only from the display mode C (red), or may be changed from the display mode C (red) and the display mode B (green). May be possible. Further, the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may be changed from the display mode C (red) and the display mode B (green) in addition to the default display mode.

As described above, various effects using colors have been described, but predetermined colors displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 (predetermined colors displayed in the background display of the reach title, the hold icon, the variable icon, and the zone title). ), Light emitting means (effect lamp 206, light emitting unit 71 of the first effect movable body 7, game board lamp 442 such as a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23, left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R. , The upper frame lamp 122U, the game table frame lamp 452 such as the button lamp 138), the predetermined color displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207 (the kimono of the lord), and the second staging movable body. Strictly speaking, the predetermined color of the decoration of the decorative body included in 8 has a different hue in each display because the display medium and the effect are different.

However, even if the colors are slightly different, if the player can imagine that the color is a "predetermined color" (for example, red), the "predetermined color" of each display represents the same "predetermined color". It can be said that they are the same or similar "predetermined colors".

FIG. 61 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 61), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored, and the slot machine 1000 is used. It is configured to be able to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame member to form each reel 1010 to 1012. .. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a backlight (not shown in FIG. 61) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 medals are bet and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a downhill winning line and an upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for staging.

The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61, up to three bet buttons 1030 are inserted each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, two are inserted when the bet button 1031 is pressed, and two are inserted when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal slot 1034 is a slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034, and the insertion means that both are included. be. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize in some winning combination.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process is executed to draw a lottery as to which of the plurality of types of combinations is won, and the slot machine 1000 is operated. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively disadvantageous state.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 1043 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 41 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal insertion slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 41 is provided, and this effect button 1091 is also a button lamp (not shown). It emits light.

The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A staging device 1080 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002. The effect device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 composed of two right doors 1063a and a left door 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 arranged on the back side of the door member 1063. It has the same effect movable body 1058 as the second effect movable body 8 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 41, and the two right doors 1063a and the left door 1063b are horizontally outside in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057. When opened, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) appears in front of the slot machine 1000 (on the player side), and the effect movable body 1058 also appears on the right side thereof. A light emitting diode (not shown) capable of emitting full color is arranged in the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b. Further, the staging movable body 1058 shown in FIG. 61 also includes the decorative body described with reference to FIG. 54. It should be noted that the device may be configured to be capable of displaying various effect images and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, and may include, for example, a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. It may be a display device or the like. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but it may be a square flat surface. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. Further, the display screen may have a curved surface.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61, a sub-liquid crystal display device may be provided separately from the liquid crystal display device 1057.

The liquid crystal display device 1057 and / and the sub-liquid crystal display device display display modes A to E in a title character display, a title background display, a notice background display, a notice frame display, a notice character display, and the like. Used. That is, the display of the maker pattern of the display mode D is also used. In the slot machine 1000, each display of the display mode A to the display mode E is a suggestion image suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to the AT state and the degree of expectation of bonus acquisition. Further, the side lamp 1044, the light emitting diode (not shown) arranged on the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b, the button lamp (not shown) for causing the effect button 1091 to emit light, and the like can emit light in the light emitting modes A to E. However, it does not emit light in the light emitting mode representing the manufacturer's pattern.

The present invention is also applicable to an enclosed pachinko machine. In the enclosed pachinko machine, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means into the gaming area is discharged from the gaming area and can be supplied to the launching means again. Further, a display means for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area on the front of the game table, and is shown in FIG. 41. The sphere storage dish 126 shown is not provided. This enclosed pachinko machine encloses a ball and circulates the enclosed ball inside the pachinko machine. The enclosed ball is used as a launching ball, and the payout of the ball is executed by credit. It may be.

According to the above description
Suggestion image [for example, hold icon, variable icon, title character display] suggesting "expectation that the player will be advantageous [for example, expectation of big hit, expectation of transition to AT state, expectation of bonus acquisition, etc.]" , Title background display, notice background display, notice frame display, notice character display, etc.] and display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, sub liquid crystal display device 207, liquid crystal display device 1057, etc.] ,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of light emitting modes [For example, for a game board such as an effect lamp 206, a light emitting unit 71 of the first effect movable body 7, and a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in an attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 43. Lamp 442 (see FIG. 44), left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R, upper frame lamp 122U, button lamp 138 and other game table frame lamps 452 (see FIG. 44) shown in FIG. 43, shown in FIG. A light emitting diode (not shown) arranged on the side lamp 1044, the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b, a button lamp (not shown) that causes the effect button 1091 to emit light, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The display means displays the suggested image in the first display mode [for example, the white display mode shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 60 (a), the green display mode shown in FIG. 53 (b), and FIG. 53 ( c), the display mode of red shown in FIG. 60 (a), etc.] can be displayed.
The display means can display the suggestion image in a second display mode [for example, a display mode of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer pattern) on a white background shown in FIGS. 53 (d) and 60 (a)]. It is a thing
The second display mode is a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the first display mode [for example, 75%].
The light emitting means is a first light emitting mode showing the first display mode [for example, a white light emitting mode shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 60 (b), and a green light emitting mode shown in FIG. 53 (b). It may emit light in the mode, the red light emitting mode shown in FIGS. 53 (c), 60 (b), etc.].
The light emitting means may not emit light in the second light emitting mode [for example, a light emitting mode having green and yellow polka dots on a white background] representing the second display mode.
The gaming table is characterized by [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 41 and the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61]. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, the rarity of the second display mode, which has a high degree of expectation, may be improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the second display mode may be enhanced.

The degree of expectation may be the expectation of a big hit.

Further, the light emitting means may be a board lamp or a frame lamp. Alternatively, it may be a light emitting body provided in an accessory such as a movable means.

Further, even if the first light emitting mode is slightly different from the first display mode, it is sufficient that the relationship with the first display mode is generally recognized. Further, the light emitting means does not emit light in a light emitting mode in which a relationship with the second display mode is generally recognized.

Further, the display means can display the suggested image in the fourth display mode, and the display suggesting that the first display mode has a higher degree of expectation than the fourth display mode. It may be an embodiment. The fourth display mode may be a normal display mode, that is, a default display mode. The fourth display mode may be a display mode suggesting that the expectation level is lower than that of the first display mode, or a display mode suggesting that the expectation level is 0%. It may be a display mode which does not suggest the degree of expectation.

again,
"The display means can display the suggestion image in the third display mode [for example, the rainbow-colored display mode shown in FIGS. 53 (e) and 60 (a)].
The third display mode is a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the second display mode [for example, 100%].
The light emitting means may emit light in a third light emitting mode [for example, the rainbow-colored light emitting mode shown in FIGS. 53 (e) and 60 (b)] representing the third display mode. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first light emitting mode is the same as or similar to the first display mode.
The second light emitting mode is the same as or similar to the second display mode.
The third light emitting mode is the same as or similar to the third display mode.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first light emitting mode is a light emitting mode related to the first display mode, and the second light emitting mode is a light emitting mode related to the second display mode. The light emitting mode may be a light emitting mode related to the third display mode.

For example, if the first light emitting mode and the first display mode are only different due to the difference between the medium such as the light emitting means and the display means, the first light emitting mode is the first light emitting mode. It can be said that the light emitting mode is the same as the display mode, and it can be said that the third light emitting mode is the same light emitting mode as the third display mode.

again,
"The second display mode is a display mode using a plurality of colors [for example, yellow and green].
The third display mode is also a display mode using a plurality of colors [for example, seven colors constituting the rainbow (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The third display mode is a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is 100%.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

For example, the third display mode may be a display mode suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed.

again,
"The second display mode is a display mode [for example, a maker pattern or a maker color] that symbolizes a manufacturing company or a sales company of a game table.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second display mode may be a display mode in which the manufacturer or the sales company of the game console can be recognized.

According to the above description
Suggestion image [for example, hold icon, variable icon, title character display] suggesting "expectation that the player will be advantageous [for example, expectation of big hit, expectation of transition to AT state, expectation of bonus acquisition, etc.]" , Title background display, notice background display, notice frame display, notice character display, etc.] [For example, in the decorative pattern display device 208, sub liquid crystal display device 207, and FIG. 61 shown in FIG. 43. Liquid crystal display device 1057, etc.]
Movable means in which the player side is a movable area rather than the display means [for example, the first effect movable body 7 and the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 43, the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b shown in FIG. Body 1058] and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means displays the suggested image in the first display mode [for example, the white display mode shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 60 (a), the green display mode shown in FIG. 53 (b), and FIG. 53 ( c), the display mode in red shown in FIG. 60 (a)].
The display means can display the suggestion image in a second display mode [for example, a display mode of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer pattern) on a white background shown in FIGS. 53 (d) and 60 (a)]. It is a thing
The second display mode is a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the first display mode [for example, 75%].
The movable means is the first decoration according to the display mode showing the first display mode [for example, the white decoration shown in FIG. 54 (a), the green decoration shown in FIG. 54 (b), or FIG. 54 (c). ) Shown in red decoration]
The movable means does not include a second decoration according to the display mode representing the second display mode [for example, a decoration of a green and yellow polka dot pattern (maker pattern) on a white background] [for example, FIG. 54. reference],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, the rarity of the second display mode, which has a high degree of expectation, may be improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the second display mode may be enhanced. Further, since the movable means in which the player side is the movable area rather than the display means does not include the second decoration, it is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that the second display mode has appeared, which is expected. It is possible to reduce the excessive agitation of the feeling.

The degree of expectation may be the expectation of a big hit.

Further, the movable means may be an effect movable means (role).

Further, even if the first decoration is slightly different from the first display mode, it is sufficient that the relationship with the first display mode is generally recognized. Further, the movable means is not provided with a decoration generally recognized to be related to the second display mode.

The decoration may be a part painted with a color or a pattern. That is, it may be a portion where the color or pattern does not change. Alternatively, it may be a portion for displaying a color or a pattern (such as a liquid crystal display device or a light emitting diode), or may be a portion capable of displaying in a different color or pattern.

Further, the display means can display the suggested image in the fourth display mode, and the display suggesting that the first display mode has a higher degree of expectation than the fourth display mode. It may be an embodiment. The fourth display mode may be a normal display mode, that is, a default display mode. The fourth display mode may be a display mode suggesting that the expectation level is lower than that of the first display mode, or a display mode suggesting that the expectation level is 0%. It may be a display mode which does not suggest the degree of expectation.

again,
"The display means can display the suggestion image in the third display mode [for example, the rainbow-colored display mode shown in FIGS. 53 (e) and 60 (a)].
The third display mode is a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the second display mode [for example, 100%].
The movable means does not include a third decoration [for example, a rainbow-colored decoration] according to the display mode representing the third display mode [see, for example, FIG. 54].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The movable means is provided with a first portion [for example, a second finger (index finger) 822] on which the display according to the display mode representing the first display mode is displayed, and the movable means is provided with the movable means. Can take a state in which the first part is invisible to the player and a state in which the first part is visible to the player, and the movable means represents the second display mode. It may not be provided with the second part where the display according to the display mode is displayed. Further, the movable means may not be provided with a third portion in which the display according to the display mode representing the third display mode is displayed (see FIG. 54).

again,
"The first decoration is a decoration having the same or similar display mode as the first display mode.
The second decoration is a decoration having the same or similar display mode as the second display mode.
The game table is characterized in that the third decoration is a decoration having the same or similar display mode as the third display mode. 』\
Was also explained.

The first decoration is a decoration according to the display mode related to the first display mode, and the second decoration is a decoration according to the display mode related to the second display mode. The third decoration may be a decoration according to the display mode related to the third display mode.

For example, if the first decoration and the first display mode are only differences due to the difference between the media such as the movable means and the display means, the first decoration is the first display mode. It can be said that the display mode is the same as that of.

Further, the second display mode is a display mode using a plurality of colors, and the third display mode may also be a display mode using a plurality of colors.

Further, the third display mode may be a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is 100%.

again,
"The movable means displays the suggestion image of the second display mode rather than [for example, FIG. 58 (g)] when the suggestion image of the first display mode is displayed on the display means. If this is the case [for example, FIG. 59 (g)], it is easier to move.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The second display mode is a display mode that symbolizes the manufacturing company or the sales company of the game console.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second display mode may be a display mode in which the manufacturer or the sales company of the game console can be recognized.

The actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, etc. described above, the constituent requirement can be changed to another embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, and the like. And various examples may be applied. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, etc. Even if it is applied to various examples, it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating body game machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 62 to 84. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 62 to 84 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 62 to 84, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 62 to 62 to FIG. In the description using FIG. 84, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 62 to 84 are given priority.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door 108 with a ball storage plate. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 104S for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. A clerk at a game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 106S for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage dish is a door member mounted on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 with respect to the lower side of the main body 104 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage dish is opened by pushing an open lever 1080 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage dish for detecting that the door 108 with a ball storage dish has been opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that is guided to the launcher 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, an effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 2 to 4 (see FIG. 64) by the operation of the player, and an effect button 136 that is built into the effect button 136. A chance button lamp 138 that causes the button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit. It is provided with a return operation button 142 for performing the above, and a ball lending display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full due to the game ball. Further, the operation key unit 190 is also provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching mallet 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. The launching device 110 launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player. It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 62, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

FIG. 63 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 62 as viewed from the back side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game ball and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable and, when mounted at a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 65). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 65) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 65) that performs control processing related to the effect. A second sub-board case 166 for accommodating a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 65) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 65). A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes (see FIG. 65) and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launch of a game ball (FIG. 65). A power switch that configures a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices (see FIG. 65), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The CR interface unit 606 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change key 192, the setting change button 194, and the accessory ratio / setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In the present embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change mode can be set to at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities. Can be migrated to. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner visible to the clerk. As shown in FIG. 71 (A), the accessory ratio / setting display 196 has double-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged one above the other, and one-digit 7-segment LEDs modularized on the right side. The bonus ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the bonus ratio (YH) and the continuous bonus ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a red monochromatic LED, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. It should be noted that at least a part of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that the player can see it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. The details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 64 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. Here, the arrows d1 to d3 indicate the directions in a state where the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d1 indicates the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side may be referred to as front or front, and the back side may be referred to as back or rear. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand may be referred to as the right in front view. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher one may be referred to as upper and the lower one may be referred to as lower.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, the front left side portion 200a of the game board 200 is inserted into the front view left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the main body 104, and here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the game board 200 is rotated around the center of rotation and the right side portion 200b of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 to be set. With such a structure, workability can be improved. In some cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is formed of, for example, resin, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface displaying a character or the like of the pachinko machine 100. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which a character of the pachinko machine 100 or the like is printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged at the lower right of the main body 201. When it is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, game stop that makes it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached to and detached from the main body 104. Of the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the launched game ball.

Areas other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be referred to as a non-game area. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished from each other with the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes with the firing intensity of the game ball maximized can be referred to as at least the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area in which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of the effect device or the like in the game area 124. The game area 124 may be referred to as a flow area at the point where the game ball flows down during the game, and the non-game area may be referred to as the non-flow area at the point where the game ball does not flow down during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but an area in which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of a staging device or the like may be referred to as a non-flow-down area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. Below the game area 124, there are a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol hold lamp 218. A second special symbol holding lamp 220 and the like are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. , And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , A 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment.

The normal map holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding special figure variable games, and in this embodiment, holding up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure variable games. It is possible. Further, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure variable games, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible.

Further, a time-saving medium lamp TL, a right-handed indicator lamp RL, and a high-accuracy medium lamp HL are also arranged. The time-saving medium lamp TL is a lamp for indicating that the variation display time of the normal drawing is shortened and the blade member 232a of the electric tulip (electric chew), which will be described later, is in a time-saving gaming state where it is easy to open for a long time. The right-handed display lamp RL is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a big hit game state or a short-time game state and is in a state where the player can obtain the benefit by hitting the right side. The high-probability middle lamp HL is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or that the game state is in a high-probability state.

Around the decorative symbol display device 208, there are predetermined ball advance entrances, for example, general winning openings 226a and 226b, a normal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232. , A variable winning opening 234 is arranged.

One or a plurality of general winning openings 226a and 226b are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 124, respectively. Here, the general winning opening arranged on the left side of the game area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226a, and the general winning opening arranged on the right side of the gaming area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226b. When a ball enters the general winning opening 226a, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning opening 226a has won a prize, the payout device 152 is driven to win a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls. When the ball is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a ball and enters the general winning opening 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and it is assumed that the general winning opening 226b has won a prize, and the payout device 152 is driven to obtain a predetermined number (not shown). For example, one) ball is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the winning. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 226a and the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 226b are detected by different ball detection sensors. Further, when a plurality of general winning openings 226a are provided on the left side of the game area 124, even if the ball passages for guiding the entered game balls are merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, they may be detected by different ball detection sensors. Further, when a plurality of general winning openings 226b are provided on the right side of the game area 124, even if the ball passages for guiding the entered game balls are merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, they may be detected by different ball detection sensors. The balls that have entered the general winning openings 226a and 226b are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged in. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the normal starting opening 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal map variation game by the normal map display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of a ball into the first special drawing start port 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball in the upper plate 126. At the same time, the special figure fluctuation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure starting port 230, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first special drawing starting port 230 when hitting to the right. Then, in the present embodiment, the specification is to start the variable display of the special figure 2 in preference to the special figure 1 (a pachinko machine having such a specification may be referred to as a "special 2 priority variable machine" or the like). Has been done.

The second special figure start port 232 is composed of an electric tulip (electric chew), is arranged below the first special figure start port 230, has a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed on the left and right, and closes the blade member 232a. Since it is impossible to enter the ball inside, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times when the normal map variation game is won and the normal map display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol. 2 Special figure When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects an entry into the start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the normal drawing start opening 228 (due to the game nail (not shown)), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the normal drawing start opening 228 when hitting to the left. .. Therefore, during the left-handed strike, in principle, the player does not win the swing game, and therefore, in principle, the blade member 232a does not open or close. On the other hand, in the case of hitting to the right, since the game ball can be expected to enter the normal drawing start port 228, the blade member 232a may open and close by winning the normal drawing variable game. That is, it can be said that there is almost no possibility of winning a prize in the second special figure starting port 232 while hitting left, but there is a possibility of winning a prize in the second special drawing starting port 232 while hitting right.

The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in this embodiment, only one is arranged on the lower right side of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the door member 234a is closed. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 2, 3, or 10 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball.

In the present embodiment, the variable winning opening 234 and the general winning opening 226b are integrally configured in the entry unit U1 and can be detachably attached to the main body 201 of the game board 200. The ball entry unit U1 is further provided with a V shutter VS and a V passage switch VC. The V-passing switch VC opens upward so that the game ball can pass from top to bottom. This V-passing switch VC detects a passing game ball. The V-shutter VS is arranged above the V-passing switch VC, and moves forward and backward by a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. When the V shutter VS is advanced (corresponding to the closed state), the game ball cannot pass through the V passage switch VC, and when the V shutter VS is retracted (corresponding to the open state), the game ball is V. It becomes possible to pass through the pass switch VC. A gaming ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 and has passed through a ball detection sensor (not shown) is guided to the front side, then rolls to the V shutter VS, passes through the V-pass switch VC, and cannot pass. It may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100. The V-passing switch VS is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the V passage switch VC, it is determined that the V prize has been won.

In the present embodiment, the V shutter VS is maintained in a closed state (advanced state) from the start of the jackpot game to a specific round (for example, the final round), and the V shutter VS is opened (backward) in the specific round. , V prize can be obtained. If the V prize can be won, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and if the V prize cannot be won, the control state is the special figure low probability state after the big hit game ends. It remains. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment, the transition to the special figure high probability state is determined by the game ball passing through the V passage switch VS.

Further, in the game area 124, a disk-shaped ball striking direction changing member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting opening is provided. There is also an out port 240 for guiding a ball or the like that did not win a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and drives the launch motor and the launch rod. It is launched into the game area 124 by passing through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the launching mallet. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the ball striking direction changing member 236, the game nail, or the like, and is used as a winning opening (general winning opening 226a, 226b, variable winning opening 234) or starting. Win a prize at the mouth (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), without winning any prize opening or start port, or just passing through the normal figure start port 228. Reach 240. Further, in the present embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed so as to open upward at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104. An out-ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of the game ball received at the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. The out-ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. All the game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including the game balls discharged from the out port 240 and the game balls winning in various winning openings) are accepted by the discharge ball receiving port and pass through a predetermined discharge passage. It is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the pachinko machine 100.

Further, the staging device 2 is arranged at the upper part of the game area 124, the staging device 3 is arranged at the lower part, and the staging device 4 is arranged on the left side and the right side, respectively. In the case of the present embodiment, these effect devices 2 to 4 are supported by the main body 104.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 65. The figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central portion of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (it is assumed that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor. Then, a sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 in the basic circuit 302, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc., and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the first 2. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for controlling the display of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, for example). A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the normal figure hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp, etc.), and a predetermined movable member, for example, as an ordinary electric accessory. The drive means for driving the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232, the door member 234a for the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric accessory, the drive means for driving the V shutter VS, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for control is connected to the drive circuit 334. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won a prize in the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Stored in the value storage register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won a prize at the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly obtained. It is latched and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the start port 232 of the second special figure.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. is doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but the payout control unit 600 is configured so as not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the effect devices 2 to 4, and a sensor circuit. The 428 and the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the effect devices 2 to 4, and button sensors 426 that detect the pressing of various buttons constituting the effect buttons 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A VDP (video display processor) that reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is equipped with 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502. In the present embodiment, the memory 508 is used as the temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is composed of a recording medium (for example, EEPROM, flash memory, etc.) capable of holding the storage state even when the power supply is cut off. Thereby, for example, the information for displaying the display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or the setting is changed. A RAM whose stored information volatilizes when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the CR interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. Ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor 1044 that detects that the main body 104 has opened, a front frame door sensor 106S that detects that the front frame door 106 has opened, and the like, and includes the main body 104 and the front frame door. When the 106 is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the launching rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies balls from the precision plate 126 to the launching device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current and converts it into a predetermined voltage to control each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device by another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. Explain the types of special drawings and general drawings.

Special Figure 1 The variable game is started on condition that the first starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the ball enters the special drawing 2 starting port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure 1). Fluctuating game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as a variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be performed multiple times in succession.

FIG. 66A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 66 (a), three types of special figures, "special figure a" to "special figure c", are shown. In FIG. 66A, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned on.

In the present embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols (“special diagram a” and “special diagram b”) are prepared as the stop symbol modes of special diagram 1. "Special figure a" is a 3 round (R) probability change jackpot symbol that is scheduled to acquire probability variation, and "special figure b" is a 3R normal jackpot symbol that has no chance of acquiring probability variation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment, the probability variation acquisition (transition to the special figure high probability state) is determined by the game ball passing through the V passage switch VS. When the special figure a is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the V shutter VS opens (retracts) and the game ball passes through the V passage switch VS when the player enters the third round, which is the final round of the big hit game. It will be possible. If the game ball passes through the V-pass switch VS (if a V prize is won), the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and the shifted special figure high probability state shifts to the jackpot game. It is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times after the end. In the present embodiment, if the V-shutter VS is opened, there is sufficient time to maintain the open state, and there is a high possibility that the game ball will pass through the V-passing switch VS. It can be said that it is a big hit scheduled (the same applies to "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure B" described later). On the other hand, when the special figure b is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the V shutter VS does not open even if the player enters the third round, which is the final round of the big hit game, and the game ball passes through the V passage switch VS. Nothing is done (V prize cannot be won), and the control state remains the special low probability state after the big hit game is completed. As described above, it was necessary to win a V prize for the transition to the special high-probability state, but the transition to the normal high-probability state is started on condition that the big hit game is completed. That is, if a big hit is made, the state shifts to the normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and in the shifted normal figure high probability state, even if the symbol variation display of the special figure is the special figure a after the big hit game ends. For example, it is maintained 120 times, and in the case of special figure b, it is maintained for 50 times.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of lost symbol (“special symbol c”) is prepared as the stop symbol mode of the special diagram 1.

FIG. 66 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 66 (b), four types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure D" are shown, and two kinds of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure A" and "special figure D". Figure B "). "Special figure A" is a 10R probability change jackpot symbol scheduled to be acquired, and "special figure B" is a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol scheduled to be acquired. That is, if the special figure A wins the V prize in the 10th round, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state, the normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and the special figure A waits after the big hit game ends. The state is maintained while the symbol variation display of is performed 120 times. If the special figure B wins a V prize in the second round, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state, the normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and the special figure symbol after the big hit game ends. The state is maintained while the variation display is performed 120 times here as well.

Further, in the present embodiment, two types of lost symbols (“Special Figure C” and “Special Figure D”) are prepared as the stop symbol modes of Special Figure 2. "Special figure C" is the same general lost symbol as "special figure c", but "special figure D" is a special symbol called a time-saving symbol, which will be described in detail later.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot in the special figure variation game is performed by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination of the jackpot symbol to be stopped is performed by a lottery of software random numbers. In addition, in the special figure 2 variable game for a specific period, whether or not the "sudden time reduction" is won is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and if the "sudden time reduction" is won, the second special figure is displayed. The "time saving symbol" is stopped and displayed on the device 214. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the game shifts to the high probability state of the normal figure after the end of the big hit game. The high-probability state of the normal figure is called a time-saving game state (electric support state). Here, the time-saving game state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-time-saving game state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time-saving game state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a time saving game state and a high probability state in the normal figure. In the high-probability state of the normal map, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal map than in the low-probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). For example, the winning probability of the normal-figure variable game is 1/100 in the normal-figure low-probability state (non-time-saving game state), whereas it increases to 99/100 in the normal-figure high-probability state (time-saving game state). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map variation game is shorter in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state (normal map variation short). For example, in the non-time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the normal map variation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the time-saving game state. Further, in the time-saving gaming state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-time-saving gaming state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-time saving game state, the electric chew opening period of 0.2 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the time saving game state. Further, in the time-saving gaming state, the blade member 232a is more likely to open than in the non-time-saving gaming state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 232a, which opens only once in the non-time-saving game state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the time-saving game state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-time saving game state is maintained. This may be disadvantageous to the player if the game ball is picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and the prize of the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases. Because there is. In addition, in this embodiment, when it is simply described as "non-time saving game state", it shall be excluded during the big hit game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, all of the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the electric chew opening period, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are performed, but at least one of these is performed. If this is done, the player's advantage will be high, and the game may be in a short-time game state. In this case, in each of the time-saving game states of a time reduction, b time reduction, and c time reduction, which will be described later, the execution is changed among the normal figure probability change, the normal figure change short, the extension of the electric chew opening period, and the increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened. May be good. For example, in the case of a time reduction, the normal figure probability change, the normal figure change short, the extension of the electric chew opening period, and the increase in the number of times of electric chew opening are all performed. , Extension of the electric chew opening period, and increase in the number of times of electric chew opening may be executed. Alternatively, if either the electric chew opening period is extended or the number of times the electric chew is opened is increased so that the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is increased, the game may be in a time-saving gaming state. In the non-time-saving game state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the time-saving game state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes into a winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the time-saving gaming state than in the non-time-saving gaming state. As described above, in the present embodiment, when "special figure a", "special figure A", and "special figure B" are stopped and displayed, the special figure changes 120 times after the end of the subsequent big hit game. The time-saving game state (normal figure high probability state) is maintained until the display is performed, and at the 121st time, the game shifts to the non-time saving game state (normal figure low probability state). Further, when the "special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the time-saving game state (high probability state of the normal figure) is maintained until the variable display of the special figure is performed 50 times after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter. At the second time, it shifts to the non-time saving game state (normal probability low probability state). In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols of all the special figures are set to shift to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, but even if a jackpot symbol (non-time-saving jackpot symbol) that does not shift to the time-saving gaming state is provided. Often, when a jackpot is achieved with a non-time-saving jackpot symbol, the game may remain in the non-time-saving gaming state without shifting to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. Further, a small hit symbol may be prepared in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined time (for example, twice), and the door member 234a operates once. Keep open for up to 0.1 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 234a in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent openings will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

FIG. 66 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 11 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "Decoration 1" to "Decoration 11". The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variation display of design" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying that it is a normal jackpot (3R normal jackpot of "special figure b"), a combination of decorative symbols in which three decorative symbols of the same number are lined up in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration"). 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1 "," Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2 ", etc.) are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the probability variation jackpot (3R probability variation jackpot of "Special Figure a", 10R probability variation jackpot of "Special Figure A", 2R probability variation jackpot of "Special Figure B"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol c" or "special symbol C", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described so far (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying that the winner is suddenly won in a short time, three "decoration 11" are displayed side by side instead of the combination of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10".

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed by being controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 66 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal map of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public map A" and a missed symbol "Public map B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 has all seven segments lit and one segment in the center. Performs "variable display of the normal map" (variable game of the normal map) that repeats lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols of the hit symbol "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 66 (d), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 65 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 65 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special symbol symbol determination random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a reserved number storage area for special figures. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures divided into a maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of a win / fail judgment (lottery) can be suspended. A random number value storage area for ordinary figures is also prepared. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored in the winning order (holding order) one set for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 65 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input resets and starts by reset interruption, and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 67 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT 314 is set. Operation permission and initial value setting etc. are performed. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step is returned to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312 in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to the processing after step S113 in order to execute the initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state before the power failure is restored (step S109; No), the cause is whether the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 63 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is on (indicating that the operation has been performed). When it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115), and the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side. If it is determined that this is the case (step S115; Yes), the setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio / setting display 196 blinks indicating "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, every time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7-segment of the setting monitor is incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor indicates "6". Then, it returns to "1". In the present embodiment, at least one of settings 1 to 6 having different jackpot probabilities can be selected, and the setting is made by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. Is confirmed. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is erased. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the set value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In the present embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, but for example, it may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or notified by voice output. good. Further, in the present embodiment, the 6-step setting of the settings 1 to 6 is set, but the setting may be other than the 6-step setting, or the setting may not be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is cut off is retained and the retained setting value is displayed. May be good.

Further, in step S113, when it is not determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or when it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S113; No). Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, the initialization process is executed so as to bring the basic circuit 302 into the initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when this power status information is not information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (for example,). A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0). Is determined (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and when the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal). Executes the initialization process to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting (main setting) in the stack pointer, initialization of all storage areas of RAM 308, and the like are performed. In this embodiment, the set value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained even when the initialization is performed. Further, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command described later in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S121, after setting the interruption prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (this setting) to the stack pointer. Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 63 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has been restored to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 68. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 65 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once in about 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 65 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area of this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned pre-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 65 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. (Information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is determined that there was a passage. That is, it is determined that there has been a prize in these winning openings 234,226 and these starting openings 230,232,228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects the entry of the ball into the first special figure start port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special figure It is determined that the starting port 230 has won a prize, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure starting port 230 is performed, but the detection signals for the past three times are performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S121 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. Special figure Update the random number counter to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the normal figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random value has made one round next. I'll do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211 the staging random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a variable / stopped manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display fluctuation / stop, a timer for measuring a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter is updated. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning in the winning openings 234, 226 and the starting openings 230 and 232, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is used. Read and add 1 to set in the original prize ball number storage area.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 65 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal map state update process in the middle of the normal map fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of a normal map (a variable game of a normal map).

In addition, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the normal map fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal map display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be a display mode of a lost symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for making various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal diagram A shown in FIG. 66 (d)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 66 (d)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 232a is set to the setting area during operation, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid (332) of the 232a, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal map state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be non-operating. do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal number winning random number stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If a winning decision is made, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random value, and the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired normal figure timer random value. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol and the fluctuation time before the hit / fail determination process, and predetermines. The result (special figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed repeatedly. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 10R jackpot flag is on. Is special figure B when the special figure A and 2R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 66 (b) is on, special figure C when the loss flag is on, and special figure when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on. D The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is performed so as to be in each mode, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 10R probability variation jackpot symbol (special diagram A), a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol (special diagram B), a lost symbol (special symbol C), and a time saving symbol (special diagram D). Confirmation display of any one of the symbols is performed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the time reduction flag is turned off. .. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in the special figure 2, the symbol for stopping the variable display while additionally storing the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 2 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Set the storage area with information indicating the closure period. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in the final round of the jackpot with probability variation (10 rounds in the special figure A and 2 rounds in the special figure B), the V shutter is used for a predetermined opening period (for example, 10 seconds). A signal for holding the V-shutter VS in the open state is output to the solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the VS (a part of various solenoids 332), and the opening period is set in the storage area of the timer for managing the V-shutter opening time provided in the RAM 308. Set the information to be shown. Then, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the V shutter opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the solenoid for opening / closing the V shutter VS (V shutter opening / closing drive) ( A signal for holding the V shutter VS in the closed state is output to a part of various solenoids 332). Further, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, in order to wait for a period (V winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds)) of displaying an image notifying the player that the game ball has passed through the V passage switch VC and acquired the probability change, the RAM 308 is used. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided, information indicating the V winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the V winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is not turned on.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process which repeats the opening / closing control of the door member 234a a predetermined number of times (excluding the first time, 9 rounds or 1 round) and starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). ) That is, in order to set to wait for a period during which the image for notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed, the effect is displayed in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the waiting period.

If the 10R jackpot flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number of times (120 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. Even when the 2R jackpot flag is set to on, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number (120 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the time reduction number (950 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal map, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal map is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal map. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the fluctuation time of the variable game of the normal map is shorter than that in the low-probability state of the normal map (normal map variation). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew spread). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal map. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 will be entered during the jackpot game, and many gaming balls will be inserted into the special drawing 2 starting opening 232 until the gaming balls enter. There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit may increase and the gambling may increase, and this is to solve the problem.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operating state of the special figure 2 is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 1.

For example, in the special figure 1 state update process in the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 1 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed repeatedly. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 (special figure 1 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 3R jackpot flag A, a 3R jackpot flag B, and a missed flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 3R jackpot flag A is on. The special figure 1 is displayed so that the special figure a and the 3R jackpot flag B shown in FIG. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the device 212 is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 1 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 determines any one of the 3R probability variation jackpot symbol (special symbol a), the 3R normal jackpot symbol (special symbol b), and the lost symbol (special symbol c). Display.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the confirmed and displayed special figure 1 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the time reduction flag is turned off. .. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in the special figure 1, a symbol indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 1 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 1 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 1 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Set the storage area with information indicating the closure period. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, if the 3R jackpot flag A is set to ON, in the special figure 1 state update process in the final round (3 rounds), the solenoid for opening / closing the V shutter VS for a predetermined opening period (for example, 10 seconds) (for example, 10 seconds). A signal for holding the V-shutter VS in the open state is output to (a part of various solenoids 332), and information indicating the release period is set in the storage area of the V-shutter open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Then, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for managing the V shutter opening time changes from 1 to 0), the solenoid for driving the opening / closing of the V shutter VS ( A signal for holding the V shutter VS in the closed state is output to a part of various solenoids 332). Further, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, in order to wait for a period (V winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds)) of displaying an image notifying the player that the game ball has passed through the V passage switch VC and acquired the probability change, the RAM 308 is used. In the storage area of the special figure 1 standby time management timer provided, information indicating the V winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the V winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is not turned on.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (two rounds excluding the first time) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative symbol display device. In order to set the player to wait for a period of time while displaying an image notifying the player that the jackpot by 208 is finished, information indicating the effect waiting period is displayed in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set. If the 3R jackpot flag A is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number (120 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on the flag. Even when the 3R jackpot flag B is set to on, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number (50 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on the flag. In the special figure 1 state update process, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is not set to on.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 1 non-operation is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operating state of Special Figure 1 is set. In the special figure 1 state update process in the case where the special figure 1 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. The execution is performed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process or the variable game related to the holding of the special figure 1 variable game is not performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the winning / failing determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. , The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port 230 is prioritized. In this exemplary embodiment, the special figure variable game with high advantage (special figure 2 variable game in this example) is given priority over the special figure variable game with low advantage (special figure 1 variable game in this example). Therefore, it may be easy to make a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 receives the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the acquired special figure 2 starting information, etc., the winning / failing determination table stored in the ROM 306 is used. Decide whether to make a big hit or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Further, even in the case of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1, it is determined whether the hit is a big hit or a miss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The fluctuation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area and specially. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information taken out from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game with high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with low advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. Although the special figure 2 priority fluctuation is taken as an example, the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 1 is held in the special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested in preference to a hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the high-advantageous special figure 2 variable game or the low-advantage special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won a prize. It may be a variation in the starting opening winning order that starts in order. In the change in the starting order winning order, the upper limit of the number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the upper limit of the hold is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2. Then, it may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of holds.

Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update is not limited to this. By performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing independently for the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special drawings may be configured to be changed at the same time. Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the display of 1 may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, when the fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, Information that can specify the type of command such as a setting command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a symbol change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, missed flags, timer numbers selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the case of the (stop rotation) command, the values of various jackpot flags and missed flags are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of jackpot rounds, the number of jackpot rounds is included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not a special figure 1 starting port 230 has won a prize, whether or not a special figure 2 starting port 232 has won a prize, whether or not a variable winning opening 234 has won a prize, etc. including. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. If it is a setting command, it includes setting information and so on.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data is selected by the various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process, and special figure 2 related lottery process stored in the RAM 308. Set the timer number, the information indicating the number of the reserved special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, and the like. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags, missed flag values, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Set information indicating the number of variable games or special figure 2 variable games. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Set information indicating the number of variable games or special figure 2 variable games. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games, special figure 2 variable games, and the like is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games, special figure 2 variable games, and the like is set in the command data.

Further, in this step S233, a general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence / absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal drawing display device 210 and the special drawing 1 display device 212 are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. , The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 67 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as return data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 69A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 69A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. .. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309 following step S307, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is converted into the effect data according to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 according to the detection result. Perform the process to change to.

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is an instruction to various lamps 442,452 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. do.

In step S317 following step S315, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command to the staging devices 2 to 4 in the staging data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 69B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 69 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S343 following step S341, control commands are transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other effects random value value update processes are performed. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 70A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 70A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 70B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 70C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S443 following step S441, other processing for updating the random value for staging is performed.

FIG. 70D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 next to step S451, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 is input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP516 based on the end of image drawing is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. Here, FIG. 71 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and FIG. 71 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198. Is.

As described above, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 is configured to have a bonus ratio monitor and a setting monitor, and the bonus ratio monitor includes a continuous bonus ratio (RY) and a bonus ratio (the bonus ratio). YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor displays the current setting value.

Here, the continuous bonus ratio is due to the operation of the bonus when the bonus is continuously operated among the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired (that is, variable winning during the big hit game). It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the mouth 234 and winning a prize. In addition, it may be the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning a prize in the variable winning opening 234 to the number of out balls. In addition, the bonus ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the bonus (that is, the second special figure start opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234 are opened to win a prize. It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous bonus ratio exceeds 60% as a result of calculating the continuous bonus ratio, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the continuous bonus ratio is blinked and then displayed. A security signal (RY) is output to. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, it may be possible to smoothly carry out the type application test for the gaming machine.

If it is determined that the bonus ratio exceeds 70% as a result of calculating the bonus ratio, the double-digit 7-segment LED that displays the bonus ratio is blinked, and then the security signal (YH) is displayed. ) Is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is blinked, but for example, the emission color is changed. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 71 (B), eight DIP switches are arranged on the DIP switch substrate 198. Each DIP switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and the position of each DIP switch can be read when the power is turned on to change the appearance probability of the effect. The appearance rate, the entry rate of the effect mode, and the like can be set.

Subsequently, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62 will be described, although there are some overlaps with those described so far.

FIG. 72 (a) is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the gaming state after the jackpot game.

First, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62, when the setting 1 is selected in the setting change process (step S117) shown in FIG. 67, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability becomes 1/320, and the special figure The jackpot probability with high probability is 1/91. When setting 2 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/315, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/90. When the setting 3 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/310, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/88. When setting 4 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/305, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/87. When the setting 5 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/300, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/85. When the setting 6 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/295, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/84. The larger the setting value, the easier it is to win a big hit.

Further, while the probability of winning a map with a low probability of a map is 1/100, the probability of winning a map with a high probability of a map is 99/100.

Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), in the special figure 1, the breakdown of the special figure a and the special figure b is equal (50% each), and in the special figure 2, the breakdown of the special figure A and the special figure B. Is 7: 3.

Further, in the special figure a of the special figure 1, the V shutter VS is opened only in the third round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passing switch VC. When the game ball passes through this V-pass switch VC (when the probability variation operation area is ON), the probability variation is attached, so that the game state after the big hit game ends becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. This state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V-pass switch VC (when the probability variation operation region is OFF), the game state after the big hit game ends becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state becomes. , The symbol variation display of the special figure is maintained for 120 times.

In the special figure b of the special figure 1, the V shutter VS does not open even in the third round, which is the final round, and therefore the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC. Therefore, the game state after the end of the big hit game is limited to the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state is maintained while the special figure symbol variation display is performed 50 times.

In the special figure A of the special figure 2, the V shutter VS is opened only in the 10th round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passing switch VC. In the special figure B, the V shutter VS opens only in the second round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passing switch VC. In both the special figure A and the special figure B, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC (when the probability variation operation area is ON), the game state after the big hit game ends is the special figure high probability normal figure. It becomes a high-probability state, and this state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V-pass switch VC (when the probability variation operation region is OFF), the game state after the big hit game ends becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state becomes. , The symbol variation display of the special figure is maintained for 120 times.

After the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state or the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is maintained a predetermined number of times, the state shifts to the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The time reduction that starts after the big hit game is said to be a time reduction.

FIG. 72B is a diagram showing a game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62.

In the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), it is recommended to launch the game ball toward the left side area of the game area in order to aim at the special figure 1 starting port 230. That is, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, even if the ball is entered into the normal figure start port 228, the player hardly wins the normal figure variable game and should not make a right-handed hit. The ball should be fired towards the left area (should be left-handed). The normal state is a non-time saving game state.

On the other hand, in a time-saving game state such as a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state or a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, it is easy to win the normal figure fluctuation game, so in order to aim at the normal figure start opening 228, in the game area It is recommended to launch the game ball toward the right area where the starting port 228 is provided. That is, as shown in the breakdown of FIG. 72 (a), the probability of obtaining a big hit with a probability variation (special figure a) is 50% in the special figure 1, whereas in the special figure 2, the probability variation is attached. The probability of getting a big hit is 100%. Further, the number of times that the time-saving game state is maintained after the big hit game may be 50 times in the special figure 1, whereas it is always 120 times in the special figure 2. Therefore, since it is easier for the player to obtain a jackpot that is advantageous to the player in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1, the second special figure start opening 232 should be won and the big hit in the special figure 2 should be aimed at. .. Therefore, the player should shoot the game ball toward the right side region (should hit right).

Further, in the case of a big hit game, in order to aim at the variable winning opening 234, the game ball is fired (right-handed) toward the right side area where the variable winning opening 234 is provided in the game area. Become. FIG. 72 (b) shows that after the big hit game is completed, the time-saving game state may be maintained 120 times or 50 times.

Further, in FIG. 72 (b), when the special figure is not hit even once while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 950 times in the special figure low probability state (time saving game state, non-time saving gaming state). That is, when the special figure is lost 950 times continuously, the time-saving gaming state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 1100 times. The period during which the time-saving game state is maintained as a result of the special figure loss being continued a predetermined time is called the play time, and this time reduction is called the b time reduction. b The time-saving game state can be shifted only once before the first hit after the power is turned on, and after the big hit, it can be shifted only once before the next big hit. Therefore, if the special figure loss of 950 times is continuous in the b time reduction game state, there is no new transition to the b time reduction game state, and the b time reduction game state so far is continued, and the special figure loss of 1100 times occurs. If it is continuous, it shifts to the non-time saving game state (normal state). It should be noted that the count of the number of consecutive losses, which is a condition for shifting to the b time-saving game state, includes the number of consecutive losses in the a time-saving game state and the c time-saving game state described later.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), the time-saving symbol may be stopped and displayed only in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2. The time-saving game state in which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed and the transition is made is called c time-saving. This time-saving symbol is a hold of special figure 2 remaining at the end of the time-saving game state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) (hereinafter, "special figure 2 remaining"). It may be referred to as "hold".) In the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of being digested in the non-time saving game state, c time saving may be won. If the c time reduction is won, the time reduction symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 64), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows the “decoration 11” (time reduction decorative symbol) shown in FIG. 66 (c). ) Are displayed side by side and stopped. Then, while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 950 times, the time-saving gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) is maintained. That is, it shifts to the c time saving game state without going through the big hit game. The probability of winning suddenly is 1/90. In addition, the special figure 2 remaining hold at the time when the time-saving game state started after the big hit game ends, and the special figure 2 at the time when the b time-saving game state when the 950 times special figure loss is continuously started are finished. In addition to the remaining hold, there is a possibility that the special figure 2 remaining hold at the time when the time-saving game state started by suddenly winning in a short time will be won again in a sudden time reduction.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving symbol may be won even in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and the b time saving game state. Also in this case, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 64). However, on the decorative symbol display device 208, three "decoration 11" (decorative symbols for shortening the time) shown in FIG. .. Then, in the present embodiment, since the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state and the b time short game state are prioritized over the c time saving game state, the second special figure display device 214 Even if the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the time-saving symbol is invalidated and the game is not changed to the time-saving gaming state.

Furthermore, even if you hit right in a non-time saving game state, win a normal figure fluctuation game with a probability of 1/100, and win a prize at the 2nd special figure start opening 232 (electric chew), if you win in c time saving There is, and it shifts to the c time saving game state without being invalidated. That is, not only the special figure 2 remaining hold but also a new special figure 2 hold may shift to the c time saving game state. In addition, it may be extremely difficult (impossible) to win a prize in the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew) in the non-time saving gaming state. For example, even if the game ball enters the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure variable game may not be won, or even if the normal figure variable game is won, the opening pattern of the blade member 232a may be set. The opening pattern may be an extremely difficult (impossible) opening pattern to win a prize in the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew).

In addition, the conditions for transitioning to the b-time-shortened gaming state are all satisfied by losing all in the c-time-shortened gaming state (becoming a special figure loss 950 times in a row), and the transition from the c-time-shortened gaming state to the b-time-saving gaming state is achieved. In some cases.

In this embodiment, the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 even in the special figure high-probability normal-figure high-probability state, the special-figure low-probability normal-figure high-probability state, and the time-saving game state. However, the stop display may not be displayed. That is, the stop display may not be performed except for the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving game state.

Subsequently, a specific game progress example in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62 will be described.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the time-saving gaming state ends and shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state shortly before the time-saving gaming state ends.

In each figure shown in FIG. 73, a decorative symbol display device 208, a time-saving medium-time lamp TL, a right-handed display lamp RL, and a high-accuracy medium-time lamp HL are shown. Each lamp represents a lighting state in black and a lighting state in white (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 83). Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73A is provided with a fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) and notifying the hold number, and the hold number display of the special figure 1 is displayed in the upper left part. An area is provided, and a reserved number display area of Special Figure 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, a symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 is provided in the upper right portion, and a symbol changing notification area of special figure 2 is provided in the lower right portion. In addition, a notification area during symbol change of the normal map and a hold number display area of the normal map may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 1 is matched with the holding number shown in the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2 is the holding lamp 220 of the special drawing 2. Consistent with the number of holds indicated by. Further, in the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1, while the symbol of Special Figure 1 is stopped, for example, if it is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed as "○", and if it is off, it is displayed as "×". Stop is displayed. Further, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is being performed. The display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 2 is the same as the display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 1, and this is a display mode corresponding to the symbol change display and the stop display of Special Figure 2. Changes. By changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the hold number display area, a pre-reading notice and a notice regarding the running symbol change display can be given. You may go. The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 described above is the same up to the example shown in FIG. 83.

Further, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and variable display and stop display are performed according to the decorative symbol displayed large in the center of the display screen.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. In the variation icon display area 280, a variation icon corresponding to the currently performed symbol variation is displayed. In FIG. 73A, since the symbol variation display of the special figure is completed, the variation icon disappears and is hidden.

The control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 73A is a time-saving gaming state. More specifically, it is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. The time-saving medium lamp TL shown in FIG. 73 (a) is on, and the high-accuracy medium lamp HL is off. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 72 (b), right-handed striking is recommended in the short-time gaming state, and the right-handed striking indicator lamp RL shown in FIG. 73 (a) is also lit. In addition, a right-handed first display RH1 for urging right-handed is displayed on the left side of the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (a). This right-handed first display RH1 is a display that continues to be displayed even when the symbol variation display of the special figure ends during the time-saving game state, and continues to be displayed even when the demo screen is displayed. Even after shifting to the demo screen, the right-handed display lamp RL also continues to light.

The time-saving game state in FIG. 73 (a) is a time-saving game state (a time-saving game state) in which the big hit game is completed and started without the game ball passing through the V-pass switch VC, or 950 times special figure loss is continuous. This is the time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) that was started. The background of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (a) is the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state. Further, the state in FIG. 73A is a state in which the time-saving gaming state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state when the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed four more times. In the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (a), the character "remaining 4" is displayed as a time-saving game state remaining number display indicating that the time-saving game state continues only four times. In addition, the time-saving game state (a time-saving game state) when the big hit game is completed and started, the time-saving game state where 950 times special figure loss is continuously started (b time-saving game state), and suddenly the time is shortened and started. The background in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be different depending on the time-saving game state (c time-saving game state), and the display mode of the time-saving game state remaining number of times display may also be different. Further, the background in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be different between the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and the display mode of the time-saving game state remaining number of times display is also different. May be good.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the time-saving gaming state, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280.

In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lighting of the holding lamp 220 of the special figure 2, the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2, and the number of the holding icons of the special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon closer to the variable icon display area 280 (the hold icon on the right side) becomes the older hold icon.

In FIG. 73A, three hold icons h21, h22, h23 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the hold icons h11, h12, of these three special figures 2 are displayed. All of h23 are displayed in the default display mode (normal display mode). The default display mode is a round, non-patterned and white display mode. On the drawing, white is represented by hatching facing diagonally downward to the left. The hold icon suggests the expectation of a big hit of the look-ahead notice depending on the display mode. That is, it suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display performed by digesting the hold represented by the hold icon. The default display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 5%. It may be suggested that the jackpot expectation is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit in the first place. In the following description, if it is the default display mode, the description to that effect may be omitted.

In addition, in FIG. 73A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. ..

In FIG. 73 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. That is, in this figure, the symbol variation in the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 64) (not shown) is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the decoration is finished. The variable display of the design has also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 2, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h21, which was the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. The display mode of this variable icon is also the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). In addition, the time-saving game state remaining number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced by one to display "remaining 3".

Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, the display of the music selection display MC capable of selecting the music output from the speaker 120 is started on the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. To. The music name of "music 1" is displayed on the music selection display MC displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (b), and the music 1 is output from the speaker 120 (not shown here). The music output will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 78 and after.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (c), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "358". The music selection display MC disappears once each time the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the display is resumed each time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 73 (d), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right side by one, and only one hold icon h21 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In addition, the time-saving game state remaining number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced by one to display "remaining 2".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (e), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "814".

In FIG. 73 (f), the symbol variation display of the last special symbol capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state is started, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 0, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right side by one, and no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the number of holds is 0. Further, the hold icon h21 in the default display mode, which has been the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 73 (f) is a red display mode different from the default display mode. On the drawing, red is represented by diagonal cross-hatching. The variation icon h0 in the red display mode suggests that the expectation of a big hit in the currently performed symbol variation display is 50%, and a so-called normal notice is executed. Further, the right-handed first display RH1 is continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and next to it is a symbol variation display of the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving gaming state. The characters "LAST" are displayed. Although the time-saving game state remaining number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears and is hidden, it may be displayed as "remaining 1". Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (f), the display of the right-handed second display RH2 that encourages right-handed display in a display mode different from that of the right-handed first display RH1 is started. In the right-handed second display RH2, it is written that the hold of the special figure 2 is stored aiming at the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew) in the figure of the arrow pointing to the right. This is a notification that it is recommended to acquire the special figure 2 remaining hold that suddenly leads to the short-time winning. At the stage of FIG. 73 (f), the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0, but even if the reserved number of the special figure 2 is full (4 pieces), the right-handed second display RH2 is displayed. Further, the speaker 120 also has started a right-handed notification (voice output of "right-handed and save the hold") for prompting the right-handed hit and accumulating the hold of the special figure 2. Further, the music 1 is continuously output from the speaker 120. While the right-handed notification sound is being output, the output sound of the music 1 may be reduced, or the music 1 may be completely muted. Right-handed second display Whether it is right-handed notification by RH2 or right-handed notification from the speaker 120, execution is started when the symbol variation display of the last special figure that can maintain the time-saving gaming state is started. .. The display start timing of the right-handed second display RH2 may be the same as the start timing of the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation display of the last special symbol, or the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. It may be the timing after that. Further, the start timing of the right-handed notification from the speaker 120 may be the same as the start timing of the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation display of the last special symbol, or the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. It may be the timing after that, or it may be the timing after the symbol variation in the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 64) (see FIG. 64), which is not shown, is started and before the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. good.

In FIG. 73 (g), the second special figure start opening 232 has won two prizes, the hold of the special figure 2 has increased by two, and the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 has been changed. The numerical value shown is 2, and two hold icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

In FIG. 73 (h), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, the second special figure start opening 232 has one more prize, and the hold of the special figure 2 is increased by one, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 3. The third hold icon h23 is also displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

In the example shown in FIG. 73, although it entered the reach state in FIG. 73 (h), it did not develop into super reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "434". Further, in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (i), the character "end" indicating that the symbol variation display of the last special symbol capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state has ended is displayed. .. When the symbol variation display of the last special figure is completed, the right-handed first display RH1 and the right-handed second display RH2 that have been displayed up to that point disappear and disappear. In addition, the right-handed notification that has been output from the speaker 120 up to that point has also ended. It should be noted that these end timings may be at the same time as the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be after the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. Alternatively, it may be the timing after the symbol variation display of the last special symbol is completed and before the variation display of the decorative symbol is completed, or the timing before the symbol variation display of the last special symbol is completed. May be good. The number of reservations in Special Figure 2 has finally reached four, and the tank is full. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 shown in FIG. 73 (i) is 4, and the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 has a fourth hold icon. h24 is also displayed.

In addition, the right-handed second display RH2 is hidden (erased) in response to the accumulation of four reservations of special figure 2, and a display suggesting that four reservations of special figure 2 are accumulated (indication). For example, a character display indicating that the tank is full on hold, a character display indicating that the product is ready, etc.) may be performed. In this case, if four reservations of special figure 2 are not accumulated by the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the right-handed second display RH2 is hidden according to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol. It should be done (it should be erased).

In FIG. 73 (j), the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The time saving middle lamp TL shown in FIG. 73 (j) is turned off, and the high accuracy middle lamp HL is also turned off. When the state of the time-saving game is changed to the non-time-saving game state, if the hold of the special figure 2 remains, the special figure 2 remaining hold is preferentially digested because it is the special figure 2 priority variable machine. As described above, the time-saving symbol shown in FIG. 66 (c) may be stopped and displayed only in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining reservation of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time-saving gaming state. .. During the period in which the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "pull-back period"), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is It becomes a dedicated background. In this example, an animation in which the main character, the lord, is running is displayed, and the character display of one-shot reversal is displayed.

In addition, since the remaining hold of special figure 2 is exhausted during the pullback period, the hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is in a time-saving gaming state in order to more clearly notify how many more holds are left in special figure 2. It is continuously displayed from. The hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 may be displayed together, or the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 may not be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (j), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and three hold icons h21 to h23 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is also 3, and the display of “−” is started to blink in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2.

Further, as described with reference to FIG. 72 (b), left-handed striking is recommended in the non-time-saving gaming state, the right-handed striking indicator lamp RL shown in FIG. 73 (j) is also turned off, and the decoration shown in FIG. 73 (j) is turned off. The right-handed first display RH1 is also not displayed on the symbol display device 208. However, during the pullback period, the left-handed notification that prompts the left-handed is restricted even though the game is in a non-time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 73 (j), even if the time-saving gaming state is changed to the non-time-saving gaming state, the left-handed notification is not executed during the pullback period. In FIG. 73 (k), the right-handed hitting so far is continued, and the game ball is launched toward the right side area of the game area 124. The same applies when the player changes from right-handed to left-handed, but happens to be right-handed. In the non-time-saving game state, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228 provided in the right side region, left-handed notification (left-handed second display LH2) is executed (FIG. 74 (m) etc.). In FIG. 73 (l), it was detected that the game ball passed through the starting port 228 of the normal drawing, but the left-handed notification was not executed. This is because, as explained with reference to FIG. 66 (a), the special figure 1 does not have a time saving symbol, and when a left-handed strike is performed, suddenly the time-saving cannot be obtained. Not recommended. However, right-handed hitting is not recommended because it is extremely rare to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232 when hitting right-handed. After all, it is a good idea not to fire the game ball during this pullback period.

It should be noted that the left-handed notification is not executed even during the restoration display when a power failure occurs during the pullback period and the restoration is performed. Further, even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the starting port 228 during this restoration, the left-handed notification is not executed. On the other hand, if a power failure occurs in a non-time-saving game state that is not a pullback period, and it is detected that the game ball has passed the normal drawing start port 228 during the recovery display when the game is restored, a left-handed notification is executed. .. It should be noted that the left-handed notification during the recovery display may be notified by the left-handed display and the left-handed notification sound, as in the case of the left-handed notification described later in FIG. 74 or the like, or only the left-handed display is displayed. It may be a notification that only notifies the left-handed notification sound. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (m), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" was stopped and displayed, and the winner was not suddenly won in a short time. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "541".

In FIG. 73 (n), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. In the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the blinking of "-" is started. In FIG. 73 (n), the number of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 is reduced by one, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 2, and the special figure 2 Two hold icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (o), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed, and even here, the winner was not suddenly won in a short time. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "245".

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 73 step by step.

In FIG. 74 (a) following from FIG. 73 (o), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the decorative symbol is variable display. In the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the blinking of "-" is started. In FIG. 74 (a), the number of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 is reduced by one again, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 1, and the special figure is shown. Only one hold icon h21 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (b), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 9-Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed, and again, the winner was not suddenly won in a short time. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "195".

In FIG. 74 (c), the last special figure 2 remaining hold symbol variable display is started, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. In the 4th symbol of the special figure 2 in the 4th symbol / holding number display area 284, the blinking of "-" is started, the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2 becomes 0, and the holding of the special figure 2 is held. No hold icon is displayed in the icon display area 282.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (d), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 6-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and in the end, in this example, the time is suddenly not won. rice field. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "261". The pullback period ends with FIG. 74 (d). In this example, the pullback period is the period of FIGS. 73 (j) to 74 (d). The pullback period is a period in which the length varies depending on the number of remaining reservations in Special Figure 2 and the time length of the symbol variation display of each special figure.

In FIG. 74 (e), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed due to the end of the pull-back period. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (e) displays a background (a white background with no pattern) representing a non-time saving gaming state. Further, when the pullback period is completed, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280 instead of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

Further, when the pullback period ends, the left-handed first display LH1 for prompting left-handed is displayed over the left-handed notification period. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (e), the left-handed first display LH1 is displayed on the variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the left-handed first display LH1 is a display mode in which the character left-handed is written in a figure in which a left-pointing arrow is deformed. Further, the left-handed notification (voice output of "please left-handed") for prompting left-handed is also started from the speaker 120. In FIG. 74 (e), the pending symbol variation display of the remaining special figure 1 is started, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. In the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the blinking of "-" is started, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 is 0. Further, no hold icon is displayed in the newly displayed hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1.

The player sees the left-handed first display LH1, starts left-handed, and aims at the special figure 1 starting port 230. In FIG. 74 (f), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by two, the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 2, and the hold icon display of the special figure 1 is displayed. Two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the area 281.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (g), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "923". Further, the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is further increased by one, the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 3, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 The third hold icon h13 is also displayed.

In FIG. 74 (h), a new symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 2, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the left side by one, and two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Even if the symbol variation display of the new special figure 1 is started, the left-handed first display LH1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (i) displays the left-handed first display LH1. Left-handed first display LH1 disappears and is hidden. The left-handed notification period, which starts when the pullback period ends, is a predetermined period with a predetermined time length, and may end within one symbol variation display depending on the time length of the symbol variation display of the special symbol. For example, it may be displayed over multiple times of the symbol variation display. It should be noted that the left-handed notification period may end with a predetermined number of symbol fluctuation displays (for example, once), or ends when a predetermined number (for example, one or four) of the reservations of the special figure 1 are accumulated. You may try to do it. In such a case, the left-handed notification period becomes an indefinite period.

If a power failure occurs and is restored during the left-handed notification period, the execution of the left-handed first display LH1 is continued. Further, the left-handed notification during the left-handed notification period may be performed only by the left-handed first display LH1 or may be performed only by the left-handed notification from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 74 (i), the hold of the special figure 1 is further increased by two, the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 4, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 Four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the display area 281.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (j), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 2-Decoration 9" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "729".

In FIG. 74 (k), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 3, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the left side by one, and three hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 74 (l), it is detected that the game ball has passed through the starting port 228 of the normal drawing. That is, right-handed strike is detected. Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the left-handed second display LH2 for prompting left-handed. This left-handed second display LH2 is a display in a display mode different from that of the left-handed first display LH1, and is a character display such as "Please return to left-handed". The left-handed second display LH2 is displayed for a certain period each time a right-handed hit is detected. In addition to displaying the left-handed second display LH2, the speaker 120 may perform left-handed notification (for example, return to left-handed).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (n), the left-handed second display LH2 disappears, the hold of the special figure 1 increases again, and the hold number display of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is displayed. The numerical value shown in the area is 4, and four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. In addition, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and the 4th symbol of Special Figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x" in the 4th symbol / hold number display area 284. At the same time, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed in the combination of "924".

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the period length of the pullback period is different from the example shown in FIG. 74. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 74 will be mainly described, and duplicate description may be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 74, the number of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 was four, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 75, the number of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 is only one. That is, in FIG. 75 (f), the symbol variation display of the final special figure 2 in which the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is started at 0 and the time-saving gaming state can be maintained, and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won only once. I didn't. As a result, it is shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (i) at which the symbol variation display of the last special figure is completed. The numerical value is 1, and only one hold icon h21 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In this state, as shown in FIG. 75 (j), the state shifts from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). In FIG. 75 (j), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 remaining hold, which has only one, is immediately started, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. That is, the pullback period has started. Even during this pullback period, right-handed strikes are detected (FIG. 75 (k)), but left-strike second display LH2 is not executed (FIG. 75 (l)). The display is completed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (m), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Even in this example, I didn't win suddenly in a short time. The pullback period ends with FIG. 75 (m). The pullback period in this example is the period from FIG. 75 (j) to FIG. 75 (m), which is shorter than the pullback period in the example shown in FIG. 74. However, if the period length of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 remaining hold is very long, the pullback period may be longer than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. 74. Further, even when the number of remaining holds in FIG. 2 is two or three, the pullback period may be longer than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. 74, or shorter than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. 75. It may be a withdrawal period.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 75, when the pullback period ends, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to a background (a white background with no pattern) indicating a non-time saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. is doing. Further, when the pullback period is completed, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280 instead of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

Further, since the pullback period has ended, the display of the left-handed first display LH1 has started. Further, the left-handed notification (voice output of "please left-handed") for prompting left-handed is also started from the speaker 120. In FIG. 75 (n), the pending symbol variation display of the remaining special figure 1 is started, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. In the same figure (o), the variation display of the decorative symbol is continued. is doing.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 75 step by step.

In FIG. 76 (a) following FIG. 75 (o), the pull-back period ends and the first symbol variation display of the special figure 1 ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows “Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 3”. The combination of the decorative patterns of the loss is stopped and displayed. In this example, a prize is awarded to the special figure 1 starting port 230 from the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 (the display of the left-handed first display LH1 is started) to the end of the symbol variation display. However, I couldn't save the hold of Special Figure 1 because it wasn't done once. Therefore, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started immediately after FIG. 76 (a), and as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the decorative symbol also remains stopped and displayed. Even if the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started, the left-handed first display LH1 remains displayed until the left-handed notification period, which is a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), ends. The left-handed first display LH1 continues to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (b). During this time, the player continued to hit left and aimed to win the special figure 1 starting port 230, but there was still no winning to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the left-handed notification period ended soon. The left-handed first display LH1 disappears and disappears (FIG. 76 (c)). Even if the left-handed first display LH1 disappears, there is no prize for the special figure 1 starting port 230, and in FIG. 76 (d), the special figure 1 starting port 230 is finally won, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is displayed. It is started, and the decorative design also starts to change display.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 76, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228 (FIG. 76 (g)), as shown in FIG. The left-handed second display LH2 that prompts left-handed is displayed.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a stepwise example when there is no pullback period. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 74 will be mainly described, and duplicate description may be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 74, the number of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 is four, and in the example shown in FIG. 75, the number of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 is one, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 77, the number of the remaining hold is one. Then, the number of remaining reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. That is, in FIG. 77 (f), the symbol variation display of the final special figure 2 in which the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is started at 0 and the time-saving gaming state can be maintained, and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won once. There was no. As a result, it is shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (i) at which the symbol variation display of the last special figure is completed. The numerical value is 0, and no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In this state, when the state is changed from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), there is no pullback period, and as shown in FIG. 77 (j), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is , The background of the castle town, which represents the time-saving game state, changes to the unpatterned background of the white background, which represents the non-time-saving game state. Further, instead of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. Further, the display of the left-handed first display LH1 has started. Further, the left-handed notification (voice output of "please left-handed") for prompting left-handed is also started from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 77 (j), the pending symbol variation display of the remaining special figure 1 is started, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. In the following figure (k), the symbol of the special figure 1 is started. The variable display is completed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed that the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped. Also in the example shown in FIG. 77, as in the example shown in FIG. 76 above, from the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 (the display of the left-handed first display LH1 is started) to the end of the symbol variation display. During that time, there was no prize in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the hold of special figure 1 could not be saved. Therefore, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started immediately after FIG. 77 (k), and in this example, the demo display is started after the symbol variation display of the special figure is completed ( During (for example, 30 seconds), the special figure 1 starting port 230 has not been awarded once, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the demo display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (l), a symbol demo is displayed. In the demo display, the setting menu is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 by operating the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 64. From the setting menu, for example, the volume of the speaker 120 and the brightness of the frame lamp 122 can be adjusted. As shown in FIG. 77 (l), even after shifting to the demo display, the left-handed first display LH1 is continuously displayed until the left-handed notification period elapses.

As shown in FIG. 77 (m), when the left-handed notification period elapses, the left-handed first display LH1 disappears and disappears. In this example, there is still no prize in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the demo display continues to be displayed. When the game ball is continuously fired while the demo display is displayed and it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228 (FIG. 77 (n)), as shown in the figure (o). In the demo display screen, the left-handed second display LH2 that prompts left-handed is displayed. The left-handed notification in the demo display may output a sound together with the display, or may output only the sound instead of the display. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 77, the symbol demo is displayed as the demo display, but the same applies even when the animation demo is displayed.

In addition to the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the voice output from the speaker 120, the right-handed notification can also be performed by blinking the right lamp of the frame lamp 122. In addition to the display on the decorative symbol display device 208, the left-handed notification can also be performed by outputting voice from the speaker 120 or blinking the left lamp of the frame lamp 122.

Further, the display mode is different between the left-handed first display LH1 during the left-handed notification period and the left-handed second display LH2 displayed when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228. , The same display mode may be used. Further, although the display period length of the left-handed first display LH1 and the display period length of the left-handed second display LH2 are different, they may be the same period length.

In addition, the notification of how to hit during restoration due to a power failure is executed depending on the actual game state. For example, in the case of recovery during the pullback period, the left-handed notification is not executed even if the right-handed hit is detected. On the other hand, in the case of recovery during the symbol change of the special figure in the non-time saving game state, if the right-handed hit is detected, the left-handed hit notification is executed.

Next, the selection of music will be described in detail. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62, the music output from the speaker 120 can be selected by operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. The music that can be selected depends on whether or not the predetermined conditions are satisfied. In this pachinko machine 100, by pressing the setting change button 194 shown in FIG. 63, it is possible to change the setting values having different jackpot probabilities. Normally, the player does not know which set value is set. Which set value is set is an important concern for the player, and in this pachinko machine 100, the setting suggestion suggesting the set value is made by using the music. The above-mentioned predetermined condition is not satisfied until a big hit is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state. Therefore, even if a big hit is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the time-saving game state, the predetermined condition is not satisfied. That is, it is a predetermined condition that a big hit is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of being digested in the non-time saving game state.

In addition, as a predetermined condition, instead of making a big hit with the special figure 2 remaining hold, or in addition to making a big hit with the special figure 2 remaining hold, as a result of pre-reading during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit will be made again. It may be that there is a hold (so-called hold consecutive villa). Alternatively, the player may win the most advantageous jackpot (for example, the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds or the jackpot with the maximum number of time reductions). In this pachinko machine 100, the most advantageous jackpot for a player is the special figure A, which is a 10R probability variation jackpot. On the contrary, the jackpot that is the most disadvantageous for the player (for example, the jackpot with the smallest number of rounds (special figure B that is a 2R probability variation jackpot) or the jackpot with the smallest number of time reductions (special figure b that is a 3R normal jackpot)). You may win the prize, or you may win the big hit of the 10th consecutive villa.

Also, instead of the setting suggestion that suggests the setting value, or in addition to the setting suggestion, a song that suggests that there is a hold that becomes a big hit again as a result of pre-reading in the hold during the big hit game (so-called hold consecutive villa). It may be a song that suggests a hit type (for example, whether or not there is a probability change, or a round promotion occurs, etc.), or it suggests that it is a big hit for the 10th consecutive villa. It may be a musical piece. Furthermore, if the suggestion of the game information by the music is the game information that the player cannot normally know, the suggestion content becomes useful.

FIG. 78 (a) is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected when a predetermined condition is not satisfied.

When the music can be selected, it becomes a big hit game state, a time-saving game state, and a non-time-saving game state. The music cannot be selected while the symbol of the special figure is stopped, and therefore the music cannot be selected even during the demo display. However, the music may be selected from the above-mentioned setting menu.

In addition, even if the symbol of the special figure is stopped, the music may be selectable.

Further, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music suggesting the set value cannot be selected, so that the music that can be selected does not change regardless of which set value (settings 1 to 6) the pachinko machine 100 is set.

The songs that can be selected when the predetermined condition is not satisfied are five songs from the song 1 to the song 5. Music 1 is a default music, and when the RAM is cleared, this music 1 is set. Further, this music 1 is set every time the game shifts to the non-time saving game state. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 73, the music 1 is still set from the beginning, but if a music other than the music 1 is selected, the music 1 is set at the timing of FIG. 73 (j).

FIG. 78 (b) is a diagram showing a list of songs selected when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The predetermined condition is satisfied when the jackpot is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which is performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state, and one song is selected by the internal lottery during the winning jackpot game. The result is selected and set. That is, it is not selected by the player, but is automatically selected by the pachinko machine 100. The selection rate shown in FIG. 78 (b) corresponds to the permutation rate by lottery. The songs selected here include songs that suggest setting values. The music 6 is not a music that suggests a setting value like the music 1 to the music 5, but the music 7 is a music that suggests that the setting is 3 or more, and the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 3 or more. If it is not set, it will not be selected. The music 8 is a music suggesting that the setting is 5 or 6, and is not selected unless the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 5 or 6. When the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 1 or 2, the music 6 is selected with a 100% probability.

Even after the predetermined condition is satisfied once, the predetermined condition may be satisfied again, and the music is selected by lottery in the same manner even when the predetermined condition is satisfied for the second time and thereafter. When the predetermined conditions are satisfied multiple times, the same music may be selected. It is also possible to increase the number of songs so that the songs selected once are not selected.

As described above, the number of songs described with reference to FIG. 78 is an example, and more songs may be used. Even in this case, the number of songs that can be output from the speaker 120 is smaller when the predetermined condition is satisfied than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Further, under this relationship, the songs 1 to 5 may include the songs 6 to 8. Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, only one song is selected by lottery, but based on the above relationship, even if a plurality of songs are selected by lottery and the player finally selects one song. good.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a list of songs selected after the predetermined condition is satisfied even once. Note that FIG. 78 (b) is referred to for the jackpot gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the jackpot gaming state in FIG. 79 is the jackpot gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied even once. That is.

In the non-time saving game state, as described with reference to FIG. 78 (a), the music 1 to the music 5 can be selected by the player operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190. .. Further, if the music 6 is selected by lottery even once in the jackpot game started when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music 6 is released until the RAM is cleared, and the music 1 to the music 5 are released. Similarly, it can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190. Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied even once and the music 7 or the music 8 is selected, the music 7 and the music 8 are not released in the non-time-saving gaming state and cannot be selected by the operation of the player. That is, when the music 6 is released, when the operation of the upper button 191 is repeated, the music names of the music 1 to the music 6 are displayed in order on the music selection display MC, and the music names of the music 6 are displayed. If the upper button 191 is operated while the button is on, the song title is returned to that of the song 1, and the song name of the song 7 or the song name of the song 8 is not displayed on the music selection display MC in the first place.

In the time-saving game state or the big hit game state in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, the big hit game state started by winning the big hit in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the time-saving game state), the music 1 to the music 5 Up to this point can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190 in the same manner as in the non-time saving game state. Further, if the music 6 is released, it can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190 in the same manner as the music 1 to the music 5. Further, when the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 1 or 2, the music 7 and the music 8 are not selected by lottery even if the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the music 7 and the music 8 are not released. When the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 3 or 4, the music 7 may be selected by lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and if it is selected, it is released and the operation key unit 190 is operated. However, since the music 8 is not selected by lottery, it is not released. When the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 5 or 6, the music 7 or the music 8 may be selected by lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and if it is selected, it is released and the operation key unit 190. It can be selected by operating. As described above, in the time-saving game state or the big hit game state in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music 6 to the music 8 can be selected by the player after that if they are selected by one lottery. However, if it has not been selected by lottery even once, the player cannot select it. Similarly, when the music 6 is released and the music 7 and the music 8 cannot be selected, the operation of the upper button 191 is repeated, and the music selection display MC displays the music titles of the music 1 to the music 6. It is displayed in order, and when the upper button 191 is operated while the song name of the song 6 is displayed, the song name returns to the song 1 and the song name of the song 7 and the song name of the song 8 are displayed on the music selection display MC in the first place. There is no such thing.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing step by step an example different from the example shown in FIG. 73, which continues from FIG. 73 (h).

Similar to the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (i), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (a) following from FIG. 73 (h) has a loss of "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4". The combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the character "end" indicating that the symbol variation display of the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving gaming state has ended is displayed.

Further, the third hold icon h23 shown in FIG. 80A has changed from the default display mode to the gold display mode. On the drawing, the gold color is represented by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines. The hold icon in the gold display mode corresponds to a so-called look-ahead notice that suggests that the expectation of a big hit in the hold symbol variation display represented by the hold icon is 75%.

In FIG. 80 (b), as in FIG. 73 (j), the time-saving gaming state is shifted to the non-time-saving gaming state (special figure low-probability normal-figure low-probability state), and the time-saving medium lamp TL is turned off, so that the accuracy is high. The middle lamp HL is also off. Further, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to a dedicated background in which the character display of one-shot reversal is displayed, and the display of the music selection display MC is started. Music 1 is continuously output from the speaker 120.

Further, the display mode of the first hold icon h21 shown in FIG. 80 (b) is changed from the default display mode to the time saving display mode. This time saving display mode is a display mode of a look-ahead notice that suggests that the player will suddenly win the time saving, and is the default display mode when the game shifts to the non-time saving gaming state (special figure 2 has entered the digestion of the remaining hold). It is a display mode changed from the display mode. That is, the look-ahead notice that suggests that the winner will be suddenly won in a short time will be started when the pullback period is started. The hold icon in the gold display mode is the second hold icon h22.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (c), the combination of the lost decorative symbols in "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and in the following FIG. The symbol variation display is started again, and the decorative symbol is variable display. In the variable icon display area 280, the variable icon h0 in the time saving display mode is displayed, and a normal notice is executed. That is, it is suggested that the expectation of suddenly winning in a short time is 75% in the currently performed symbol variation display. The hold icon in the gold display mode is the first hold icon h21.

In FIG. 80 (e), the time saving symbol (special figure D) shown in FIG. 66 (b) is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (e), the characters of success are displayed, and three "decoration 11" (decorative symbols in a short time) shown in FIG. 66 (c) are stopped and displayed side by side. That is, it is notified that the winner was suddenly won in a short time. However, although the winner was suddenly won in a short time, the jackpot was not won, so the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is stopped and displayed with "x". Further, the mini-design is stopped and displayed not by the combination of the decoration 11 but by a specific combination of numbers (321). In addition, this specific combination is a combination that stops and displays only when a time-saving symbol that is not stopped and displayed is won at the time of loss or a big hit.

By suddenly winning in a short time, the game shifts to a short time game without going through the big hit game. The time-saving medium lamp TL shown in FIG. 80 (f) is lit, and the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the background of the castle town showing the time-saving gaming state. Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "remaining 949" is displayed as a display of the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state indicating that the time-saving game state continues 949 times. In addition, the right-handed first display RH1 is displayed and the right-handed display lamp RL is also lit due to the transition to the time-saving game state. In addition, the golden display mode icon, which has been the first hold icon h21, has become the variable icon h0, and the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. The variation icon h0 in the gold display mode is a normal notice suggesting that the expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display started here is 75%. The music 1 is continuously output from the speaker 120, and the music selection display MC is also started to be displayed.

In FIG. 80 (g), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, in FIG. 80 (h), it develops into a super reach, the hold icon display area 282 and the variable icon display area 280 of the special figure 2 disappear, and the music selection display MC also displays the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state such as "remaining 949". It's gone. In addition, the variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right corner. From the speaker 120, the music A dedicated to the super reach is output instead of the music 1 that has been continuously output.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (i), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The combination is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability variation jackpot (special figure B) is won. Further, in the 4th symbol / reserved number display area 284, the 4th symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "777". The big hit here is a big hit in the remaining hold of Special Figure 2, but the predetermined condition is not satisfied because the game was suddenly won in a short time and the game was changed to the short game state.

In FIG. 80 (j), the opening effect of the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character display of congratulations on the big hit. Further, since the variable winning opening 234 is arranged in the right side region, the right-handed first display RH1 is displayed and the right-handed display lamp RL is also lit. The lamp TL is turned off during the time reduction. Further, at the start of the big hit game (during the opening effect), the right-handed second display RH2 for prompting right-handed is also displayed in addition to the right-handed first display RH1. This right-handed second display RH2 is a display mode in which the characters "hit on the right side" are displayed between the right-pointing arrows lined up at intervals, and is larger than the right-handed first display RH1. be. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a right-handed notification voice saying "hit to the right".

Further, since it is a big hit game started without satisfying a predetermined condition, at least music 1 to music 5 can be selected, and the music selection display MC is displayed except for a part of the period during the big hit game. On the music selection display MC, a display UD imitating the upper button 191 and the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 62 is displayed, and during the period when the music selection display MC is displayed, the upper button 191 or the upper button 191 or Music can be selected by operating the lower button 192. The music name of "music 1" is displayed on the music selection display MC displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (j), and the music 1 is output from the speaker 120 together with the voice output of the right-handed notification. ing. While the right-handed notification sound is being output, the output sound of the music 1 may be reduced, or the music 1 may be completely muted.

In FIG. 80 (k), the first round is started and the right-handed second display RH2 disappears and is hidden, but the right-handed first display RH1 is still displayed. Further, the right-handed notification sound is no longer output from the speaker 120, and only the music 1 is output. Further, on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the first round is started, a musical piece moving image corresponding to the musical piece 1 output from the speaker 120 is displayed. The music video here is an animation in which the main character, Tonosama, shows off swordsmanship in time with music 1, and the lyrics of music 1 are also displayed. In addition, the music selection display MC is also displayed.

In FIG. 80 (l), the second round has started. In the 2R probability variation jackpot, the V shutter VS opens in this second round (final round), and V prizes can be obtained. On the decorative symbol display device 208 where the second round has started, the character display "Aim for V" prompting the V passage switch VS to pass the game ball is displayed, and the music video is continuously displayed. However, the music selection display MC disappears and is hidden. That is, in the round (final round) in which the V prize can be obtained, the music cannot be selected. The speaker 120 continues to output the music 1.

In FIG. 80 (m), the game ball passes through the V passage switch VS, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified of the V winning notification that the V winning has been won. That is, it is notified that the state will shift to the probable change state after the big hit game is completed. When the V prize notification is performed, the music moving image is hidden, but it may continue to be displayed together with the V prize notification. On the other hand, although the music 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120, the V prize notification sound may be output from the speaker 120 together with the music 1, or the V prize notification sound may be output instead of the music 1. .. Also, even after winning the V prize, it is not possible to select songs until the end of the second round, but once the V prize is won, it is possible to select songs for the remaining period of the two rounds. You may.

In FIG. 80 (n), the end effect of the big hit game is started, and the character display of the end of the big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the right-handed first display RH1 is continuously displayed during the period of the big hit game, and is also displayed in this end effect. Further, the music 1 is also continuously output from the speaker 120 during the period of the big hit game, and is also output in this end effect. Further, in the end effect, the display of the music selection display MC is restarted, and the music can be selected by operating the up button 191 or the down button 192. However, the end effect may also be such that the music cannot be selected as in the round in which the V prize can be obtained. In this way, it is not possible to select music during a part of the jackpot game. Further, during the period in which the super reach shown in FIG. 80 (h) is performed, the music cannot be selected. Further, as shown in FIGS. 80 (a), 80 (c), and (i), music cannot be selected even while the symbol of the special figure is stopped. It should be noted that the music cannot be selected even when the specific mode is set or the setting menu is displayed.

By hitting right during the jackpot game, he also won a prize at the 2nd special figure start opening 232, and up to 4 special figure 2 holds have been accumulated. When the jackpot game is completed, the game shifts to the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the hold of the special figure 2 accumulated up to four is exhausted, and the variable display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (o), the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "remaining 119" is displayed as a display of the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state indicating that the time-saving game state continues 119 times. Further, the time-saving medium lamp TL and the high-accuracy medium lamp HL shown in FIG. 80 (o) are also lit. Further, the right-handed first display RH1 is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right-handed display lamp RL is also lit. In addition, the music selection display MC in which the music title of "music 1" is displayed is also displayed, and the music 1 is output from the speaker 120.

FIG. 81 shows step by step an example in which the first hold icon h21 among the hold icons of the special figure 2 at the time when the symbol variation display of the last special figure capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state is finished is a gold display mode. It is a figure.

In the example shown in FIG. 80, the third hold icon h21 among the hold icons of the special figure 2 at the time when the symbol variation display of the last special figure is completed is the gold display mode, but in this example, the first The hold icon h21 of is a gold display mode. Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 80 will be mainly described, and duplicate description may be omitted.

The first hold icon h21 in the golden display mode shown in FIG. 81 (a) is the variable icon h0 in the gold display mode when the digestion of the remaining hold in FIG. 2 is started (when the pullback period is started). (See FIG. 81 (b)).

Here, showing the result of pre-reading, the special figure 2 symbol variation display (the symbol variation display corresponding to the variation icon h0 in the gold display mode) that is currently performed is a jackpot symbol variation display. Further, in the special figure 2 symbol variation display (the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h21 shown in FIG. 81 (b)) to be started next, the winner is suddenly won in a short time. As a result of this look-ahead, since the jackpot is won in the preceding symbol variation display, the symbol variation display corresponding to this first hold icon h21 is performed in the time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state acquired by the jackpot. In order to give priority to the time-saving game status acquired by the big hit instead of updating the time-saving suddenly, the winning of the time-saving is invalidated. Therefore, unlike the first hold icon h21 shown in FIG. 80 (b), the first hold icon h21 is not displayed in the time saving display mode, and in FIG. 81 (b), the first hold icon h21 is displayed in the default display mode. Has been done. That is, even if there is a hold scheduled to be won in the time-saving symbol, if there is a hold to win the jackpot before the hold is exhausted, the pre-reading notice for the time-saving symbol is prohibited.

In FIG. 81 (c), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, in FIG. 81 (d), the music A has evolved into a super reach, and the music A dedicated to the super reach is output from the speaker 120 in place of the music 1 that has been continuously output. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (e), the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability variation jackpot (special figure B) is won. is doing. The jackpot here is a jackpot in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time-saving gaming state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In FIG. 81 (f), the opening effect of the jackpot game is started. Since the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music selection determination display MD is displayed instead of the music selection display MC. In this example, the music title of the music 8 is displayed on the music selection determination display MD, and it is notified that the music 8 has been selected by lottery. Further, the music 8 is output from the speaker 120. The music 8 is a music suggesting that the setting is 5 or 6, and a player who knows this can know that the pachinko machine 100 currently playing is a high setting pachinko machine. Further, the music 8 is a music that may be selected only for the pachinko machine 100 that is actually set to the setting 5 or 6, and is a rare music because the selection rate is low, and the music 8 can be heard. In some cases, the interest of the game may be improved. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (f) displays a right-handed first display RH1 and a right-handed second display RH2, and the speaker 120 "strikes to the right" together with the music 8. The right-handed notification voice is also output.

In FIG. 81 (g), the first round has started, and the right-handed second display RH2 has disappeared and is hidden, but the right-handed first display RH1 is still displayed. Further, the right-handed notification sound is no longer output from the speaker 120, and only the music 8 is output. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 from which the first round has started displays a musical piece moving image corresponding to the music 8 output from the speaker 120. The music video here is an animation in which the loincloth-style bancho decides a pose according to the music 8, and the lyrics of the music 8 are also displayed. The lyrics display of the music 1 without setting suggestion shown in FIG. 80 (k) and FIG. 80 (l) is the character display of the first color (for example, the black character display), but the lyrics display of the music 8 suggesting a high setting. Is a second color character display (for example, gold character display). The lyrics display of the music 7 may be a character display of a third color (for example, a red character display). Further, the music selection determination display MD is also displayed in FIG. 81 (g).

In FIG. 81 (h), the second round has started. In the example of FIG. 81, the character display "Aim for V" is displayed, and although the music moving image is continuously displayed, the music selection determination display MD disappears and is hidden. The speaker 120 continues to output the music 8.

In FIG. 81 (i), the game ball passes through the V passage switch VS, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified that the V prize has been won, and the music movie is hidden. In addition, the music selection determination display MD remains hidden. On the other hand, the music 8 continues to be output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 81 (j), the end effect of the jackpot game has started, and the display of the music selection determination display MD has been resumed. Further, the music 8 is also continuously output from the speaker 120 during the period of the big hit game, and is also output in this end effect.

In FIG. 81 (k), the game shifts to the time-saving game state, the hold of the special figure 2 is exhausted, and the variable display is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state. The variable display of decorative patterns has started. Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the music 8 is selected by lottery, the display of the music selection display MC in which the music name of the music 8 is displayed in the time-saving game state is also started. From the speaker 120, the music 8 is continuously output from the big hit game.

In FIG. 81 (l), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. .. The stopped symbol change display of the special figure 2 is the hold symbol change display represented by the first hold icon h21 at the time when the digestion of the special figure 2 remaining hold is started (the time when the pullback period is started). be. As mentioned above, it was originally a symbol variation display that was suddenly won in a short time, but since the jackpot with a time reduction was won first, the time reduction symbol is not stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. , Does not shift to the time-saving game state based on the time-saving symbol. That is, it can be said that the stop display of the time-saving symbol is restricted in the time-saving game state, and the time-saving symbol is a symbol that is stopped and displayed only in the non-time-saving gaming state. However, the time-saving symbol may be stopped and displayed even in the time-saving game state.

In the figure (m) following FIG. 81 (l), the number of time-saving game state remaining number of times display is reduced by one, the character "remaining 118" is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In n), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed.

Further, in FIG. 81 (o), the number of times of the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state is further reduced by one, the character of "remaining 117" is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The music selection display MC displaying the music title of the music 8 is displayed, and the output of the music 8 is continued from the speaker 120.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of operating the operation key unit 190 while the music selection display MC is displayed.

In the examples so far, the operation key unit 190 is not operated even if the music selection display MC is displayed, but in the example shown in FIG. 82, the operation key unit 190 is operated. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 81 will be mainly described, and overlapping description may be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (a), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and the last special symbol symbol variation display capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state is displayed. Is finished.

In FIG. 82 (b), as in FIG. 73 (j), the time-saving gaming state is shifted to the non-time-saving gaming state (special figure low-probability normal-figure low-probability state), and the time-saving medium lamp TL is turned off, so that the accuracy is high. The middle lamp HL is also off. Further, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to a dedicated background in which the character display of one-shot reversal is displayed, and the display of the music selection display MC in which the music name of the music 1 is displayed has started. Music 1 is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 82 (c), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (d), the music title of the music 2 is displayed on the music selection display MC, and the music 2 is displayed from the speaker 120 after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the upper button 191 is pressed. Output starts. That is, the music is determined after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after operating the operation key unit 190. If the operation key unit 190 is operated again before the lapse of a predetermined time, the music title of the music on the music selection display MC is also changed, and the music output from the speaker 120 is also changed. Further, even before the lapse of a predetermined time, the music may be determined if the OK button of the operation key unit 190 is pressed.

In FIG. 82 (e), a reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in the following figure (f), it develops into a super reach, and the speaker 120 replaces the newly set music 2 with a super reach. Dedicated music A is output. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (g), the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability variation jackpot (special figure B) is won. Then, the predetermined conditions are satisfied.

In FIG. 82 (h), the opening effect of the jackpot game is started. Since the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music selection determination display MD is displayed instead of the music selection display MC. In this example, the music title of the music 6 is displayed on the music selection determination display MD. Further, the music 6 is output from the speaker 120. Music 6 is a music that does not suggest a setting. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (h) displays a right-handed first display RH1 and a right-handed second display RH2, and the speaker 120 “strikes to the right” together with the music 6. The right-handed notification voice is also output.

In FIG. 82 (i), the first round is started, and the right-handed notification sound is not output from the speaker 120, and only the music 6 is output. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 from which the first round has started displays a musical piece moving image corresponding to the musical piece 6 output from the speaker 120. The music video here is an animation in which the bancho of the learning style decides a pose according to the music 6, and the lyrics of the music 6 are also displayed. Further, also in FIG. 82 (i), the music selection determination display MD is displayed.

In FIG. 82 (j), the second round has started. In the example of FIG. 82, the character display "Aim for V" is displayed, and although the music moving image is continuously displayed, the music selection determination display MD disappears and is hidden. The speaker 120 continues to output the music 6.

In this example, the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VS and the V winning notification is not performed, and in FIG. 82 (k), the end effect of the big hit game is started. In the end effect of the jackpot game, the display of the music selection determination display MD is resumed. Further, the music 6 is also continuously output from the speaker 120 during the period of the big hit game, and is also output in this end effect.

In FIG. 82 (l), the game shifts to the time-saving game state, the hold of the special figure 2 is exhausted, and the variable display is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state. The variable display of decorative patterns has started. Since there was no V prize, the probability change state was not reached, and the high probability middle lamp HL remained off.

Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the music 6 is selected by lottery, the display of the music selection display MC in which the music name of the music 6 is displayed is started in the time-saving game state. From the speaker 120, the music 6 is continuously output from the big hit game.

In FIG. 82 (m), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (n), the music name of the default music 1 is displayed on the music selection display MC, and when the music 1 is determined after the lapse of a predetermined time, the output of the music 1 is output from the speaker 120. It will be started. In this example, the music 7 and 8 are not released, and the music 6 is returned to the music 1.

In addition, when a specific operation (for example, a pressing operation of the lower button 192, a long pressing operation of the OK button, etc.) is performed during a specific period (for example, the period of the opening effect during the big hit game shown in FIG. 82 (h)), it is predetermined. Even if the condition is not satisfied, the music 6 may be released. Even in this case, it is desirable not to release the setting suggestion music.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of operating the operation key unit 190 during a jackpot game started without satisfying a predetermined condition.

FIG. 83 (a) is different from the previous examples of FIG. 81, in which the symbol variation display of the special figure is completed in the non-time saving game state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is set to “decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4”. The combination of the decorative patterns of the loss is stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on a white background without a pattern representing a non-time saving gaming state. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, three hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed, and among them, the first hold icon h11 is a gold display mode. Further, the short-time medium lamp TL, the right-handed indicator lamp RL, and the high-accuracy medium lamp HL are all turned off. Further, the music 1 is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 83 (a).

In FIG. 83 (b), the hold symbol variation display represented by the first hold icon h11 in the gold display mode is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (b), the decorative symbol variation display is started. Has been done. Further, in the variable icon display area 280, the variable icon h0 in the gold display mode is displayed, and a normal notice is given.

In FIG. 83 (c), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, in FIG. 83 (d), the music A has evolved into a super reach, and the music A dedicated to the super reach is output from the speaker 120 instead of the music 1. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (e), the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 3R probability variation jackpot (special figure a) is won. There is. Since the big hit here is not the big hit in the special figure 2 remaining hold, the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Further, in this example, this big hit is the first hit, and the predetermined condition has not been satisfied even once after the power is turned on (after the RAM is cleared).

In FIG. 83 (f), the opening effect of the jackpot game is started. Since the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music selection display MC is displayed instead of the music selection determination display MD. In the music selection display MC shown in FIG. 83 (f), the music name of "music 1" is displayed, and the music 1 is output from the speaker 120 together with the voice output of the right-handed notification.

In FIG. 83 (g), the first round is started, and the right-handed notification sound is not output from the speaker 120, and only the music 1 is output. Further, on the decorative pattern display device 208, a music selection display MC displaying the music name of "music 1" is displayed, and a music movie in which the main character's lord appears according to the music 1 is displayed. ..

As shown in FIG. 83 (h), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 four times in the middle of the first round. In the music selection display MC, the display is switched in the order of the music title of the music 2, the music title of the music 3, the music title of the music 4, and the music name of the music 5, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The music selection display MC in which the music title of the music is displayed is displayed, and the music video with the lyrics display corresponding to the music 5 is displayed. Further, the music 5 is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 83 (j), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (k) where the second round is started, a music selection display MC displaying the music name of "music 1" is displayed, and a music with lyrics display corresponding to the music 1 is displayed. The video is displayed. That is, it returns to the music 1 that was output in the first round, and here, the output of the music 1 is restarted from the continuation of the music 1 that was output halfway in the first round. However, each time a song is selected, it may be output from the beginning of the song.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (l) at which the third round of the final round is started, the music selection display MC disappears and the music cannot be selected. The decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display a musical piece moving image with lyrics displayed according to the musical piece 1. Further, the music 1 is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 83 (m), the game ball passes through the V passage switch VS, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified that the V prize has been won, and the music movie is hidden. Also, the music selection display MC remains hidden. On the other hand, the music 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 83 (n), the end effect of the jackpot game has started, and the display of the music selection display MC has been resumed. Further, the music 1 is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 83 (o), the game shifts to the time-saving game state, the hold of the special figure 2 is exhausted, and the variable display is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state. The variable display of decorative patterns has started. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the music selection display MC in which the music title of "music 1" is displayed is continuously displayed, and the music 1 is also displayed from the speaker 120 from the jackpot game to the non-time saving game state or the time saving game. It is continuously output without interruption when switching to the state. In addition, when switching from the big hit game to the non-time saving game state or the time saving game state, even if there is no change in the music, the music is not continuously output, and the music is restarted after being interrupted once, or the non-time saving. When the game state is switched to the game state or the time-saving game state, the music may be output again from the beginning.

In addition, the predetermined condition regarding the music selection was that the jackpot was won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time-saving gaming state. During the game, music can be selected as shown in FIG. 83 (h) and FIG. 8 (j), and during the 2R jackpot jackpot game, music cannot be selected as shown in FIG. 81 (f). May be good.

The present invention can also be applied to a so-called type-two-type mixer in which a small hit is made in a short-time gaming state and a big hit is obtained by entering the V winning area in the attacker.

In the above description,
"A game table provided with a notification means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, a frame lamp 122, etc.].
In the non-time-saving gaming state, the notification means is a first notification for prompting the launch of a game ball toward the first game area [for example, a left-handed notification such as a left-handed first display LH1 or a left-handed second display LH2]. ] May be executed,
When the first condition [for example, there are four remaining reservations in FIG. 2] is satisfied when the notification means shifts from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state.
The first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining reservation of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time-saving gaming state is performed. It is a period (pull-back period), and the first notification is not executed in the period of FIG. 73 (j) to FIG. (O) to FIG. 74 (d)] [for example, FIG. 73 (l)]. ,
After the end of the first period, the first notification [for example, the left-handed first display] is performed over the second period [for example, the left-handed notification period in FIGS. 74 (e) to 74 (h)]. LH1 left-handed notification] is executed.
A game table that features that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to perform appropriate notification according to the game situation.

In the second period, the first notification is always executed.

Further, the notification means may not execute the first notification even when the power is cut off during the first period and then the power is restored.

again,
"The notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208] has a second condition [for example, there is only one remaining hold of special figure 2] when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state. If so,
In the third period [for example, the period of FIG. 75 (j) to FIG. (M)] shorter than the first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the first notification is given. [For example, FIG. 75 (l)],
After the end of the third period, the first notification [for example, the left-handed notification period of FIG. 75 (n) to FIG. (O) to FIG. 76 (b)]. For example, the left-handed first display LH1 left-handed notification] is executed.
A game table that features that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even in this game table, it is possible to perform appropriate notification according to the game situation.

again,
"When the notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208] does not satisfy the first condition and the second condition when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, Special Figure 2 When the remaining hold is 0], the second period [for example, the period of FIG. 77 (j) to FIG. (L)] after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state. When one notification [for example, left-handed notification of the left-handed first display LH1] is executed [for example, it may be executed as in the example shown in FIG. 77, or the special figure 2 remaining hold is 2 or 3 In some cases, the left-handed first display LH1 may not be executed immediately].
A game table that features that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even in this game table, it is possible to perform appropriate notification according to the game situation.

again,
"A second starting port [for example, the second special drawing starting port 232] arranged in the second gaming area [for example, the right side area], and
A second symbol display means [for example, the second special symbol display device 214] capable of executing the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display of special figure 2] based on the winning of the second start port. When,
Equipped with
The notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208] provides a second notification [for example, right-handed first display RH1] for prompting the launch of a game ball toward the second game area in the time-saving gaming state. It ’s something to do,
The notification means performs a hold number notification indicating the hold number of the second symbol variation display [for example, a number notification in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 at the lower left of the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284]. It ’s something to do,
The notification means is executing the final second symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "last second symbol variation display") in the time-saving gaming state [for example, FIGS. 73 (f) to 73 (f) to the same figure ( In h)], a third notification [for example, right-handed second display RH2] is executed, which is a notification mode different from the second notification and prompts the launch of the game ball toward the second game area. It is a thing
The notification means executes the third notification in the final second symbol variation display, while the pending number has been executed before the last second symbol variation display is started. It is executed without changing the notification mode of the notification [for example, FIGS. 73 (f) to 73 (h)].
A game table that features that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the final second symbol variation display, the player loses unless the hold of the second symbol variation display is stored. First, since the hold number notification is executed without changing the notification mode, the player can confirm the hold number of the second symbol variation display. Then, by executing a special notification such as the third notification, it is possible to emphasize the launch of the game ball toward the second gaming area and prevent the player from losing money.

It should be noted that the notification means may always execute the third notification during the execution of the last second symbol variation display.

Further, in the non-time-saving gaming state after the end of the second period, the notification means said that the game ball was detected to be launched toward the second gaming area. It executes one notification,
In the first period, the notification means does not execute the first notification even if it is detected that the game ball is being launched toward the second game area.

again,
"The first starting port [for example, the first special drawing starting port 230] arranged in the first gaming area [for example, the left side area] and
The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212] capable of executing the first symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display of special figure 1] based on the winning of the first start port. When,
Equipped with
The first symbol display means may not stop and display the time-saving symbol [for example, the time-saving symbol (special symbol D) shown in FIG. 66 (b)] in the first symbol variation display in the non-time-saving gaming state. It is a thing
The second symbol display means may stop and display the time-saving symbol in the second symbol variation display in the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, FIG. 80 (e)].
When the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol variation display, the game shifts to the time-saving game state without going through the jackpot game [for example, FIG. 80 (f)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even in the same non-time saving game state, in the second symbol variation display, if there is a hold, the time saving symbol may be won, and the time saving game state is returned again as compared with the case where there is no hold. There is a high possibility of migration. Therefore, the first notification is not performed to prevent the player from unnecessarily aiming at the first starting port.

In addition, a look-ahead notice means capable of executing a look-ahead notice suggesting that the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is provided.
In the look-ahead notice means, a hold that is digested before the hold of the second symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as "second hold") that stops and displays the time-saving symbol is won as a kind of jackpot. If so, the look-ahead notice may not be executed for the second hold.

Further, when the hold to be digested before the second hold is won in the probabilistic jackpot, even if the second hold is digested after the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot, the time saving based on the time saving symbol is used. It may not shift to the gaming state.

That is, after the end of the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot, the game shifts to the time-saving game state, and even if the second hold is exhausted, the time-saving symbol is not stopped and displayed. Further, when the second hold is exhausted, the time-saving gaming state is already in place.

The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine. In the enclosed pachinko machine, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means into the gaming area is discharged from the gaming area and can be supplied to the launching means again. Further, a display means for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area on the front of the game table, and is shown in FIG. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown are not provided.

As described above, this enclosed pachinko machine encloses a ball and circulates the enclosed ball inside the pachinko machine. The enclosed ball is used as a launching ball, and the ball is paid out. It may be performed by credit.

Next, a slot machine (rotary body gaming machine) as a gaming table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 84. Here, FIG. 84 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 84 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 84), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored, and the slot machine 1000 is used. It is configured to be able to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 84, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame member to form each reel 1010 to 1012. .. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 84, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting part and the light receiving part of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 medals are bet and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a downhill winning line and an upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for staging.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, a maximum of three medals are inserted each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. It is designed to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize in some winning combination. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 84, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of the operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel subject to the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, the reel subject to the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel subject to the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 1034 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of the operating means. The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states as in the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. The information display button 1046 corresponds to an operating means.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided at the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, and the title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the bottom of the title panel 1062, a medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A staging device 1060 is disposed on the upper part of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the staging device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 composed of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 84, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. Further, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may have a curved surface.

Further, the present invention has given an example of a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

It should be noted that the predetermined conditions for selecting music are that if the slot machine 1000 is shown in FIG. 84, the bonus of the n consecutive villas is won, and that a specific symbol (for example, 7 red symbols) is aligned and the bonus is won. Winning a bonus with all the symbols on the winning line (for example, the horizontal winning line in the middle row), winning the AT of the 10th consecutive villa, winning the predetermined number of sets or adding the predetermined number of games, predetermined It is possible to win an AT that has the same role as.

Further, in the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 84, the jackpot gaming state in the examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83 is a bonus gaming state, an ART state, an AT state, and the like. In addition, the time-saving gaming state becomes the ART state, the AT state, etc. when the jackpot gaming state is set to the bonus gaming state, and becomes the AT state, the RT state, etc. when the jackpot gaming state is set to the ART state. ..

Further, the reset timing of the music release information was when the RAM was cleared, but it may be reset when the power failure recovery is performed across the dates, or even if the dates are crossed, a certain specific time (for example, for example). It may not be reset if the power is restored by 6 am).

Further, when the music is restored from the power failure, the preset initial music is selected as the selected music.

In the above description,
"A game console equipped with a sound output means [for example, a speaker 120] capable of outputting music.
The sound output means can output a musical piece in a first advantageous state [for example, a big hit game state, a bonus game state, an ART state].
The first advantageous state is an advantageous state for the player.
Predetermined conditions [For example, winning a big hit in the symbol variation display of special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state, and as a result of pre-reading during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit again. There is a hold to become (so-called hold consecutive villa), winning the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds or the jackpot with the maximum number of time reductions), the most for the player Winning a disadvantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with the smallest number of rounds or a jackpot with the smallest number of time reductions), winning a jackpot at the nth consecutive villa, winning a bonus at the nth consecutive villa, specifying To win a bonus with all the symbols (for example, 7 red symbols), to win a bonus with all the symbols on a specific winning line (for example, the horizontal winning line in the middle row), and to win the AT of the 10th consecutive villa. , Satisfaction of the predetermined AT start condition (for example, winning in addition to a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT having a predetermined combination, etc.)] is not satisfied. The number of first songs that can be output by the sound output means in an advantageous state [for example, "5" in FIG. 78 (a), "5 or more and 8 or less" if the predetermined condition is satisfied even once (FIG. 79). (See)] and the number of second songs that the sound output means can output in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied [for example, determined by lottery as shown in FIG. 78 (b). Different from one song "1"],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, when the predetermined condition is achieved, the number of songs is different from that when the predetermined condition is not achieved, so that the special feeling in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved is enhanced, and the game can be played. You can improve your interest.

again,
"The number of the second music [for example, 1] is smaller than the number of the first music [for example, 5 or more and 8 or less].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

By reducing the number of songs that can be output in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved, the special feeling in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved is enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be done.

again,
A display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] is provided.
The sound output means can output music even in the second advantageous state.
The second advantageous state is a state advantageous for the player, which is different from the first advantageous state [for example, when the time-saving gaming state and the first advantageous state are the bonus gaming states. ART state or AT state, AT state or RT state when the first advantageous state is ART state],
The display means does not display a moving image corresponding to the music output by the sound output means in the second advantageous state [for example, FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (i), 81 (k)). -Same figure (o)],
In the first advantageous state, the display means displays a moving image corresponding to the music output by the sound output means [for example, FIGS. 81 (g) to (h), 83 (g)). -Same figure (k)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, in the first advantageous state, the game can be excited by displaying the moving image together with the output of the music, and in the second advantageous state, the game can be excited by the output of the music, for example. It is possible to prevent hindering the variable effect of notifying whether or not a winner is won.

again,
"Game information by the music output by the sound output means in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied [for example, a set value, a jackpot as a result of pre-reading during the hold during the jackpot game, the jackpot again. It is possible to suggest that there is a hold (so-called hold consecutive villas), the type of hit (whether or not there is a probability change), and the number of consecutive villas].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by suggesting game information when the predetermined condition is achieved, it is possible to increase the motivation to play the game to achieve the predetermined condition.

The game information may be information about a game that the player cannot normally know.

again,
"The operation means [for example, the operation key unit 190] is provided.
In the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means [for example, FIG. 83 (h) and FIG. j)], in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music output by the sound output means cannot be selected by using the operation means [for example, FIG. 82 (h)). The music selection decision display MD shown in the above is displayed and cannot be selected].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the music cannot be selected in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved, so that the music is a special music (a music suggesting information). It is possible to suggest that, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the display means may be provided, and the display means may be capable of displaying a music selection display representing a music that can be selected by the player.

Further, the display means does not display the music selection display in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
The display means may be capable of displaying the music selection display in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied.

Further, the display means does not display the lyrics of the music output from the sound output means in the second advantageous state.
The display means may display the lyrics of the music output from the sound output means in the first advantageous state.

When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first music [for example, music 7 or music 7 or] can be selected by the player in a certain advantageous state [for example, a big hit game state or a time-saving game state] after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Music 8] is added, and the first music can be selected in the first advantageous state, but the first music cannot be selected in the normal gaming state [for example, non-time saving gaming state]. May be present [eg, FIG. 79].

In the first advantageous state [for example, the jackpot gaming state] for a part of the period [for example, the round in which the V prize can be obtained (final round)], the music cannot be selected by using the operating means. You may.

A part of the period in the second advantageous state [for example, the time-saving game state] [for example, in the period of super reach, the period in which the symbol of the special figure is stopped and displayed, the period in which the demo display is executed, or the demo display. The period during which the menu display is executed] may also be in a mode in which music cannot be selected using the operating means.

Alternatively, in a part of the period in the normal gaming state [for example, the non-time saving gaming state], the music may not be selected by using the operating means.

Further, when the power is cut off while the music is selected and then the power is restored, the preset initial music may be treated as the selected music.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
Music can be output during a special game (for example, a big hit game).
The number of music that can be output during the special game when the predetermined condition is not satisfied is a predetermined number, but the number of music that can be output during the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied is a specific number.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 2)
The game console described in Appendix 1,
The specific number is less than the predetermined number,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 3)
The game console described in Appendix 1 or 2.
It is possible to output a predetermined number of songs even during an advantageous game (for example, a time-saving game).
During the special game, the video according to the type of the music being output is displayed, but during the advantageous game, the video according to the type of the music being output is not displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 4)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 1 to 3.
The music output during the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied may suggest the predetermined information related to the game.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 5)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 1 to 4.
The player can select the music to be output using the operating means during the special game when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, but the player outputs the music using the operating means during the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Music cannot be selected,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 6)
The non-time saving game state is
It is a gaming state in which a gaming ball should be launched toward the first gaming area (left area).
The time-saving game state is
It is a gaming state in which a gaming ball should be launched toward the second gaming area (right area).
If the first condition is met when transitioning from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state,
Restricts the execution of the first hitting method notification (left-handed notification) that notifies that the first game area should be fired in the first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state.
After the end of the first period, the first hitting method notification is executed over the third period.
A game table that features that.

(Appendix 7)
The game console described in Appendix 6
If the second condition, which is different from the first condition, is satisfied when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state,
In the second period, which is shorter than the first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the execution of the first striking method notification is restricted.
After the end of the second period, the first hitting method notification is executed over the third period.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 8)
The game console described in Appendix 6 or 7.
If the first condition and the second condition are not satisfied when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state,
After shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the first hitting method notification may be executed over the third period.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 9)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 6 to 8.
The first condition is to memorize the first number of special hold.
The second condition is to memorize the special second hold of the second number, which is less than the first number.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 10)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 6 to 9.
When shifting from the non-time-saving game state to the time-saving game state, the second hitting method notification (right-handed notification) is executed to notify that the second game area should be fired.
In the final fluctuation in the time-saving game state,
A third hitting method notification (holding storage notification) that notifies that the second game area should be fired in a mode different from the second hitting method notification that was executed in the fluctuation before the final change. While executing, the number hold is displayed in the same manner as the number hold displayed in the change before the final change.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 11)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 6 to 10.
In the special game judgment based on the special one in the non-time saving game state, the special symbol (time saving symbol) is not won, while in the special game judgment based on the special two (special figure 2 remaining hold) in the non-time saving game state, the said You may win a special design,
If you win the special symbol, you will be in a time-saving game state without going through the special game.
A game table featuring that.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. It should be noted that even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be referred to as another embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendices, etc. are applied to other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, appendices, etc., it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating body game machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 85 to 140. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 85 to 140 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 85 to 140, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 85 to 85 to 140. In the description using FIG. 140, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 85 to 140 are given priority.
<Overall configuration>
FIG. 85 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 85 is a gaming table on which a player can obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and is an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door with a ball storage plate. A 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. A clerk at a game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and the speaker 120, the left frame lamp 122L, the right frame lamp 122R, and the upper frame lamp 122U are provided on the front side. Is attached. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. The front frame door 106 corresponds to an example of a door body. In this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage dish is a door member mounted on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 with respect to the lower side of the main body 104 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage dish is opened by pushing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage dish for detecting that the door 108 with a ball storage dish has been opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate 126 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A ball removal button 130 for ejecting the game ball stored in the ball storage plate 126 from the ball storage plate 126 by the player's operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation on the game board. A ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, an effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices by the operation of the player, and a button lamp 138 that is built in the effect button 136 and emits light of the effect button 136. , A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store is provided. Further, although not shown in FIG. 85, a return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance is also provided on the right side of the ball lending operation button 140. Further, it also has an operation key unit 190 in which a cross key and an enter button are arranged.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching mallet 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player, the launching device 110 uses the gaming ball as the player's operation amount every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It fires toward the game area 124 of the game board with the corresponding firing intensity, and corresponds to an example of the firing means.

FIG. 86 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 85 as viewed from the back side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game ball and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable and, when mounted at a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the ball storage dish 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to reach a predetermined state. Based on the fact that the granting condition is satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the granting condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit that performs control processing for the entire game, and control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-board case 162 for accommodating the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 for accommodating the second sub-board 164 constituting the A payout board case 172 that houses the board 170, a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit that performs control processing related to the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit that supplies power to various electrical game devices. A power supply board that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power supply switch 178 that is configured and turned on and off by the operation of a game store clerk, and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A case 184 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are arranged.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 85, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and an accessory ratio / setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. When the setting change key 192 is operated on condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, it is possible to set at least one of a plurality of settings (for example, settings 1 to 6) having different jackpot probabilities. It is possible to shift to the setting change mode that can be done. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner visible to the clerk. The accessory ratio / setting display 196 has double-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged one above the other, and the one-digit 7-segment LED is modularized on the right side. The accessory ratio monitor has the accessory ratio. It is an indicator for notifying (YH) and the continuous accessory ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a red monochromatic LED, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. It should be noted that at least a part of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that the player can see it.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 85, a DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162.

FIG. 87 (a) is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. Here, the arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions in which the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand may be referred to as the right in front view. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher one may be referred to as upper and the lower one may be referred to as lower. Although not shown in FIG. 87, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side may be referred to as the front side or the front side, and the back side may be referred to as the rear side or the back side. In some cases.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, a front view left side portion 200L of the game board 200 is inserted into the front view left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the main body 104, and here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the game board 200 is rotated around the center of rotation and the right side portion 200R of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 to set the game board 200. With such a structure, workability can be improved. In some cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a transparent game board 201 which is a plate-shaped main body. The game board 201 is formed of, for example, resin, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface displaying a character or the like of the pachinko machine 100. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which a character of the pachinko machine 100 or the like is printed.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached to and detached from the main body 104. Of the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the launched game ball.

Areas other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be referred to as a non-game area. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished from each other with the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes with the firing intensity of the game ball maximized can be referred to as at least the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area in which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of the effect device or the like in the game area 124. The game area 124 may be referred to as a flow area at the point where the game ball flows down during the game, and the non-game area may be referred to as the non-flow area at the point where the game ball does not flow down during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but an area in which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of a staging device or the like may be referred to as a non-flow-down area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. The main control lamp board 207 is provided below the game area 124.

FIG. 87 (b) is an enlarged view showing the main control lamp board 207.

As shown in FIG. 87 (b), the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the normal symbol hold lamp 216 are on the main control lamp board 207. The first special symbol holding lamp 218, the second special symbol holding lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp RK, the electric support middle lamp RD, the right-handed display lamp RM, and the round display lamp RR are arranged. ing. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 85 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , A 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 87 (b), the normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 85 is composed of two vertical LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 85 is composed of two upper and lower stages, for a total of eight LEDs. ..

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 85 has a predetermined number of normal figure variable games (for example, 4). It is possible to hold up to one). The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding special figure variable games, and in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 85, the special figure variable games are up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to put it on hold. Further, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding special figure variable games, and the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 85 has a predetermined number of special figure variable games (for example, four). ) Can be withheld.

Further, the high-probability middle lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is in a high-probability state. The lamp RD during the electric support indicates that the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is shortened and the door member 2320 (see FIG. 88) of the electric tulip (electric chew) described later is in the electric support state where it is easy to open for a long time. It is a lamp for. The right-handed display lamp RM is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a jackpot game state, a probability change state, and an electric support state, and is in a state where the player can obtain the benefit by hitting right. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the big hit game related to the big hit when the big hit is made.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 85, one special 1 start chucker 23 is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200. The special 1 start chucker 23 has a cover plate 231 in front.

FIG. 87 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the back side of the cover plate 231 of the special 1 start chucker 23 is viewed from diagonally lower right.

The special 1 start chucker 23 has a first special figure start port 230 between the cover plate 231 and the game plate 201. A game ball released from a rotating body unit 28 whose only part is visible near the lower center in FIG. 87 (a) can enter the first special figure start port 230, but it does not always enter 100%. do not have. That is, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), the rotating body unit 28 is provided with a start port side taxiway 288 and out discharge ports 289L and 289R on both sides thereof. The exit opening 2881 of the taxiway 288 on the starting port side is located directly above the starting port 230 of the first special figure, but at a position separated from the starting port 230 of the first special figure in the vertical direction by one game ball or more. Have been placed. Therefore, the game ball released from the exit opening 2881 may be deflected to the left or right and may not enter the first special figure starting port 230. It should be noted that the game ball released from the exit opening 2881 may be configured to enter 100% into the first special figure starting port 230.

When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects an entry into the start port 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 86 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls is stored as a prize ball. At the same time as discharging to the plate 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the first ball passage 2681 and the second ball passage 2682 extend from the left side directly above the rotating body unit 28 in which only a part is shown. The details of the rotating body unit 28, the first ball passage 2681 and the second ball passage 2682 will be described later.

Further, on the right side of the first special drawing start opening 230 shown in FIG. 87 (a), a second variable winning opening 235 serving as a second attacker is arranged. In the second attacker, the second door member 2351 rotates toward the front side with the lower edge as the rotation axis. Further, one general winning opening 226 is arranged on the upper part of the second attacker, and two general winning openings 226 are diagonally arranged on the left side of the special 1 start chucker 23. When a ball enters the general winning opening 226, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning opening 226 has won a prize, the payout device 152 is driven to win a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls. It is discharged to the ball storage dish 126 as a ball. The ball discharged to the ball storage plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the prize. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, in the game board 200 shown in FIG. 87 (a), the first attacker unit is arranged on the right side, and the electric distribution unit is arranged on the left side. The first attacker unit is covered with a transparent lower right transparent plate 2591, which is normally visible through the lower right transparent plate 2591, but is not shown as such in FIG. 87 (a). do not have. Further, the electric distribution unit is also covered with a transparent left transparent plate 2691, which is normally visible through the left transparent plate 2691, but is not shown as such in FIG. 87 (a). Whether it is the first attacker unit or the electric distribution unit, a part of the back side is transparent.

Further, a first three-dimensional film effector 271 and a second three-dimensional film effector 272 are arranged in the upper part of the game area 124. The first three-dimensional film effector 271 is provided so as to be superimposed on the second three-dimensional film effector 272, and in FIG. 87 (a), both are seen integrally. The first three-dimensional film effector 271 and the second three-dimensional film effector 272 will be described in detail later.

Further, a third three-dimensional film effector 273 is arranged on the right side of the game area 124. More than half of the third three-dimensional film effector 273 is covered with a transparent lower right transparent plate 2591 and a transparent upper right transparent plate 2592. Further, between the third three-dimensional film effector 273 and the upper right transparent plate 2592, the first attacker unit capable of transmitting a part of the back side is arranged. Originally, the third three-dimensional film effector 273 is visible through the transparent plates 2591, 592 and the first attacker unit 25, but it is not shown as such in FIG. 87 (a).

Further, a fourth three-dimensional film effector 274 is arranged on the left side of the game area 124. More than half of the fourth three-dimensional film director 274 is also covered with a part of the transparent game board 201 and the transparent left transparent board 2691. Further, an electric distribution unit 26 (see FIG. 88) capable of transmitting a part of the back side is arranged between the fourth three-dimensional film effector 274 and the left transparent plate 2691. Originally, a part of the transparent game board 201, the left transparent board 2691, and the fourth three-dimensional film director 274 can be visually recognized through the electric distribution unit 26, but in FIG. 87 (a), it is so. Not shown. The third three-dimensional film effector 273 and the fourth three-dimensional film effector 274 will also be described in detail later.

Further, a substantially circular LED light emitting effect body 278 is arranged at the lower left diagonally of the third three-dimensional film effect body 273. The LED light emitting effect body 278 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 2781 on the outer periphery thereof, and the LED light emitting effect body 278 is an effect body that irradiates light in the radiation direction. The LED light emitting effect body 278 is more than the three-dimensional film effect body such as the first three-dimensional film effect body 271, the second three-dimensional film effect body 272, the third three-dimensional film effect body 273, and the fourth three-dimensional film effect body 274. Although it is arranged at the rear, the light radiated from the LED light emitting staging body 278 in the radial direction is diffused, and some light is directed toward the front. Therefore, these three-dimensional film effectors 271 to 274 are irradiated with light from the side by the LED light emitting effector 278. The LED light emitting effect body 278 is arranged in front of these three-dimensional film effect bodies 271 to 274, and these three-dimensional film effect bodies 271 to 274 are irradiated with light from the front by the LED light emission effect body 278. You may do it.

In addition, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members (not shown) called a windmill and game nails (not shown) are arranged in the game area 124, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204. An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning openings or starting openings to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

The ball housed in the ball storage dish 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, a launching motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launching handle 134, and the launching rod 146 and the launching mallet 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the gaming area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the electric distribution unit 26, a ball striking direction changing member, a game nail, etc. (not shown), and reaches various winning openings and starting openings. It reaches the out opening 240 without winning or winning any winning opening or starting opening. The game board 200 may be provided with an out sensor. The out sensor is a sensor configured to be able to detect a game ball that has passed through the sensor of the winning opening, a game ball that has passed through the sensor of the starting opening, and a game ball that has entered the out opening. Further, the sensor may be configured to be able to detect only a part of the winning opening, the starting opening and the out opening.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a state in which the lower right transparent plate 2591, the upper right transparent plate 2592, and the left transparent plate 2591 are removed from the game board 200 shown in FIG. 87. Further, in FIG. 88, the first three-dimensional film effector 271, the second three-dimensional film effector 272, the third three-dimensional film effector 273, and the fourth three-dimensional film effector 274 are also removed, and the LED light emitting effector 278 is also removed. ing. As a result, FIG. 88 shows the frame 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 88, the first attacker unit 25 is shown on the right side, and the electric distribution unit 26 is also shown on the left side.

The first attacker unit 25 shown in FIG. 88 is provided in the right side area of the game area 124. When hitting to the right, the game ball goes beyond the first region 1241 and the second region 1242, which will be described later, into the right route 1243 and heads for the right region. The right route 1243 is covered with the upper right transparent plate 2592, but the starting port 228 is arranged at the point where it branches after bifurcating and then joins. The normal drawing start port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 85 is a game. One is arranged on the right side of the board 200. Balls that have passed through the starting port 228 are not discharged to the game island side, but when they enter, a predetermined number (for example, one) of prize balls are paid out and the entered game balls are ejected. It may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal map variation game by the normal map display device 210. The normal map start port 228 is provided on the upstream side of the first attacker unit 25, and the game balls that have passed through the normal map start port 228 and the game balls that have not passed through the normal map start port 228 also head toward the first attacker unit 25. ..

The second special figure start port 232 is arranged on the upstream side of the first attacker unit 25. In the second special drawing start port 232, the door member 2320 moves forward and backward with respect to the ball passage. The door member 2320 and the second special drawing start port 232 may be collectively referred to as an electric tulip (electric chew). The ball detection sensor 2322 for the second special figure start port 232 is arranged sideways on the downstream side of the door member 2320 that has advanced to the front side. In the electric chew shown in FIG. 88, the door member 2320 is retracted, and even a game ball that has entered the electric chew introduction port 2323 falls and does not reach the ball detection sensor 2322. On the other hand, the game ball that has passed through the electric chew introduction port 2323 with the door member 2320 advanced reaches the ball detection sensor 2322. The game ball that has reached the ball detection sensor 2322 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The game ball that did not enter the electric chew introduction port 2323 and the game ball that entered the electric chew introduction port 2323 but fell, proceed to the intermediate position of the first attacker unit 25.

A first variable winning opening 234, which is a first attacker, is arranged at an intermediate position of the first attacker unit 25. In the first attacker, the first door member 2341 moves forward and backward with respect to the ball passage. The ball detection sensor 2342 for the first variable winning opening is arranged below the first door member 2341 that has advanced to the front side and faces upward. In the first attacker shown in FIG. 88, the first door member 2341 is retracted, and the game ball that has flowed down to the intermediate position of the first attacker unit 25 falls and passes through the ball detection sensor 2342 to form a ball. It is detected by the detection sensor 2342. The game ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 2342 is guided to the back side of the first attacker unit 25. A V distribution device (not shown) is arranged on the back side of the first attacker unit 25, and the game ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 2342 is directed to the V winning opening (not shown) or the out opening. Distribute. The first door member 2341 advances and retreats by a small hit game, and when the game ball enters the V winning opening, it becomes a V winning and the big hit game is started. On the other hand, when the first door member 2341 is advanced to the front side, it is difficult for the game ball to pass over the advanced first door member 2341 and to pass through the ball detection sensor 2342. The first door member 2341 is gradually inclined downward toward the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball. Further, in the ball passage formed by the advanced first door member 2341, a plurality of deceleration ribs 234r projecting forward are provided at intervals. In the first door member 2341 that has advanced to the front side, the game ball is easy to flow down due to the inclination of the first door member 2341, but the game ball is caught on the deceleration rib 234r and the game ball is placed on the first door member 2341 for a while. May stay for a while. When the first door member 2341 retracts while the game ball is staying on the first door member 2341, the game ball staying on the first door member 2341 drops at once and is used for the first variable winning opening. It is detected by the ball detection sensor 2342 of. Therefore, as compared with the case where the first door member 2341 retracts while the game ball has passed through the first door member 2341, the winning rate to the first variable winning opening 234 is improved, and the deceleration rib 234r has a winning rate. It also plays the role of a means of improvement.

The game ball that has passed over the first door member 2341 in the state of advancing to the front side is discharged from the first attacker unit 25 through the vertical ball passage 251 without passing through the V distribution device (not shown). Will be done. The vertical ball passage 251 is provided with a plurality of deceleration ribs 251r along the passage. These plurality of deceleration ribs 251r also project forward.

The first attacker unit 25 described above is not provided with a game nail.

A part of the transparent game board 201 is interposed at the tip of the first attacker unit 25, and a plurality of game nails 238, which are not shown in FIG. 87, are provided therein. These game nails 238 may cause the game ball to head toward the general winning opening 226. Further, if the second door member 2351 of the second attacker is in the open state, the second variable winning opening 235 may be won. Further, if the second door member 2351 of the second attacker is in the closed state, it may go to the out port 240.

The electric distribution unit 26 shown in FIG. 88 is provided in the left side region of the game region 124. When hit to the left, the game ball advances from the first region 1241 or the second region 1242 to the left region. Left-handed hitting is the recommended hitting method in the normal state (low probability state in the normal figure). Right-handed hitting is the recommended hitting method in a short-time state (high probability state in the normal figure). The first region 1241 and the second region 1242 are adjacent regions, and the first region 1241 is on the downstream side in the launch direction of the sphere. That is, the second region 1242 is a region farther from the return ball prevention piece 203 than the first region 1241. Therefore, when aiming at the first region 1241, it is necessary to launch the game ball with a stronger firing intensity than when aiming at the second region 1242, and when aiming at the second region 1242, the first region 1241 is used. It is necessary to launch the game ball with a weaker firing intensity than when aiming. However, even if the game ball is launched with a strong firing intensity, it may bounce off the wall 1241a that divides the first region 1241 and enter the second region 1242. A ball passage 1245 extends from the first region 1241, and the ball passage 1245 is provided with a plurality of deceleration protrusions 1245p. Further, a plurality of deceleration protrusions 1242p are also provided in the second region 1242.

A part of the transparent game board 201 is interposed between the ball passage 1245 and the electric distribution unit 26, and a plurality of game nails 238, which are not shown in FIG. 87, are provided there. Has been done. Further, a part of the transparent game board 201 is also interposed between the second region 1242 and the electric distribution unit 26, and a plurality of game nails, which are not shown in FIG. 87, are also interposed therewith. 238 is provided. Hereinafter, the area provided with a part of the game board 201 may be referred to as a distribution front area 125.

The game ball that has passed through the ball passage 1245 and the game ball that has entered the second area 1242 enter the area before distribution 125. In the area before distribution 125, the route branches into three routes: the right route 125R, the central route 125C, and the left route 125L. Each route is partitioned by a game nail 238. The game nail 238 may be made of metal or may be made of resin. The ball passage 1245 is connected to the right route 125R, and the second region 1242 is connected to the left route 125L. The central route 125C is a route provided in the lower half of the distribution front region 125, and is located between the right route 125R and the left route 125L. A game ball passing through the right route 125R or a game ball passing through the left route 125L may enter the central route 125C. Further, the game ball passing through the right route 125R may enter the left route 125L, or the game ball passing through the left route 125L may enter the right route 125R.

The electric distribution unit 26 is roughly divided into three ball paths. These three ball paths are the first ball path 2601, the second ball path 2602, and the third ball path 2603. Hereinafter, each route will be described.

First, the first ball path 2601 will be described. The first ball path 2601 becomes the right ball path connected from the right route 125R. The first ball path 2601 is provided with a first upstream ball delay portion 2651, a third ball direction change section 263, a first downstream ball delay section 2652, and a first ball direction change section 261 from the upstream side. Both the first upstream ball delay portion 2651 and the first downstream ball delay portion 2652 are provided in a vertical ball path portion, and are provided in a place where the moving speed of the game ball tends to be high. The first upstream ball delay portion 2651 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball toward the third ball direction change portion 263, and the first downstream ball delay portion 2652 is toward the first ball direction change portion 261. This is to reduce the moving speed of the game ball. A detailed description of the first upstream ball delay section 2651 and the first downstream ball delay section 2652 will be described later.

The third sphere direction changing unit 263 has a direction changing member 2631 and a motor (not shown). The first ball direction change unit 261 has a direction change member 2611 and a motor (not shown), and the second ball direction change unit 262 has a direction change member 2621 and a motor (not shown), and a fourth ball direction change unit. The 264 has a direction changing member 2641 and a motor (not shown). The following description of the third ball direction change unit 263 is the same for the direction change units (261, 262, 264) other than the third ball direction change unit 263.

The direction changing member 2631 has a right inclined surface 263R and a left inclined surface 263L. The direction changing member 2631 is rotated by a motor (not shown) to change the posture between the right-facing posture and the left-facing posture. The rightward posture is the posture of the direction changing member 2631 shown in FIG. 88, in which the right inclined surface 263R is inclined toward the lower right and the left inclined surface 263L is vertical. The left-facing posture is the posture of the direction-changing member 2641 of the fourth sphere direction-changing portion 264 shown in FIG. 88, and is a posture in which the left inclined surface 263L is inclined toward the lower left and the right inclined surface 263R is vertical. The direction changing member 2631 uses a random number to determine which posture and at what timing the posture changes. Further, the change speed (rotation speed) is also determined by using a random number, and the posture may change slowly or quickly. The posture of the direction changing member 2631 and the state of the posture change can be visually recognized by the player, but since the direction changing member 2631 moves irregularly using random numbers, the posture of the direction changing member 2631 is predicted. It is impossible to launch the game ball. As shown in FIG. 88, when the direction changing member 2631 of the third ball direction changing portion 263 is in the rightward posture, the game ball flows down toward the lower right along the right inclined surface 263R. That is, it flows down toward the first downstream ball delay portion 2652 and continues to move along the first ball path 2601. On the other hand, when the direction changing member 2631 of the third ball direction changing portion 263 is in the leftward posture, the game ball flows down toward the lower left along the left inclined surface 263L, deviates from the first ball path 2601, and is in the center. Enter the third ball path 2603.

As shown in FIG. 88, when the direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing portion 261 is in the rightward posture, the game ball flows down toward the lower right along the right inclined surface 261R. The first guide port 2613 is opened at the lower right of the first ball direction changing portion 261. Therefore, when the direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing portion 261 is in the rightward posture, the game ball is directed toward the first guide port 2613. The game ball is guided to the back side of the electric distribution unit 26 through the first guide port 2613 and enters the first ball passage 2681. The first ball passage 2681 is divided into a transparent upstream passage 2681a and a transparent downstream passage 2681b, and the game ball guided to the back side of the electric distribution unit 26 first flows down the upstream passage 2681a. do. Next, the game ball falls into the downstream passage 2681b at the downstream end of the upstream passage 2681a, and this time flows down the downstream passage 2681b. From the downstream end of the downstream passage 2681b, the game ball falls onto the rotating body unit 28, which is only partially visible in FIG. 88. Since the first ball passage 2681 is transparent, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first ball passage 2681. On the other hand, when the direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing portion 261 is in the left facing posture, the game ball flows down toward the lower left along the left inclined surface 261L. An out port 241 is provided at the lower left of the first ball direction changing portion 261, and the game ball that has entered the out port 241 passes through a path 2604 (see FIG. 89) provided inside the electric distribution unit 26. Finally, it is discharged to the game island side.

Next, the second ball path 2602 will be described. The second ball path 2602 is a left ball path connected from the left route 125L. The second ball path 2602 is provided with a second upstream ball delay portion 2653, a fourth ball direction change section 264, a second downstream ball delay section 2654, and a second ball direction change section 262 from the upstream side. The fourth ball direction changing section 264 is provided side by side with the third ball direction changing section 263 and the third ball path 2603 in the first ball path 2601. The second ball direction changing section 262 is provided side by side with the first ball direction changing section 261 and the third ball path 2603 in the first ball path 2601. Both the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 and the second downstream ball delay portion 2654 are provided in a vertical ball path portion, and are provided in a place where the moving speed of the game ball tends to be high. The second upstream ball delay section 2653 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball toward the fourth ball direction change section 264, and the second downstream ball delay section 2654 is directed toward the second ball direction change section 262. This is to reduce the moving speed of the game ball. A detailed description of the second upstream ball delay section 2653 and the second downstream ball delay section 2654 will also be described later.

As shown in FIG. 88, when the direction changing member 2641 of the fourth ball direction changing portion 264 is in the left facing posture, the game ball flows down toward the lower left along the left inclined surface 264L. That is, it flows down toward the second downstream ball delay portion 2654 and continues to move along the second ball path 2602. On the other hand, when the direction changing member 2641 of the fourth ball direction changing portion 264 is in the rightward posture, the game ball flows down toward the lower right along the right inclined surface 264R, deviates from the second ball path 2602, and is in the center. Enter the third ball path 2603.

As shown in FIG. 88, when the direction changing member 2621 of the second ball direction changing portion 262 is in the rightward posture, the game ball flows down toward the lower right along the right inclined surface 262R. The second guide port 2623 is opened at the lower right of the second ball direction changing portion 262. Therefore, when the direction changing member 2621 of the second ball direction changing portion 262 is in the rightward posture, the game ball is directed toward the second guide port 2623. The game ball is guided to the back side of the electric distribution unit 26 through the second guide port 2623, enters the transparent second ball passage 2682, and flows down the second ball passage 2682. The game ball falls on the rotating body unit 28 from the downstream end of the second ball passage 2682. Since the second ball passage 2682 is also transparent, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the second ball passage 2682. On the other hand, when the direction changing member 2621 of the second ball direction changing portion 262 is in the leftward posture, the game ball flows down toward the lower left along the left inclined surface 262L, and then directly below the second ball direction changing portion 262. To reach. The area directly below the second ball direction change portion 262 cannot be reached via the right, but can only be reached via the left. An out port 242 is provided directly below the second ball direction changing portion 262, and the game ball that has entered the out port 242 passes through a path 2604 (see FIG. 89) provided inside the electric distribution unit 26. Finally, it is discharged to the game island side.

Subsequently, the third ball path 2603 will be described. In FIG. 88, in order to distinguish the third ball path 2603 from the first ball path 2601 and the second ball path 2602, the third ball path 2603 is provided with a downward-sloping hatch. The third ball path 2603 becomes a central ball path connected from the central route 125C. Further, as described above, when the game ball enters the third ball path 2603 by the direction changing member 2631 in the left-facing posture of the third ball direction changing portion 263, or when the fourth ball direction changing portion 264 The game ball may enter due to the direction changing member 2641 in the right-facing posture. The third ball path 2603 is provided with a general winning opening 227 on the upstream side, that is, on the upstream side of the position where the game ball enters by the direction changing member 2631, 641. The game ball that has entered the general winning opening 227 is guided to the back side of the electric distribution unit 26 and deviates from the third ball path 2603. A detailed explanation of the general winning opening 227 provided in the third ball path 2603 will be described later. Further, the third ball path 2603 is provided with an effect switch 269 on the downstream side, that is, on the downstream side of the position where the game ball enters by the direction changing member 2631, 641. The effect switch 269 is a gate-shaped ball detection sensor, and a game ball that has flowed down the third ball path 2603 without entering the general winning opening 227 on the upstream side always passes through. When the game ball passes through the effect switch 269, a certain effect is started. The game ball that has passed through the effect switch 269 is discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124. The game balls discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124 are only the game balls that have passed through the third ball path 2603. That is, neither the game ball that has entered the first ball path 2601 nor the game ball that has entered the second ball path 2602 is discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124. Instead of the effect switch 269, a gate or a through chucker, which is a normal start port 228, may be provided. In this case, the normal drawing start port 228 is provided in each of the right side region and the left side region.

The electric distribution unit 26 described above is not provided with a game nail.

A part of the transparent game board 201 is interposed between the electric distribution unit 26 and the out port 240, and a plurality of game nails 238, which are not shown in FIG. 87, are provided there. Has been done. Further, the above-mentioned two general winning openings 226 are arranged.

Next, in FIG. 87 (a), the rotating body unit 28, in which only a part of the rotating body unit 28 is visible near the lower center, will be described in detail.

FIG. 89 is a perspective view when the rotating body unit 28 is viewed from the back side of the game board. In FIG. 89, the left back side of the paper is the front side (player side), and the right hand side is the rear side (back side).

FIG. 89 shows a first ball passage 2681 (upstream side passage 2681a and a downstream side passage 2681b) and a second ball passage 2682 extending from the back side of the electric distribution unit 26 toward the rotating body unit 28. The downstream end 2682L of the second ball passage 2682 opens directly above the central portion of the rotating body unit 28. On the other hand, the downstream end 2681L of the first ball passage 2681 (downstream side passage 2681b) is open directly above the outer peripheral portion of the rotating body unit 28. Further, the second ball passage 2682 is located on the back side of the first ball passage 2681.

Further, the length of the second ball passage 2682 is longer than the length of the first ball passage 2681 (the combined length of the upstream side passage 2681a and the downstream side passage 2681b).

Further, although the game nail is not provided in the first ball passage 2681, one deceleration rib r1 and the delay means d1 are provided in the upstream passage 2681a of the first ball passage 2681, and the downstream passage 2681b is provided with one deceleration rib r1. , A plurality of deceleration ribs r2 are provided. The deceleration ribs r1 and r2 are ribs extending in the vertical direction and project into the inside of the ball passage. Further, the plurality of deceleration ribs r2 are alternately provided on the facing walls. On the other hand, the second ball passage 2682, which is longer than the first ball passage 2681, is not provided with a game nail, but is provided with one deceleration rib r3 and a delay means d2. When the game ball collides with the deceleration ribs r1, r2, r3, the moving speed of the game ball decreases. The delay means d1 and d2 are cylindrical portions having a diameter larger than the width of the spherical passage. At the lower ends of the delay means d1 and d2, an opening into which the game ball falls is provided. The game ball that has reached the delay means d1 orbits along the cylindrical inner peripheral surface, and eventually falls from the opening at the lower end. The moving speed of the game ball is also reduced by the delay means d1 and d2. In terms of the number of deceleration ribs, the relatively short first ball passage 2681 can significantly reduce the moving speed of the game ball as compared to the relatively long second ball passage 2682. As a result, the time from the electric distribution unit 26 to reach the rotating body unit 28 through the first ball passage 2681 and the time from the electric distribution unit 26 to reach the rotating body unit 28 through the second ball passage 2682. The time until is approaching.

Further, in FIG. 89, the path 2604 provided inside the electric distribution unit 26 is shown by a dotted line.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing the rotating body unit 28 shown in FIG. 89. 90 (a) and FIG. 90 (c) are perspective views of the rotating body unit 28 when viewed from diagonally above, with the diagonally lower left side of the paper being the front side (player side) and the diagonally upper right side being the rear side. Become (back side).

As shown in FIG. 90 (a), the rotating body unit 28 has a cylindrical upper cover 281, an outer peripheral guide surface 282, and a pair of ball receiving inlets 2831 and 2832 arranged inside the outer peripheral guide surface 282. .. The pair of ball inlets 2831 and 2832 are arranged at positions facing each other 180 degrees, and each has a fan-like shape, and the height is about the same as that of the upper cover 281. The rotating body unit 28 includes a motor 28M, and the rotating shaft 28A (see FIGS. 90B and 90C) rotated by the motor 28M is located at the center of the rotating body unit 28. The pair of ball receiving inlets 2831 and 2832 are fixed to the rotating shaft 28A by a base plate (not shown), and when the motor 28M rotates, the pair of ball receiving inlets 2831 and 2832 rotate around the rotating shaft 28A. The base plate (not shown) is covered from above by a pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834, and the pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834 also rotate together with the pair of ball inlets 2831 and 2832 when the motor 28M rotates. The pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834 cover the central portion of the rotating body unit 28 and are inclined toward the outer peripheral side. That is, the inclined plate 2833 located on the left side shown in FIG. 90 (a) is inclined downward toward the left side, and the inclined plate 2834 located on the right side is inclined downward toward the right side. The outer peripheral guide surface 282 is provided further below the lowest position of the pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834 inclined downward. Therefore, the game ball that has fallen on the pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834 rolls on the inclined plates 2833 and 2834 according to the inclination of the inclined plates 2833 and 2834 and is guided to the outer peripheral guide surface 282.

FIG. 90B shows a state in which the cylindrical upper cover 281, the pair of ball inlets 2831 and 2832, the base plate (not shown), and the pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834 are removed from the rotating body unit 28. It is a perspective view when viewed from the front side, and the front side on the left side of the paper is the front side (player side).

As shown in FIG. 90 (b), the outer peripheral guide surface 282 has an opening 2821 on the front side. The outer peripheral guide surface 282 is a surface inclined downward toward the opening 2821, and the position of the opening 2821 is the lowest position. Further, the inclination angles of the portions 2822 and 2823 in the vicinity of the opening 2821 of the outer peripheral guide surface 282 are steep. Further, a mountain portion 2824 is provided on the outer peripheral guide surface 282 at a position 180 degrees facing the opening 2821. This mountain part 2824 is inclined to both sides from the slightly raised position 2825. The opening 2821 is connected to the taxiway 288 on the starting port side. As described with reference to FIG. 87 (c), the outlet opening 2881 of the taxiway 288 on the starting port side is arranged at a position spaced vertically from the starting port 230 of the first special drawing. The game ball on the outer peripheral guide surface 282 rolls on the outer peripheral guide surface 282 according to the inclination of the outer peripheral guide surface 282, and enters the start port side taxiway 288 from the opening 2821. The game ball that has entered the taxiway 288 on the starting port side is discharged from the exit opening 2881 of the taxiway 288 on the starting port side through the taxiway 288 on the starting port side, and heads toward the starting port 230 of the first special figure. However, the game ball released from the exit opening 2881 may be deflected to the left or right and may not enter the first special figure starting port 230.

FIG. 90 (d) is a perspective view of the rotating body unit 28 when viewed from the lower front side, and the front side of the paper surface is the front side (player side).

Also in FIG. 90 (d), the outlet opening 2881 of the taxiway 288 on the starting port side is shown. Further, FIGS. 90 (b) and 90 (d) also show out discharge ports 289L and 289R provided on both sides of the taxiway 288 on the starting port side.

Further, in FIG. 90 (b), after the pair of ball inlets 2831 and 2832, the base plate (not shown), and the pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834 are removed, the out discharge surface 289 connected to the out discharge ports 289L and 289R. Is visible. The out discharge surface 289 is a surface inclined downward toward the out discharge ports 289L and 289R. The out discharge surface 289 is a surface provided below the outer peripheral guide surface 282 by one game ball or more. The game balls that have entered the pair of rotating ball receiving ports 2831 and 2832 fall on the out discharge surface 289, are discharged from the out discharge ports 289L and 289R to the game area 124, and reach the out port 240. However, the game ball discharged from the out discharge ports 289L and 289R may enter the first special figure start port 230 very rarely. The game balls discharged from the out outlets 289L and 289R may be configured to enter the out outlet 240 100%.

Further, FIGS. 90 (b) and 90 (d) show a start winning ball guide path 284 provided below the exit opening 2881 of the start port side taxiway 288. The starting winning ball guide path 284 is a path that is bent downward by approximately 90 degrees, with the upstream end opening forward and the downstream end opening downward. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 enters the start winning ball guide path 284 of the rotating body unit 28 through the start port route 233 of the special 1 start chucker 23 shown in FIG. 87 (c). On the other end side of the start winning ball guide path 284, a ball detection sensor 2841 for detecting a ball that has entered the start opening 230 of the first special figure is provided. The game ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 2841 is finally discharged to the game island side.

90 (c) shows a state in which the outer peripheral guide surface 282 and the members (out discharge surface 289, etc.) constituting the out discharge ports 289L and 289R are further removed from the rotating body unit 28 shown in FIG. 90 (b). It is a perspective view when viewed from diagonally above.

The rotating body unit 28 is entirely made of a transparent member, and a game ball rolling on the outer peripheral guide surface 282 and a game ball flowing down the out discharge surface 289 may also be visible. Such a rotating body unit 28 is provided with an LED substrate 285 on which a plurality of LEDs 2851 are mounted. The LED substrate 285 is covered with a lens plate (not shown here) and is provided below the out discharge surface 289. By emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 2851, the outer peripheral guide surface 282 and the out discharge surface 289 are illuminated from below, and the effect of the effect is enhanced in combination with the movement of the game ball.

The rotating body unit 28 described above is not provided with a game nail.

FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a state of the electric distribution unit 26 and a state of the rotating body unit 28.

The state of the electric distribution unit 26 shown in FIG. 91 (a) is the same as the state of the electric distribution unit 26 shown in FIG. 88, and the direction changing member 2631 is the third ball direction changing portion in the first ball path 2601. It is in a right-facing posture, and the direction-changing member 2611 is also in a right-facing posture in the first ball direction changing portion. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first ball path 2601 flows down the first ball passage 2681 through the first guide port 2613 and falls to the rotating body unit 28. In the rotating body unit 28 shown in FIG. 91 (a), both of the pair of ball inlets 2831 and 2832 are not directly below the downstream end 2681L of the first ball passage 2681, but are located away from the downstream end 2681L. It is in a state. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first ball passage 2681 falls on the pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834 and is guided to the outer peripheral guide surface 282. Then, it rolls on the outer peripheral guide surface 282, is discharged from the outlet opening 2881 through the start port side taxiway 288 from the opening 2821 shown in FIG. 90 (b), and is discharged from the outlet opening 2881. Head to the special figure start port 230.

On the other hand, in the second ball path 2602, the direction changing member 2641 is in the left-facing posture in the fourth ball direction changing portion, and the direction changing member 2621 is in the right-facing posture in the second ball direction changing portion. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the second ball path 2602 flows down the second ball passage 2682 through the second guide port 2623, and the central portion of the rotating body unit 28, that is, the pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834. It falls up and is again guided by the outer peripheral guide surface 282. Then, like the game ball that has entered the first ball path 2601, it is discharged from the opening 2821 of the outer peripheral guide surface 282 shown in FIG. 90 (b) through the taxiway 288 on the starting port side and discharged from the exit opening 2881 (FIG. 87). Head toward the first special figure start port 230 shown in c).

The state of the electric distribution unit 26 shown in FIG. 91 (b) is the same as the state of the electric distribution unit 26 shown in FIG. Is in a right-facing posture, and the direction-changing member 2611 is also in a right-facing posture in the first ball direction changing portion. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first ball path 2601 flows down the first ball passage 2681 through the first guide port 2613 and falls to the rotating body unit 28. In the rotating body unit 28 shown in FIG. 91B, one of the pair of ball receiving ports 2831 and 2832 rotating in a positional relationship facing 180 degrees has the ball receiving port 2832 at the downstream end 2681L of the first ball passage 2681. It is located directly below. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first ball passage 2681 passes through the ball receiving port 2832 and falls to the out discharge surface 289 shown in FIG. 90 (b), and falls from the out discharge port 289L to the game area 124. Is discharged to.

On the other hand, in the second ball path 2602, the direction changing member 2641 is in the left-facing posture in the fourth ball direction changing portion, and the direction changing member 2621 is in the right-facing posture in the second ball direction changing portion. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the second ball path 2602 flows down the second ball passage 2682 through the second guide port 2623, and the central portion of the rotating body unit 28, that is, the pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834. It falls up and is guided by the outer peripheral guide surface 282. Then, it is discharged from the outlet opening 2881 through the opening 2821 of the outer peripheral guide surface 282 shown in FIG. 90 (b) through the taxiway 288 on the starting port side, and heads toward the first special drawing starting port 230 shown in FIG. 87 (c). .. In the second ball path 2602, when the game ball reaches the second ball passage 2682, it is always discharged from the exit opening 2881 through the taxiway 288 on the start port side and heads toward the first special figure start port 230. It will be. That is, it does not depend on the state of the rotating body unit 28. As described above, when the state of the electric distribution unit 26 is a state in which the game ball is directed toward the second ball path 2602, that is, the direction changing member 2641 of the fourth ball direction changing portion is in a state of facing to the left. When the direction changing member 2621 of the second ball direction changing portion is in the rightward posture, if the number of holdings in special figure 1 is one less than the maximum number of holdings, the holding of special figure 1 is full. It may be made to notify that it becomes. For example, in the customized setting, when it is set to perform the above notification using the ball launch handle 134, the above notification is performed by vibrating the ball launch handle 134. Further, a ball detection sensor is provided in front of the second ball path 2602, and when the game ball passes through this ball detection sensor in a state where the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is one less than the maximum number of holdings, the above notification is given. May be done.

In the electric distribution unit 26 shown in FIG. 91 (c), the direction changing member 2631 is in a rightward posture in the third ball direction changing portion in the first ball path 2601, but the direction changing portion is in the first ball direction changing portion. The member 2611 is in a left-facing posture. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first ball path 2601 enters the out port 241 provided at the lower left of the first ball direction changing portion 261 and is provided inside the electric distribution unit 26, as shown in FIG. It is finally discharged to the game island side through the indicated route 2604.

Further, in the fourth ball direction changing portion in the second ball path 2602, the direction changing member 2641 is in a left-facing posture, but in the second ball direction changing portion, the direction changing member 2621 is also in a left-facing posture. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the second ball path 2602 enters the out port 242 provided directly below the second ball direction changing portion, and this game ball is also provided inside the electric distribution unit 26. It is finally discharged to the game island side through the route 2604.

In the electric distribution unit 26 shown in FIG. 91 (d), the direction changing member 2631 is in a leftward posture in the third ball direction changing portion in the first ball path 2601. Therefore, the game ball deviates from the first ball path 2601 and enters the central third ball path 2603.

Further, in the fourth ball direction changing portion in the second ball path 2602, the direction changing member 2641 is in a rightward posture. Therefore, the game ball deviates from the second ball path 2602 and enters the central third ball path 2603.

As described above, the game ball that has entered the third ball path 2603 passes through the effect switch 269 shown in FIG. 88 and is discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124.

In addition, in the first ball path 2601, the second ball path 2602, and the third ball path 2603, a plurality of deceleration ribs 26r1 protruding forward are provided. Further, deceleration ribs 26r2 protruding in the left-right direction are alternately arranged in the vertical portion on the downstream side of the third ball path 2603.

Further, from the distance from the third ball direction changing portion (direction changing member 2631) to the third ball path 2603 (see arrow 3d), from the fourth ball direction changing portion (direction changing member 2641) to the third ball path 2603. Distance (see arrow 4d) is longer. Due to the difference in distance in this way, the time until the game ball heads for the third ball path 2603 and the rolling mode can be determined by the third ball direction change part (direction change member 2631) and the fourth ball direction change part (direction change). It can be enjoyed for each of the two ball direction changing portions such as the member 2641). It should be noted that the distance from the third ball direction changing portion (direction changing member 2631) to the third ball path 2603 (see arrow 3d) is rather than the distance from the fourth ball direction changing portion (direction changing member 2641) to the third ball path 2603. Distance (see arrow 4d) may be shorter. That is, the distance from the third ball direction changing portion (direction changing member 2631) to the third ball path 2603 (see arrow 3d) and the distance from the fourth ball direction changing portion (direction changing member 2641) to the third ball path 2603. It suffices if the distance (see arrow 4d) is different.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the flow of the game ball as a result of hitting left.

Hereinafter, although it may overlap with the explanations so far, the explanations so far will be summarized and explained again.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 85, left-handed strike is recommended in the normal state (low probability state in the normal figure). When left-handed, the game ball enters the first area 1241 or the second area 1242. In the positional relationship between the first region 1241 and the second region 1242, when firing with a relatively strong firing intensity, the first region 1241 can be aimed, and when firing with a relatively weak firing strength, the second region 1242 Can be aimed at. However, even if the game ball is launched with a relatively strong firing intensity, the game ball may bounce off the wall 1241a (see FIG. 88) that divides the first region 1241 and enter the second region 1242. obtain. In addition, even if you intend to hit right, you may hit left due to insufficient firing strength, or conversely, even if you intend to hit left, you may hit right because the firing strength is too strong.

The game ball that has entered the first region 1241 may proceed to the end of the right route 125R in the region before distribution 125, may enter the left route 125L from the middle of the right route 125R, or may enter the left route 125L from the middle of the right route 125R. It may get in. Further, the game ball that has entered the second area 1242 may proceed to the end of the left route 125L in the area before distribution 125, may enter the right route 125R from the middle of the left route 125L, or may enter the right route 125R from the middle of the left route 125L to the center. It may enter Route 125C.

When the game ball advances on the right route 125R, it enters the first ball path 2601 of the electric distribution unit 26, and in the third ball direction change section 263, the game ball is directed toward the first ball direction change section 261. Or directed to the third ball path 2603. When the game ball is directed to the first ball direction change portion 261, the game ball still proceeds on the first ball path 2601, and in the first ball direction change portion 261 the game ball is directed to the first ball passage 2681. Or it is directed to the out port 241. The first ball direction changing unit 261 can also be seen as a means (first distribution means) for distributing the game ball to the right direction (direction of the first ball passage 2681) and the left direction (direction of the out port 241). When the game ball is directed to the first ball passage 2681, in the rotating body unit 28, the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 or the out port 240.

When the game ball advances on the left route 125L, it enters the second ball path 2602 of the electric distribution unit 26, and in the fourth ball direction change section 264, the game ball is directed toward the second ball direction change section 262. Or directed to the third ball path 2603. When the game ball is directed to the second ball direction change portion 262, the game ball still proceeds on the second ball path 2602, and in the second ball direction change portion 262, the game ball is directed to the second ball passage 2682. Or it is directed to the out port 242. The second ball direction changing unit 262 can also be seen as a means (second distribution means) for distributing the game ball to the right direction (direction of the second ball passage 2682) and the left direction (direction of the out port 242). When the game ball is directed to the second ball passage 2682, the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 in the rotating body unit 28.

In the rotating body unit 28, even when the game ball is pointed at the first special figure start port 230, the game ball does not always win the first special figure start port 230, and the first special figure is not always awarded. It may depart from the starting port 230 and reach the out port 240.

When the game ball advances on the central route 125C, it may enter the third ball path 2603 of the electric distribution unit 26 and win a prize in the general winning opening 227. If the general winning opening 227 is not won, the game ball proceeds on the third ball path 2603 and passes through the effect switch 269. Further, even when the game ball is directed to the third ball path 2603 in the third ball direction change section 263, the game ball is directed to the third ball path 2603 in the fourth ball direction change section 264. Even if there is, the game ball advances on the third ball path 2603 and passes through the effect switch 269. The game ball that has passed through the effect switch 269 is discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124. The game ball discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124 may win in any of the two general winning openings 226 and 226, and if neither of the general winning openings 226 is awarded, Reach the out port 240. Here, the electric distribution unit 26 has only one general winning opening 227, but after passing through the electric distribution unit 26, the two general winning openings 226 and 226 are based on the number of general winning openings. It can be said that the probability of winning the general winning opening is higher after passing through the electric distribution unit 26. The number of prize balls is the same regardless of whether the general winning opening 227 in the electric distribution unit 26 or the two general winning openings 226 after passing through the electric distribution unit 26.

Further, when the game ball advances on the first ball path 2601, the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 or the out port 240 at the stage of falling to the rotating body unit 28. .. The rotating body unit 28 uses a pair of rotating ball receiving inlets 2831 to move the game ball in the direction of the starting port side guide path 288 (direction of the first special drawing starting port 230) and the direction of the out discharging surface 289 (out port 240). It can be seen as a means of distributing the game ball to the direction of the starting port side guide path 288 (direction of the first special drawing starting port 230) and the out discharge surface 289. It can also be seen as a means for changing the direction of the ball, which can be changed to a state of turning toward the direction (direction of the out port 240). On the other hand, when the game ball advances on the second ball path 2602, the game ball is always directed to the first special drawing start port 230. However, when the game ball advances on the second ball path 2602, it is less likely to reach the rotating body unit 28 than when the game ball advances on the first ball path 2601. For example, when the game ball advances on the first ball path 2601, at the stage of falling to the rotating body unit 28, the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 with a probability of 50%, and 50%. It is directed to the out port 240 with a probability of. On the other hand, in the first ball direction change portion 261 in the first ball path 2601, the game ball is directed to the first ball passage 2681 with a probability of 50% and to the out port 241 with a probability of 50%. Therefore, when the game ball advances on the first ball path 2601, the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 with a probability of 25%. On the other hand, when the game ball travels on the second ball path 2602, if it reaches the rotating body unit 28, the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 with a probability of 100%. However, in the second ball direction change portion 262 in the second ball path 2602, the game ball is directed to the second ball passage 2682 with a probability of 25% and to the out port 242 with a probability of 75%. Therefore, even when the game ball advances on the second ball path 2602, the game ball is directed to the first special figure starting port 230 with a probability of 25%. That is, the probability that the game ball is directed to the first special figure starting port 230 is the same regardless of whether the game ball travels on the first ball path 2601 or the second ball path 2602. .. However, looking only at the rotating body unit 28, as described above, the game ball passing through the second ball direction changing unit 262 is the starting port rather than the game ball passing through the first ball direction changing unit 261. It is easy to be guided to the side taxiway 288. In this example, the probability that the third ball direction change part 263 upstream of the first ball direction change part 261 directs the game ball toward the first ball direction change part 261 and the upstream of the second ball direction change part 262. The probability that the fourth ball direction changing unit 264 directs the game ball toward the second ball direction changing unit 262 is the same. In the electric distribution unit 26, the motors of the direction changing members are controlled so as to have the probabilities described above per unit time (while the random number table prepared in advance makes a round). According to the example described above, even if the game ball is made to enter the first region 1241, the game ball does not always follow the first ball path 2601, and even if the game ball is made to enter the second area 1242, the game is played. Although the ball does not always follow the second ball path 2602, the game ball can be reached to the rotating body unit 28 with a relatively high probability by aiming at the first region 1241, but the first special figure start. The probability of winning the mouth 230 is relatively low. On the other hand, by aiming at the second region 1242, the game ball can be reached to the rotating body unit 28 only with a relatively low probability, but when it reaches the rotating body unit 28, it reaches the first special figure starting port 230. The probability of winning is relatively high. The player can enjoy and select which area of the first area 1241 and the second area 1242 is aimed at. Moreover, both the game ball that has entered the first area 1241 and the game ball that has entered the second area 1242 can be visually recognized by the player until they go to the back side of the electric distribution unit 26 or the game board 201. You can enjoy watching the rolling motion of.

FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of a game description displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 93 shows the decorative symbol display device 208 from (a) to (f). In any of the decorative symbol display devices 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is displayed as a mini symbol in the upper left of the display area. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 2081 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. Further, the control state (game state) here is a normal game state (normal figure low probability state), and the characters "left-handed" are displayed in the upper center of any of the decorative symbol display devices 208, and the left side. I am urging you to hit. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state is provided with the hold icon display area 2082 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 2081. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state, the designation of the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided. In the hold icon display area 2802 of the special figure 1, the hold icons h11 and h12 indicating the hold of the special figure 1 are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (a), a diagram showing the first area 1241 and the second area 1242 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen, and the game ball flows down when left-handed. Introducing that there are two routes. Specifically, these two routes are routes such as the first region 1241 → the right route 125R → the first ball route 2601 → the third ball direction change part 263 → the first ball direction change part 261 (hereinafter, “the first route”). 2nd region 1242 → left route 125L → 2nd ball route 2602 → 4th ball direction change part 264 → 2nd ball direction change part 262 (hereinafter referred to as “second route”) Become.

Also in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (b), a diagram showing the first region 1241 and the second region 1242 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen, and either the first region 1241 or the second region 1242 is displayed. It explains that there is no difference in the profits of the players even if they aim at. That is, as described above, the probability that the game ball will be directed toward the first special figure start port 230 regardless of whether the game ball has traveled on the first ball path 2601 or the second ball path 2602. Explain that they are the same.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (c), a diagram showing the rotating body unit 28 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen, and a description of the rotating body unit 28 is displayed. That is, when the game ball reaches the rotating body unit 28, the first special figure start port is via the second ball path 2602 (second route) as compared with the first ball path 2601 via (first route). It explains that the chances of winning the 230 will be doubled. As described above, in the first route, the game ball is guided to the start port side taxiway 288 only with a 50% probability, and in the second route, the game ball is guided to the start port side taxiway 288 with a 100% probability. Will be done. It should be noted that just because the taxiway is guided to the taxiway 288 on the starting port side, it is not always the case that the first special figure starting port 230 wins a prize, and in rare cases, it deviates from the first special drawing starting port 230 and reaches the out port 240. In some cases.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (d), a diagram showing the first region 1241 and the second region 1242 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen, and the first region 1241 is surrounded by a line. Then, as an explanation of the first region 1241, it is indicated that if the game ball is to reach the rotating body unit 28, the first region 1241 should be aimed at. In FIG. 93 (d), only the explanatory display for the first region 1241 is displayed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (e), a diagram showing the first region 1241 and the second region 1242 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen, and the second region 1242 is surrounded by a line. .. Then, as an explanation of the second region 1242, it is indicated that if a prize is aimed at the first special figure starting port 230, the second region 1242 should be aimed at. In FIG. 93 (e), only the explanatory display for the second region 1242 is displayed.

Also in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (f), a diagram showing the first region 1241 and the second region 1242 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen. Then, in this decorative symbol display device 208, the most detailed explanatory display of the first area 1241 (first route) and the second area 1242 (second route) is displayed.

The explanatory display described above may be displayed only when there is no reservation of the special figure (for example, during the demonstration display). Alternatively, the explanatory display may be displayed even during the jackpot game. For example, an explanatory display may be displayed during the ending effect of the jackpot game. Further, the explanation display may be displayed not only during the ending effect during the big hit game but also in a situation where there is a relatively large margin.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing another example of the game description displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

The explanatory display described with reference to FIG. 93 is an example in which the symbol change of the special figure is performed during the stop display, but the example shown in FIG. 94 is an example in which the symbol change of the special figure is performed during the stop display.

The control state (game state) in FIGS. 94 (a) to 94 (c) is a normal game state (low probability state in the normal figure), and any decorative symbol display device 208 has a “left-handed” in the upper center. Character is displayed.

In FIG. 94 (a), the symbol of the special symbol is changing, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen, and the changing mini symbol is also displayed in the upper left. .. Further, the variable icon h10 is displayed in the variable icon display area 2081. In this example, the detailed explanatory display described using FIG. 93 (f) is a telop-shaped display 2083 in which characters flow to the left on the variable display of the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the screen. Is displayed.

In FIG. 94 (b), the symbol change of the special figure performed in FIG. 94 (a) is completed, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen. .. Further, in the upper left of the display area, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is also displayed as a mini symbol. The display of the variable icon h10 has disappeared. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (b), the continuation of the explanatory display displayed in FIG. 94 (a) is displayed. That is, the telop-shaped display 2083 is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 94 (c), the symbol change of the special figure is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (c), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen, and the changing mini symbol is also displayed in the upper left. Further, the hold icon is shifted and displayed, and the variable icon h10 is displayed in the variable icon display area 2081. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (c), the continuation of the explanatory display displayed in FIG. 94 (b) is displayed. That is, the telop-shaped display 2083 is continuously displayed.

As described above, the explanation display (tutorial display) may continue to be displayed regardless of whether the symbol is changing or stopped over a plurality of fluctuations.

The control state (game state) in FIGS. 94 (d) to 94 (f) is also a normal game state (low probability state in the normal figure), and any decorative symbol display device 208 has a “left-handed” in the upper center. Character is displayed.

In FIG. 94 (d), the symbol of the special symbol is changing, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen, and the changing mini symbol is also displayed in the upper left. .. Further, the variable icon h10 is displayed in the variable icon display area 2081. In this example, the conversation notice 2084 is started during the symbol change. The conversation notice 2084 is a kind of look-ahead notice, and the reliability of the jackpot differs depending on the characters that appear. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (d), the character of the princess with the second highest reliability of the jackpot appears, and the character display of "chance" is normally displayed. The explanatory display described with reference to FIG. 93 (a) is displayed instead.

In FIG. 94 (e), the symbol change of the special figure performed in FIG. 94 (a) is completed, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen. .. Further, in the upper left of the display area, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is also displayed as a mini symbol. The display of the variable icon h10 has disappeared. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (e), the conversation notice 2084 has disappeared and the explanatory display has also disappeared.

In FIG. 94 (f), the symbol change of the special figure is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (f), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen, and the changing mini symbol is also displayed in the upper left. Further, the hold icon is shifted and displayed, and the variable icon h10 is displayed in the variable icon display area 2081. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (f), the character of the lord who has the highest reliability of the big hit appears, and the character display "It's intense heat" is originally displayed, but here. , The explanatory display described with reference to FIG. 93 (e) is displayed instead.

As described above, the explanatory display may be displayed as a part of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation notice may not be a look-ahead notice but a notice of the symbol change display currently being performed. Further, the mode of the notice in which the explanation display is also performed is not limited to the conversation notice, but may be a step-up notice, a cut-in notice, or the like.

Subsequently, a modified example of the means for changing the movement of the game ball, centering on the electric distribution unit 26 described so far, will be described. In the following description, the components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a first modification of the example shown in FIG. 92. Here, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 92 will be mainly described, and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 95, the distribution front region 125 provided with the game nail 238 is removed from the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 92. Therefore, the first ball path 2601 of the electric distribution unit 26 is connected from the first region 1241 without branching, and the game ball that has entered the first region 1241 is the first ball of the electric distribution unit 26. You will definitely follow Route 2601. Further, the second area 1242 is connected to the second ball path 2602 of the electric distribution unit 26 without branching, and the game ball that has entered the second area 1242 is connected to the second ball path of the electric distribution unit 26. You will definitely proceed to 2602.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 95, the third ball direction changing portion 263 and the fourth ball direction changing portion 264 are also removed, and the third ball direction 2603 is also eliminated. Therefore, the first ball direction changing portion 261 and the second ball direction changing portion 262 are provided side by side. Further, the game ball that has entered the first area 1241 is directed to the first ball passage 2681 or the out port 241 in the first ball direction changing portion 261. The game ball that has entered the second area 1242 is directed to the second ball passage 2682 or the out port 242 in the second ball direction changing portion 262.

Even with the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 95, in the first ball direction change unit 261 the game ball is directed to the first ball passage 2681 with a probability of 50%, and the out port 241 has a probability of 50%. Directed to. The game ball that has flowed down the first ball passage 2681 has a 50% probability of being directed to the first special figure starting port 230. On the other hand, in the second ball direction change portion 262, the game ball is directed to the second ball passage 2682 with a probability of 25% and to the out port 242 with a probability of 75%. The game ball that has flowed down the second ball passage 2682 has a 100% probability of being directed to the first special figure starting port 230. Therefore, even with the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 95, whether the game ball travels on the first ball path 2601 or the second ball path 2602, the game ball The probability of being directed to the first special figure start port 230 is the same (25%). The means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 95 has a simpler configuration than the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 92, and the flow of the game ball is easier for the player to understand. Even in the first modification shown in FIG. 95, even when the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 in the rotating body unit 28, the game ball is still in the first special figure start port 230. It is not always the case that a prize is won, and there is a case where the player deviates from the first special figure starting port 230 and reaches the out port 240.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a second modification of the example shown in FIG. 92. Here, too, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 92 will be mainly described, and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 96, there is a region 125 before distribution, and the game ball that has entered the first region 1241 goes to the end of the right route 125R and to the left route 125L or the center route 125C from the middle. It may get in. Further, the game ball that has entered the second region 1242 may proceed to the end on the left route 125L, or may enter the right route 125R or the central route 125C from the middle.

When the game ball advances on the central route 125C, the game ball may enter the third ball path 2603 of the electric distribution unit 26 and win a prize in the general winning opening 227. If the general winning opening 227 is not won, the game ball advances on the third ball path 2603, passes through the effect switch 269, and is discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124.

Further, in the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 96, the first ball direction changing unit 261 and the second ball direction changing unit 262 are removed from the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 92. ing.

When the game ball advances on the right route 125R, the game ball is directed to the first ball passage 2681 or the third ball path 2603 in the third ball direction changing portion 263 of the electric distribution unit 26. .. When the game ball is directed to the first ball passage 2681, in the rotating body unit 28, the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 or the out port 240.

When the game ball travels on the left route 125L, the game ball is directed to the second ball passage 2682 or the third ball path 2603 in the fourth ball direction changing portion 264 of the electric distribution unit 26. .. When the game ball is directed to the second ball passage 2682, the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 in the rotating body unit 28.

In the third ball direction change section 263 or the fourth ball direction change section 264, the game ball directed to the third ball path 2603 is the third from the middle of the third ball path 2603 (downstream from the general winning opening 227). After flowing down the ball path 2603 and passing through the effect switch 269, it is discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124.

In the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 96, in the third ball direction change unit 263, the game ball is directed to the first ball passage 2681 with a probability of 50%, and the third ball has a probability of 50%. Directed to route 2603. The game ball that has flowed down the first ball passage 2681 has a 50% probability of being directed to the first special figure starting port 230. On the other hand, in the fourth ball direction change unit 264, the game ball is directed to the second ball passage 2682 with a probability of 25% and to the third ball path 2603 with a probability of 75%. The game ball that has flowed down the second ball passage 2682 has a 100% probability of being directed to the first special figure starting port 230. Therefore, even if the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 96 is used, the game ball may follow the first ball path 2601 or the second ball path 2602. The probability of being directed to the first special figure start port 230 is the same (25%). The means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 96 has the same configuration as the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 95 as compared with the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. It is simple and the flow of the game ball is easy for the player to understand. Even in the second modification shown in FIG. 96, even when the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 in the rotating body unit 28, the game ball is still in the first special figure start port 230. It is not always the case that a prize is won, and there is a case where the player deviates from the first special figure starting port 230 and reaches the out port 240.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a modified example of the third ball direction changing section 263 and the first ball direction changing section 261.

Both the direction changing member 2631 of the third ball direction changing portion 263 and the direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing portion 261 shown in FIG. 97A are replaced with resin fixing members. The resin fixing member is also provided with right inclined surfaces 263R and 261R and left inclined surfaces 263L and 261L, respectively. The direction changing members 2631 and 2611 shown in FIG. 97 (a) are not rotated but are fixedly arranged, but the right inclined surfaces 263R and 261R shown in FIG. 97 (a) are always inclined toward the lower right. The left inclined surfaces 263L and 261L are always inclined toward the lower left. The game ball may be directed to the left or to the right depending on how it hits the direction changing members 2631 and 2611.

Both the direction changing member 2631 of the third ball direction changing portion 263 and the direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing portion 261 shown in FIG. 97B are replaced with three resin game nails. These three resin game nails 239 are integrally molded with the base plates 2632 and 2612 of the direction changing members 2631 and 2611. Therefore, the angle of the game nail cannot be adjusted. The three game nails 239 are located at the vertices of the triangle, and the game ball is directed to the left or to the right depending on how it hits the three game nails 239.

A metal game nail may be used instead of the resin game nail.

Further, the direction changing member described with reference to FIG. 97 was that of the third ball direction changing section 263 and the first ball direction changing section 261. However, the fourth ball direction changing section 264 and the second ball direction changing section It may be 262.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example in which the region 125 before distribution is changed. Hereinafter, the changes will be mainly described.

In the distribution front region 125 shown in FIG. 98, in addition to the right route 125R and the left route 125L, a first central route 125C1 and a second central route 125C2 are prepared. The right route 125R branches to the first central route 125C1, and the left route 125L branches to the second central route 125C2. However, the first central route 125C1 and the second central route 125C2 were not connected in the middle, and the game ball passing through the right route 125R did not enter the left route 125L, or passed through the left route 125L. The game ball may not enter the right route 125R.

In the example shown in FIG. 98, the ball passage 1245 is connected to the right route 125R, and the second region 1242 is connected to the left route 125L. Further, the right route 125R is connected to the first ball path 2601, and the left route 125L is connected to the second ball path 2602. The first central route 125C1 is connected to the third ball path 2603, and the second central route 125C2 is connected to the fourth ball path 2605. The fourth ball route 2605 is also provided with a general winning opening 227. The fourth ball path 2605 joins the third ball path 2603 at a position where the fourth ball direction changing portion 264 is provided. That is, the game ball directed to the right side in the fourth ball direction change portion 264 enters the third ball path 2603, and the game ball passing through the fourth ball path 2605 also enters the third ball path 2603 and is the third. The game ball directed to the left side in the ball direction changing portion 263 also enters the third ball path 2603.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example in which the upstream portion of the third ball path 2603 in the electric distribution unit 26 is changed. Hereinafter, the changes will be mainly described.

The third ball route 2603 shown in FIG. 99 includes a winning route 2603W that wins the general winning opening 227, a left detour route 2603L that does not win the general winning opening 227 and flows down the left side of the general winning opening 227, and a general winning opening. The 227 is provided with a right detour route 2603R that flows down the right side of the general winning opening 227 without winning a prize. The winning route 2603W is a route that is easy to proceed when entering straight from the central route 125C.

Further, although the first ball path 2601 and the second ball path 2602 were provided side by side with the third ball path 2603 in between, they may be provided so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction.

In the above description,
"The first ball direction changing means for changing the moving direction of the game ball [for example, the first ball direction changing portion 261 shown in FIG. 95] and
A second ball direction changing means [for example, a second ball direction changing portion 262 shown in FIG. 95] that changes the moving direction of the game ball, and
Equipped with
The first ball direction changing means takes the game ball to the first route [for example, a route toward the out port (here, the out port 241) or a route passing through a route 2604 provided inside the electric distribution unit 26]. It is a means that can be changed to the first state [for example, the state in which the direction changing member 2611 is in the left-facing posture].
The first ball direction changing means directs the game ball to a second route [for example, a route toward the guidance port (here, the first guidance port 2613) or a route passing through the taxiway 288 on the starting port side]. Is a means that can be changed to the state of [for example, the state in which the direction changing member 2611 is in a rightward posture].
The second ball direction changing means takes the game ball to the first route [for example, a route toward the out port (here, the out port 242) or a route passing through a route 2604 provided inside the electric distribution unit 26. ] Is a means that can be changed to a second state [for example, a state in which the direction changing member 2621 is in a left-facing posture].
The second ball direction changing means directs the game ball to the second route [for example, a route toward the guidance port (here, the second guidance port 2623) or a route passing through the taxiway 288 on the starting port side]. It is a means that can be changed to four states [for example, the state in which the direction changing member 2621 is in a rightward posture].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

Since the game ball may pass through either of the two routes toward either of the two ball direction changing means, the player sees the rolling mode of the game ball changed by each ball direction changing means. Even if one of the ball direction changing means is dirty and it is difficult for the game ball to go to the target route, the game can be played with the expectation that the game ball will go to the other ball direction changing means.

The first route may be a route extending from the out port to the back side of the game board. This first route may be a route invisible to the player.

Further, the second route may be a route (for example, the first ball passage 2681 and the second ball passage 2682) toward the fifth ball direction changing means (for example, the rotating body unit 28). Alternatively, the second route may be a route toward the winning means. This second route may be at least partially visible to the player. It should be noted that the winning means may be won without fail when passing through the second route, or the winning means may not be won even after passing through the second route.

again,
"The second route is a route in which the player is more likely to have an advantage by passing the game ball than the first route [for example, more prize balls can be obtained, and more prize balls can be obtained. , You can get a starting prize, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first route is a route toward an out port [for example, out ports 241,242].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first route may be a route extending from the out port [for example, out ports 241,242].

again,
"The second route is a route toward the winning area [for example, the first special drawing start port 230].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

A game nail [for example, a metal game nail 238] may not be provided between the second route and the winning area.

again,
"The first ball direction changing means and the second ball direction changing means are provided side by side.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"Launching means [for example, launching device 110] and
A first region [for example, the first region 1241 shown in FIG. 95] provided on the upstream side of the first spherical direction changing means.
A second region [for example, the second region 1242 shown in FIG. 95] provided on the upstream side of the second ball direction changing means.
Equipped with
The first ball direction changing means is a means for a game ball that has passed through the first region to reach.
The second ball direction changing means is a means for the game ball that has passed through the second region to reach.
The launching means can launch a game ball into either the first region or the second region.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

It becomes possible for a player to launch a game ball aiming at passing the game ball through a ball direction changing means of his choice and to play a game, or to appropriately change the ball direction changing means aimed at during the game. ..

The first ball direction changing means may be a means that the game ball that has passed through the first region always reaches.

Further, the second ball direction changing means may be a means that the game ball that has passed through the second region always reaches.

again,
"A game nail [for example, a metal game nail 238] is not provided between the first region and the first ball direction changing means.
A game nail [for example, a metal game nail 238] is not provided between the second region and the second ball direction changing means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"When the game ball is directed to the second route [for example, the route passing through the taxiway 288 on the starting port side] with the second route, and the route other than the second route [for example, the out discharge surface]. A fifth ball direction changing means [for example, a rotating body unit 28], which may direct a game ball to a route passing through 289],
A first ball passage [for example, a first ball passage 2681] in which a game ball directed to the second route by the first ball direction changing means flows down toward the fifth ball direction changing means.
A second ball passage [for example, a second ball passage 2682] in which a game ball directed to the second route by the second ball direction changing means flows down toward the fifth ball direction changing means.
A game table characterized by being equipped with. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first ball passage is not provided with a game nail [for example, a metal game nail 238].
The second ball passage is also not provided with a game nail [for example, a metal game nail 238].
A game nail [for example, a metal game nail 238] is not provided between the first ball passage and the fifth ball direction changing means.
A game nail [for example, a metal game nail 238] is not provided between the second ball passage and the fifth ball direction changing means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"The first ball direction changing means [for example, the first ball direction changing portion 261] that gives a change in the moving direction of the game ball, and
A second ball direction changing means [for example, a second ball direction changing portion 262] that changes the moving direction of the game ball, and
Equipped with
The first ball direction changing means directs the game ball to a second route [for example, a route toward the guidance port (here, the first guidance port 2613) or a route passing through the taxiway 288 on the starting port side]. It is a means that can be changed by the first ratio [for example, 50%].
The second ball direction changing means directs the game ball to the second route [for example, a route toward the guidance port (here, the second guidance port 2623) or a route passing through the taxiway 288 on the starting port side]. It is a means that can be changed at a second rate [for example, 25%].
The first ratio is higher than the second ratio,
The second route [for example, a route toward the guidance port or a route passing through the taxiway 288 on the starting port side] is a game ball via the first ball direction changing means [for example, the starting port side with a probability of 50%]. The game ball via the second ball direction changing means [for example, passing through the route passing through the taxiway 288 on the starting port side] passes through rather than passing through the taxiway 288. Easy route,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

The player can enjoy watching the rolling mode of the game ball changed by each ball direction changing means, and even if one ball direction changing means is dirty and the game ball is difficult to go to the target route, the other ball direction changing means is used. You can play with the expectation that the game ball will head.

In the game table, a game ball heading for the second route via the second ball direction changing means heads for the second route via the first ball direction changing means. It is configured to be easier to pass through the second route than a sphere.

The second route may be a route (for example, the first ball passage 2681 and the second ball passage 2682) toward the fifth ball direction changing means (for example, the rotating body unit 28).

Further, a third ball direction changing means [for example, a third ball direction changing unit 263] provided on the upstream side of the first ball direction changing means is provided, and the first ball direction changing means [for example, the third ball direction changing means] is provided. The first ball direction changing unit 261] may be a means through which a game ball that has passed through the third ball direction changing means may pass. Further, a fourth ball direction changing means [for example, a fourth ball direction changing unit 264] provided on the upstream side of the second ball direction changing means is provided, and the second ball direction changing means [for example, the fourth ball direction changing means] is provided. The second ball direction changing unit 262] may be a means through which a game ball that has passed through the fourth ball direction changing means may pass. Further, the first ball direction changing means is a means through which the game ball that has passed through the fourth ball direction changing means does not pass, and the second ball direction changing means is the third ball. It may be a means that the game ball that has passed through the direction changing means does not pass.

again,
"The distance from the first ball direction changing means to the second route [for example, the distance including the length of the first ball passage 2681] and from the second ball direction changing means to the second route. [For example, the distance including the length of the second ball passage 2682] is different [for example, it is different because the second ball passage 2682 is longer than the first ball passage 2681].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

You can enjoy the time until the game ball heads for the second route and the rolling mode for each of the two ball direction changing means.

again,
"A first delay means provided between the first ball direction changing means and the second route, which can slow down the moving speed of the game ball [for example, one deceleration rib r1 and a delay. Means d1 and a plurality of deceleration ribs r2],
A second delay means [for example, one deceleration rib r3 and a delay means] provided between the second ball direction changing means and the second route, which can slow down the moving speed of the game ball. d2] and
Equipped with
The number of the first delay means and the number of the second delay means are different.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"When the game ball is directed to the second route [for example, the route passing through the taxiway 288 on the starting port side], and the game ball to a route other than the second route [for example, the route passing through the out discharge surface 289]. With a fifth ball direction changing means [for example, a rotating body unit 28], which may be directed toward
The fifth ball direction changing means is a case where the game ball via the first ball direction changing means [for example, the first ball direction changing unit 261] is directed to the second route [for example, the game ball]. When the ball falls on the pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834], and when the player goes to a route other than the second route [for example, when the game ball falls on the ball inlets 2831 and 2832]. be,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The fifth ball direction changing means is a means for directing the game ball via the second ball direction changing means [for example, the second ball direction changing unit 262] to the second route. May be good.

Further, the guiding means is provided with a guiding means [for example, a rotating body unit 28] that may guide the game ball to a route other than the second route and may guide the game ball to a route other than the second route. May be a means for guiding the game ball via the first ball direction changing means to the second route or to a route other than the second route. .. Further, the guiding means may be a means for guiding the game ball via the second ball direction changing means to the second route.

again,
"The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
A game table comprising a second detection means [for example, the ball detection sensor 2841 shown in FIG. 90 (d)] capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the second route. 』\
Was also explained.

You can enjoy the rolling mode of the game ball toward the second detection means.

Further, even if the first ball direction changing means directs the game ball to the second route, the game ball does not always pass through the second route, and the second detection By providing the means, it may be possible to notify the player of the passage of the game ball through the second route (for example, paying out the prize ball by winning a prize or outputting a payout sound).

again,
"The first ball direction changing means is a route for the game ball to the first route [for example, a route toward the out port (here, the out port 241) or a route through the route 2604 provided inside the electric distribution unit 26." ] Is a means that can be changed to a state [for example, a state in which the direction changing member 2611 shown in FIG. 91 (c) is in a left-facing posture].
The second detection means is a means that cannot detect a game ball that has passed through the first route.
A game table characterized by being equipped with. 』\
Was also explained.

When a special ball for the purpose of cheating (a ball with a thread, a ball with oil, a small ball, etc.) passes through the first route, the special ball is not detected by the second detection means. In some cases, scratches or stains on the area after passing the first route can make it easier to see evidence of fraudulent activity when inspecting the game console.

The second route may be a route in which the player is more likely to have an advantage by passing the game ball than the first route.

Further, the mode may be provided with a first detection means [for example, an out sensor] capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the first route, and the first detection means is the second detection means. It may be a means that cannot detect a game ball that has passed through the route of. By doing so, when a special ball for the purpose of cheating (a ball with a thread, a ball with oil, a small ball, etc.) passes through the second route, the special ball becomes the first detection means. Since it is not detected, it may be easy to confirm the evidence of fraudulent activity when inspecting the game table due to scratches or stains on the area after passing through the second route. The first detection means may be provided at the outlet end of the path 2604 provided inside the electric distribution unit 26, or may be provided on the gutter on the back side of the game board 200 where the out balls gather. It may be a gutter.

again,
"When the first ball direction changing means is in a state of directing the game ball toward the second route, the second ball direction changing means is also in a state of directing the game ball toward the second route. [For example, FIGS. 91 (a), (b), (d)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even if the game ball passes through any of the ball direction changing means, the game ball may be directed to the second route.

At a certain first timing, the state of the first ball direction changing means and the state of the second ball direction changing means may be in a state of directing the game ball to the second route. ..

again,
"Launching means [for example, launching device 110] and
A first region [for example, the first region 1241] provided on the upstream side of the first spherical direction changing means,
A second region [for example, the second region 1242] provided on the upstream side of the second ball direction changing means,
Equipped with
The first ball direction changing means is a means that a game ball that has passed through the first region may reach.
The second ball direction changing means is a means that a game ball that has passed through the second region may reach.
The launching means can launch a game ball into either the first region or the second region.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

It becomes possible for a player to launch a game ball aiming at passing the game ball through a ball direction changing means of his choice and to play a game, or to appropriately change the ball direction changing means aimed at during the game. ..

again,
"There is a case where the game ball that has passed through the first region does not reach either the first ball direction changing means or the second ball direction changing means [for example, passing through the third ball path 2603]. Is configured to
There is a case where the game ball that has passed through the second region does not reach either the first ball direction changing means or the second ball direction changing means [for example, passing through the third ball path 2603]. Is configured in,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"A third ball direction changing means [for example, a third ball direction changing portion 263] that changes the moving direction of the game ball, and
A fourth ball direction changing means [for example, a fourth ball direction changing portion 264] that changes the moving direction of the game ball, and
A fourth route through which the game ball can pass [for example, central route 125C],
Equipped with
The third ball direction changing means directs the game ball to a third route [for example, a route downstream of the general winning opening 227 in the third ball route 2603] [for example, FIG. 91 (d). ) Is a means that can be changed to the state of the direction changing member 2631].
The fourth ball direction changing means is a means capable of changing to a state in which the game ball is directed toward the third route [for example, the state of the direction changing member 2641 shown in FIG. 91 (d)].
The fourth route is a route through which a game ball that does not pass through any of the third ball direction changing means and the fourth ball direction changing means can pass.
The third route is a route that can be reached by a game ball that has passed through the fourth route.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

Since the game ball heads for the third route regardless of whether or not the game ball goes through one of the two ball direction changing means, the rolling mode of the game ball up to the third route is changed by each ball direction changing means. There are cases where the player can see and enjoy the change in the direction of the game, and there are cases where the player can see and enjoy the rolling mode of the game ball without going through the respective ball direction changing means.

again,
"The third route is a route in which the game ball that has passed through the fourth route may not reach [for example, if the general winning opening 227 is won].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

You may be able to enjoy the rolling mode of the game ball after passing through the fourth route.

again,
"It is provided with an entrance [for example, a general winning opening 227] provided between the fourth route and the third route.
A game ball that has passed through the fourth route may enter the entrance.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

You may be able to enjoy the rolling mode of the game ball after passing through the fourth route.

The entrance may be an entrance (special drawing start port or normal drawing start opening) where a lottery is performed when the game ball enters, or an entrance where a prize ball is generated when the game ball enters (the entrance). It may be a winning opening) or an entrance (out opening) where a winning ball does not occur even if a game ball enters.

Further, the game ball that has entered the entrance and passed through the entrance may head toward the third route. That is, the entrance may be of a gate type.

Further, a plurality of entrances may be provided between the fourth route and the third route, or a plurality of types of entrances may be provided.

again,
"A game table characterized in that a plurality of routes [for example, a first ball route 2601 and a second ball route 2602] are provided between the fourth route and the third route. 』\
Was also explained.

You may be able to enjoy the rolling mode of the game ball after passing through the fourth route.

again,
"A first region [for example, a first region 1241] provided on the upstream side of the third ball direction changing means is provided.
The third ball direction changing means is a means in which a game ball that has passed through the first region arrives [for example, when traveling to the end on the right route 125R].
The fourth route is a route in which a game ball that has passed through the first region arrives [for example, when entering from the middle of the right route 125R].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The player may be able to enjoy where the game ball goes through by the third route.

again,
"A second region [for example, a second region 1242] provided on the upstream side of the fourth ball direction changing means is provided.
The fourth ball direction changing means is a means in which a game ball that has passed through the second region arrives [for example, when traveling to the end on the left route 125L].
The fourth route is a route in which a game ball that has passed through the second area arrives [for example, when entering from the middle of the left route 125L].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The player may be able to enjoy where the game ball goes through by the third route.

again,
"The first ball direction changing means [for example, the first ball direction changing unit 261] provided on the downstream side of the third ball direction changing means is provided.
The first ball direction changing means is a means through which a game ball that has passed through the third ball direction changing means may pass [for example, FIGS. 91 (a), (b), (c)].
The first ball direction changing means is a means through which a game ball heading for the third route does not pass [for example, FIG. 91 (d)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"A second ball direction changing means [for example, a second ball direction changing unit 262] provided on the downstream side of the fourth ball direction changing means is provided.
The second ball direction changing means is a means through which a game ball that has passed through the fourth ball direction changing means may pass [for example, FIGS. 91 (a), (b), (c)].
The second ball direction changing means is a means through which a game ball heading for the third route does not pass [for example, FIG. 91 (d)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first ball direction changing means is a means capable of changing the game ball to a state in which the game ball is directed to the first route [for example, the route toward the out port (here, the out port 241)].
The first ball direction changing means is a means capable of changing the game ball to a state in which the game ball is directed to a second route [for example, a route passing through a taxiway 288 on the starting port side].
The second ball direction changing means is a means capable of changing the game ball to a state in which the game ball is directed to the first route [for example, a route toward the out port (here, the out port 242)].
The second ball direction changing means is a means capable of changing the game ball to a state in which the game ball is directed to the second route [for example, a route passing through the taxiway 288 on the starting port side].
The first route is a route toward an out port [for example, out ports 241,242].
The second route is a route toward the winning area [for example, the first special drawing start port 230].
The third route is a route toward an area provided with a game nail [for example, a game nail 238] [for example, a part of a transparent game board 201].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first route may be a route extending from the out port [for example, out ports 241,242] [for example, a route passing through a route 2604 provided inside the electric distribution unit 26]. The second route may be a route toward a fifth ball direction changing means (for example, a rotating body unit 28) (a route toward a guide port (first guide port 2613, second guide port 2623), or a first route. It may be a ball passage 2681, a second ball passage 2682). The third route may be a route toward a gaming area [for example, a gaming area 124]. Further, when the game ball that has passed through the third route reaches the entrance [for example, the general winning opening 226] provided in the game area [for example, a part of the transparent game board 201]. It may be configured to have an out port [for example, an out port 240] provided in a game area [[for example, a part of the transparent game board 201]]. It may be configured as follows.

In the above description,
"The first region [for example, the first region 1241] in which the game ball is likely to enter when the game ball is launched with the first firing strength [for example, the relatively strong firing strength] and
A second region [eg, second region 1242] where the game ball is likely to enter when the game ball is launched with a second firing intensity [eg, relatively weak firing strength], and
With the first distribution means [for example, the first ball direction changing portion 261] through which the game ball entering from the first region can pass.
A second distribution means [for example, a second ball direction changing portion 262] through which a game ball entering from the second region can pass, and
・ Equipped with
The first distribution means may distribute the game ball in the first direction [for example, the right direction (direction of the first ball passage 2681)].
The second distribution means may distribute the game ball in the second direction [for example, the right direction (direction of the second ball passage 2682)].
When the first distribution means distributes the game ball in the first direction [for example, it occurs with a probability of 50%], the second distribution means distributes the game ball in the second direction. The second direction [eg, 100% chance of winning] is more likely than the case [eg, 25% chance of winning], but the first direction [eg, 50% chance of winning]. It is a direction in which it is easy to win a prize in a certain winning means [for example, the first special figure starting port 230].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, the player can arbitrarily select whether to aim at the first area or the second area. Further, although it is difficult to be sorted in a direction in which it is easy to win a prize in the certain winning means, it is easy to be sorted in a second route in which a prize is easily won in the case of being sorted, and in a direction in which a prize is easily won in the certain winning means. , The first route, which is more difficult to win in the certain winning means than the second route, can be selected according to the preference of the player.

The first distribution means may distribute the game ball in a direction different from the first direction [for example, the left direction (direction of the out port 241)].

Further, the second distribution means may distribute the game ball in a direction different from the second direction [for example, the left direction (direction of the out port 242)].

again,
"The first area is an area where a game ball launched by a striking method recommended in a certain game state [for example, a normal state] may enter.
The second area is an area where a game ball launched in the manner recommended in the certain game state [for example, a normal state] may enter.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, a gaming ball launched in a manner recommended in a certain gaming state may enter the first region or the second region. In other words, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the first region or the second region by executing the recommended striking method in a certain gaming state.

In the common gaming state of a certain gaming state, the player can select the first region or the second region. That is, the player can arbitrarily select a route in one gaming state.

again,
"The game ball that has entered the first region reaches the first distribution means [for example, the first ball path 2601 → the third ball direction change portion 263 → the first ball path 2601 → the first ball direction change portion. A third region [for example, a region before distribution 125] that passes before [261] is provided.
In the third region, the game ball that has entered the second region reaches the second distribution means [for example, the second ball path 2602 → the fourth ball direction change portion 264 → the second ball path 2602 →. It is also the area that passes before the second ball direction change part 262].
The game ball that has entered the first region reaches the second distribution means from the third region [for example, second ball path 2602 → fourth ball direction change portion 264 → second ball path 2602 → second ball path 2602 → second ball path 2602 → second. 2 ball direction change part 262] may occur,
The game ball that has entered the second region reaches the first distribution means from the third region [for example, first ball path 2601 → third ball direction change portion 263 → first ball path 2601 → first 1 ball direction change part 261] may occur,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the game ball that has passed through the first region may change direction in the third region toward the second distribution means (not the first distribution means), and the second The game ball that has passed through the region may change direction in the third region toward the first distribution means (rather than the second distribution means).

While selecting one area, the rolling direction of the game ball may change accidentally, and it may be possible to confirm the same flow of the game ball as when entering the other area.

again,
"The first region and the second region are adjacent regions [for example, regions adjacent to each other in the left-right direction].
A game ball launched with the first firing intensity may enter the second region.
A game ball launched with the second firing intensity may enter the first region.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

While aiming at one area, the rolling direction of the game ball may change accidentally, and it may be possible to confirm the same flow of the game ball as when aiming at the other area.

again,
"A fifth distribution means [for example, a rotating body unit 28] provided in front of the certain winning means [for example, the first special drawing start port 230] is provided.
The fifth distribution means is a means through which a game ball distributed in the first direction by the first distribution means [for example, a game ball flowing down the first ball passage 2681] passes through.
The fifth distribution means is a means through which a game ball distributed in the second direction by the second distribution means [for example, a game ball flowing down the second ball passage 2682] passes through.
The game ball [for example, 100% reaching the start port side taxiway 288] distributed in the second direction by the second distribution means is distributed in the first direction by the first distribution means. Rather than the game ball [for example, reaching the start port side taxiway 288 with a 50% probability], the fifth distribution means guides the player to the certain winning means [for example, passes through the start port side taxiway 288]. ] Easy to do
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, a game ball provided with a guiding means [for example, a rotating body unit 28] provided in front of the certain winning means, and the guiding means is distributed in the first direction by the first distribution means. [For example, a game ball flowing down the first ball passage 2681] is a means through which the guiding means is a game ball distributed in the second direction by the second distribution means [for example, a second ball]. The game ball flowing down the ball passage 2682] is a means through which the game ball [for example, 100% reaches the start port side taxiway 288] distributed in the second direction by the second distribution means. , Rather than the game ball distributed in the first direction by the first distribution means [for example, reaching the start port side taxiway 288 with a 50% probability], the guidance means to the certain winning means. It may be configured to facilitate guidance [for example, passing through the taxiway 288 on the starting port side]. The guiding means is a game ball distributed in the second direction by the second distribution means, rather than a game ball distributed in the first direction by the first distribution means. It is easy to guide to the certain winning means.

Further, the guiding means is guided by the second sorting means rather than the probability that the guiding means guides the game ball distributed in the first direction by the first sorting means to the certain winning means. The probability of guiding the game ball distributed in the second direction to the certain winning means is higher. That is, the probability of winning a prize from the guiding means to the certain winning means is determined by the second sorting means rather than the game ball distributed in the first direction by the first sorting means. The game balls distributed in the direction are higher.

Ultimately, it is sufficient to pay attention to the guidance means, so that even if a plurality of routes are provided, the winning route can be shown in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

again,
"The advantage of the player who has entered the game ball into the first area and the advantage of the player who has entered the game ball into the second area do not change [for example, the game ball is the first special figure. The probability of being directed to the starting port 230 is the same at 25%],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

There are no nails in the distribution control design of the first distribution means, the distribution control design of the second distribution means, and the vicinity of the first distribution means and the vicinity of the second distribution means. Although the design is the same in terms of points, there may be slight differences due to individual differences. However, it is not enough for the player to experience it.

Even if the probability that the game ball that has entered the first area wins the certain winning means and the probability that the game ball that has entered the second area wins the certain winning means are the same. good. The same here means almost the same, considering that extremely rare events occur. That is, it means that they include substantially the same.

again,
A display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] is provided.
The display means is a means for displaying explanatory displays relating to at least one of the first region and the second region [for example, FIGS. 93 (a), (b), (d) to (f)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

It should be noted that the display means explains that the advantage of the player who has entered the game ball into the first area and the advantage of the player who has entered the game ball into the second area do not change. [For example, the explanatory display shown in FIG. 93 (b)] may be displayed.

Further, although the display means is more likely to occur in the first case than in the second case, the second direction is a direction in which it is easier to win a prize in a certain winning means than in the first direction. The explanation display [for example, the explanation display shown in FIG. 93 (f)] may be displayed.

Further, the display means may display explanatory displays relating to both the first region and the second region [for example, the explanatory display shown in FIG. 93 (f)], the first. The explanatory display [for example, the explanatory display shown in FIG. 93 (d)] relating to only the first region of the region and the second region may be displayed, or only the second region. The explanation display [for example, the explanation display shown in FIG. 93 (e)] may be displayed.

It should be noted that a third distribution means [for example, a third ball direction change] that is arranged between the first region and the first distribution means and through which a game ball that has entered from the first region can pass through. Section 263] may be provided. The third distribution means may distribute the game ball in a direction toward the first distribution means and in a direction not so. Further, a fourth distribution means [for example, a fourth ball direction change] arranged between the second region and the second distribution means and through which a game ball entering from the second region can pass. Section 264] may be provided. The fourth distribution means may distribute the game ball in a direction toward the second distribution means and a direction in which the game ball is not. By providing the third distribution means and the fourth distribution means, the amount of the game ball toward the certain winning means can be finely adjusted.
Further, another winning area (for example, the second special drawing starting port 232) is provided in the vicinity of the first special drawing starting port 230, and the starting port side taxiway 288, the first special drawing starting port 230 and other A new distribution device (for example, the distribution unit 291 shown in FIGS. 104 (b) and (c) described later) may be provided between the winning area and the winning area. With this new distribution device, distribution may be further performed between the first special drawing start port 230 and another winning area. Further, a V winning area is provided in place of the starting port 230 of the first special figure, and a new distribution device provided between the taxiway 288 on the starting port side and the V winning area provides a V winning area and other areas ( For example, further distribution may be performed between the taxiways). In addition, the first special winning opening is provided in place of the first special drawing starting port 230, and the first large winning opening is provided by a new distribution device provided between the taxiway 288 on the starting opening side and the first large winning opening. Further distribution may be performed between and other areas (for example, the second big winning opening). Here, there is a chance of winning a V when passing through the first prize opening, but there may be no chance of winning a V even if passing through the second prize. Further, a large winning opening is provided in place of the starting port 230 of the first special figure, and a new distribution device provided between the taxiway 288 on the starting opening side and the large winning opening allows the large winning opening and other areas (). For example, it may be further distributed among the general winning openings). The general winning opening referred to here corresponds to a general winning opening that increases the number of prize balls in addition to winning a prize in the big winning opening during a big hit game.

It can also be applied to the blade accessory in so-called two types of models. That is, a pair of accessories (for example, a pair) having a first movable member (for example, a left blade member that opens to the left side) that can move in one direction and a second movable member (for example, a right blade member that opens to the right side) that can move in the other direction. Of the blade members), the region where the first movable member is movable and the game ball can enter is defined as the first region 1241, and the region where the second movable member is movable and the game ball can enter is the first region. Two areas 1242. Then, a V winning area is provided in place of the first special drawing starting port 230. By doing so, in a gaming state in which the first movable member and the accessory provided with the second movable member are movable, if the first movable member is aimed to move, the rotating body unit 28 is guided to the rotating body unit 28 with high probability, but V. The probability of winning in the winning area is low, and if the second movable member is aimed at moving, the probability of guiding to the rotating body unit 28 is low, but the probability of winning in the V winning area is high. However, even if the game ball enters the first region 1241 and advances on the first ball path 2601, or enters the second region 1242 and advances on the second ball path 2602. The probability that the game ball will be directed to the V winning area is the same.

The electric distribution unit 26 is not provided with a game nail, and the rotating body unit 28 is not provided with a game nail. Further, no game nail is provided between the outlet opening 2881 of the taxiway 288 on the starting port side and the starting port 230 of the first special drawing. Therefore, the game nail is on the route such as the first ball path 2601 → the third ball direction change part 263 → the first ball direction change part 261 → the first ball passage 2681 → the rotating body unit 28 → the first special figure start port 230. It will not be provided. In addition, the game nail can also be used for routes such as the second ball path 2602 → the fourth ball direction change part 264 → the second ball direction change part 262 → the second ball passage 2682 → the rotating body unit 28 → the first special figure start port 230. It will not be provided. As shown in FIG. 88, a game nail is provided in the distribution front area 125, but even if there is a game nail, in the end, the third ball direction change portion 263 or the fourth ball direction change portion 264. If guided, the probability that the game ball will be directed to the first special figure starting port 230 is the same regardless of which route is taken, so it can be said that the structure allows the player to play the game with peace of mind. Further, even if the electric distribution unit 26 is hit through the transparent plate member 118 (see FIG. 85), the direction change of the game ball in each ball direction change portion is not affected. Further, even if the rotating body unit 28 is hit through the transparent plate member 118, there is no effect on the guidance of the game ball in the rotating body unit 28. From these facts, the act of hitting by the player is meaningless, and it can be expected that the player who knows this will stop hitting.

Subsequently, the general winning opening 227 provided at a position upstream of the position where the game ball enters by the direction changing member 2631,2641 on the third ball path 2603 will be described in detail.

FIG. 100A is a partially enlarged perspective view of the third ball path 2603 in a vertical cross section, but hatching of the cut surface is omitted. In FIG. 100 (a), the front side on the right side of the paper surface is the front side, and the back side on the left side of the paper surface is the rear side. Further, FIG. 101 is a partially enlarged side view when the third ball path 2603 is cross-sectionald in the vertical direction, but hatching of the cut surface is omitted. In FIG. 101, the right side of the paper surface is the front side, and the left side of the paper surface is the rear side.

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, the third ball path 2603 is not provided with a game nail. 100 and 101 show the entrance 2603s of the third ball path 2603 connected to the end of the central route 125C (see FIG. 101). At the entrance 2603s, the front wall 2603f portion inclines downward toward the rear side, the rear wall 2603b portion inclines downward toward the front side, and the game ball moves toward the intermediate position side in the front-rear direction in the third ball path 2603. You will be guided.

Further, FIGS. 100 and 101 also show a front wall 2603f and a rear wall 2603b forming the third ball path 2603 of the electric distribution unit 26. The general winning opening 227 is an opening provided in the rear wall 2603b. That is, the general winning opening 227 opens toward the rear side (back side). Of the edges defining the general winning opening 227, the upper end portion 227a projects downward. Further, it can be said that the general winning opening 227 is opened diagonally upward.

FIG. 100B is a diagram showing a cross-sectional shape of the third ball path 2603 when the entrance 2603s portion of the third ball path 2603 is cross-sectionald in the horizontal direction.

In FIG. 100 (b), the upper part of the figure is the front side and the lower part of the figure is the rear side. As shown in FIG. 100, a ridge portion 2603t extending in the vertical direction and protruding forward is formed in a portion of the rear wall 2603b between the entrance 2603s and the general winning opening 227. In FIG. 100 (b), the game ball B is shown by a solid line and a alternate long and short dash line. The game ball B shown by the solid line is a game ball B in a state of being in contact with the ridge portion 2603t. On the other hand, the game ball B'shown by the alternate long and short dash line is a game ball in a state of being closer to the right rear side. In the third ball path 2603 shown in FIG. 100 (b), dust Du is accumulated in the right rear corner. The game ball B'shown by the alternate long and short dash line hits the ridge portion 2603t and cannot completely approach the right rear corner of the third ball path 2603, so that it can be avoided from coming into contact with the dust Du, and the game ball is dusted. Is prevented from adhering.

The ridge portion 2603t is provided with an inclined portion SL1 inclined downward toward the front side on the entrance 2603s side, and the game ball is directed toward the front side by the inclined portion SL1. On the general winning opening 227 side of the ridge portion 2603t, an inclined portion SL2 inclined downward toward the rear side is provided. This inclined portion SL2 continues to the edge defining the general winning opening 227. Further, a protrusion 2603p is formed on the front wall 2603f at a position facing the general winning opening 227. The protrusion 2603p is provided with a guide curved surface CS that guides the game ball toward the general winning opening 227. The guide curved surface CS is composed of a curved surface toward the general winning opening 227. A path toward the general winning opening 227 is formed in the third ball path 2603 by the inclined portion SL2 following the edge defining the general winning opening 227 and the guide curved surface CS provided on the protrusion 2603p. This route is a route toward the general winning opening 227 diagonally downward from above the general winning opening 227. FIG. 100A shows a game ball B that has flowed down to the front of this path, and a solid arrow indicating the movement of the game ball B along this path. The game ball that has entered the general winning opening 227 advances toward the rear side (back side) and then falls downward as shown by the arrow indicated by the dotted line. The game ball that has fallen downward is detected by a ball detection sensor (not shown). When this ball detection sensor detects a game ball, it is assumed that the general winning opening 227 has been won, and the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are used as prize balls in the ball storage plate 126. Discharge. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 227 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a process until the game ball enters the general winning opening 227 provided in the middle of the third ball path 2603, and a state in which the game ball cannot enter. FIG. 102 is a cross-sectional view of the third sphere path 2603 in the vertical direction, and is a diagram schematically showing the structures shown in FIGS. 100 and 101 for easy understanding, with the left side of the paper being the front side. The right side of the paper is the back side.

FIG. 102 (a) shows how the game ball B enters the third ball path 2603 from the entrance 2603s of the third ball path 2603. In FIG. 102 (a), the rear wall 2603b and the ridge portion 2603t shown in FIGS. 100 and 101 are integrally represented, but the game ball B flows down along the front wall 2603f due to the inclination of the inclined portion SL1. It's easier to do. When the game ball B flows down along the front wall 2603f, the moving direction of the game ball B is easily directed to the rear (back side) by the guide curved surface CS provided on the protrusion 2603p. When the passing game ball comes into contact with the protrusion 2603p, the protrusion 2603p changes the movement of the game ball.

The game ball B not only flows down along the front wall 2603f, but may also flow down along the rear wall 2603b. In this case, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 102 (a), the upper end portion 227a protruding downward from the edge defining the general winning opening 227 collides with the general winning opening 227. Is hindered from entering.

FIG. 102 (b) shows how the game ball B flows down along the front wall 2603f and reaches the guide curved surface CS provided on the protrusion 2603p. The guide curved surface CS is provided at a position facing the general winning opening 227. Further, the guide curved surface CS is provided at a position separated from the general winning opening 227. Further, the guide curved surface CS is provided at a position on the player side with respect to the general winning opening 227. When the momentum of the game ball B is moderate, as indicated by the arrow A, the game ball B enters the general winning opening 227 from the guide curved surface CS. On the other hand, if the momentum of the game ball B is not sufficient at all, as indicated by the arrow B, the game ball B advances in the direction of falling from the guide curved surface CS. The game ball B that has advanced in the direction of falling from the guide curved surface CS passes through the effect switch 269 shown in FIG. 88 and is discharged from the electric distribution unit 26.

FIG. 102 (c) shows how the game ball B rides on the lower end portion of the edge defining the general winning opening 227. The game ball B shown in FIG. 102 (c) has reached the general winning opening 227, and then heads toward the rear side (back side) from the general winning opening 227 as shown by the arrow shown in FIG. 102 (c). Proceed.

On the other hand, in FIG. 102 (d), the momentum of the game ball B is slightly insufficient, and the game ball B collides with the game ball B before it gets on the lower end portion of the edge defining the general winning opening 227. Then, as the arrow indicates, it flows down the third ball path 2603.

In the above explanation, it has been explained that depending on the momentum of the game ball B, the general winning opening 227 may or may not be won, but the momentum of the game ball B is related to the moving speed of the game ball. Further, the moving direction of the game ball B and the state of the moving game ball (for example, a spin state, etc.) also affect the winning of the general winning opening 227.

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a modified example of the third ball path 2603, which is a cross-sectional view when the third ball path 2603 is cross-sectionald in the vertical direction, with the left side of the paper surface being the front side and the right side of the paper surface being the rear side. Become. In the following explanation, duplicate explanations are omitted, and there is a place to mainly explain the characteristic parts of the modified examples. Further, the components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far. Further, in FIG. 103, the general winning opening 227 is shown by an arrow in order to show it in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 103A is an example in which the protrusion 2603p is removed from the front wall 2603f. As described above, the protrusion 2603p changes the movement of the game ball when it comes into contact with the passing game ball, but even without the protrusion 2603p, the momentum (movement speed) of the game ball B and the game ball Depending on the moving direction of B and the state of the moving game ball, the player may enter the general winning opening 227.

The third sphere path 2603 itself may be replaced with one having an inverted conical peripheral surface whose diameter gradually decreases toward the downstream side. When the game ball B flows down (flows in a spiral shape) while orbiting its peripheral surface, it becomes easy to enter the general winning opening 227. In this case, when the peripheral surface of the inverted cone comes into contact with the game ball passing upstream from the position where the general winning opening 227 is provided, the movement of the game ball is changed.

Further, a structure having the same structure as the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 (see FIG. 88), which will be described in detail later, may be provided between the entrance 2603s of the third ball path 2603 and the general winning opening 227. In this case, a force for moving in the circumferential direction is applied to the game ball passing upstream from the position where the general winning opening 227 is provided, and the movement of the game ball changes laterally.

FIG. 103 (b) is an example in which the upper end portion 227a projecting downward from the edge defining the general winning opening 227 is not provided. The general winning opening 227 shown in FIG. 103 (a) was an opening provided diagonally with respect to the third ball path 2603 (see the arrow shown in FIG. 103 (a)), which is shown in FIG. 103 (b). The general winning opening 227 is an opening provided in parallel with the third ball path 2603 (see the arrow shown in FIG. 103 (b)). Even such a general winning opening 227 may enter the general winning opening 227 depending on the momentum (moving speed) of the game ball B, the moving direction of the game ball B, and the state of the moving game ball. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 103 (b), since the protrusion 2603p is provided, the movement of the game ball is changed, and it is easy to enter the general winning opening 227.

FIG. 103 (c) is an example in which the protrusion 2603p is removed from the example shown in FIG. 103 (b) as in the example shown in FIG. Depending on the momentum (moving speed) of the game ball B, the moving direction of the game ball B, and the state of the moving game ball, the general winning opening 227 shown in FIG. 103 (c) may also be entered. In the third ball path 2603 shown in FIG. 103 (c), the game ball B flowing upstream from the general winning opening 227 is more likely to flow down the third ball path 2603 than the entry into the general winning opening 227. It may be a route. On the other hand, the third ball path 2603 shown in FIGS. 100 to 102 may also be a ball path in which the game ball B is more likely to flow downstream of the third ball path 2603 than to enter the general winning opening 227. In the third ball path 2603 shown in FIGS. 100 to 102, the game ball B flowing upstream from the general winning opening 227 is moved to the downstream of the third ball path 2603 by increasing the guide curved surface CS of the protrusion 2603p. It may be a ball route that is easier to enter the general winning opening 227 than the flow of.

Further, here, the same structure as the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 (see FIG. 88) may be provided between the entrance 2603s of the third ball path 2603 and the general winning opening 227. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 100 itself is installed on the island facility, the tilt of the entire pachinko machine 100 in the front-rear direction can be adjusted. In this case, the pachinko machine 100 is installed with the upper side tilted backward. If it is set, it will be easier to enter by the general winning opening 227. The tilt adjustment of the pachinko machine 100 in the front-rear direction when installed in this island facility can be applied to the examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 102 and others.

The general winning opening 227 is an opening in which the game ball enters toward the rear (back side), but the technique described here can also be applied to the opening in which the game ball enters toward the front.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing another example in which an entrance of a game ball opened toward the rear side (back side) is provided in the middle of the ball path.

FIG. 104 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the third ball path 2603 in the vertical direction, in which the left side of the paper surface is the front side and the right side of the paper surface is the rear side. The third ball path 2603 shown in FIG. 104 (a) is also not provided with a game nail, and the third ball path 2603 is provided with two general winning openings 227. That is, another general winning opening 227 is provided with the same structure further downstream of the same structure as the structure provided with the general winning opening 227 shown in FIG. 102. An inclined portion SL1 is also provided on the rear side between the general winning opening 227 on the upstream side and the general winning opening 227 on the downstream side, so that the game ball B can easily flow down along the front wall 2603f.

An out opening may be provided instead of the general winning opening 227 on the downstream side. Further, one or a plurality of general winning openings 227 may be provided further downstream than the general winning opening 227 on the downstream side, and three or more winning openings may be provided on the third ball path 2603.

FIG. 104 (b) shows a distribution unit 291 that distributes a game ball to a first flow path 2301 provided with a first special figure start port 230 and a second flow path 2321 provided with a second special figure start port 232. Is a view seen from the front, and FIG. 3C is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA'of the distribution unit 291 shown in FIG. In FIG. 104 (b), the front side of the paper surface is the front side, and the back side of the paper surface is the rear side. Further, in FIG. 104 (c), the left side of the paper surface is the front side, and the right side of the paper surface is the rear side. In FIG. 104 (c), each entrance / exit is indicated by an arrow in order to show it in an easy-to-understand manner.

As shown in FIGS. 104 (b) and 104 (c), neither the first flow path 2301 nor the second flow path 2321 is provided with a game nail. Further, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the distribution unit 291 has a distribution unit 2912 that distributes the game ball that has entered from the unit entrance 2911 to the left and right flow paths. The distribution unit 2912 changes the distribution posture according to the weight of the game ball. In the distribution unit 291, the portion provided with the unit entrance 2911, the distribution unit 291 and the out ports 243 and 244 is transparent or translucent, and the player can visually recognize how the distribution unit 291 distributes the game ball B. It is possible. Since the distribution unit 2912 changes its distribution posture depending on how the game ball hits and the movement of the game ball (for example, spin, etc.), it is impossible to predict the posture of the distribution unit 2912 and launch the game ball. In the distribution unit 291, the flow path on the left side becomes the first flow path 2301, and the flow path on the right side becomes the second flow path 2321.

The distribution unit 2912 may be rotated left and right by a motor. In this case, the distribution unit 2912 may not use a random number as in the direction changing member 2631 described with reference to FIG. 88. You just have to make regular movements.

As shown in FIG. 104 (c), the distribution unit 291 is provided on the front surface of the game board 201. The second flow path 2321 of the distribution unit 291 has a second special drawing start port 232 (see the solid arrow) that opens upward and an out port 244 that opens toward the rear side (back side). It is provided. The out port 244 is located near the front surface of the game board 201, and the game ball that has entered the out port 244 heads toward the back side of the game board 201. Further, the downstream side of the second flow path 2321 from the position where the second special drawing start port 232 is provided may be made opaque so that the player cannot see it, but this is also made transparent or translucent for the game. It may be visible to a person.

The position of the second special drawing start port 232 may be a position on the bottom wall 2321b of the second flow path 2321 (for example, refer to the arrow of the two-dot chain line), and in the case of this position, the second special drawing Like the out port 244, the start port 232 opens toward the rear side (back side). Further, the out port 244 is located above the second special drawing start port 232. The position of the out port 244 and the position of the second special figure start port 232 may be reversed. In this case, the second special figure start port 232 is located above the out port 244. ..

Whether it is the second special figure start port 232 indicated by the solid arrow or the second special figure start opening 232 indicated by the two-dot chain arrow, it is provided in the middle of the extending direction of the second flow path 2321. It is a thing. On the other hand, the out port 244 is provided in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the second flow path 2321 (here, a direction substantially orthogonal to each other), and more specifically, it is provided in the front-rear direction. be. At the downstream end of the second flow path 2321, a ball detection sensor 2322 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the second special drawing start port 232 is provided.

The second flow path 2321 has been described above with reference to FIG. 104 (c), but the same applies to the first flow path 2301.

Further, the configuration of the second special figure start port 232 and the out port 244 described with reference to FIG. 104 (c) may be applied to the special figure 1 start chucker 23 shown in FIG. 87 (c). That is, the first special figure start port 230 shown in FIG. 87 (c) has the configuration of the second special figure start port 232 shown in FIG. 104 (c), and the outlet opening 2881 and the first special figure of the start port side taxiway 288. The interval of one game ball or more provided between the start port 230 and the start port 230 may be configured as the out port 244 shown in FIG. 104 (c). In this case, the left and right distances of one game ball or more provided between the exit opening 2881 of the taxiway 288 on the starting port side and the starting port 230 of the first special figure are eliminated. For example, it is blocked by a wall. In this configuration, the game balls discharged from the out outlets 289L and 289R shown in FIG. 87 (c) have a 100% probability of reaching the out outlet 240 shown in FIG. 87 (a). However, one of the left and right intervals of one game ball or more provided between the exit opening 2881 of the taxiway 288 on the starting port side and the starting port 230 of the first special figure is left, and from this interval. It may be a mode that allows the entry and exit of the game ball.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example in which a game ball is moved laterally in the middle of the ball path, and then the game ball enters the entrance of the game ball that opens toward the rear side (back side). In FIG. 105, the front side of the paper surface is the front side, and the back side of the paper surface is the rear side. Further, also in FIG. 105, the entrance 2606W is indicated by an arrow in order to show it in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 105 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a ball passage in which the third ball path 2603 described with reference to FIG. 102 is rotated by 90 degrees and arranged.

The ball path 2606 shown in FIG. 105 (a) is also not provided with a game nail. At the entrance 2606s of the ball path 2606, the right side wall 2606R is inclined downward longer toward the inside of the passage than the left side wall 2606L. Therefore, the game ball B tends to approach the left side wall 2606L.

In the middle of the right side wall 2606R, the entrance 2606W of the game ball is open. The entrance 2606W may be a general winning opening, a large winning opening, a special drawing starting opening, or an out opening. The entrance 2606W is opened in the lateral direction. Of the edges defining the entrance 2606W, the upper end portion 2606a projects downward. Further, the right side wall 2606R is provided with an inclined portion SL3 connected to the upper end portion 2606a. It can be said that the entrance 2606W is opened diagonally upward to the left.

On the other hand, on the left side wall 2606L, a protrusion 2606p is formed at a position facing the entrance 2606W. The protrusion 2606p is provided with a guide curved surface CS that guides the game ball toward the entrance 2606W. The guide curved surface CS is composed of a curved surface toward the entrance 2606W. The sphere path 2606 shown in FIG. 105 (a) is formed with a path toward the entrance 2606W by the inclined portion SL3 following the edge defining the entrance 2606W and the guide curved surface CS provided on the protrusion 2606p. There is. This route is a route toward the entrance 2606W diagonally downward from above the entrance 2606W.

When the game ball B flows down along the left side wall 2606L, the moving direction of the game ball B is easily directed to the right side by the guide curved surface CS provided on the protrusion 2606p. When the passing game ball comes into contact with the protrusion 2606p, the protrusion 2606p changes the movement of the game ball.

The game ball B not only flows down along the left side wall 2606L, but may also flow down along the right side wall 2606R. In this case, it collides with the upper end portion 2606a, and the entrance to the entrance 2606W is hindered. The game ball B that has not entered the entrance 2606W advances downstream of the ball path 2606.

At the back of the entrance 2606W (lower right in FIG. 105A), an approach area 2606E having a space larger than that of one game ball is provided. A flow path 2606K is formed in the approach region 2606E toward the rear side. The flow path 2606K opens in the game plate 201 and serves as a passage through which the game ball B flows down to the back side of the pachinko machine 100. The game ball that has entered the entrance 2606W enters the flow path 2606K, is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the flow path 2606K, and then is discharged to the game island side. The flow path 2606K is provided with a ball detection sensor that detects a game ball.

FIG. 105 (b) is a diagram showing an example in which the protrusion 2606p shown in FIG. 105 (a) is removed and a plurality of convex portions 2606T are provided instead.

The right wall 2606R of the ball path 2606 shown in FIG. 105A is provided with a convex portion 2606T protruding inward of the ball passage, one on the upstream side of the entrance 2606W and one on the downstream side of the entrance 2606W. Has been done. On the other hand, the left side wall 2606L of the ball path 2606 shown in FIG. 105B is provided with one convex portion 2606T at a position facing the entrance 2606W. In the ball path 2606 shown in FIG. 105 (a), convex portions 2606T are alternately provided on the right side wall 2606R and the left side wall 2606L along the flow direction of the game ball. The game ball B is directed diagonally downward to the left by the convex portion 2606T provided on the upstream side of the right side wall 2606R. If there is a convex portion 2606T provided on the left side wall 2606L ahead of the game ball B, the convex portion 2606T will turn the game ball B diagonally downward to the right. If there is an entrance 2606W ahead of the game ball B, the game ball B may enter the entrance 2606W. The plurality of convex portions 2606T shown in FIG. 105B change the movement of the game ball B when the passing game ball B comes into contact with the convex portion 2606T.

In the ball path 2606 shown in FIG. 105 (b), the upper end portion 2606a protruding downward from the edge defining the entrance 2606W is also removed, and the entrance 2606W is an opening provided in parallel with the ball path 2606. (See the arrow shown in FIG. 105 (b)). Even with such an entrance 2606W, the movement of the game ball is changed by the plurality of convex portions 2606T, and it is easy to enter the entrance 2606W.

FIG. 105 (c) is an example in which a plurality of convex portions 2606T are removed from the example shown in FIG. 105 (b). Depending on the momentum (moving speed) of the game ball B, the moving direction of the game ball B, and the state of the moving game ball, the entrance 2606W shown in FIG. 105 (c) may also be entered. Further, a structure having the same structure as the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 (see FIG. 88) may be provided between the inlet 2606s and the entrance 2606W of the ball path 2606.

In the above description,
"The first ball passage through which the game ball passes [for example, the third ball path 2603, the first flow path 2301, the second flow path 2321, the ball path 2606] and
A first winning opening provided in the middle of the first ball passage [for example, a general winning opening 227, a first special drawing starting port 230, a second special drawing starting port 232, an entrance 2606W].
Equipped with
The first winning opening is opened in a wall surface [for example, a rear wall 2603b, a game board 201].
When a game ball that has entered the first ball passage wins a prize in the first winning opening [for example, FIG. 102 (c)], the first winning opening passes through the first winning opening. It is configured so that when it reaches the downstream side from the position where the mouth is provided [for example, FIG. 102 (d)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

By providing the first winning opening in the middle of the first ball passage, the game area can be made compact and the area other than the game area can be enlarged.

The first ball passage may be a passage partitioned by a wall surface or a passage formed by a wall surface.

The wall surface may be the front surface of the game board.

The first winning opening may be formed in a ball passage unit [for example, an electric distribution unit 26, a distribution unit 291], or may be an opening in a game board.

The first winning opening may be a variable winning opening or a general winning opening. Further, it may be a special drawing start port or a normal drawing start port.

The first prize opening may be any one as long as the prize ball is paid out when a prize is won, and when it enters, it may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine and then discharged to the game island side, or a gate. It may remain in the game area even after entering.

again,
"With a second ball passage formed by a game nail [eg, right route 125R, center route 125C, and left route 125L in the area before distribution 125].
The first ball passage is a ball passage without a game nail.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Since the winning rate of the first winning opening does not change due to an external factor (for example, adjustment of the game nail by the game store), both the expert and the amateur can play equally.

A second ball passage formed by a metal game nail may be provided, and the first ball passage may be a ball passage not provided with a metal game nail. That is, the first ball passage may be provided with a resin game nail. The resin game nail may be integrally formed with the game board or the ball passage unit.

Alternatively, the game nail may be made of resin.

again,
"Protrusion 2603p, the same structure as the second upstream ball delay portion 2653, convex portion 2606T" is provided.
A game ball in contact with the change-imparting means is configured to be easier to win in the first winning opening than a game ball in non-contact with the change-imparting means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The player can enjoy how the flow direction of the game ball is changed by the change-imparting means.

The first ball passage is provided with a change-imparting means that changes the movement of the game ball when the game ball passing upstream from the position where the first winning opening is provided comes into contact with the first ball passage. May be.

again,
"The change-imparting means is provided at a position away from the first winning opening [for example, a position upstream of the first winning opening].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The player can enjoy entering the first winning opening or flowing down the downstream of the first ball passage depending on the ball power and direction of the game ball away from the change-imparting means.

again,
"The change-imparting means is provided at a position facing the first winning opening [for example, a position of a wall surface facing the wall surface].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The player can anticipate and enjoy the flow destination of the game ball whose flow direction has changed due to the change-imparting means.

again,
"The change-imparting means is provided at a position on the player side [for example, a position of the front wall 2603f] with respect to the first winning opening [for example, an opening (227) provided in the rear wall 2603b]. be,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The area in the plane direction facing the player in the game area can be made compact.

again,
"The first ball passage is formed in the ball passage unit [for example, the electric distribution unit 26, the distribution unit 291].
The ball passage unit is at least partially transparent or translucent so that the first winning opening is visible to the player.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The player can visually recognize the game ball entering the first winning opening through the ball passage unit.

In addition, the game ball passing through the first ball passage may be configured to be visible.

The first winning opening may be formed in the ball passage unit or may be opened in a game board.

The ball passage unit may be partially transparent or translucent, or may be wholly transparent or translucent.

again,
"The first winning opening is open in the front-back direction,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first winning opening may be opened toward the front side (front side, player side) or may be opened toward the back side (rear side).

again,
"A second winning opening provided on the downstream side of the first ball passage [for example, a general winning opening 226 provided between the electric distribution unit 26 and the out opening 240 shown in FIG. 88]. Prepare,
The first winning opening and the second winning opening are general winning openings having the same number of prize balls [for example, 4].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The game ball flowing down the upstream of the first ball passage may be easier to flow down the downstream of the first ball passage than the entry to the first winning opening [for example, FIG. 103 (c). ) The third ball path 2603].

The game ball flowing down the upstream of the first ball passage may be easier to enter the first winning opening than the flowing down of the first ball passage [for example, FIGS. 100 to 102. 3rd sphere path shown [2603].

There may be a third winning opening [for example, the general winning opening 227 on the downstream side shown in FIG. 104 (a)] between the first winning opening and the downstream end of the first ball passage.

The change-imparting means may be a ball delaying means capable of slowing the moving speed of the game ball [for example, one having the same structure as the second upstream ball delay portion 2653].

The game ball flowing down the upstream of the first ball passage may be easier to flow down the downstream of the first ball passage than the entry to the first winning opening [for example, in FIG. 103 (c). 3rd sphere path shown [2603].

The game ball flowing down the upstream of the first ball passage may be easier to enter the first winning opening than the flowing down of the first ball passage [for example, FIGS. 100 to 102. 3rd sphere path shown [2603].

There may be a third winning opening [for example, the general winning opening 227 on the downstream side shown in FIG. 104 (a)] between the first winning opening and the downstream end of the first ball passage.

The change-imparting means may be a ball delaying means capable of slowing the moving speed of the game ball [for example, one having the same structure as the second upstream ball delay portion 2653].

Subsequently, the first upstream ball delay section 2651, the first downstream ball delay section 2652, the second upstream ball delay section 2653, and the second downstream ball delay section 2654 shown in FIG. 88 will be described. As described above, the first upstream ball delay section 2651 and the first downstream ball delay section 2652 are arranged in the first ball path 2601, and the second upstream ball delay section 2653 and the second downstream ball delay section 2654 are the second ball. Since it is arranged on the path 2602, only the arranged position is different, and the structure is the same for all the delay portions, the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 will be described here as an example.

FIG. 106A is a cross-sectional view of the second upstream sphere delay portion 2653 and the fourth sphere direction change portion 264 when cross-sectionald by a vertical plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and is a cross-sectional view of the second upstream sphere delay portion 2653 and a cross section. The cross section of the fourth ball direction change portion 264 is hatched.

The second upstream ball delay portion 2653 has a cylindrical ball passage portion 2653A. A game ball passes through the inside of the ball passage portion 2653A. Therefore, the ball passage portion 2653A forms a part of the second ball path 2602. The inner peripheral surface of the ball passage portion 2653A is provided with an R surface 2653b, an inverted conical surface 2653c whose diameter is gradually reduced toward the downstream side, and a cylindrical surface 2653d having the same inner diameter. The upstream end of the R surface 2653b constitutes the upstream end of the ball passage portion 2653A, and the inverted conical surface 2653c is connected to the downstream end of the R surface 2653b. Further, the cylindrical surface 2653d is connected to the downstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c, and the downstream end of the cylindrical surface 2653d constitutes the downstream end of the spherical passage portion 2653A. In other words, the inner peripheral surface is narrower on the downstream side than on the upstream side. The width referred to here is the length of one of the directions orthogonal to the passing direction of the game ball (the direction from top to bottom in FIG. 106 (a)), but the inner peripheral surface is annular. Therefore, the length is the same in all directions as long as they are orthogonal to each other. That is, the width referred to here is the inner diameter of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 shown in FIG. 106 (a). If the inner peripheral surface has different lengths depending on the direction, the width is the direction in which the inner peripheral surface has the shortest length. The width W1 of the upstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c is narrower than the width W2 of the portion connected to the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 in the second ball path 2602. Further, the width W3 of the downstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c is narrower than the width W1 of the upstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c. Further, the width W4 of the downstream end of the second upstream sphere delay portion 2653 (the width of the downstream end of the cylindrical surface 2653d) is narrower than the width W1 of the upstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c. As described above, the magnitude relationship between the width of each part and the width of other parts is important, but as an example, the width W1 of the upstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c is 12.5 mm, and the width of the second ball path 2602 The width W2 of the portion connected to the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 is 13.0 mm, the width W3 of the downstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c is 11.5 mm, and the width of the downstream end of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 (cylindrical surface 2653d). The width of the downstream end of the) W4 may be 11.5 mm. The width of the cylindrical surface 2653d is 11.5 mm. The cylindrical surface 2653d is an adjustment allowance for increasing the height (passage length) of the spherical passage portion 2653A to a certain value or more, and can be omitted if a constant value can be secured only by the inverted conical surface 2653c. ..

FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 when viewed from diagonally above. In FIG. 107, the front side on the left side of the paper is the front side (player side).

The second upstream ball delay portion 2653 is separate from the electric distribution unit 26. That is, it is detachably attached to the second ball path 2602. In the second upstream ball delay portion 2653, the locking portions 2653L and 2653R extending on both sides of the ball passage portion 2653A in the lateral direction are locked to the rear wall 2603b of the electric distribution unit 26. The rear side of the second ball path 2602 is defined by the rear wall 2603b. Since the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 is removable, if the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 becomes dirty or damaged, there are few parts to be replaced. Further, the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 can be reused for another pachinko machine 100.

Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), a ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 forming a part of the second ball path 2602 is located on the downstream side of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653. A slight vertical gap 2653s is provided between the downstream end of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 and the upstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 as well. The width W5 of the upstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 is wider than the width W4 of the downstream end of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653, but is wider than the width W1 of the upstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c in the second upstream ball delay portion 2653. Is narrow. Similar to the inverted conical surface 2653c, the sphere behavior stabilizing portion 266 is also a portion where an inverted conical inner peripheral surface whose diameter is gradually reduced toward the downstream side is formed, and the width W6 of the downstream end of the sphere behavior stabilizing portion 266 is , The width of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 is narrower than the width of any portion of the ball passage portion 2653A. Further, it can be said that the width W6 of the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 is the narrowest width in the second ball path 2602 on the upstream side of the downstream end. The width W6 at the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball. In other words, the second ball path 2602 is most narrowed down at the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266. The width W5 of the upstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 may be 12.0 mm. Further, the width W6 at the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 may be 11.3 mm, which is slightly wider than the diameter (11 m) of the game ball. The widths (W1 to W6) of each portion described above may have other values as long as the ratio relationship is the same.

The inclination angle of the inner peripheral surface of the sphere behavior stabilizing portion 266 that is reduced in diameter toward the downstream side is larger than the inclination angle of the inverted conical surface 2653c of the second upstream sphere delay portion 2653 that is reduced in diameter toward the downstream side. The angle. The tilt angle referred to here means a tilt angle with respect to the vertical axis.

After passing through the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing part 266, the ball path branches to the left and right, the left path becomes the second ball path 2602, and the right path connects to the third ball path 2603 (see FIG. 88). It becomes the route 2607. Both the route on the left side (second ball route 2602) and the route on the right side (communication route 2607) have a width wider than the diameter of the game ball (11 m), and the game ball can easily pass through any of the passages. It is possible. Therefore, ball clogging is less likely to occur. Immediately below the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266, a fourth ball direction changing portion 264 is arranged across a branch portion of the left route (second ball route 2602) and the right route (communication route 2607). .. Further, in these passages (2602, 2606), a deceleration rib 26r1 is provided at a central portion in the width direction.

On the other hand, in the second ball path 2602, a ball trajectory changing rib 26r3 projecting forward is provided on the upstream side of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653. Of the second ball path 2602, the portion where the ball trajectory changing rib 26r3 is provided is a curved passage facing the left side, and the ball trajectory changing rib along the passage is in the central portion in the width direction of this passage. 26r3 is provided. The shape of the spherical trajectory changing rib 26r3 is also a curved shape.

Subsequently, the trajectory of the game ball flowing down the second ball path 2602 will be described. FIG. 106 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the trajectory of the game ball in the second upstream ball delay portion 2653. FIG. 106 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the trajectory of the game ball in the ball behavior stabilizing unit 266. FIG. 106 (d) is a diagram schematically showing the trajectory of the game ball passing through the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266.

The game ball that has entered the second ball path 2602 comes into contact with the ball trajectory changing rib 26r3. In the game ball in contact with the curved ball trajectory changing rib 26r3, the trajectory tends to change outward, that is, to the left, and the game ball tends to be spun. The game ball, which has changed its trajectory to the left and has been spun, comes into contact with the left side portion of the inner peripheral surface of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653, and then starts orbiting along the inner peripheral surface. That is, the inverted conical surface 2653c of the second upstream sphere delay portion 2653 is spirally moved toward the downstream side (see FIG. 106 (b)). The game ball moves in a spiral shape rather than falling straight, so that the moving distance becomes longer, and as a result, the moving speed decreases. The game ball becomes stagnant in the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 while moving in a spiral shape for a short time.

In the gap 2653s provided between the downstream end of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 and the upstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266, the inner peripheral surface on which the game ball moving in a spiral shape moves along is interrupted. The spiral movement of the game ball is easy to finish. Further, since the upstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 is slightly wider than the downstream end of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653, the continuity of the spiral is interrupted here as well, and the spiral movement is likely to end. The game ball that has completed the spiral movement advances diagonally downward while colliding with the inner peripheral surface of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266, which has an inverted conical shape that gradually shrinks in diameter. The ball behavior stabilizing unit 266 eliminates the moment that tends to move outward of the game ball that has moved in the circumferential direction, and tries to direct the game ball directly downward. At the narrowest downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266, the behavior of the game ball is suppressed and stabilized by the image that the game ball fits into it. For example, the behavior of the game ball that has been rattling while colliding with the inner peripheral surface of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 is settled (see FIG. 106 (c)).

Eventually, the game ball passes through the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266, and the game ball falls on the direction changing member 2641 of the fourth ball direction changing section 264. That is, from the narrowest downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266, the game ball B falls straight downward and comes into contact with the direction changing member 2641 (see FIG. 106 (d)). When the game ball comes into contact with the left inclined surface 264L of the direction changing member 2641, it flows down the path on the left side (second ball path 2602). On the other hand, when the game ball comes into contact with the right inclined surface 264R of the direction changing member 2641, it flows down the right path (communication path 2607).

The trajectory of the game ball from the second upstream ball delay section 2653 to the fourth ball direction change section 264 in the second ball path 2602 has been described above, but the ball direction change from the other ball delay sections (2651, 2652, 2654). The same applies to the trajectory of the game ball from the section (261 to 263).

The ball trajectory changing rib 26r3 and the direction changing member 2641 have the same function in the sense that they change the moving direction of the game ball, but the direction changing member 2641 is more than the ball trajectory changing rib 26r3. The direction of movement of the game ball is greatly changed. Further, the ball trajectory changing rib 26r3 is fixed and is not a movable member, but the direction changing member 2641 is a movable member. That is, the state of the ball trajectory changing rib 26r3 does not change, but the state of the direction changing member 2641 changes, and the moving direction of the game ball also changes according to the state change.

Subsequently, a modified example of the ball delay portion will be described. Here, the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 will be described as an example, but the components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far.

FIG. 108 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a modified example of the sphere delay portion. This partial cross-sectional view is a cross-sectional view showing a part of the downstream side of the second upstream sphere delay portion 2653 when the second upstream sphere delay portion 2653 is cross-sectionald on a vertical plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and is a second upstream sphere. The cross section of the delay portion 2653 is hatched.

In the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 shown in FIG. 106, a downstream portion of the inverted conical surface 2653c whose diameter is gradually reduced toward the downstream side and a cylindrical surface 2653d having the same inner diameter are provided on the downstream side. In the second upstream sphere delay portion 2653 shown in FIG. 108 (a), the cylindrical surface 2653d is omitted, and the inverted conical surface 2653c extends to the downstream end of the second upstream sphere delay portion 2653. That is, a surface perpendicular to the inner peripheral surface of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 is not provided.

Further, the inverted conical surface 2653c whose diameter is gradually reduced toward the downstream side is a flat surface, but in the second upstream sphere delay portion 2653 shown in FIG. 108 (b), the diameter is gradually reduced toward the downstream side and is convex outward. The outer curved surface 2653e, which is a curved surface, is formed up to the downstream end of the second upstream sphere delay portion 2653. Even on this outer curved surface 2653e, the game ball orbits along an outwardly convex curved surface. In the second upstream sphere delay portion 2653 shown in FIG. 108 (c), an inner curved surface 2653f, which is an inwardly convex curved surface that gradually reduces in diameter toward the downstream side, is formed up to the downstream end of the second upstream sphere delay portion 2653. ing. Even on this inner curved surface 2653f, the game ball orbits along an inwardly convex curved surface.

In the second upstream sphere delay portion 2653 shown in FIG. 108 (d), a screw groove 2653 g is formed on an inverted conical surface whose diameter is gradually reduced toward the downstream side. The screw groove 2653 g is a groove connected in a spiral shape, and the game ball can easily move around the screw groove 2653 g.

FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view showing a modified example of the spherical behavior stabilizing portion 266. This cross-sectional view is a view showing the cross-sectional shape when the downstream end (the narrowest part) of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 is cross-sectionald in the horizontal direction, and in FIG. 109, the cross-sectional view of the game ball B is also shown in each figure. Has been done. In FIG. 109, the lower side is the front side (player side). Here, too, the components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far.

First, FIG. 109 (a) shows the ball behavior stabilizing unit 266 shown in FIG. 106. The entire circumference of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. 106 is covered with a wall. A front wall 2603f is shown on the front side of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266. Both the wall constituting the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 and the front wall 2603f are transparent, and the player can visually recognize the game ball passing through the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266.

The ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. 109 (b) has an open front side and is composed of left and right side walls 266L, 266R and a rear wall 266B. The inner dimension of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 is shorter in the left-right direction than in the front-back direction, and the length in the left-right direction corresponds to the width, for example, 11 or 3 mm. The ball behavior stabilizing unit 266 shown in FIG. 109 (b) stabilizes the behavior of the game ball in only one direction in the left-right direction.

The front side of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. 109 (c) is closed by another plate member 266F', and the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. 109 (d) has left and right side walls 266L. It has a front wall 266F integrally formed with the 266R and the rear wall 266B. In both the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. 109 (c) and the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. 109 (d), the inner dimensions are the same in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, and the left-right direction and the front-back direction. The behavior of the game ball is stabilized by the two directions of.

The ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. 109 (e) has an open front side and has an arc-shaped rear wall 266B'connecting the left and right side walls 266L and 266R. The arc of the arc-shaped rear wall 266B'is a circular hole in a circle having a diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 11.3 mm). The ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. 109 (e) restrains the rear half of the game ball B. As described in the explanation in FIG. 103 (c), when the pachinko machine 100 itself is installed in the island equipment, the inclination of the entire pachinko machine 100 in the front-rear direction can be adjusted. If the upper part of the pachinko machine 100 is installed in an inclined posture toward the rear side, the rear half of the game ball B fits into the arc-shaped rear wall 266B'shown in FIG. 109 (e), and the behavior of the game ball is observed. Stabilize.

The ball behavior stabilizing unit 266 shown in FIG. 109 (f) closes the front side of the ball behavior stabilizing unit 266 shown in FIG. 109 (e) with another member 266F'', and as a result, the ball behavior shown in FIG. 109 (a). It has the same configuration as the stabilizing unit 266.

In the above description,
"A ball delaying means capable of slowing the moving speed of a game ball [for example, a first upstream ball delay section 2651, a first downstream ball delay section 2652, a second upstream ball delay section 2653, a second downstream ball delay section 2654". ]When,
A ball behavior stabilizing means [for example, a ball behavior stabilizing unit 266] capable of stabilizing the behavior of a moving game ball, and
A ball direction changing means for changing the moving direction of the game ball [for example, a first ball direction changing portion 261 to a fourth ball direction changing portion 264] and
Equipped with
The ball behavior stabilizing means stabilizes the behavior of a game ball that has passed through the ball delaying means.
The ball direction changing means changes the moving direction of the game ball that has passed through the ball behavior stabilizing means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

By changing the moving speed of the game ball, the game ball heading toward the ball direction changing means while preventing the game ball from stopping and launching the game ball aiming at the timing of directing the game ball to the ball direction changing means. By stabilizing the behavior of the ball, the accuracy of the direction change of the game ball in the ball direction changing means can be improved.

The ball direction changing means may be a ball distribution means for distributing the moving direction of the game ball.

again,
"The ball delay means is provided on the ball passage forming portion [for example, the rear wall 2603b of the electric distribution unit 26].
The ball delaying means is separate from the ball passage forming portion.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

By separating the ball passage forming portion from the ball passage forming portion, even if the ball delaying means is damaged or soiled, the number of parts to be replaced can be reduced. Further, when it is desired to attach the ball delay means having different performance to another game table, the ball passage forming portion can be reused.

The ball behavior stabilizing means is provided in the ball passage forming portion, and the ball behavior stabilizing means may be a separate body from the ball passage forming portion.

again,
"In the ball delaying means, the width of the portion through which the game ball passes is narrower on the downstream side [for example, 11.5 mm] than on the upstream side [for example, 12.5 mm].
The width is the length in one of the directions orthogonal to the passing direction of the game ball.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

It is possible to delay the moving speed of the game ball in contact with the wall surface constituting the ball delay means by making it easy for the game ball to come into contact with the wall surface.

again,
"In the ball delaying means, the portion through which the game ball passes is composed of an inverted conical surface [for example, an inverted conical surface 2653c] whose diameter is gradually reduced toward the downstream side.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The game ball in contact with the wall surface constituting the ball delay means goes downstream while orbiting along the wall surface. That is, it moves toward the downstream side while moving in a spiral shape. By doing so, the moving speed of the game ball can be slowed down. If the timing at which the game ball comes into contact with the wall surface constituting the ball delay means is late, the time for the game ball to go downstream while orbiting along the wall surface is shortened, and the rate of reducing the movement speed of the game ball is reduced. do. Further, when the game ball does not come into contact with the wall surface constituting the ball delay means, the moving speed of the game ball does not decrease. As described above, the degree to which the moving speed of the game ball decreases is not fixed, and the moving speed of the game ball becomes random. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being stopped and the game ball to be launched at the same timing of the ball direction changing means.

A part of the wall surface (the inner wall of the portion through which the game ball of the ball delaying means passes) constituting the ball delaying means may extend vertically downward.

The ball delaying means may have a portion through which the game ball passes, which may be formed of an inwardly convex curved surface from the upstream side to the downstream side, or may be outwardly convex from the upstream side to the downstream side. It may be composed of a curved surface of.

A screw groove may be formed on the wall surface constituting the ball delay means.

again,
"In the ball behavior stabilizing means, the width of the narrowest portion [for example, the downstream end] is further narrower than the width of the narrowest width [for example, 11.5 mm] portion [for example, the downstream end] in the ball delay means. [For example, 11.3 mm]
The width is the length in one of the directions orthogonal to the passing direction of the game ball.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The ball behavior stabilizing means constitutes the ball behavior stabilizing means by the outward force applied to the game ball by the ball delaying means (the force generated by the centrifugal force generated by going to the downstream side while orbiting along the wall surface constituting the ball delaying means). It can be suppressed by hitting the game ball against the wall surface. That is, the outward force is changed to a downward force when the game ball hits the wall surface constituting the ball behavior stabilizing means. This makes it possible to stabilize the behavior of the game ball.

The length (width) of the ball behavior stabilizing means in the left-right direction may be narrower than the length (depth) of the ball behavior stabilizing means in the front-back direction. That is, the spherical behavior stabilizing means may have a rectangular cross-sectional shape.

The length (width) in the left-right direction of the ball behavior stabilizing means may be the same as the length (depth) in the front-back direction of the ball behavior stabilizing means. That is, the spherical behavior stabilizing means may have a square cross-sectional shape.

The spherical behavior stabilizing means may have a U-shaped cross section, a U-shaped cross section, or a circular shape.

again,
"The ball direction changing means is provided just below the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Since the game ball that has passed through the ball behavior stabilizing means falls vertically and comes into contact with the ball direction changing means, the accuracy of the change in the moving direction of the game ball given by the ball direction changing means can be improved.

again,
"A ball orbit changing means [for example, a ball orbit changing rib 26r3] is provided on the upstream side of the ball delaying means.
In the ball trajectory changing means, the game ball moving toward the ball delay means comes into contact with the wall surface constituting the ball delay means [for example, the wall surface on the left side of the inner peripheral surface of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653]. It changes the trajectory of the game ball so that it can be easily played.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The game ball is likely to come into contact with the wall surface constituting the ball delay means, and the ball delay means is likely to slow down the moving speed of the game ball.

It should be noted that the ball direction changing means has a greater influence on the game ball than the ball trajectory changing means. That is, the ball direction changing means greatly changes the direction of the moving game ball, whereas the ball trajectory changing means changes the direction of the moving game ball only slightly.

again,
"A gap [for example, a gap 2653s] is provided between the downstream end of the ball delaying means and the upstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the ball behavior stabilizing means may be provided at a position away from the ball delaying means. Alternatively, the ball behavior stabilizing means may be provided at a position in contact with the ball delaying means.

again,
"In the path through which the game ball changed in the moving direction by the ball direction changing means passes [for example, the left path (second ball path 2602) and the right path (communication path 2607) shown in FIG. 106]. A game table characterized by having a deceleration rib [for example, a deceleration rib 26r1] that protrudes and can slow down the moving speed of the game ball. 』\
Was also explained.

Subsequently, the first three-dimensional film effector 271, the second three-dimensional film effector 272, the third three-dimensional film effector 273, and the fourth three-dimensional film effector 274 will be described.

In FIG. 110, various members overlapping the first three-dimensional film directing body 271, the second three-dimensional film directing body 272, the third three-dimensional film directing body 273, and the fourth three-dimensional film directing body 274 are removed from the game board 200. It is a figure which shows the state.

As shown in FIG. 110, a first three-dimensional film effector 271 and a second three-dimensional film effector 272 are arranged at the upper part. Further, the third three-dimensional film effector 273 is arranged on the right side, and the fourth three-dimensional film effector 274 is arranged on the left side. The first three-dimensional film effector 271 is provided so as to be superimposed on the second three-dimensional film effector 272.

Further, FIG. 110 shows a decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative pattern display device 208 can execute an image display effect by modulation of light using a liquid crystal composition. A part of the right end of the decorative pattern display device 208 is covered with a part of the left side of the third three-dimensional film effector 273 arranged on the right side.

Further, FIG. 110 also shows a substantially circular LED light emitting effect body 278. As described above, the LED light emitting effect body 278 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 2781 on the outer periphery, and each of the three-dimensional film effect bodies 271 to 274 is irradiated with light from the side by the LED light emitting effect body 278. The three-dimensional film effectors 271 to 274 may be irradiated with light from the front by the LED light emitting effector 278. Further, a member for covering the LED light emitting effect body 278 from the front may be provided, and at least a part of the member may be covered with a part of the third three-dimensional film effect body 273.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a state in which the first three-dimensional film effector 271 and the third three-dimensional film effector 273 are removed from the state shown in FIG. 110.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a single unit of the first three-dimensional film effector 271. FIG. 112 (a) is a perspective view of the first three-dimensional film effector 271 when viewed from a slightly right side, and FIG. 112 (b) is a schematic perspective view of the first three-dimensional film effector 271 when viewed from above. It is a figure.

The first three-dimensional film effector 271 is formed by vacuum forming or vacuum forming a resin film (for example, polystyrene resin) having a thickness of about 0.01 mm, and has a flat plate portion 2711 and a three-dimensional portion 2712. Of the flat plate portion 2711 and the three-dimensional portion 2712, at least the three-dimensional portion 2712 is transparent. The transparency may be transparent or translucent (the same applies in the present specification). Further, the three-dimensional portion 2712 may be entirely transparent or only a part thereof may be transparent.

FIG. 112 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a transparent portion in the three-dimensional portion 2712 and an opaque portion.

In FIG. 112 (c), the border portion of the number of the 7 segment is the opaque portion npe, and the portion surrounded by the opaque portion npe is the permeable site per. The inside of the impermeable site npe may be the translucent site per.

The matters concerning the first three-dimensional film effector 271 described above are the same for the other three-dimensional film effectors 272 to 274. Further, the three-dimensional film effector may be formed by using a material according to the weight and strength, and is not limited to a resin film having a thickness of about 0.01 mm, and a film having a thickness of less than 0.1 mm, 0. It may be formed by using a sheet of 1 mm to less than 0.8 mm, a plate of 0.8 mm or more, or the like.

FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the second three-dimensional film effector 272 when viewed from the right side.

The three-dimensional portion 2722 of the second three-dimensional film effect body 272 is provided with a mounting portion 2723 on which the three-dimensional portion 2712 of the first three-dimensional film effect body 271 is covered. The front surface 2724 of the mounting portion 2723 shown in FIG. 113 is entirely transparent and flat, but may have an uneven shape in whole or in part imitating a lens. Further, a double-sided tape is attached to the side surface 2725 of the mounting portion 2723, and the three-dimensional portion 2712 of the first three-dimensional film effector 271 is fixed to the mounting portion 2723 by the double-sided tape. By using a transparent double-sided tape, it is possible to irradiate light from the side surface.

FIG. 114 is a perspective view showing a state in which the three-dimensional portion 2712 of the first three-dimensional film effect body 271 is fixed to the mounting portion 2723 of the second three-dimensional film effect body 272.

FIG. 114 shows the first three-dimensional film effector 271 to the fourth three-dimensional film effector 274, but in order to distinguish the second three-dimensional film effector 272, the color is different from that of other three-dimensional film effectors. It is shown differently. Of the second three-dimensional film effector 272, the portion where the first three-dimensional film effector 271 does not overlap is the front view, and the second three-dimensional film effector 272 is visible. Further, as shown in FIG. 114, the portion of the first three-dimensional film effector 271 surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is a portion that does not overlap with the second three-dimensional film effector 272, and the second three-dimensional film is on the rear side. The staging body 272 does not exist.

Further, as shown in FIG. 114, the second 3D film effector 272 and the 4th 3D film effector 274 have a lower left edge 2726 of the 2nd 3D film effector 272 and an upper edge 2741 of the 4th 3D film effector 274. Are placed in contact with each other. That is, the second three-dimensional film effector 272 and the fourth three-dimensional film effector 274 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 112, the flat plate portion 2711 of the first three-dimensional film effector 271 is provided with screw holes 271N and positioning holes 271H on the left and right sides, respectively. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111, the game board back base 200b is provided with one set of a screw receiving cylinder 200bP and one set of a positioning protrusion 200bT on the left and right sides. The left positioning protrusion 200bT is inserted into the left positioning hole 271H for alignment, and the right positioning protrusion 200bT is inserted into the right positioning hole 271H for alignment. When the alignment is completed, the screw can be inserted into the screw hole 271N on the left side and the screw receiving cylinder 200bP on the left side, and screwing is performed. In addition, screws can be inserted into the screw hole 271N on the right side and the screw receiving cylinder 200bP on the right side, and the right side is also screwed. In this way, the first three-dimensional film effector 271 is screwed to the game board back base 200b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 113, the flat plate portion 2721 of the second three-dimensional film effect body 272 is also provided with screw holes 272N and positioning holes 272H on the left and right sides, respectively.

Each three-dimensional film effector 271 to 274 is arranged on the lens. FIG. 114 shows a part of the upper lens 2752, a part of the right lens 2753, and a part of the left lens 2754. Any of these lenses 2752 to 2754 refracts light from the rear side and diffuses or focuses it toward the front side. Each of these lenses 2752 to 2754 is provided with a light diffusing portion. However, a lens that is simply a transparent plate may be used.

The upper lens 2752 is provided with screw receiving holes and positioning protrusions on the left side and the right side, respectively. As shown in FIG. 114, the positioning protrusion on the left side is inserted into the positioning hole 272H on the left side of the second three-dimensional film effector 272 for positioning, and the positioning protrusion on the right side is positioned on the right side of the second three-dimensional film effector 272. It is inserted into the hole 272H and aligned. When the alignment is completed, the screw can be inserted into the screw hole 272N on the left side of the second three-dimensional film effector 272 and the screw receiving hole on the left side provided in the upper lens 2752, and screwing is performed. Further, screws can be inserted into the screw holes 272N on the right side of the second three-dimensional film effector 272 and the screw receiving holes on the right side provided in the upper lens 2752, and the right side is also screwed. In this way, the second three-dimensional film effector 272 is screwed to the upper lens 2752. FIG. 114 shows a screw 271S in which the first three-dimensional film effector 271 is screwed to the game board back base 200b and a screw 272S in which the second three-dimensional film effector 272 is screwed to the upper lens 2752. Has been done. Further, a positioning protrusion 200bT provided on the back base 200b of the game board and a positioning protrusion 2752T provided on the upper lens 2752 are also shown. As shown in FIG. 114, the positioning means (positioning protrusions 200bT) and fixing means (screws 271S) of the first three-dimensional film effector 271 and the positioning means (positioning protrusions 2752T) and fixing means (positioning protrusions 2752T) of the second three-dimensional film effector 272 (positioning protrusions 2752T). The position in the front-rear direction is different from that of the screw 272S). That is, the positioning means (positioning protrusion 200bT) and fixing means (screw 271S) of the first three-dimensional film effect body 271 are the positioning means (positioning protrusion 2752T) and fixing means (screw 272S) of the second three-dimensional film effect body 272. It is provided on the front side of the front. By doing so, the staging means are arranged with depth.

Subsequently, the mounting structure of the three-dimensional film effector will be described by taking the third three-dimensional film effector 273 as an example. However, the matters described below are the same for other three-dimensional film effectors, or similarly. It is a matter that can be applied.

FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting structure of the third three-dimensional film effector 273. In FIG. 115, the left front side is the front side and the right back side is the rear side.

FIG. 115 shows the third three-dimensional film effector 273, the right lens 2753, the right lens mounting base 2763, and the right LED substrate 2773 from the front side.

The third three-dimensional film effect body 273 is provided with three screw holes 273N and two positioning holes 273H in the flat plate portion 2731.

The right lens 2753 is provided with six screw receiving holes 275H1 to 275H6, two positioning protrusions 275T, and three screw holes 275N.

The right lens mounting base 2763 is also transparent, and the right lens mounting base 2763 is provided with four screw receiving cylinders 276P1 to 276P4 and four screw holes 276N.

A plurality of LEDs 277L are arranged in a matrix on the right LED substrate 2773, and four notches 277C and four screw holes 277N are provided.

Each of the two positioning protrusions 275T of the right lens 2753 is inserted into each of the two positioning holes 273H of the third three-dimensional film effect body 273 for positioning. When the alignment is completed, each of the three screw holes 273N of the third three-dimensional film effector 273 and the three screw receiving holes 275H1,275H5, 275H6 out of the six screw receiving holes 275H1 to 275H6 provided in the right lens 2753. Each of them can be inserted, and the third three-dimensional film effector 273 is screwed to the right lens 2753. The third three-dimensional film effector 273 is screwed in a state where the upper left end portion protrudes to the left side from the right lens 2753. FIG. 115 shows three machine screws 273S used for screwing. Further, on the right lens 2753 shown in FIG. 115, the region covered by the screwed third three-dimensional film effector 273 is shown by hatching downward to the right. Further, in FIG. 115, the region connecting the positions of these three machine screws 273S is shown by a dotted line. The position of the center of gravity of the third three-dimensional film effector 273 is located outside the region indicated by the dotted line.
The right lens mounting base 2763 is for mounting a part of the right lens 2753 and the upper lens 2752, and three of the four screw receiving cylinders 276P1 to 276P4 are attached to the screw receiving cylinders 276P2-276P4 and the right lens 2753. The screw holes 275N are matched and screwed. FIG. 115 also shows three screws 275S1 to 275S3 used for screwing the right lens 2753. Of these three screws 275S1 to 275S3, only one upper screw 275S1 is covered with the screwed third three-dimensional film effector 273 as shown by the hatching downward to the right. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 110, the lower two screws 275S2 and S275S3 are visible, but the upper one screw 275S1 is not visible. The screw 275S1 is shown in FIG. 111 from which the third three-dimensional film effector 273 is removed. Further, the screw receiving holes 275H2 to 275H4 provided at the right end of the right lens 2753 for three from the bottom are screwed to the third three-dimensional film as shown by the hatching to the right without being used at all. It is covered by the effector 273 and is invisible as shown in FIG. 110. Further, of the four screw receiving cylinders 276P1 to 276P4, the screw holes of the upper lens 2752 (not shown here) are matched with the screw receiving cylinder 276P1 located at the uppermost position on the uppermost lens 2752 side. Screwing is done. The screws used for this screwing are also covered by the screwed third three-dimensional film effector 273 and are invisible as shown in FIG. 110. However, in FIG. 111 with the third three-dimensional film effector 273 removed, , The screw is shown as screw 275S4.

The right lens mounting base 2763 and the right LED substrate 2737 are screwed to a frame plate (not shown here). That is, the right lens mounting base 2763 has four screws 276S inserted through the four screw holes 276N. These four screws 276S are fixed to a frame plate (not shown) through the notch 277C of the right LED substrate 2773. Further, the right LED board 2773 has four screws 277S inserted through the four screw holes 277N, and is screwed to a frame plate (not shown) by these four screws 277S.

The right LED substrate 2773 is covered with a light diffusing portion provided on the right lens 2753. On the other hand, the third three-dimensional film effector 273 covers the light diffusing portion thereof, and through the third three-dimensional film effector 273, the lighting and blinking of the LED 277L mounted on the right LED substrate 2773 can be visually recognized. ..

Here, each is fixed by screwing, but it may be fixed by a transparent double-sided tape.

FIG. 116 is a diagram showing an LED substrate attached to a frame plate. In FIG. 116, the substantially circular LED light emitting effect body 278 shown in FIG. 110 is removed.

FIG. 116 shows the upper LED substrate 2772, the right LED substrate 2737, and the left LED substrate 2774.

FIG. 117 is a diagram showing each lens mounting base mounted on each LED substrate 2772 to 2774. Also in FIG. 117, the substantially circular LED light emitting effect body 278 shown in FIG. 110 is removed.

FIG. 117 shows the upper lens mounting base 2762, the right lens mounting base 2763, and the left lens mounting base 2764. The upper lens mounting base 2762 has substantially the same shape as the upper LED substrate 2772 shown in FIG. 116, and overlaps the entire area of the upper LED substrate 2772. The right lens mounting base 2763 has substantially the same shape as the right LED board 2737 shown in FIG. 116, and overlaps the entire area of the right LED board 2773. The left lens mounting base 2764 is longer downward than the left LED substrate 2774 shown in FIG. 116 and overlaps the entire area of the left LED substrate 2774.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing each lens mounted on each lens mounting base 2762 to 2764. Also in FIG. 118, the substantially circular LED light emitting effect body 278 shown in FIG. 110 is removed.

FIG. 118 shows the upper lens 2752, the right lens 2753, and the left lens 2754.

The left lens 2754 covers not only the left lens mounting base 2764 but also the left end portion of the upper lens mounting base 2762 from the front side. Further, the upper lens 2752 covers not only the upper lens mounting base 2762 but also the upper left end portion of the right lens mounting base 2763 from the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 116 to 118, the LED substrates 2772 to 2774 have corresponding lens mounting bases 2762 to 2764, and the lens mounting bases 2762 to 2764 also have corresponding lenses 2752 to 2754. The term "corresponding" as used herein means that the area is located directly above and has the most overlapping areas. However, a part of the LED substrate may be covered with another lens. Further, in the three-dimensional portion 2732 of the third three-dimensional film effector 273 shown in FIG. 115, the upper left end portion is a lens (upper lens 2752) different from the lens (right lens 2753) arranged under the other portions. Illuminated by the light that has passed through.

The light emitted by the LED mounted on the upper LED substrate 2772 passes through the upper lens mounting base 2762, the upper lens 2752, and a part of the left lens 2754, and the first three-dimensional film director 271 and the second three-dimensional film. The effect body 272 is irradiated with light from the rear side by the LED mounted on the upper LED substrate 2772. The light emitted by the LED mounted on the right LED substrate 2773 passes through the right lens mounting base 2763, passes through the right lens 2753 and a part of the upper lens 2752, and the third three-dimensional film effector 273 is the right LED substrate. Light is emitted from the rear side by the LED mounted on the 2773. The light emitted by the LED mounted on the left LED substrate 2774 passes through the left lens mounting base 2764, passes through the left lens 2754, and a part of the third three-dimensional film effector 273 and the second three-dimensional film effector 272. Light is emitted from the rear side by the LED mounted on the left LED board 2774.

In the above description,
"Decorative bodies having a three-dimensional shape [for example, first three-dimensional film directing body 271, second three-dimensional film directing body 272, third three-dimensional film directing body 273, fourth three-dimensional film directing body 274] and
A member [eg, right lens 2753] provided with a plurality of screw holes [for example, screw holes 275N, 275H1 to 275H6], and
Equipped with
The decorative body covers a screw hole [for example, a screw receiving hole 275H2-275H4] in which a screw is not inserted among the plurality of screw holes.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

If a trace of a hole leading to a screw hole through which a screw is not inserted is found in the decorative body, the game clerk can understand that the game table may have been tampered with. Further, when the member is reused for another game table, the screw can be fixed by using the screw hole through which the screw is not inserted, and the degree of freedom of the fixing position of the member can be increased.

The decorative body may be a three-dimensionally processed resin sheet or film.

The member may not be partially covered with the decorative body.

The decorative body is fixed to the member by a plurality of screws, and the position of the center of gravity of the decorative body is located outside the area connecting the positions of the plurality of screws for fixing the decorative body. You may.

The decorative body may be fixed by double-sided tape. For example, the decorative body may be fixed to the member with double-sided tape.

The decorative body may be sandwiched and fixed by two or more other parts.

The decorative body may be fixed by two or more fixing methods (for example, holding by screws, double-sided tape, or other parts).

again,
"For example, a screw [for example, screw 275S1, 275S4 shown in FIG. 111] for fixing an object different from the decorative body [for example, a member (right lens 2753) or an upper lens 2752] is provided.
The screw is covered with the decorative body [for example, the third three-dimensional film effect body 273].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The appearance quality of the game table can be improved.

The product may be the member.

The screw may fix the member [eg, right lens 2753] to a structure [eg, right lens mounting base 2763].

again,
"The member [for example, the right lens 2753] is screw-fixed using some screw holes [for example, screw holes 275N] among the plurality of screw holes.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The appearance quality of the game table can be improved.

The member [for example, the right lens 2753] may be screw-fixed to the object [for example, the right lens mounting base 2763].

again,
"The screw is a screw that fixes a different object [for example, the upper lens 2752] from the member [for example, the right lens 2753] [for example, 275S4 shown in FIG. 111].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The appearance quality of the game table can be improved.

The material different from the member may be the same type as the member or may be a different type.

again,
"A first effect means capable of executing the first light emission effect [for example, right LED board 2773] is provided.
The decorative body has a transparent portion at least in a part thereof.
The member [for example, the right lens 2753] has at least a part of a light diffusing portion that diffuses the transmitted light.
The first staging means is covered with the light diffusing portion, and is covered with the light diffusing portion.
The decorative body [for example, the third three-dimensional film directing body 273] covers the light diffusing portion.
The first light emission effect [for example, the light emission effect by lighting and blinking the LED 277L mounted on the right LED substrate 277] can be visually recognized through the decorative body.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the decorative body may cover the light diffusing portion so that the first light emitting effect can be visually recognized through the decorative body.

The first light emission effect can be performed while hiding the screw holes with the decorative body.

It should be noted that the decorative body may be entirely transparent or only a part thereof may be transparent.

The member may be one that diffuses light transmitted through the whole, or may be one that diffuses light transmitted only partially.

The first effect means may be, for example, an LED substrate or a liquid crystal display.

The first light emitting effect may be an effect of lighting or blinking an LED, or an image display effect of modulation of light using a liquid crystal composition.

The member may be, for example, a lens member.

again,
"A second effect means capable of executing a second light emission effect [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] is provided.
In the second effect means, a part [for example, a part on the right end] is covered with a part [for example, a part on the left side] of the decorative body [for example, the third three-dimensional film effect body 273]. Is,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second light emitting effect can be performed while hiding the screw holes with the decorative body.

The second effect means may be a liquid crystal display, and the second light emission effect may be an image display effect by modulation of light using a liquid crystal composition.

again,
"A third effect means capable of executing a third light emission effect [for example, LED light emission effect body 278] is provided.
The decorative body is irradiated with light from the front side or the side by the third light emitting effect.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The third light emitting effect can be performed while hiding the screw holes with the decorative body.

In addition, at least a part of the second member covering the third display means may be covered with a part of the decorative body. That is, the entire second member covering the third display means may be covered with a part of the decorative body, or only a part of the second member covering the third display means is said. It may be covered with a part of the decoration.

again,
"The decorative body [for example, the third three-dimensional film effect body 273] has a flat plate portion [for example, the flat plate portion 2731] and a three-dimensional portion [for example, the three-dimensional portion 2732].
The flat plate portion uses the screw holes [for example, screw receiving holes 275H1,275H5, 275H6] of a part of the plurality of screw holes [for example, screw receiving holes 275H1 to 275H6] to form the member [for example, a right lens. It is screwed to 2753].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The flat plate portion covers the screw holes [for example, screw receiving holes 275H2-275H4] in which the screws are not inserted among the plurality of screw holes [for example, screw receiving holes 275H1 to 275H6].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"A first decorative body having a three-dimensional shape [for example, a first three-dimensional film directing body 271] and
A second decorative body having a three-dimensional shape [for example, a second three-dimensional film directing body 272] and
Equipped with
The second decorative body is at least partially covered with at least a part of the first decorative body.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

By overlapping the first decorative body and the second decorative body, the decoration of the game table can be made into a more three-dimensional decoration.

The first decorative body may be a three-dimensionally processed resin sheet or film. The second decorative body may be a three-dimensionally processed resin sheet or film.

The first decorative body is fixed to the member by a plurality of screws, and the position of the center of gravity of the first decorative body is the position of a plurality of screws for fixing the first decorative body. It may be located outside the connected area. The second decorative body is fixed to the member by a plurality of screws, and the position of the center of gravity of the second decorative body is the position of the plurality of screws for fixing the second decorative body. It may be located outside the connected area.

The second decorative body may be entirely covered with the entire first decorative body, or may be entirely covered with only a part of the first decorative body. Alternatively, only a part thereof may be covered with the whole of the first decorative body, or only a part thereof may be covered with only a part of the first decorative body. May be good.

The first decorative body is fixed to the first member, and the first member may have a portion that does not overlap with the first decorative body. The second decorative body is fixed to the second member, and the second member may have a portion that does not overlap with the second decorative body.

The position where the first decorative body is fixed to the first member may be on the front side (player side) of the position where the second decorative body is fixed to the second member.

The shape of the first decorative body may be similar to the shape of a part of the second decorative body.

The first decorative body may be fixed to the second decorative body with double-sided tape.

again,
"The second decorative body has a portion that does not overlap the first decorative body in the front-rear direction [for example, FIG. 114].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first decorative body and the second decorative body are formed by a portion where the first decorative body and the second decorative body overlap and a portion where only the inner decorative body (the second decorative body) can be seen. It is possible to make the combination of the above three-dimensional when viewed from an oblique direction rather than the front view.

again,
"The first decorative body has a portion that does not overlap with the second decorative body in the anteroposterior direction [for example, a portion surrounded by a alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 114].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first decorative body and the second decorative body are formed by a portion where the first decorative body and the second decorative body overlap and a portion where only the front decorative body (the first decorative body) can be seen. The combination can be made more three-dimensional when viewed from an oblique direction rather than the front view.

again,
"A third effect means capable of executing a third light emission effect [for example, LED light emission effect body 278] is provided.
The first decorative body is irradiated with light from the front side or the side by the third light emitting effect.
The second decorative body is irradiated with light from the front side or the side by the third light emitting effect.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The shadow of the combination of the first decorative body and the second decorative body can be used to create a decoration with a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect.

again,
"The first ornament is at least partially transparent [eg, FIG. 112].
In the second decorative body, at least a part [for example, the mounting portion 2723] is covered with a portion having transparency of the first decorative body (hereinafter, referred to as "first portion"). There is [eg, FIG. 113],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The combination of the first decorative body and the second decorative body can be made to have a more three-dimensional effect and depth.

The first decorative body may be entirely transparent or only a part thereof may be transparent.

The second decorative body may be entirely covered with the first portion, or may be partially covered with the first portion. ..

again,
"The fourth effect means [for example, the upper LED board 2772] capable of executing the fourth light emission effect is provided.
The portion of the second decorative body covered with the first portion (hereinafter referred to as “second portion”) [for example, the mounting portion 2723] is transparent.
The fourth staging means is covered with at least the second portion.
The fourth light emitting effect can be visually recognized from the first portion through the second portion.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

A light emitting effect can be executed by the combination of the first decorative body and the second decorative body having a three-dimensional effect.

The second site may be at least partially permeable. That is, the second portion may be entirely permeable or may be partially permeable.

The fourth effect means may be, for example, an LED substrate or a liquid crystal display. The fourth light emitting effect may be an effect of lighting or blinking an LED, or an image display effect by modulation of light using a liquid crystal composition.

At least a part of the second portion may have an uneven shape. That is, the second portion may have an uneven shape as a whole, or may have an uneven shape only partially. Alternatively, the second portion may be at least partially planar. That is, the second portion may be entirely flat or only partially flat. Further, the second portion may have a shape imitating a lens. The second portion may have the shape formed entirely or may be formed only partially.

again,
"The first decorative body has an impermeable portion (hereinafter referred to as" third portion ") [for example, a border portion such as a character].
The first part is a part surrounded by the third part.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In some cases, the first portion may be emphasized so that the player can visually recognize it.

The second decorative body may have a transmissive portion and an impermeable portion surrounding the transmissive portion.

again,
"The first decorative body has a first flat plate portion [for example, a flat plate portion 2711] and a first three-dimensional portion [for example, a three-dimensional portion 2712].
The first flat plate portion is fixed to the first member [for example, the game board back base 200b].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The second decorative body has a second flat plate portion [for example, the flat plate portion 2721] and a second three-dimensional portion [for example, the three-dimensional portion 2722].
The second flat plate portion is fixed to the second member [for example, the upper lens 2752].
The first decorative body is also fixed to the second decorative body [for example, fixed with double-sided tape].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Subsequently, other components that can be applied to the pachinko machine 100 described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 118 will be further described. In the following description, the components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far. In addition, duplicate explanations may be omitted.

First, the attacker unit 25'used in place of the first attacker unit 25 arranged on the right side of the game area 124 will be described.

FIG. 119 is a schematic configuration diagram of the attacker unit 25'.

On the upstream side of the attacker unit 25'shown in FIG. 119, the normal starting port 228 shown in FIG. 88 is provided. Both the game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start port 228 and the game ball that has not passed reach the attacker unit 25'.

Similar to the first attacker unit 25 shown in FIG. 88, the second special figure starting port (electric chew) is also arranged on the upstream side of the attacker unit 25'shown in FIG. 119. Also in the second special drawing start port 232 shown in FIG. 119, the door member 2320 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction with respect to the ball passage, and the size of the start port is changed by the door member 2320. The ball detection sensor 2322 for the second special figure start port 232 is arranged upward near the downstream end of the electric chew guide member 2324 arranged below the door member 2320. In FIG. 119, the door member 2320 advances forward with respect to the ball passage. The game ball B that has reached the attacker unit 25'is on one end side of the door member 2320 if the door member 2320 is in the forward advanced state (closed state). The door member 2320 is gradually inclined downward toward the other end side (right side in the figure), and the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the door member 2320. That is, the ball passage is formed by the advanced door member 2320. The game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the door member 2320 goes out to the downstream side without winning a prize in the second special figure start opening 232 (see the solid arrow).

On the other hand, in the state where the door member 2320 is retracted with respect to the ball passage (open state), the game ball B is guided by the electric chew guide member 2324 and passes through the ball detection sensor 2322 as indicated by the dotted arrow. .. The game ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 2322 enters the electric chew entry port 2325, is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, and is then discharged to the game island side. That is, the back ball passage 2326 for the electric chew is connected to the ball entry port 2325 for the electric chew. The back ball passage 2326 for the electric chew extends downward on the back side of the game board 201.

Further, in the ball passage formed by the advanced door member 2320, a plurality of deceleration ribs (not shown) protruding forward are provided at intervals. These deceleration ribs are the same as those of the deceleration rib 234r shown in FIG. The game ball may be caught on the rib and stay on the door member 2320 for a while. When the door member 2320 retracts while the game ball is staying on the door member 2320, the game ball staying on the door member 2320 drops at once, and the game ball is continuously detected by the ball detection sensor 2322. May be done.

A plurality of game nails 238 are arranged at the intermediate position of the attacker unit 25', and the route that the game ball B travels while hitting these game nails 238 is divided into three routes. That is, it is divided into a route toward the general winning opening 226, a route toward the out opening 245, and a route toward the attacker (variable winning opening). A back ball passage 2261 for the general winning opening is connected to the general winning opening 226. A ball detection sensor 2262 is provided inside the back ball passage 2261 for the general winning opening, and when the game ball B passes through the ball detection sensor 2262, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are used as prize balls. It will be paid out. Further, a back ball passage 2451 for the out port is connected to the out port 245. A ball detection sensor is not provided in the back ball passage 2451 for the out port. The out opening 245 may be used as the general winning opening 226, and two general winning openings 226 may be arranged side by side.

Further, the back ball passage 2261 for the general winning opening and the back ball passage 2451 for the out opening merge to form one merging back ball passage JR.

The game ball B traveling on the route toward the attacker (variable winning opening) reaches the downstream portion of the attacker unit 25'. Similar to the first attacker unit 25 shown in FIG. 88, the first variable winning opening 234, which is the first attacker, is arranged on the downstream side portion of the attacker unit 25'shown in FIG. 119. Further, on the downstream side thereof, a second variable winning opening 235, which is a second attacker, is also arranged. That is, two variable winning openings are arranged in the attacker unit 25'shown in FIG. 119.

The first attacker on the upstream side has the same configuration as the first attacker shown in FIG. 88, and the first door member 2341 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction with respect to the ball passage, and the first door member 2341 wins a prize. The size of the mouth is variable. The ball detection sensor 2342 for the first variable winning opening is arranged below the first door member 2341 that has advanced to the front side and faces upward. In the first attacker shown in FIG. 119, the first door member 2341 advances forward with respect to the ball passage. The game ball B that has reached the downstream portion of the attacker unit 25'is on one end side of the first door member 2341 if the first door member 2341 is in the forward advanced state (closed state). The first door member 2341 is gradually inclined downward toward the other end side (left side in the figure), and the game ball B rolls on the upper surface of the first door member 2341. That is, the ball passage is formed by the advanced first door member 2341. The game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the first door member 2341 heads for the second attacker without winning the first variable winning opening 234 (see the solid arrow).

On the other hand, in the state where the first door member 2341 is retracted with respect to the ball passage (open state), the game ball B is guided by the guide member 2344 for the first attacker as shown by the dotted arrow, and the ball detection sensor 2342 is used. Pass through. The game ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 2342 is guided to the back side of the attacker unit 25'from the first attacker entry port 2343. Similar to the first attacker unit 25 shown in FIG. 88, a V distribution device (not shown) is also arranged on the back side of the attacker unit 25'shown in FIG. It is divided into whether to go to the V winning opening shown in the figure or to the out opening. The first door member 2341 advances and retreats by a small hit game, and when the game ball enters the V winning opening, it becomes a V winning and the big hit game is started.

The first door member 2341 is gradually inclined downward toward the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball. Further, in the ball passage formed by the advanced first door member 2341, a plurality of deceleration ribs (not shown) projecting forward are provided at intervals. In the first door member 2341 that has advanced to the front side, the game ball is easy to flow down due to the inclination of the first door member 2341, but the game ball is caught by a deceleration rib (not shown) and the game ball is above the first door member 2341. May stay in the door for a while. When the first door member 2341 retracts while the game ball is staying on the first door member 2341, the game ball staying on the first door member 2341 drops at once and is used for the first variable winning opening. The game ball may be continuously detected by the ball detection sensor 2342 of the above. Therefore, as compared with the case where the game ball B is guided by the first attacker guide member 2344 and passes through the ball detection sensor 2342, the winning rate to the first variable winning opening 234 is improved, and the deceleration rib is a means for improving the winning rate. It also plays the role of.

Like the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235 also has a variable size of the winning opening by the second door member 2351, but the arrangement position of the ball detection sensor is the first variable winning opening 234. Is different. The game ball heading for the second variable winning opening 235 falls through the fall passage FR. The drop passage FR shown in FIG. 119 is a passage from diagonally upper right to diagonally lower left. The ball detection sensor 2352 for the second variable winning opening 235 is arranged not below the second door member 2351 but downstream of the second door member 2351 and facing the upstream side. In FIG. 119, at a position in the middle of the fall passage FR, the second door member 2351 advances forward with respect to the fall passage FR. The game ball B that has fallen halfway through the fall passage FR falls to one end side of the second door member 2351 if the second door member 2351 is in the forward advanced state (open state). The second door member 2351 is also gradually inclined downward toward the other end side (left side in the figure), and the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the second door member 2351. That is, a ball passage is formed by the advanced second door member 2351. The game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the second door member 2351 passes through the ball detection sensor 2352 and wins a prize in the second variable winning opening 235. The game ball B that has passed through the ball detection sensor 2352 enters the second attacker entry port 2353. The second attacker entry port 2353 is connected to the confluence back ball passage JR where the above-mentioned general winning opening back ball passage 2261 and the out opening back ball passage 2451 merge.

On the other hand, in the state where the second door member 2351 is retracted with respect to the fall passage FR (closed state), the game ball B passes through the fall passage FR to the end and is above the rolling passage RR, as indicated by the dotted arrow. Fall into. Therefore, the winning of the second variable winning opening 235 is missed without passing through the ball detection sensor 2352. The rolling passage RR is connected to an out port 240 provided at the lowermost portion of the inner rail 204.

Further, as will be described in detail later, an upper extending portion UJ1 (see FIG. 120) having a function of preventing the falling game ball B from rebounding is provided on the upper surface of the second door member 2351. However, if the game ball falls on the upper surface of the second door member 2351 at the timing when the second door member 2351 starts to retreat from the advanced state (open state), the second door member 2351 starts to retreat. Even if there is a so-called irregular game ball that spins on the game ball and pops out toward the ball detection sensor 2352 without hitting the upper extending portion UJ1, the winning blocking protrusion 2351a and the winning blocking rib 235r Winning to the second variable winning opening 235 is blocked. The winning blocking protrusion 2351a is a protrusion protruding toward the front side at the end portion of the second door member 2351 on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball. The winning blocking protrusion 2351a protrudes in front of the ball detection sensor 2352 even when the second door member 2351 is completely retracted (maximum retracted position) (see FIG. 120 (b)). Therefore, even if there is an irregular game ball that has popped out toward the second variable winning opening 235, the game ball collides with the winning blocking protrusion 2351a and cannot pass through the ball detection sensor 2352 and rolls. It falls on the passage RR. The winning blocking rib 235r is a vertical rib located on the winning blocking protrusion 2351a in the second door member 2351 at the maximum retracted position (see FIG. 120 (b)). The irregular game ball that jumped out toward the second variable winning opening 235 collided with the winning blocking rib 235r and could not pass through the ball detection sensor 2352 as in the case of colliding with the winning blocking protrusion 2351a. , It may fall on the rolling passage RR.

FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining measures for preventing the game ball that has fallen in the fall passage FR from bouncing back.

FIG. 120 (a) is a view showing the downstream side portion of the attacker unit 25'shown in FIG. 119 from the back side. That is, it is a view of the downstream side portion of the front wall 25F of the attacker unit 25'viewed from the back side. Therefore, the front side of the figure is the back side (rear side) and the back side is the front side.

The drop passage FR is provided between the front wall 25F and the rear wall 25B (see FIG. 120 (b)) (not shown), and is a passage leading to the rolling passage RR. In FIG. 120, it is a gray portion extending from diagonally upper left to diagonally lower right. Note that FIG. 120 (a) shows the upstream side connecting side walls FR1 and FR2 connecting the front wall 25F and the rear wall 25B (not shown) that define the fall passage FR.

Further, in FIG. 120 (a), both the first door member 2341 and the second door member 2351 are shown by dotted lines. Both the first door member 2341 and the second door member 2351 advance from a predetermined rear position (maximum retreat position) on the rear wall 25B side to a predetermined front position (maximum advance position) in the ball passage. .. The game ball B1 which rolls the upper surface 2341U of the first door member 2341 and is guided by the upper end R portion FR2r of the upstream side connecting side wall FR2, which is shown in FIG. 120A, enters the fall passage FR and starts falling. do.

As shown in FIG. 120 (a), the drop passage FR is provided with a rib SDR for deceleration. In this figure, the deceleration rib SDR provided on the front wall 25F is represented by a solid line, and the deceleration rib SDR provided on the rear wall 25B (not shown) is represented by a dotted line. Due to these deceleration ribs SDR, the game ball falling in the fall passage FR meanders in the front-rear direction and falls, and the momentum of the fall is weakened.

When the second door member 2351 advances forward, the upstream portion of the second door member 2351 in the ball passage direction is in a state of blocking the middle of the downstream side of the fall passage FR, and the game has fallen halfway through the fall passage FR. The ball B2 collides with the upper surface 2351U of the second door member 2351. The front wall 25F is provided with a U-shaped ridge UJ projecting rearward. The U-shaped ridge UJ has an upper extending portion UJ1 extending along the second door member 2351 at a position above the second door member 2351 advancing to the front position.

FIG. 120 (b) is an enlarged view of the BB'cross section shown in FIG. 120 (a). In FIG. 120 (b), the right side is the front side and the left side is the rear side.

FIG. 120 (b) shows the front wall 25F and the rear wall 25B. Further, the second door member 2351 retracted to the maximum retracted position is shown by a solid line, and the second door member 2351 advanced to the maximum advanced position is indicated by a two-dot chain line. In the second door member 2351, only the portion on the upstream side in the ball passage direction advances into the fall passage FR, but the entire second door member 2351 may advance into the fall passage FR. Alternatively, although the second door member 2351 moves back and forth in a linear motion, at least a part of the second door member 2351 may appear and disappear in the fall passage FR by rotating.

The upper extending portion UJ1 protrudes rearward from the upper surface 2351U of the second door member 2351 that has advanced to the maximum advance position at a height position equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball. When the game ball B2 that has fallen halfway through the fall passage FR and collided with the upper surface 2351U of the second door member 2351 bounces off the upper surface 2351U, it hits the upper extending portion UJ1 and the bounce may be suppressed. Further, as shown in FIG. 120 (a), the upper extending portion UJ1 extends in the longitudinal direction (ball passing direction) of the advanced second door member 2351, and is the upper surface 2351U of the second door member 2351. If the game ball B3 that rolls on the door comes into contact with the upper extending portion UJ1, it also has a function of guiding the game ball B3.

Further, the U-shaped ridge UJ has a lower extending portion UJ2 extending along the rolling passage RR at a position below the maximum advancing position of the second door member 2351. The lower extending portion UJ2 protrudes rearward from the bottom surface RR1 of the rolling passage RR at a height position equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball. In the state where the second door member 2351 is located at the maximum retracted position, the fall passage FR is not blocked by a part of the second door member 2351, and the game ball that has fallen through the fall passage FR passes the fall passage FR. It passes to the end and falls on the bottom surface RR1 of the rolling passage RR. When the game ball B4 that has fallen on the bottom surface RR1 of the rolling passage RR bounces off (especially when it bounces diagonally toward the front side), the game ball B4 hits the lower extending portion UJ2 and bounces off. It may be suppressed. Further, as shown in FIG. 120 (a), the lower extending portion UJ2 extends in the extending direction of the rolling passage RR, and the game ball B4 rolling on the rolling passage RR extends in the lower extending portion. When it comes into contact with the UJ2, it also has a function of guiding the game ball B4.

Further, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), the rear wall 25B has a ball bounce suppressing ridge portion extending along the rolling passage RR at a position below the maximum advance position of the second door member 2351. JJ is also provided. The ball bounce suppressing ridge portion JJ protrudes forward from the bottom surface RR1 of the rolling passage RR at a height position equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. When the game ball B4 that has fallen on the rolling passage RR bounces off (especially when it bounces toward the rear side), the game ball B4 may hit the ball bounce prevention ridge JJ and bounces off. Is suppressed. In this attacker unit 25', the game ball that has fallen in the fall passage FR hits the bottom surface RR1 of the rolling passage RR and bounces upward to win a prize in the second variable winning opening 235 (passing through the ball detection sensor 2352). Winning is suppressed by the ball bounce prevention ridge JJ and the lower extension UJ2.

The front wall 25F is also provided with a guide ridge GJ protruding rearward at a position corresponding to an intermediate portion of the fall passage FR. The guide ridge GJ has a linear shape extending in the extending direction of the fall passage FR, and its lower end is connected to the U-shaped ridge portion UJ. The game ball that has begun to fall in the fall passage FR may be weakened by the above-mentioned deceleration rib SDR, and then may come into contact with the guide ridge GJ. The game ball that comes into contact with the guide ridge GJ is guided in the extending direction of the guide ridge GJ, and if the second door member 2351 is in the advanced state, it gets on the upper surface 2351U of the second door member 2351 and is second. If the door member 2351 is retracted, it falls to the rolling passage RR.

In addition, the attacker unit 25'is provided with an arc-shaped detour passage DR in the direction opposite to the ball passing direction of the second door member 2351 that has advanced to the maximum advance position. This arc-shaped detour passage DR is a passage that branches from the middle of the fall passage FR and is connected to the upstream end of the rolling passage RR, and is formed by the arc-shaped connecting side wall ARW connected to the lower end of the upstream connecting side wall FR2. Has been done. For example, when the game balls fall together on the second door member 2351 that has advanced to the maximum advance position, the game balls collide with each other and the game balls are flipped in the direction opposite to the ball passing direction. In some cases. The game ball flipped to the opposite side falls from the second door member 2351 (see arrow D in the figure) and enters the detour passage DR. If the detour passage DR is not provided, the game ball bounced on the opposite side may be clogged at the upstream end of the second door member 2351 in the ball passing direction, which may hinder the advance / retreat operation of the second door member 2351. However, since the detour passage DR is provided, the game ball can escape and there is no concern about ball clogging, and the second door member 2351 can smoothly repeat the advance / retreat operation.

The U-shaped ridge UJ also has an arcuate portion UJ3 curved along this arcuate detour passage DR. The game ball that has entered the detour passage DR may come into contact with the arcuate portion UJ3. The game ball in contact with the arc-shaped portion UJ3 is guided by the arc-shaped portion UJ3 and reaches the rolling passage RR.

Further, FIG. 120 shows an escape opening 25F provided in the front wall 25F. In the escape opening 25Fa shown in FIG. 120 (b), a winning prevention protrusion 2351a projecting to the front side of the second door member 2351 shown by a two-dot chain line is inserted. The escape opening 25Fa is a space in which the winning prevention protrusion 2351a projecting to the front side is stored when the second door member 2351 advances to the maximum advance position. The tip of the winning blocking protrusion 2351a does not protrude further forward from the escape opening 25F, and when a decorative sticker is attached to the front wall 25F, the decorative seal makes the presence of the winning blocking protrusion 2351a invisible to the player. .. However, it is also possible to provide an opening in the decorative seal so that the tip of the winning blocking protrusion 2351a projects further forward from the escape opening 25F, which is one of the effects.

Note that FIG. 120 (b) also shows a winning blocking rib 235r located on the winning blocking projection 2351a in the second door member 2351 at the maximum retracted position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), a gap CS is provided between the front edge of the second door member 2351 in a state of being advanced to the maximum advance position and the front wall 25F. With this gap CS, the second door member 2351 can advance from the maximum retracted position to the maximum advance position within a short time, and the protrusion length of the winning prevention projection 2351a provided on the second door member 2351 is lengthened. Even if the second door member 2351 is in the maximum retracted position, the irregular game ball protruding toward the second variable winning opening 235 will surely collide with the winning blocking protrusion 2351a. Further, since the second door member 2351 is provided with the gap CS, the second door member 2351 can be retracted from the maximum advance position within a short time. Therefore, when the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 performs an extremely short opening such as 0.06 seconds only once, the game ball rides on the upper surface 2351U of the second door member 2351. Even so, the second door member 2351 retracts before the game ball reaches the ball detection sensor 2352, preventing the game ball from winning a prize, and the winning rate can be lowered.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), the winning blocking projection 2351a protrudes forward from the rear wall 25B even when the second door member 2351 is retracted to the maximum retracted position. The amount of protrusion T1 in which the winning blocking protrusion 2351a protrudes forward from the rear wall 25B is the amount of protrusion (projection amount from the rear wall 25B) T2 in which the ball bounce suppressing protrusion JJ protrudes forward from the rear wall 25B. There are few. In addition, in order to increase the collision rate of the irregular game ball, the protrusion amount T1 may be the same as the protrusion amount T2 from the rear wall 25B, or may be larger than the protrusion amount T2. Further, the amount of protrusion T2 from the rear wall 25B is larger than the amount of protrusion T3 of the U-shaped ridge portion UJ protruding rearward from the front wall 25F (the amount of protrusion from the front wall 25F). This pachinko machine 100 is installed so as to slightly tilt toward the rear side, and since the game ball tends to approach the rear wall 25B side, the protrusion amount T2 from the rear wall 25B is larger than the protrusion amount T3 from the front wall 25F. is doing. However, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed almost vertically, both protrusion amounts T2 and T3 may be set to the same level, and conversely, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed so as to slightly tilt forward, the rear The amount of protrusion T3 from the front wall 25F may be larger than the amount of protrusion T2 from the wall 25B.

According to the above description
"Rolling passage where the game ball rolls [for example, rolling passage RR] and
A drop passage [for example, a fall passage FR] in which a game ball falls toward the rolling passage,
It is a game table equipped with
In the rolling passage, a game ball that has fallen in the falling passage rolls.
In the fall passage, a ball bounce deterrent means [for example, a ball bounce deterrent ridge portion JJ, a lower extending portion UJ2] is arranged to prevent a game ball that has fallen in the fall passage from hitting the rolling passage and bouncing upward. Is a thing,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

The game ball that has fallen down the falling passage may hit the bottom surface, or in some cases, the side surface of the rolling passage, and the game ball may bounce. However, the ball bounce deterrent means ball suppresses the bounce of the game ball. , It may be possible to prevent irregular movements of the game ball.

again,
"A movable means [for example, a second door member 2351] in which at least a part [for example, a portion on the upstream side in the ball passing direction] appears in the middle of the fall passage is provided.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the movable means may have a part appearing in the middle of the falling passage or a whole appearing. Further, at least a part of the movable means may appear by rotating in the middle of the drop passage.

again,
"The movable means constitutes the drop passage in a state where at least a part of the movable means appears in the middle of the fall passage [for example, the state of the second door member 2351 represented by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 1272 (b)]. , A gap [for example, a gap CS] is provided between the wall on the player side [for example, the front wall 25F].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

By providing the gap, the amount of movement of the movable means is reduced, and the change time appearing in the drop passage can be shortened.

The movable means moves forward and backward with respect to the fall passage, and the movable means has a gap between the movable means and the wall on the player side that constitutes the fall passage. It may be the one that advances to.

again,
"With a winning opening [for example, a second variable winning opening 235],
The winning opening is such that a game ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the movable means [for example, the upper surface 2351U of the second door member 2351] in which at least a part of the falling passage appears can win a prize.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The unexpected winning that the game ball that has fallen down the falling passage hits the bottom surface of the rolling passage and bounces upward to win a prize in the winning opening is suppressed by the ball bounce suppressing means.

again,
"The fall passage is provided between the front wall [for example, the front wall 25F] and the rear wall [for example, the rear wall 25B].
The movable means advances from a rear position [for example, a maximum retreat position] to a front position [for example, a maximum advance position], and at least a part of the movable means appears in the middle of the fall passage.
The ball bounce deterrent means has a first ball bounce deterrent portion [for example, a ball bounce deterrent ridge portion JJ] arranged on the rear wall.
The first ball bounce suppressing portion projects forward at a position downstream of the drop passage from the front position.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first ball bounce suppressing portion is arranged above the rolling passage. That is, the first ball bounce suppressing portion is arranged between the rolling passage and the front position.

again,
"The ball bouncing deterrent means has a second ball bouncing deterrent portion [for example, a lower extending portion UJ2] arranged on the front wall.
The second ball bounce suppressing portion projects rearward at a position downstream of the fall passage from the front position.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second ball bounce suppressing portion is arranged above the rolling passage. That is, the second ball bounce suppressing portion is arranged between the rolling passage and the front position.

The second ball bouncing restraining unit may be arranged on the downstream side (lower side) of the falling passage from the first ball bouncing suppressing unit.

again,
"It has a ridge that protrudes backward from the front wall.
The ridge portion is formed from the upper surface [for example, the upper surface 2351U] of the movable means [for example, the second door member 2351] that has advanced to the front position [for example, the maximum advance position] to the game ball [for example, the game ball B3]. Some are provided at a height below the diameter [for example, the upper extending portion UJ1],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the ridge portion is provided above the movable means that has advanced to the front position. The ridge portion may function as a ball bouncing deterrent means for suppressing the game ball that has fallen in the falling passage from hitting the movable means and bouncing upward. In addition, the ridge portion may guide a game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the movable means that has advanced to the front position, and the game ball tends to roll on the upper surface of the movable means.

again,
"A detour passage [for example, a detour passage DR] in which a game ball can move from the upper surface of the movable means in which at least a part thereof appears in the middle of the fall passage to the rolling passage is provided.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even when a plurality of game balls are collectively dropped on the upper surface of the movable means, by providing the detour passage, it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged on the upper surface.

Subsequently, the ball passage unit connected to the attacker unit 25'shown in FIG. 119 will be described in detail.

FIG. 121 shows the ball passage unit BU in which the back ball passage 2451 for the out port, the back ball passage 2261 for the general winning opening, and the merging back ball passage JR shown in FIG. 119 are formed, and the back for the electric chew also shown in FIG. 119. It is a figure which shows the sphere passage forming member BP in which the sphere passage 2326 is formed.

A light emitting substrate LEB is fixed to the front surface of the ball passage unit BU shown in FIG. 121, and a light guide plate LGP is attached to the front side of the light emitting substrate LEB. The extending portion LGPr extending to the right side of the light guide plate LGP is in contact with the front surface of the ball passage forming member BP. The ball passage unit BU and the ball passage forming member BP are arranged on the rear side (back side) of the attacker unit 25'shown in FIG. 119.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing each of a ball passage unit BU, a ball passage forming member BP, a light emitting substrate LEB, and a light guide plate LGP.

FIG. 122 (a) shown on the left side of FIG. 122 shows a ball passage unit BU and a ball passage forming member BP. The light emitting substrate LEB is removed from the ball passage unit BU shown in FIG. 122 (a), and the light guide plate LGP is not shown in FIG. 122 (a). The ball passage unit BU is a combination of the front part BUf and the rear part (not shown), and inside, the back ball passage 2451 for the out opening, the back ball passage 2261 for the general winning opening, and the merging back ball passage JR. Is formed. The back ball passage 2451 for the out opening and the back ball passage 2261 for the general winning opening are ball passages formed in parallel, and both extend from the diagonally upper right on the upstream side to the diagonally lower left on the downstream side. .. The upstream end opening 2451a of the back ball passage 2451 for the out port is connected to an out ball discharge port (not shown) provided on the back surface of the attacker unit 25'. In the attacker unit 25'shown in FIG. 119, the out port 245 is connected to the out ball discharge port on the back surface of the attacker unit 25', and the game ball entering the out port 245 is discharged from this out ball discharge port. It enters the back ball passage for the out port 2451 from the upstream end opening 2451a. On the other hand, the upstream end opening 2261a of the back ball passage 2261 for the general winning opening is connected to a general winning ball ejection port (not shown) provided on the back surface of the attacker unit 25'. In the attacker unit 25'shown in FIG. 119, the general winning opening 226 is connected to the general winning ball ejection port on the back surface of the attacker unit 25', and the game ball entered in the general winning opening 226 is the general winning ball ejection port. It is discharged from the upstream end opening 2261a and enters the back ball passage 2261 for a general winning opening. A ball detection sensor 2262 is also shown in the back ball passage 2261 for the general winning opening shown in FIG. 122 (a).

The downstream end of the back ball passage 2451 for the out port and the downstream end of the back ball passage 2261 for the general winning opening are connected to the common confluence back ball passage JR, and the back ball passage 2451 for the out opening and the back ball passage for the general winning opening. 2261 joins at the confluence back ball passage JR. With this configuration, the ball passage unit BU can be made compact.

An opening JRa is provided in the confluence back ball passage JR. In the attacker unit 25'shown in FIG. 119, the second attacker entry port 2353 is connected to the second attacker winning ball discharge port on the back surface of the attacker unit 25', and enters the second attacker entry port 2353. The game ball is discharged from the second attacker winning ball discharge port, and enters the confluence back ball passage JR from the opening JRa. The space behind the attacker unit 25'is used efficiently.

The ball passage forming member BP is arranged on the right side of the ball passage unit BU. The ball passage forming member BP is also a combination of the front part BPf and the rear part (not shown), and the back ball passage 2326 for electric chew is formed inside. The upstream end opening 2326a of the electric chew back ball passage 2326 is connected to an electric chew winning ball discharge port (not shown) provided on the back surface of the attacker unit 25'. In the attacker unit 25'shown in FIG. 119, the electric chew entry port 2325 is connected to the electric chew winning ball discharge port on the back surface of the attacker unit 25', and the game ball entered into the electric chew entry port 2325. Is discharged from the electric chew winning ball discharge port, and enters the electric chew back ball passage 2326 from the upstream end opening 2326a.

The light emitting substrate LEB is shown in FIG. 122 (b) shown in the upper right of FIG. 122.

This light emitting board LEB is a printed circuit board PB on which a plurality of light emitting diode LEDs and LEDs'are mounted. The printed circuit board PB is provided with a vertically long oval opening PBa corresponding to both the upstream end opening 2451a of the back ball passage 2451 for the out opening and the upstream end opening 2261a of the back ball passage 2261 for the general winning opening. The light emitting diode LEDs and LEDs'are arranged along the outer peripheral edge of the printed circuit board and are arranged around the oval opening PBa. The light emitting substrate LEB shown in FIG. 122B is screwed to the ball passage unit BU in a state of being in surface contact with the front surface BU1 of the ball passage unit BU shown in FIG. 122A. By fixing the light emitting substrate LEB to the ball passage unit BU in this way, the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 can be made compact. Further, when the game ball passes through the back ball passage 2451 for the out opening and the back ball passage 2261 for the general winning opening, an air flow is generated in the ball passage, and the light emitting substrate LEB is air-cooled. Moreover, by using the two ball passages, the cooling efficiency is improved as compared with the case where one ball passage is used. Further, since both of the two ball passages are arranged diagonally, the contact area is increased, and the cooling efficiency is also improved in this respect. In addition, since the out opening 245 and the general winning opening 226 are easy to enter, many game balls pass through these ball passages, and the light emitting substrate LEB is easily cooled.

The light guide plate LGP is shown in FIG. 122 (c) shown in the lower right of FIG. 122.

The light guide plate LGP has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. Light is incident on the light guide plate LGP from the side, and the incident light is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmitted region appears to emit light in a predetermined pattern. The light guide plate LGP shown in FIG. 122 (c) is placed on the light emitting substrate LEB shown in FIG. 122 (b). The light guide plate LGP is provided with notches NC and through holes TH at the positions of the plurality of light emitting diode LEDs and LEDs'arranged on the light emitting substrate LEB. The plurality of light emitting diode LEDs, LED'shown in FIG. 122 (b) emit light from the side surface. The light guide plate LGP is provided with an opening LGPa corresponding to the upstream end opening 2451a of the back ball passage 2451 for the out port and an opening LGPb corresponding to the upstream end opening 2261a of the back ball passage 2261 for the general winning opening. ing.

Further, the light guide plate LGP shown in FIG. 122 (c) has an extended right side portion. That is, the extending portion LGPr is provided on the right side of the light emitting diode LED located on the right side of the openings LGPa and LGPb. This extending portion LGPr becomes a portion that comes into surface contact with the front surface BP1 of the ball passage forming member BP shown in FIG. When the game ball passes through the back ball passage 2326 for electric chew formed inside the ball passage forming member BP, an air flow is generated in the ball passage, the light guide plate LGP is air-cooled, and the light guide plate LGP is used. As a result, the light emitting substrate LEB in contact is also cooled.

The ball passage unit BU arranged on the rear side of the attacker unit 25'sees through the transparent portion when a part or all of the attacker unit 25' is transparent, but the light emitting substrate LEB is arranged on the front side. By being there, the ball passage unit BU can be hidden. The light emitting substrate LEB is covered with a light guide plate LGP, and the light emitting diode LED is exposed from the notch NC and the through hole TH, but it is inconspicuous in the extinguished state and is in phase with the light emission in the transmission region in the light emitting state. It becomes a part of the decoration. The attacker unit 25'is illuminated from the back side by emitting light from the light emitting diode LED, LED'. Further, the light emitting diode LEDs'arranged on the lower edge below the oval opening PBa provided in the light emitting substrate LEB have a positional relationship arranged near the back side of the first variable winning opening 234, and these By emitting light from the light emitting diode LED', the first variable winning opening 234 is illuminated from the back side.

According to the above description
"A light emitting board [for example, a light emitting board LEB] on which a light emitting element [for example, a light emitting diode LED, LED'] is mounted, and
A ball passage unit [for example, a ball passage unit BU] in which a ball passage through which a game ball passes [for example, a back ball passage 2451 for an out opening, a back ball passage 2261 for a general winning opening, and a merging back ball passage JR] is formed.
It is a game table equipped with
The light emitting substrate is fixed to the ball passage unit [for example, screwed in a state of surface contact].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, the configuration of the game table can be made compact, and the light emitting substrate is air-cooled by the game ball passing through the ball passage in the ball passage unit.

The ball passage unit may be provided on the back surface side of the game board. Further, the light emitting substrate may be fixed to the ball passage unit in a state of being in surface contact with the ball passage unit. By doing so, the air-cooling effect of the light emitting substrate by the game ball passing through the ball passage is enhanced. Further, the ball passage unit may have a ball passage extending diagonally with respect to the fixed light emitting substrate. The contact area of the ball passage with the light emitting substrate is increased, and the cooling efficiency is improved.

again,
"The light emitting substrate is fixed to the front side of the ball passage unit.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The ball passage unit can be hidden by the light emitting substrate.

again,
"Equipped with a first entry slot [for example, general winning slot 226] provided in the game area,
The ball passage unit is formed with a ball passage [for example, a back ball passage for a general winning opening 2261] through which a game ball entering the first entrance is passed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The light emitting substrate is air-cooled by the game ball that has entered the first ball entry port.

The first entrance may be an out opening or a general winning opening. That is, the frequency of entering balls is low at the starting opening and the variable winning opening that opens at the time of a big hit, and the number of game balls passing through the ball passage is small, so that the air cooling effect cannot be expected so much. The frequency of entering balls is higher than that of the starting opening and the winning opening that opens at the time of a big hit, and the number of game balls passing through the ball passage is large, so that an air cooling effect can be expected.

again,
"A second entry port [for example, out opening 245] provided in the game area is provided.
In the ball passage unit, a first ball passage [for example, a back ball passage for a general winning opening 2261] through which a game ball entering the first entry opening [for example, a general winning opening 226] passes is formed. And
The ball passage unit is formed with a second ball passage [for example, a back ball passage for an out opening 2451] through which a game ball entering the second entrance is passed.
The ball passage unit is formed by forming the first ball passage and the second ball passage in parallel.
The light emitting substrate is fixed to the ball passage unit in a state of being in contact with the portion of the first ball passage and the portion of the second ball passage in the ball passage unit.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The light emitting substrate is air-cooled by the two spherical passages, and the cooling of the light emitting substrate is further promoted.

The second entrance may be an out opening or a general winning opening.

again,
"The ball passage unit has a third ball passage [for example, a confluence back ball passage JR] formed therein.
The third ball passage is for a game ball that has passed through the first ball passage.
The third ball passage also passes a game ball that has passed through the second ball passage.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first ball passage and the second ball passage meet at the third ball passage.

By doing so, the ball passage unit can be made compact.

again,
"A winning opening unit [for example, an attacker unit 25'] provided with a winning opening is provided.
The winning opening unit is arranged in front of the light emitting substrate.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The winning opening unit can be illuminated by the light emitting element.

again,
"With a variable winning opening [for example, the second variable winning opening 235],
The third ball passage is for the game ball that has won a prize to the variable winning opening.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The space on the back side of the winning opening unit can be efficiently used.

Subsequently, an example that can be applied to the left side area of the game area 124 will be described.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a part of the left side region of the game region 124.

In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 88, the first area 1241 and the second area 1242 are provided in the left side area of the game area 124, and the distribution front area 125 composed of the game nail 238 is located downstream of the first area 1241 and the second area 1242. An electric distribution unit 26 is provided, and an electric distribution unit 26 is arranged further downstream thereof. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 123, a high chance region 1242H (dark gray region) is provided in place of the second region 1242, and a low chance region 1241L (light gray region) is provided in place of the first region 1241. .. Although the details will be described later, the high chance region 1242H is a region in which the player tends to be more advantageous than the low chance region 1241L.

When the game ball is hit to the left, the game ball advances from the high chance area 1242H or the low chance area 1241L to the left side area. The high chance region 1242H and the low chance region 1241L are adjacent regions, and the high chance region 1242H is on the downstream side in the launch direction of the ball. That is, the high chance region 1242H is a region farther from the return ball prevention piece 203 than the low chance region 1241L. Therefore, when aiming at the high chance region 1242H, the player needs to launch the game ball with a strong firing intensity by increasing the amount of operation of the ball launching handle 134 as compared with the case of aiming at the low chance region 1241L. However, if the amount of operation is too large, the firing intensity may become too strong and the game ball may advance to the right side region.

The high chance region 1242H and the low chance region 1241L are defined as regions partitioned by the walls Wa1 to Wa4, while the high chance region 1242H is defined as a region partitioned by the game nail 138 on the upstream side thereof and is a low chance region. 1241L may be a region partitioned by the game nail 138 and the attachment portion 2031 of the return ball prevention piece 203. In this case, it is necessary to prevent the game ball from spilling out of the area between the game nails 138 after the game ball has entered the high chance area 1242H or the low chance area 1241L. The player can aim at the high chance area 1242H only by adjusting the operation amount of the ball launching handle 134 without being affected by the game nail 138.

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the flow of a game ball as a result of hitting left in the example shown in FIG. 123. Hereinafter, the description will be continued with reference to FIG. 124 as well as FIG. 123.

In this example, the distribution front region 125 composed of the game nail 238 does not exist, and the game ball that has entered the high chance region 1242H is 100 in the electric distribution zone 26Z provided in place of the electric distribution unit 26. %move on. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the low chance area 1241L advances 100% to the first ball route Rt1.

A zone entrance ball delay portion 2650 (see FIG. 123) is provided near the entrance of the ball path (hereinafter referred to as zone ball path 26Z1) in the electric distribution zone 26Z. The configuration of the zone ball path 26Z1 on the downstream side of the zone entrance ball delay portion 2650 is the same as the configuration of the first ball path 2601 shown in FIG. 88 and the like. That is, in the zone ball path 26Z1, from the upstream side, the zone entrance ball delay part 2650, the first upstream ball delay part 2651, the third ball direction change part 263, the first downstream ball delay part 2652, and the first ball direction change. A section 261 is provided.

The zone entrance ball delay portion 2650, the first upstream ball delay portion 2651, and the first downstream ball delay portion 2652 are provided in the vertical ball path portion, and the moving speed of the game ball tends to be high. It is provided in a place. The zone entrance ball delay portion 2650 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball that has passed through the high chance region 1242H and entered the electric distribution zone 26Z. Further, the first upstream ball delay section 2651 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball toward the third ball direction change section 263, and the first downstream ball delay section 2652 is for the first ball direction change section 261. This is to reduce the moving speed of the game ball toward. These three ball delay portions (2650, 2651, 652) are as described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 108, and although detailed description thereof will be omitted, the game is played by changing the movement of the game ball. It is a means that can slow down the moving speed of the ball. That is, regardless of whether the zone entrance ball delay portion 2650, the first upstream ball delay portion 2651, or the first downstream ball delay portion 2652, the portion through which the game ball passes is the diameter on the downstream side of the diameter on the upstream side. Is composed of a shorter inverted conical surface, and the game ball passing through the inverted conical surface moves in a spiral shape toward the downstream side (see FIG. 106 (b)). The game ball moves in a spiral shape rather than falling straight, so that the moving distance becomes longer, and as a result, the moving speed decreases.

Further, the zone ball path 26Z1 is provided with a plurality of deceleration ribs 26r1 protruding forward. The game ball passing through the deceleration rib 26r1 swings in the front-rear direction, so that the moving distance becomes long, and as a result, the moving speed decreases. Since the deceleration rib 26r1 is arranged on both the upstream side and the downstream side of the first upstream ball delay portion 2651, the deceleration rib 26r1, the ball delay portion having an inverted conical surface, and the deceleration rib 26r1 are arranged in this order. It will be done. It should be noted that two types of ball delay means, such as a deceleration rib 26r1 and a ball delay portion having an inverted conical surface, may be provided so as to repeat the arrangement in this order a plurality of times. Further, three deceleration ribs 26r1 are provided between the zone entrance ball delay portion 2650 and the first upstream ball delay portion 2651. The three deceleration ribs 26r1 are combined into one, and the ball delay has an inverted conical surface. The ball delay means may be arranged in the order of the portion, the deceleration rib 26r1, and the ball delay portion having an inverted conical surface, and further, two types of ball delay means may be arranged so as to repeat the arrangement in this order a plurality of times. It may be provided.

Further, in the zone ball path 26Z1, a ball trajectory changing rib 26r3 projecting forward is also provided on the upstream side of the first downstream ball delay portion 2652. Of the zone sphere path 26Z1, the portion where the sphere trajectory changing rib 26r3 is provided is a curved passage facing the left side, and the sphere trajectory changing rib 26r3 is located at the central portion in the width direction of this passage along this passage. Is provided. The shape of the spherical trajectory changing rib 26r3 is also a curved shape. The game ball passing through the ball trajectory changing rib 26r3 also swings in the front-rear direction, so that the moving distance becomes longer, and as a result, the moving speed decreases.

The third ball direction changing unit 263 has a direction changing member 2631 and a motor (not shown), and the first ball direction changing unit 261 has a direction changing member 2611 and a motor (not shown). Both the third ball direction changing section 263 and the first ball direction changing section 261 are as described above, and although detailed description is omitted, the route toward the game ball is changed by changing the state. be. That is, to outline the third sphere direction changing portion 263 as an example, the direction changing member 2631 is rotated by a motor (not shown), so that the state of the right-facing posture shown in FIG. 123 and the opposite left Change the state between the state of the facing posture and the state. When the direction changing member 2631 is in the rightward posture shown in FIG. 123, the game ball is directed to the second ball route Rt2 toward the lower right. This second ball route Rt2 is a part of the zone ball route 26Z1. The game ball will continue to move along the zone ball path 26Z1 toward the first downstream ball delay portion 2652 through the second ball route Rt2.

On the other hand, when the direction changing member 2631 is in the leftward posture, the game ball is directed to the third ball route Rt3 toward the lower left. This third ball route Rt3 is also a part of the zone ball route 26Z1, and the third ball route Rt3 joins in the middle of the first ball route Rt1 continuing from the low chance region 1241L. The game ball directed to the third ball route Rt3 by the direction changing member 2631 in the left-facing posture deviates from the zone ball path 26Z1 and enters the first ball route Rt1.

The direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing portion 261 shown in FIG. 123 is also in a rightward posture, and the game ball reaching the first ball direction changing portion 261 in this state flows down toward the lower right. .. A first guide port 2613 is opened at the lower right of the first ball direction changing portion 261, and the game ball is guided to the back side of the game plate 201 through the first guide port 2613 and is a first ball passage. Enter 2681 (see also FIGS. 88 and 89, etc.). The game ball that has entered the first ball passage 2681 is guided to the rotating body unit 28. The first ball passage 2681 and the rotating body unit 28 are as described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, the game ball guided to the rotating body unit 28 through the first ball passage 2681 is a rotating rotating body. Depending on the timing of falling to the unit 28, it may be directed to the first special drawing start port 230 shown in FIG. 87 (c), or it may be discharged from the rotating body unit 28 and finally reach the out port 240. Even when the rotating body unit 28 heads toward the first special figure starting port 230, the ball does not always enter the first special figure starting port 230 and spills to the outside due to the trouble of the first special figure starting port 230. Finally, it may reach the out port 240. Therefore, when the direction changing member 2631 in the third ball direction changing portion 263 is in the state of the rightward posture shown in FIG. 123, the game ball may or may not enter the first special figure starting port 230. It means that it was directed to the second ball route Rt2 toward.

On the other hand, when the direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing portion 261 is in the left facing posture, the game ball flows down toward the lower left. An out port 241 is provided at the lower left of the first ball direction changing portion 261, and the game ball that has entered the out port 241 passes through the path 2604 shown in FIG. 89 and is finally discharged to the game island side. To.

In this example, the first ball direction change unit 261 distributes to the first ball passage 2681, but the rotating body unit 28 heads to the first special figure starting port 230 with a 100% probability. It may be configured to be distributed to the second ball passage 2682 (see FIG. 89 and the like). However, even in this case, it is not always the case that the ball enters the first special figure starting port 230.

In the zone sphere path 26Z1 in the electric distribution zone 26Z described above, the sphere delay portion having an inverted conical surface (zone entrance sphere delay portion 2650, first upstream sphere delay portion 2651, first downstream sphere delay portion 2652) and deceleration. Three types of ball delay means such as a rib 26r1 and a ball trajectory changing rib 26r3 are provided. Further, the third ball direction changing portion 263 arranged in the zone ball path 26Z1 distributes the game ball to the second ball route Rt2 which is advantageous to the player and the third ball route Rt3 which is disadvantageous to the player. It corresponds to a movable means in which the advantage of the player may change depending on the timing at which the game ball arrives. Aiming at the game ball that has come to the front of the third ball direction change portion 263, the transparent plate member 118 shown in FIG. 85 is hit, and the timing at which the game ball reaches the third ball direction change portion 263 is set by the second ball route. In some cases, a fraudulent act (so-called slapstick goto) that attempts to match the direction changing member 2631 that is distributed to Rt2 when the direction changing member 2631 is in the right-facing posture may be performed. However, since two types of ball delay means are provided upstream of the third ball direction changing portion 263, different delays are performed by the two types of ball delay means, and the fraudster can use the transparent plate member 118. The timing of adjusting the angle by hitting is out of order, and there is no point in doing a rushing goto. Further, the delay time is often different between the two types of ball delay means, and it becomes difficult to adjust the timing when the direction changing member 2631 is in the right-facing posture. Further, the first ball direction changing portion 261 arranged in the zone ball path 26Z1 is also advantageous to the player, and is disadvantageous to the player as well as the first guide port 2613 for directing the game ball to the first special figure starting port 230. The game ball is distributed to the out port 241 and corresponds to a movable means in which the advantage of the player may change depending on the timing at which the game ball arrives. Therefore, there may be a case where a rushing goto is performed aiming at a game ball that has come to the front of the first ball direction changing portion 261. In addition, the rotating body unit 28, which may be reached by a game ball that has passed through the zone ball path 26Z1, is also in a state where it can enter the first special figure start port 230 by rotating, and the entry of the ball is Since the state is changed from the impossible state, it corresponds to the movable means in which the advantage of the player may change depending on the timing when the game ball arrives. Therefore, in anticipation of the arrival timing of the game ball to the rotating body unit 28, a roaring goto may be performed aiming at the game ball that has come to the front of the first ball direction changing portion 261. However, since three types of ball delay means are provided upstream of the first ball direction changing portion 261, different delays are performed by the three types of ball delay means, and the rushing goto is also performed here. It makes no sense. Moreover, the delay times of the three types of ball delay means are often different, and it is extremely difficult to adjust the timing when the direction changing member 2611 is in the right-facing posture.

Subsequently, the first ball route Rt1 continuing from the low chance region 1241L will be described. As shown in FIG. 123, the first ball route Rt1 is provided with two types of ball delay means. One is a rib that extends in the width direction of the first ball route Rt1 and protrudes forward, which is the same as the deceleration rib SDR provided in the attacker unit 25'. In the first ball route Rt1, rib SDRs for deceleration are provided at predetermined intervals in the passing direction of the game ball. The game ball passing through these ribs SDR swings in the front-rear direction as in the case of passing through the deceleration rib 26r1, so that the moving distance becomes longer, and as a result, the moving speed decreases. Another ball delaying means is the deceleration protrusions GT1 to GT4 protruding in the width direction of the first ball route Rt1. The game ball passing through the deceleration protrusions GT1 to GT4 swings in the width direction (left-right direction), so that the moving distance becomes longer, and as a result, the moving speed decreases. On the first ball route Rt1, ball delay means are arranged in the order of the deceleration protrusion GT2, the deceleration rib SDR, and the deceleration protrusion GT3. Two types of ball delay means may be provided so as to repeat the arrangement in this order a plurality of times. Further, since the deceleration rib SDR is arranged on both the upstream side and the downstream side of the deceleration protrusion GT4, the ball delay means is also in the order of the deceleration rib SDR, the deceleration protrusion GT4, and the deceleration rib SDR. Is placed. It should be noted that two types of ball delay means may be provided so that the arrangement in this order is also repeated a plurality of times.

Further, unlike the third ball route 2603 shown in FIG. 88, the first ball route Rt1 is not provided with the general winning opening 227 or the effect switch 269, and is a route that the game ball simply passes through. .. The game ball that has entered the first ball route Rt1 is always discharged from the downstream end Rt1e of the first ball route Rt1 to the area where the plurality of game nails 238 are provided. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the zone ball path 26Z1 is not discharged from the zone ball path 26Z1 to the area where the plurality of game nails 238 are provided.

Neither the electric distribution zone 26Z described above nor the first ball route Rt1 is provided with a game nail.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing the space between the downstream end Rt1e of the first ball route Rt1 and the out port 240.

A part of the transparent game board 201 is interposed between the downstream end Rt1e of the first ball route Rt1 and the out port 240, and a plurality of game nails 238 are provided therein. Further, a ball passage unit 226U for a general winning opening is arranged. The general winning opening ball passage unit 226U includes an extended ball passage 226U1 extending toward the downstream end Rt1e side of the first ball route Rt1, a roof portion 226U2, a winning opening opening plate 226U3, and a pocket portion 226U4. It has a transparent plate 226U5. A game nail 238 is provided so that the game ball Ba discharged from the downstream end Rt1e of the first ball route Rt1 can flow down toward the tip portion of the extended ball passage 226U1. However, some of the game balls discharged from the downstream end Rt1e are hit by the game nail 238 before reaching the tip of the extended ball passage 226U1, and the trajectory deviates and falls downward like the game ball Bb. There is also a game ball, such as a game ball Bc, that goes over the roof portion 226U2 and heads toward the out port 240. The extending ball passage 226U1 is inclined downward from the tip portion toward the entrance IN of the internal ball passage 226Ur described later, and the game ball Bd reaching the tip portion of the extending ball passage 226U1 is extended due to the inclination. Roll the ball passage 226U1 toward the entrance IN of the inner ball passage 226Ur.

FIG. 125 (b) is a view when the roof portion 226U2, the winning opening opening plate 226U3, and the pocket portion 226U4 are viewed from the extending ball passage 226U1 side. In FIG. 125 (b), the transparent plate 226U5 arranged on the front side is not shown. In FIG. 125 (b), the extending ball passage 226U1 is not shown, the left side surface is shown, the right side of the figure is the front side, and the left side is the rear side.

A first general winning opening 226A and a second general winning opening 226B are arranged in the internal ball passage 226Ur of the general winning opening ball passage unit 226U. The internal ball passage 226Ur is a passage connected from the extended ball passage 226U1 and extends directly downward, and the entrance IN at the upstream end is a connection point with the extended ball passage 226U1. On the upstream side of the internal ball passage 226Ur, the winning opening opening plate 226U3 is erected in a posture inclined backward. The winning opening opening plate 226U3 is provided with a first general winning opening 226A that opens toward the rear, and has a compact structure. Further, a pocket portion 226U4 is arranged on the downstream side of the internal ball passage 226Ur, and the pocket portion 226U4 is provided with a second general winning opening 226B which is open toward the bottom. Further, out openings 226Uo are provided on both the left and right sides between the upstream side and the downstream side of the internal ball passage 226Ur. The game ball that has entered the internal ball passage 226Ur may win a prize in the first general winning opening 226A that opens in the front-rear direction (see the arrow Bi shown in FIG. 125 (b)), or in the first general winning opening 226A. In some cases, the player does not win a prize and jumps out of the left and right out openings 226Uo like the game ball Be and the game ball Bf shown in FIG. 125 (a) (see the arrow Bii shown in FIG. be. On the other hand, the game ball that does not jump out from the out opening 226Uo always wins the second general winning opening 226B (see the arrow Bii shown in FIG. 125 (b)). Both the ball that has won the first general winning opening 226A and the ball that has won the second general winning opening 226B are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

As described above, the game ball that has passed through the low chance region 1241L passes through the first ball route Rt1 and then wins the first general winning opening 226A, wins the second general winning opening 226B, or goes out. The result is either toward the mouth 240, and unlike the game ball that has passed through the high chance region 1242H, it does not reach the first special figure starting mouth 230.

Both the first general winning opening 226A and the second general winning opening 226B are general winning openings, the number of prize balls is the same, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls are paid out regardless of which one is won. .. Therefore, it can be expected that the game ball that has not won the first general winning opening 226A on the upstream side will win the second general winning opening 226B on the downstream side having the same number of prize balls. Further, since the first general winning opening 226A is a general winning opening opened in the front-rear direction, while the second general winning opening 226B is a general winning opening opened in the vertical direction, the opening direction of the winning opening is Due to the difference, the second general winning opening 226B is inevitably easier to win than the first general winning opening 226A. A player who knows this can not be discouraged even if he / she does not win the first general winning opening 226A, and can wait with expectation for winning the second general winning opening 226B.

In the ball passage unit 226U for the general winning opening, only the game ball that has passed through the common area such as the entrance IN of the internal ball passage 226Ur is the general one of the first general winning opening 226A and the second general winning opening 226B. It is possible to win a prize at the winning opening. That is, the ball passage can be made more compact than the one in which the entrance and the winning opening have a one-to-two relationship and the entrance and the winning opening have a one-to-one relationship. Further, even if the player does not win the first general winning opening 226A, the player can be expected to win the second general winning opening 226B. Further, a plurality of game nails 238 are provided between the downstream end Rt1e of the first ball route Rt1 and the tip end portion of the extended ball passage 226U1, and in which direction the game ball is affected by the influence of these game nails 238. The player may be worried whether he is heading, but the ball passage unit 226U for the general winning opening is not provided with a game nail, and if the game ball reaches even the internal ball passage 226Ur, the game nail There is no need to worry about the effects, and the player can enjoy the whereabouts of the game ball with confidence.

As shown in FIG. 125A, the transparent plate 226U5 (not shown in FIG. 125B) is arranged so as to cover the first general winning opening 226A, the out opening 226Uo, and the second general winning opening 226B from the front. It is a transparent member. Therefore, the player can visually recognize how the game ball wins the first general winning opening 226A and how it pops out from the out opening 226Uo. In addition, the player can visually recognize how the game ball disappears into the second general winning opening 226B. The transparent plate 226U5 may be translucent as long as it can be transmitted.

As described above, the high chance region 1242H is a region where the game ball may head toward the first special figure start port 230, and if the game ball does not pass through the high chance region 1242H, the first special figure It is not possible to reach the starting port 230. Therefore, it can be said that the high chance region 1242H is a region provided on the upstream side of the first special figure start port 230. Further, the second ball route Rt2 is also a route in which the game ball may head toward the first special figure start port 230, and if it is not a game ball that has passed through the second ball route Rt2, the first special figure start port You cannot reach 230. On the other hand, the low chance region 1241L is an region in which the possibility that the game ball heads for the first special figure starting port 230 is 0%. Further, the third ball route Rt3 is also a route in which the possibility that the game ball heads for the first special figure starting port 230 is 0%. Therefore, even if the passage to the high chance region 1242H is successful, the distribution of the game balls in the third ball direction changing unit 263 to be distributed to the second ball route Rt2 and the third ball route Rt3 is important, and the game is played. The interest of the game is improved depending on whether or not the ball heads for the second ball route Rt2. The game ball that has passed through the low chance area 1241L and the game ball that has passed through the third ball route Rt3 do not have a 100% probability of entering the out opening 240, and the first general winning opening 226A or the first general winning opening 226A or the first. 2 There is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 226B.

The high chance area 1242H and the low chance area 1241L can be separated, and the player can be concentrated so that the game ball heads toward the high chance area 1242H. That is, the player can aim at the high chance area 1242H by adjusting the operation amount of the ball launch handle 134, and can concentrate the player on the high chance area 1242H aiming. Further, since the high chance area 1242H and the low chance area 1241L are in the same left side area of the game area 124, the player does not have to simply hit the left side, but hits the left side aiming at the high chance area 1242H. It must be done, which may improve the interest of the game. Further, since the high chance region 1242H and the low chance region 1241L are adjacent regions, the player may need to finely adjust the amount of operation of the ball launching handle 134, and may be able to enjoy the adjustment.

Further, since the electric distribution zone 26Z is not provided with a game nail, the player can launch the game ball into the high chance area 1242H without considering the state of the game nail, and the third ball. Depending on the state of the direction changing portion 263 and the state of the first ball direction changing portion 261, it is possible to expect the ball to enter the first special figure starting port 230, and the player's willingness to play is likely to increase. Further, when selecting the game table, it is not necessary to consider the state of the game nail, and the player can concentrate on estimating the set value of the game table.

The above description with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125 and the description with reference to FIGS. 85 to 109 can be appropriately combined.

According to the above description
"A launching means for launching a game ball with a firing intensity according to the amount of operation of the player [for example, a launching device 110],
Out port [for example, out port 240] and
Starting port [for example, first special drawing starting port 230],
It is a game table equipped with
A first region [for example, a low chance region 1241L] provided on the upstream side of the out port, and
A second region [for example, a high chance region 1242H] provided on the upstream side of the starting port, and
Equipped with
The out port is used when the game ball that has passed through the first area arrives [for example, when the player does not get on the extended ball passage 226U1 after passing through the first ball route Rt1 or at the first general winning opening 226A. If you do not win], there is
The starting port may be reached by a game ball that has passed through the second region [for example, if it reaches through the rotating body unit 28 through the first ball passage 2681].
The starting port is not reached by the game ball that has passed through the first region.
The launching means can launch a game ball into either one of the first region and the second region.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, the players can be concentrated so that the game ball heads toward the second area. That is, the player can aim at the second region by adjusting the operation amount of the launching means, and can concentrate the player on the second region aiming.

again,
"A game board provided with the out port and the start port [for example, the game board 200] is provided, and the first region is located on one side [for example, the left side] in the left-right direction from the center of the game board. It ’s an area,
The second region is also a region located on one side [for example, the left side].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player can concentrate on the position where the game ball is launched. That is, since both the first region and the second region are located on the same one side, the player does not have to simply aim at the region located on the one side, and the second region is targeted. The game ball must be fired at the area located on one side of the target, and the player can be concentrated. Further, if the first region and the second region are adjacent to each other, the player may need to finely adjust the amount of operation of the launching means and can enjoy the adjustment. ..

again,
"Equipped with a ball direction changing means [for example, a third ball direction changing unit 263] that changes the route toward the game ball by changing the state.
The ball direction changing means is reached by a game ball that has passed through the second region.
The ball direction changing means can change the game ball to a second state [for example, a state in which the direction changing member 2631 is in a rightward posture] toward the second route [for example, the second ball route Rt2]. can be,
The ball direction changing means can change the game ball to a third state [for example, a state in which the direction changing member 2631 is in a left-facing posture] toward the third route [for example, the third ball route Rt3]. can be,
The second route is a route toward the starting port.
The third route is a route that does not go to the starting port.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The interest of the game is improved depending on whether or not the game ball heads for the second route.

The ball direction changing means changes the moving direction of the game ball.

again,
"A game nail is not provided between the second region and the ball direction changing means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

As long as the player can launch the game ball into the second area, the player can expect the ball to enter the starting port depending on the state of the ball direction changing means without considering the state of the game nail or the like. It is easy for players to increase their motivation to play.

again,
"Setting value setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values [for example, setting 1 to setting 6] having different advantages of the player [for example, setting change key 192 and setting change button 194]. ] Is equipped with a game table. 』\
Was also explained.

Since the game nail is not provided between the second area and the ball direction changing means, it is not necessary to consider the state of the game nail, and the player sets the game table when selecting the game table. You can focus on guessing the value.

again,
"The first route [for example, the first ball route Rt1] through which the game ball passing through the first region passes is provided.
The first route is a route where game balls that have passed through the third route join.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

It is possible to remove the game ball that does not go to the second route from the player's consciousness and concentrate the player's consciousness on the game ball that passes through the second route.

The first route is a route toward the out port.

again,
"The winning opening [for example, the first general winning opening 226A, the second general winning opening 226B] is provided.
The winning opening may be reached by a game ball that has passed through the first region [for example, a game ball that has passed through the low chance region 1241L and has passed through the first ball route Rt1].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even if the game ball is launched into the first area despite aiming at the second area, the winning opening can be expected and the player is immediately disappointed. You can eliminate it.

That is, the winning opening may arrive before the game ball that has passed through the first region reaches the out opening [for example, the out opening 240]. In addition, the winning opening may be reached by a game ball that has passed through the first route.

According to the above description
"It ’s a game table with multiple types of ball delay means.
One of the plurality of types of ball delay means is a first ball delay means [for example, a ball delay portion having an inverted conical surface (zone entrance ball delay portion 2650, first upstream ball delay portion 2651). , 1st downstream ball delay part 2652)]
One of the plurality of types of ball delay means is a second ball delay means [for example, deceleration rib 26r1 or ball trajectory changing rib 26r3].
The first ball delaying means can slow down the moving speed of the game ball by giving a first change [for example, a change of rotating the game ball in a spiral shape] to the movement of the game ball.
The second ball delaying means can slow down the moving speed of the game ball by giving a second change [for example, a change of swinging in the front-back direction] to the movement of the game ball.
The first change and the second change are different changes.
The first ball delay means and the second ball delay means are arranged in a common ball passage [for example, zone ball path 26Z1].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to make it difficult to perform fraudulent acts such as so-called slapstick goto, which is to hit the game table to illegally manipulate the behavior of the game ball. That is, even if the movement of the game ball is delayed by hitting the game table and the arrival timing of the game ball is adjusted to the desired timing of the cheating person, two types of ball delay means are arranged in the common ball passage. As a result, the delay is performed by each of the two types of ball delay means, and the timing adjusted by the fraudster is out of order, making it meaningless to make a rush. Moreover, the delay times may differ between the two types of ball delay means, and it is extremely difficult to match the desired timing.

The first ball delaying means may, for example, give a rotational change to the movement of the game ball, and the second ball delaying means may, for example, change the movement of the game ball. May be given.

again,
"A movable means [for example, a third ball direction changing section 263, a first ball direction changing section 261 and a rotating body unit 28] may be provided, in which the player's advantage may change depending on the timing at which the game ball arrives.
The movable means is provided on the downstream side of the first ball delay means.
The movable means is provided on the downstream side of the second ball delay means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even if an attempt is made to adjust the timing at which the game ball arrives at the movable means by hitting the game table, the delay is performed by each of the two types of ball delay means, and it becomes difficult to match the timing desired by the fraudster.

The movable means may be a ball direction changing means that changes the route toward the game ball by moving the movable portion, or the moving portion makes it easy to enter the starting port. It may be an accessory that becomes difficult or difficult.

again,
"With a starting port [for example, the first special drawing starting port 230],
The movable means is one that a game ball that has passed through the ball passage may reach [for example, a rotating body unit 28].
The movable means is in a state in which a movable portion [for example, a pair of ball inlets 2831, 2832 and a pair of inclined plates 2833, 2834] can enter the starting port and the starting port. It changes the state between the state where it is impossible to enter the ball,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even if the game table is hit to match the timing at which the game ball arrives at the movable means when the ball is easy to enter, the two types of ball delay means delay each, and the timing is desired by the fraudster. It becomes difficult to match.

Even if the movable means changes its state between a state in which it is easy to enter the ball into the starting port and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball into the starting port by operating the movable portion. good.

again,
"With a starting port [for example, the first special drawing starting port 230],
The movable means is reached by a game ball passing through the ball passage.
The movable means is a ball direction changing means [for example, a third ball direction changing portion 263] that changes the route toward the game ball by moving the movable portion.
The ball direction changing means may direct the game ball to a second route [for example, the second ball route Rt2].
The ball direction changing means may direct the game ball to a third route [for example, the third ball route Rt3].
The second route is a route toward the starting port.
The third route is a route that does not go to the starting port.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even if the movable portion hits the game table to match the timing at which the game ball arrives at the ball direction changing means with the timing at which the movable portion directs the game ball to the second route, the two types of ball delay means delay each. It is done and it becomes difficult to match the timing desired by the cheating person.

again,
"The ball passage has at least the first ball delay means [for example, a ball delay portion having an inverted conical surface (zone entrance ball delay portion 2650)], and the second ball delay means [for example, from the upstream side. The deceleration rib 26r1] and the first ball delay means [for example, a ball delay portion having an inverted conical surface (first upstream ball delay portion 2651)] are arranged in this order.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

By alternately arranging different types of ball delay means in this way, it becomes more difficult to hit the game table to match the timing.

The ball passage is provided with a plurality of arrangements of ball delay means in the order of the first ball delay means, the second ball delay means, and the first ball delay means from the upstream side to the downstream side. It may be the one.

again,
"The ball passage is, from the upstream side, at least the second ball delay means [for example, deceleration rib 26r1], the first ball delay means [for example, a ball delay portion having an inverted conical surface (first upstream ball). The ball delay means is arranged in the order of the delay portion 2651)] and the second ball delay means [for example, the deceleration rib 26r1].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

By alternately arranging different types of ball delay means in this way, it becomes more difficult to hit the game table to match the timing.

The ball passage is provided with a plurality of arrangements of ball delay means in the order of the second ball delay means, the first ball delay means, and the second ball delay means from the upstream side to the downstream side. It may be the one.

again,
"The first ball delaying means gives a change to rotate the game ball as the first change [for example, a change to rotate in a spiral shape].
The second ball delay means gives a change to swing the game ball as the second change [for example, a change to swing in the front-back direction].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Since the movement of the game ball is different between the first ball delay means and the second ball delay means, the delay time is likely to be different, and it becomes more difficult to hit the game table to match the timing.

again,
"In the first ball delay means, the width of the portion through which the game ball passes is narrower on the downstream side [for example, width W3] than on the upstream side [for example, width W1].
The width is the length in one of the directions orthogonal to the passing direction of the game ball [for example, the inner diameter].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

It is possible to make it easier for the game ball to come into contact with the wall surface constituting the first ball delay means and delay the moving speed of the contacted game ball.

Further, even if the portion through which the game ball passes is composed of an inverted conical surface [for example, an inverted conical surface 2653c] whose diameter is gradually reduced toward the downstream side, the first ball delaying means is provided. good. By doing so, the game ball in contact with the wall surface constituting the first ball delay means goes downstream while orbiting along the wall surface. That is, it is possible to slow down the moving speed of the game ball by moving toward the downstream side while moving in a spiral shape. If the timing at which the game ball comes into contact with the wall surface constituting the first ball delay means is late, the time for the game ball to go downstream while orbiting along the wall surface is shortened, and the moving speed of the game ball is reduced. The percentage decreases. Further, when the game ball does not come into contact with the wall surface constituting the first ball delay means, the moving speed of the game ball does not decrease. As described above, the degree to which the moving speed of the game ball decreases is not fixed, and the moving speed of the game ball becomes random. By doing this, it is possible to make it difficult to perform fraudulent acts such as roaring goto.

again,
"The second ball delaying means is one protruding into the ball passage [eg, deceleration rib 26r1 or ball trajectory changing rib 26r3].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second ball delaying means may be one that projects forward into the ball passage. By this second ball delay means, the game ball swings in the front-rear direction, and the moving speed of the game ball decreases.

The first ball delaying means may project in the ball passage in the first direction, and the second ball delaying means may project in the ball passage in the second direction. .. The first direction and the second direction are different. For example, the first direction is a lateral direction, and the first ball delaying means causes the game ball to swing in the left-right direction. The moving speed of the ball decreases. The second direction is the forward direction, and the second ball delaying means causes the game ball to swing in the front-rear direction, and the moving speed of the game ball decreases. That is, the first ball delaying means may give a change in which the movement of the game ball swings in a third direction (for example, a left-right direction), and the second ball delaying means may be a game. It may give a change that swings in the fourth direction (for example, the front-back direction) to the movement of the sphere.

According to the above description
"A game table equipped with a first ball passage [for example, an internal ball passage 226 Ur].
The first ball passage is the one in which the first winning opening [for example, the first general winning opening 226A] is arranged.
The first ball passage is the one in which the second winning opening [for example, the second general winning opening 226B] is arranged.
The first winning opening is such that a game ball that has passed through a common area [for example, an entrance IN at the upstream end] in the first ball passage can win a prize.
The second winning opening is such that a game ball that has passed through the common area can win a prize.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, both the first winning opening and the second winning opening are provided for the common area, rather than having a one-to-one relationship between the entrance of the ball and the winning opening. Those having a two-to-two relationship can make the game area (here, the first ball passage) more compact.

again,
"The first winning opening is located upstream of the second winning opening.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even if the game ball does not enter the first winning opening, the player can expect the game ball to enter the second winning opening.

again,
"The first winning opening is opened in the wall surface [for example, the winning opening opening plate 226U3].
In some cases, the game ball that has entered the first ball passage wins in the first winning opening, passes through the first winning opening, and is downstream from the position where the first winning opening is provided. It is configured to reach the side,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first winning opening also utilizes the space in the front-rear direction, and the first ball passage can be made compact. In addition, you can enjoy what happens to the whereabouts of the game ball that has passed the first winning opening.

again,
A second ball passage formed by a game nail [for example, a game nail 238] [for example, a passage connecting the downstream end Rt1e of the first ball route Rt1 and the tip end portion of the extended ball passage 226U1] is provided.
The first ball passage is a passage through which a game ball that has passed through the second ball passage enters.
The first ball passage is a ball passage without a game nail.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the second ball passage, the player may be worried about which direction the game ball will go due to the influence of the game nail, but once the game ball reaches even the first ball passage, the game There is no need to worry about the effects of nails, and players can enjoy what happens to the game ball with peace of mind.

again,
"The first ball passage is formed in a ball passage unit [for example, a ball passage unit 226U for a general winning opening].
The ball passage unit is transparent or translucent at least in part [for example, a portion of the transparent plate 226U5] so that the first winning opening is visible to the player.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

It becomes easier to check how the game ball wins the first prize opening.

again,
"The first winning opening is open in the front-back direction,
The second winning opening is open in the vertical direction.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

It is easier to confirm how the game ball wins in the first winning opening than in the second winning opening.

again,
"The first winning opening and the second winning opening are general winning openings having the same number of prize balls [for example, 4].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

It can be expected that a game ball that has not won a prize in the winning opening on the upstream side will win a prize in the winning opening on the downstream side, which is a general winning opening having the same number of winning balls.

again,
"Of the first winning opening and the second winning opening, the winning opening arranged on the downstream side [for example, the second general winning opening 226B] is the winning opening arranged on the upstream side [for example, It is configured to be easier to win than the 1st general winning opening 226A] [for example, the difference in the opening direction of the winning opening],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

It can be expected that a game ball that has not won a prize in the winning opening arranged on the upstream side will win a prize in the winning opening arranged on the downstream side.

again,
"A game ball that has not won a prize in the winning slot [for example, the first general winning slot 226A] arranged on the upstream side of the first winning slot and the second winning slot is placed on the downstream side. It is configured so that there are cases where a prize is won in the mouth [for example, the second general winning opening 226B], and there are cases where the player goes to the out opening [for example, the out opening 240] [for example, the case where the player jumps out from the out opening 226Uo]. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, it is configured so that a game ball that has not won a prize in the winning opening arranged on the upstream side of the first winning opening and the second winning opening may go to the out opening, and the game ball is out. If it does not go to the mouth, it is configured to win a prize in the winning opening arranged on the downstream side of the first winning opening and the second winning opening.

Next, the staging movable body unit will be described.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an staging movable body unit as an example.

FIG. 126 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the staging movable body unit 27U, in which the front side diagonally to the left of the paper surface is the front side and the diagonally right back side of the paper surface is the rear side.

The staging movable body unit 27U shown in FIG. 126 is composed of a three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1, a double-sided tape 27U2, a light guide plate 27U3, a light emitting substrate 27U4, and a mounting base member 27U5 in this order from the front side. The outer shapes of the double-sided tape 27U2, the light guide plate 27U3, the light emitting substrate 27U4, and the mounting base member 27U5 are substantially the same as the outer shape of the three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1, or slightly smaller than the outer shape of the three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1. These constituent members 27U1 to 27U5, including the three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1, are fixed by screws 27U6 and become an integral body, as will be described in detail later.

The three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1 was formed by vacuum forming or vacuum forming a resin film (for example, polystyrene resin) having a thickness of about 0.01 mm, similarly to the first three-dimensional film effector 271 and the like shown in FIG. 110 and the like. It is a thing. That is, it is not injection-molded, the cost of manufacturing the mold is suppressed, and the mold manufacturing period is short. In FIG. 126 (a), the three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1 is seen from the front side in the arrangement of the disassembled perspective views, but the three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1 is seen from the rear side (back side) on the three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1. The situation is also shown. The three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1 has a three-dimensional portion 27U1S in which a star-shaped portion is three-dimensionally formed. The three-dimensional portion 27U1S has a three-dimensional shape in which the center point of the star shape protrudes most forward. The three-dimensional portion 27U1S is a portion having transparency as a whole. The transparency referred to here may be transparent or translucent. The peripheral portion 27U1F surrounding the three-dimensional portion 27U1S may also be three-dimensionally decorated, but in this example, both the front surface (front surface) FS1 and the rear surface (back surface) BS1 of the peripheral portion 27U1F have a planar shape. .. A boss portion BSP is attached to the rear surface BS1 of the peripheral portion 27U1F. The boss portion BSP has a cylindrical shape and is provided with a screw hole in the central portion. The rear surface BS1 of the peripheral portion 27U1F in this example has not been subjected to any processing other than the attachment of the boss portion, and remains the surface of the flat resin film.

The three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1 may be formed by using a material according to the weight and strength, and is not limited to a resin film having a thickness of about 0.01 mm, but a film having a thickness of less than 0.1 mm, 0. It may be formed by using a sheet having a thickness of 1 mm to less than 0.8 mm, a plate having a thickness of 0.8 mm or more, and the like.

In the double-sided tape 27U2, the central portion 27U2C is cut out in a star shape according to the shape of the three-dimensional portion 27U1S. Further, a through hole 27U21 through which the boss portion BSP penetrates is also provided. Further, when integrated, a clearance hole 27U22 that is one size larger than the light emitting diode SLED is provided at a position where the light emitting diode SLED, which will be described later, is located, in accordance with the shape of the light emitting diode SLED. The double-sided tape 27U2 is opaque, for example, entirely black. Further, the double-sided tape 27U2 may be a thin one having a thickness of 1 mm or less, or a thick one having a cushioning property having a thickness of more than 1 mm.

The light guide plate 27U3 is a flat plate-shaped optical member having a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region 27U31. That is, the front surface of the light guide plate 27U3 is flat. Light is incident on the light guide plate 27U3 from the side, and the incident light is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the inside of the transmission region 27U31 appears to be emitting light. In this figure, the lens cut portion is schematically represented by a one-dot chain line. The transmission region 27U31 is provided according to the three-dimensional portion 27U1S, and the light emitted from the transmission region 27U31 toward the front irradiates the three-dimensional portion 27U1S from the rear. The size, position, and shape of the transmission region 27U31 do not have to completely match the size, position, and shape of the three-dimensional portion 27U1S, and may be any region as long as the three-dimensional portion 27U1S can be irradiated from behind. Further, the light guide plate 27U3 is provided with a storage portion 27U32 in which the light emitting diode SLED described later is housed, and the light emitting diode SLED is housed inside the storage portion 27U32. In this example, the storage portion 27U32 is an opening, but it may be a notch. Further, the light guide plate 27U3 is also provided with a through hole 27U33 through which the boss portion BSP penetrates.

The light emitting board 27U4 is a printed circuit board 27UPB on which a plurality of light emitting diodes SLEDs are mounted. These light emitting diodes SLEDs project forward, emit light from the side, and emit light laterally. In the storage portion 27U32 of the light guide plate 27U3, the light emitted laterally from the stored light emitting diode SLED enters from the thick portion of the light guide plate 27U3 at the edge defining the storage portion 27U32 and proceeds to the transmission region 27U31. Further, the light emitting substrate 27U4 is also provided with a through hole 27U41 through which the boss portion BSP penetrates.

The mounting base member 27U5 is a member having higher strength than the resin film constituting the three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1. The mounting base member 27U5 is provided with a boss receiving portion 27U51 to which the boss portion BSP is abutted. The boss receiving portion 27U51 is composed of a through hole provided in the mounting base member 27U5 and an edge portion on the front surface of the mounting base member 27U5 that defines the through hole, and a thread groove is cut in the through hole. be. Further, in the mounting base member 27U5, the central portion 27U5C is largely cut out to reduce the weight.

The three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1 is attached to the front surface of the light guide plate 27U3 by the double-sided tape 27U2. As described above, since the rear surface BS1 of the peripheral portion 27U1F remains the surface of the flat resin film except that the boss portion is attached, the double-sided tape 27U2 can be easily attached and can be easily adhered to the light guide plate 27U3. When this attachment is performed, the boss portion BSP penetrates the through hole 27U21 of the double-sided tape 27U2, and further penetrates the through hole 27U33 of the light guide plate 27U3. When the boss portion BSP penetrates through these through holes 27U21 and 27U33, alignment is performed and accurate positioning is performed. A light emitting substrate 27U4 is prepared on the rear surface side of the light guide plate 27U3 to which the three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1 is attached to the front surface, and the boss portion BSP is aligned with the through hole 27U41 of the light emitting substrate 27U4 and the through hole 27U41 is passed through. .. By doing so, the light guide plate 27U3 and the light emitting substrate 27U4 are accurately positioned, and the light emitting diode SLED of the light emitting substrate 27U4 is housed in the storage portion 27U32 of the light guide plate 27U3. The protruding end surface (front surface) of the light emitting diode SLED protruding forward is housed in the storage portion 27U32, but the double-sided tape 27U2 is provided with a relief hole 27U22 at the position of the light emitting diode SLED. Even if the protruding tip surface of the light emitting diode SLED protrudes from the storage portion 27U32, it is accepted by the escape hole 27U22. Finally, the light guide plate 27U3 and the light emitting substrate 27U4 through which the boss portion BSP of the three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1 communicates are attached to the mounting base member 27U5 using screws 27U6. The tip of the boss portion BSP is abutted against the boss receiving portion 27U51 of the mounting base member 27U5. That is, the tip of the boss portion BSP is abutted against the edge portion that defines the through hole in which the thread groove is cut. At this time, positioning is easy and accurate positioning is performed so that the through hole in the boss receiving portion 27U51 where the screw groove is cut and the screw hole provided in the central portion of the boss portion BSP are connected in a straight line. By inserting the screw 27U6 there and screwing it, the light guide plate 27U3 to which the three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1 is attached to the front surface with the double-sided tape 27U2, the light emitting substrate 27U4, and the mounting base member 27U5 are firmly integrated. Then, the staging movable body unit 27U is completed.

FIG. 126 (b) is a side view of the completed staging movable body unit 27U. In this side view, the left side is the front side and the right side is the rear side. In the staging movable body unit 27U shown in FIG. 126 (b), the three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1, the double-sided tape 27U2, the light guide plate 27U3, the light emitting substrate 27U4, and the mounting base member 27U5 are arranged in this order from the front side, and the screws 27U6 are arranged from the rear side. These constituent members 27U1 to 27U5 are integrated by being inserted. In addition, there is also a component member (for example, a three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1 or the like) whose thickness is exaggerated. As shown in FIG. 126 (b), it can be seen that the three-dimensional portion 27U1S protrudes forward. The effect movable body unit 27U is arranged so as to be able to move up and down above the decorative symbol display device 208, and moves up and down in an integrated manner in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. According to the effect movable body unit 27U, the three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1 can be fixed so as not to come off even if it is moved, while performing a light emission effect in which the three-dimensional portion 27U1S emits light.

In the staging movable unit 27U shown in FIG. 126, the double-sided tape 27U2 was entirely black, but since the central portion 27U2C was cut out in a star shape to match the shape of the three-dimensional portion 27U1S, the light guide plate 27U3 The light from the transmission region 27U31 reaches the three-dimensional portion 27U1S without being blocked by the double-sided tape 27U2, and the three-dimensional portion 27U1S that is entirely transparent is illuminated from the rear to produce light emission. The double-sided tape 27U2 may be transparent or translucent.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a modified example of the staging movable body unit 27U shown in FIG. 126.

The staging movable body unit 28U shown in FIG. 127 is composed of a three-dimensional film decorative body 28U1, a double-sided tape 28U2, a mounting base member 28U5, and a light emitting substrate 28U4 in this order from the front side. In this example as well, the outer shapes of the double-sided tape 28U2, the mounting base member 28U5, and the light emitting substrate 28U4 are almost the same as the outer shape of the three-dimensional film decoration 28U1, or slightly smaller than the outer shape of the three-dimensional film decoration 28U1, and the three-dimensional film decoration 28U1. These components, including the above, are fixed by screws 28U6 and become one.

The three-dimensional film decorative body 28U1 is also formed by vacuum forming or vacuum forming a resin film (for example, polystyrene resin) having a thickness of about 0.01 mm. Also in FIG. 127 (a), the arrangement of the disassembled perspective view shows the appearance of the three-dimensional film decorative body 28U1 viewed from the front side, but above that, the three-dimensional film decorative body 28U1 is viewed from the rear side (back side). The situation is also shown. This three-dimensional film decorative body 28U1 also has a three-dimensional portion 28U1S in which a star-shaped portion is three-dimensionally formed, like the three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1 shown in FIG. 126, but the three-dimensional shape is different. Further, the small star-shaped portion having a similar figure provided in the central portion of the three-dimensional portion 28U1S is opaque, and is painted black in this figure, and the line representing the three-dimensional shape is shown in white. The small star-shaped portion in the center may have a planar shape instead of a three-dimensional shape. Further, in the three-dimensional film decorative body 28U1, the peripheral portion 28U1F surrounding the three-dimensional portion 28U1S is also three-dimensionally decorated. The zigzag line shown on the front surface (front surface) FS2 of the peripheral portion 28U1F is a line representing a three-dimensional shape. On the other hand, the rear surface (back surface) BS2 of the peripheral portion 28U1F is coated with a silicon resin and finished in a planar shape. In this figure, the applied silicone resin is represented by hatching. Since the silicon resin is applied to the rear surface (back surface) BS2 of the peripheral portion 28U1F, the peripheral portion 28U1F is an impermeable region. Further, the same boss portion BSP as the three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1 shown in FIG. 126 is attached to the rear surface BS2 of the peripheral portion 28U1F.

The double-sided tape 28U2 is entirely transparent, and is not cut out to match the shape of the three-dimensional portion 28U1S. Further, the escape hole of the light emitting diode is not provided, and only the through hole 28U21 through which the boss portion BSP penetrates is provided. The thickness of the double-sided tape 28U2 may be 1 mm or less, or may be more than 1 mm having cushioning properties.

Unlike the staging movable body unit 27U shown in FIG. 126, the staging movable body unit 28U shown in FIG. 127 is not provided with a light guide plate, and the mounting base member 28U5 having a flat plate shape as a whole is transparent at the position of the light guide plate. Is placed. That is, the front surface of the mounting base member 28U5 is flat. The mounting base member 28U5 shown in FIG. 127 is also a member having higher strength than the resin film constituting the three-dimensional film decorative body 28U1. Further, the mounting base member 28U5 also has a lens function. The lens function referred to here is a function of refracting light from the rear side and diffusing or focusing it on the front side. However, the transparent mounting base member 28U5 may be a simple transparent plate having high strength. Further, it may be provided with a cutout that matches the shape of the three-dimensional portion 28U1S. In this case, it does not have to be transparent and may be opaque. The mounting base member 28U5 is provided with a through hole 28U51 through which the boss portion BSP penetrates.

The light emitting board 28U4 shown in FIG. 127 is the same as the light emitting board 27U4 shown in FIG. 126, in which a plurality of light emitting diodes FLEDs are mounted on the printed circuit board 28UPB. However, in these light emitting diode FLEDs, the front surface protruding forward emits light, and the light emission direction is forward. The front light emitting diode FLED is provided at a position inside the three-dimensional portion 28U1S, but may be provided at a position outside the three-dimensional portion 28U1S. Further, the light emitting substrate 28U4 is provided with a boss receiving portion 28U41 to which the boss portion BSP is abutted. The boss receiving portion 28U41 has a cylindrical shape protruding forward, and a thread groove is cut in the through hole in the central portion. The boss receiving portion 28U41 is longer than the protruding length of the light emitting diode FLED protruding forward, and also plays a role of securing a space for the light emitting diode FLED.

The three-dimensional film decorative body 28U1 is attached to the front surface of the mounting base member 28U5, which is also entirely transparent, by the double-sided tape 28U2, which is entirely transparent. As described above, since the rear surface BS2 of the peripheral portion 28U1F is coated with a silicon resin and finished in a flat shape, the double-sided tape 28U2 can be easily attached and can be easily adhered to the mounting base member 28U5. When this attachment is performed, the boss portion BSP penetrates the through hole 28U21 of the double-sided tape 28U2, and further penetrates the through hole 28U51 of the mounting base member 28U5. When the boss portion BSP penetrates through these through holes 28U21 and 28U51, alignment is performed and accurate positioning is performed. Next, the mounting base member 28U5 through which the boss portion BSP of the three-dimensional film decorative body 28U1 is inserted is mounted on the light emitting substrate 28U4 using screws 28U6. First, the tip of the boss portion BSP is abutted against the boss receiving portion 28U41 of the light emitting substrate 28U4. At this time, positioning is easy and accurate positioning is performed so that the through hole provided in the central portion of the boss receiving portion 28U41 and the screw hole provided in the central portion of the boss portion BSP are connected in a straight line. By inserting the screw 28U6 there and screwing it, the mounting base member 28U5 to which the three-dimensional film decorative body 28U1 is attached to the front surface with the double-sided tape 28U2 and the light emitting substrate 28U4 are firmly integrated and the staging movable body. Unit 28U is completed.

In the effect movable body unit 28U shown in FIG. 127, since the double-sided tape 28U2 is entirely transparent, the light from the front-emitting light emitting diode FLED reaches the three-dimensional portion 28U1S without being blocked by the double-sided tape 28U2. The three-dimensional portion 28U1S having a transparent portion is illuminated from the rear, and a light emitting effect is performed. As the double-sided tape 28U2, a double-sided tape 28U2 that is entirely transparent may be used, and a tape that has a central portion cut out according to the shape of the three-dimensional portion 28U1S, such as the double-sided tape 27U2 shown in FIG. 126, may be used. The effect movable body unit 28U is also arranged so as to be able to move up and down above the decorative symbol display device 208, and moves up and down as it is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Even in this effect movable body unit 28U, the three-dimensional film decorative body 28U1 can be fixed so as not to come off even if it is moved, while performing a light emission effect in which the three-dimensional portion 28U1S emits light.

Whether the effect movable body unit 27U shown in FIG. 126 or the effect movable body unit 28U shown in FIG. 127 is applied to a fixed effect unit such as the first three-dimensional film effect body 271 shown in FIG. 110. Is also possible.

The above description with reference to FIGS. 126 to 127 and the description with reference to FIGS. 110 to 118 can be appropriately combined. For example, the first three-dimensional film effector 271, the second three-dimensional film effector 272, the third three-dimensional film effector 273, and the fourth three-dimensional film effector 274 shown in FIG. 87 were fixed effectors, but were movable. It may be a staging body, and the things described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 127 can be combined or applied. On the contrary, the staging movable body unit 27U and the staging movable body unit 28U may be fixed staging units, and what has been described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 118 can be combined or applied. ..

According to the above description
"A light emitting board [for example, a light emitting board 27U4, a light emitting board 28U4] on which a light emitting element [for example, a light emitting diode SLED that emits light from the side surface and a light emitting diode FLED that emits light from the front surface] is mounted.
A decorative body having a three-dimensional shape [for example, a three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1, a three-dimensional film decorative body 28U1],
It is a game table equipped with
The decorative body has a transmissive portion (hereinafter, referred to as "first portion") that transmits light from the light emitting element (for example, all of the three-dimensional portion 27U1S and a part of the three-dimensional portion 28U1S]. can be,
The decorative body is attached to a member [for example, a light guide plate 27U3, a mounting base member 28U5] arranged behind the decorative body without blocking the light from the light emitting element.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

The decorative body can be fixed while performing a light emitting effect in which the first portion emits light.

The member arranged on the rear side of the decorative body may be a member arranged on the front side of the light emitting substrate. More specifically, it may be a light guide plate, a lens plate, or a base member (mounting plate) having higher strength than the decorative body. Further, in the decorative body, the first portion may have a three-dimensional shape, or the first portion may not have a three-dimensional shape. Alternatively, in the decorative body, a part of the three-dimensional shape portion may be the first portion, or the entire three-dimensional shape portion may be the first portion.

again,
"Equipped with a sticking means [for example, double-sided tape 27U2],
The decorative body is attached to the member by the attaching means.
The sticking means is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the first portion [for example, one cut out according to the shape of the three-dimensional portion 27U1S].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"Equipped with a sticking means [for example, double-sided tape 28U2],
The decorative body is attached to the member by the attaching means.
The sticking means is transparent [for example, the whole is transparent].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The decorative body has a second portion [for example, peripheral portion 27U1F, peripheral portion 28U1F] different from the first portion.
The sticking means is arranged on the back surface of the second portion [for example, BS1, BS2].
The second portion is one in which the portion where the sticking means is arranged is flat [for example, the surface of the flat resin film remains as it is, or silicon resin is applied and finished into a flat shape].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

This configuration makes it easy to attach the decorative body to the member.

The second portion may be a portion surrounding the first portion. Further, the decorative body may have a three-dimensional portion on the front side and a flat plate portion on the back side. For example, the decorative body may have a three-dimensional shape formed by vacuum formation or compressed air formation, and a flat plate portion may be formed by applying a silicon material to the back surface.

again,
"The second portion has a protrusion [for example, a boss portion BSP] on the back surface.
The member is provided with an alignment portion [for example, through hole 27U33, through hole 28U51] to be aligned with the protrusion.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The protrusion and the alignment portion accurately position the decorative body and the member.

The alignment portion may be one to which the protrusion is fitted, may be one through which the protrusion is inserted, or may be one to which the protrusion is abutted. ..

again,
"The alignment portion is the one through which the protrusion is inserted.
The protrusion has a boss shape into which a screw is screwed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The decoration is firmly fixed by the screws.

The decorative body may have a three-dimensional shape formed by vacuum formation or compressed air formation, and may have a silicon material coated on the back surface and a boss portion attached to the back surface.

again,
"The member is a transparent member arranged in front of the light emitting substrate [for example, a light guide plate 27U3, a mounting base member 28U5 that is entirely transparent].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

A light emitting effect is performed in which the light from the light emitting element passes through the member and the first portion emits light.

The member may be an optical member.

again,
"The member does not overlap with the light emitting element [for example, the light emitting diode SLED that emits light from the side surface] [for example, the light guide plate 27U3 provided with the storage portion 27U32 in which the light emitting diode SLED is housed].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The member can function as a light guide plate.

In addition, the light emitting element may be one in which the direction of emitting light is lateral.

again,
"The member is a member that overlaps with the light emitting element [for example, a light emitting diode FLED that emits light from the front surface] [for example, a mounting base member 28U5 that also has a lens function].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The member can function as a lens plate.

The light emitting element may emit light in the front direction.

again,
"The light emitting substrate [for example, light emitting substrate 27U4, light emitting substrate 28U4], the decorative body [for example, three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1, three-dimensional film decorative body 28U1], and the member [for example, light guide plate 27U3, mounting base member 28U5]. ] Is provided, and the effect unit [for example, the effect movable body unit 27U, the effect movable body unit 28U] is provided.
The staging unit is a movable unit.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the effect unit is a movable unit in which the light emitting substrate, the decorative body, and the member are integrated.

According to this configuration, even if the decorative body moves, it is difficult to remove it.

Next, the handle unit will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 (a) is an external perspective view of the handle unit, and FIG. 128 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit.

As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 128 (b), the handle unit HU is housed in the cylindrical handle base 82 fixed to the door 108 with the ball storage tray of the pachinko machine 100 and the inner space of the handle base 82. A handle detection unit 84 is provided, a dial 86 disposed in the opening of the handle base 82 and slidable with respect to the handle base 82, and a dial 86 arranged on the opposite side of the handle base 82 with the dial 86 interposed therebetween. It has a handle lighting unit 88 used for directing and the like, and a handle cover 89. In the description in FIG. 85 and the like, the combination of the handle cover 89 and the dial 86 is referred to as a firing handle 134, but the dial of the firing handle 134 in FIG. 85 and the dial 86 shown in FIG. 128 (b) are slightly different in shape. They are different, but they have the same functionality.

The handle base 82 is composed of a small diameter portion 821 and a large diameter portion 822 continuously formed on one end side of the small diameter portion 821. A dial guide groove 822a into which the dial 86 is fitted and slidable is formed on the outer edge of the opening of the large diameter portion 822 over the entire circumference. Further, in the inner space of the large diameter portion 822, a first shaft portion 822b, a second shaft portion 822c, and a third shaft portion 822d for fixing and supporting the handle lighting board mounting base 881 of the handle lighting unit 88 stand. It is set up.

The first shaft portion 822b also functions as a member that limits the rotation range (minimum rotation amount) of the dial 86 while guiding the dial 86 in a predetermined direction by engaging with the first guide groove 861 of the dial 86. The second shaft portion 822c is engaged with the second guide groove 862 of the dial 86 to guide the dial 86 in a predetermined direction and limit the rotation range (maximum rotation amount) of the dial 86. Also works.

The handle detection unit 84 includes a firing spring 841 for urging the dial 86 in the direction of the initial position, a transmission gear 842 connected to the dial 86, a volume gear 843 that meshes with the transmission gear 842, and a transmission gear 842. A volume bracket 844 that rotatably holds the volume gear 843 and a touch switch 845 that is arranged on the volume bracket 844, and a launch stop lever 846 that is rotatably supported by the volume bracket 844. It has a launch stop switch 847 capable of detecting the state of the launch stop lever 846.

The transmission gear 842 has a ball portion 8421 and a gear portion 8422. The ball portion 8421 is provided with a notched portion CT cut out from the front side to the rear side. This notch CT gradually narrows toward the rear side. A detailed description of these components will be described later, but when the dial 86 rotates, the transmission gear 842 rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the dial 86, and is meshed with the volume gear 843 to provide a dial. The amount of rotation of the 86 is transmitted to the volume gear 843 via the transmission gear 842. The volume gear 843 is configured by a potentiometer (variable resistor) capable of detecting the rotation angle of the dial 86, and can output the detected rotation angle information to the outside as a firing intensity adjustment signal. The volume gear 843 is electrically connected to a firing control unit (not shown) by a harness (not shown), and the firing control unit can detect the rotation angle of the dial 86 by a firing intensity adjustment signal. be. The launch control unit controls the launch intensity of the game ball according to the detected rotation angle of the dial 86.

The touch switch 845 is configured by a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the dial 86 is held by the player (whether or not the player is touching the dial 86). The touch switch 845 is electrically connected to a launch control unit (not shown) by a harness (not shown), and in the launch control unit, the dial 86 is set by the player by the touch switch signal output from the touch switch 845. It is possible to determine whether or not the player is being held (whether or not the player is touching the dial 86). In addition, the launch control unit also determines whether or not to launch the game ball based on the determination result. When it is determined that the player has not touched the dial 86, even if the dial 86 is rotated, the firing operation is not performed.

The firing stop switch 847 is composed of a sensor capable of detecting whether or not the firing stop lever 846 is being pressed. The launch stop switch 847 is electrically connected to a launch control unit (not shown) by a harness (not shown). In the launch control unit, a launch stop lever is generated by a launch stop switch signal output from the launch stop switch 847. It is possible to determine whether or not the 846 is pressed. In addition, the launch control unit also determines whether or not to launch the game ball based on the determination result. When it is determined that the firing stop lever 846 is being pressed, the firing operation is not performed even if the dial 86 is rotated.

The dial 86 has a first guide portion 861 engaged with the first shaft portion 822b of the handle base 82 and a second guide portion engaged with the second shaft portion 822c of the handle base 82 inside the operation portion 860. Has 862. Further, the operation unit 860 is provided with two operation convex portions 863, 864 protruding outward. By putting a finger on these operation convex portions 863, 864, the rotation operation of the dial 86 becomes easy. Further, as will be described in detail later, a boss portion 865 is provided at the center of the dial 86, and the boss portion 865 is connected to the transmission gear 842.

The handle lighting unit 88 has a handle lighting board mounting base 881 fixed to the handle base 82, and a handle lighting board 882 attached to the handle lighting board mounting base 881. The members (881 to 883) constituting these handle lighting units 88 are covered with a hemispherical handle cover 89.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the handle lighting board 882, and the light emitted from these LEDs is delivered to the outside through the handle cover 89. The handle lighting board 882 is electrically connected to a firing control unit (not shown) by a harness (not shown), and the firing control unit can control the lighting of the LED mounted on the handle lighting board 882. This LED is used for staging.

The handle cover 89 according to the present embodiment is configured to rotate in conjunction with the dial 86 when the player rotates the dial 86, but only the dial 86 is configured to rotate. May be good. Further, the handle cover 89 may be provided with a display function. Further, the handle cover 89 may be provided with a function of a lending operation button or a return operation button.

129 is a view showing the dial 86, FIG. 129 is a view of the dial 86 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 129 is a view of the dial 86 viewed from the rear side.

FIG. 129 shows an operation unit 860 provided with two operation protrusions 863, 864 protruding outward. Further, inside the operation unit 860, a first guide unit 861 and a second guide unit 862 are also shown.

Further, in FIG. 129 (b), a rear surface 860b of the operation unit 860 is also shown, and a plurality of ribs 860r projecting rearward are provided on the rear surface 860b at intervals in the circumferential direction. The dial 86 shown in FIG. 129 (b) is provided with a total of eight ribs 860r at intervals of 45 degrees. Details of these ribs 860r will be described later.

Further, FIG. 129 also shows a boss portion 865. A socket portion 8651 is provided at the center of the boss portion 865. The ball portion 8421 of the transmission gear 842 is rotatably fitted to the socket portion 8651 from the rear side, and the dial 86 and the transmission gear 842 are connected by a ball joint structure. Further, a part of the peripheral wall defining the socket portion 8651 is provided with an engaging portion 8651t protruding inward. As shown in FIG. 129 (a), the engaging portion 8651t is provided in the 2 o'clock direction in the front view. The engaging portion 8651t enters the cutout portion CT provided in the ball portion 8421 of the transmission gear 842.

FIG. 130A is a diagram schematically showing a ball joint structure of the dial 86 and the transmission gear 842. In FIG. 130A, the transmission gear 842 is shown, while the dial 86 shows only the boss portion 865. This figure shows the state of the boss portion 865 when viewed from the 2 o'clock direction in a front view. As described above, the socket portion 8651 is provided with an engaging portion 8651t in the direction of 2 o'clock when viewed from the front. Further, the notch CT provided in the ball portion 8421 of the transmission gear 842 is also provided in the direction of 2 o'clock in the front view of the ball portion 8421.

In FIG. 130 (a), the left side of the figure is the front side and the right side is the rear side. Further, the front side of the paper surface is in the direction of 2 o'clock in the front view, and the back side of the paper surface is in the direction of 8 o'clock. As is clear from FIG. 130 (a), the notch CT gradually narrows toward the rear side. On the other hand, the engaging portion 8651t housed in the cutout portion CT has the same thickness. In the rear end CTe of the notch CT, the engaging portion 8651t is engaged with the rear end CTe. The boss unit 865 is integrated with the operation unit 860 (see FIG. 129 and the like), and when the operation unit 860 is rotated, it rotates together with the operation unit 860. When the boss portion 865 rotates, the rear end CTe of the notch portion CT is pushed by the engaging portion 8651t, and the ball portion 8421 of the transmission gear 842 rotates. The gear portion 8422 of the transmission gear 842 has a rotating shaft 8422a on the rotation center axis of the ball portion 8421, and the volume bracket 844 shown in FIG. 128B is provided with a bearing for the rotating shaft 8422a. As a result, the gear portion 8421 of the transmission gear 842 rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the dial 86.

On the other hand, in the opening edge CTa of the notch CT, a clearance CTC is provided between the engagement portion 8651t and the ball portion 8421 of the transmission gear 842 is rotated in the socket portion 8651 by using this clearance CTC. It becomes possible to move. Therefore, even if the operation unit 860 is pushed in any direction of 360 degrees, the load applied to the operation unit 860 can be released by the amount of this clearance CTC. Therefore, the transmission gear 842 is less likely to break.

FIG. 130 (b) is a diagram schematically showing a transmission gear 842 and a volume gear 843 as viewed from the front side. In FIG. 130 (a), the front side of the paper surface is the front side, and the back side of the paper surface is the rear side. Also in FIG. 130 (b), the notch CT provided in the ball portion 8421 of the transmission gear 842 is shown.

The volume gear 843 is formed with a gear portion 8431 on a part of the outer periphery thereof. The gear portion 8431 meshes with the gear portion 8422 of the transmission gear 842, and when the transmission gear 842 rotates, the volume gear 843 also rotates. As a result, the volume gear 843 detects the rotation angle of the dial 86. Therefore, it is premised that the gear portion 8422 of the transmission gear 842 and the volume gear 843 must always be in mesh with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), the volume gear 843 is provided at a position deviated to the right by about 45 degrees from directly above the transmission gear 842.

Forces are applied to the operation unit 860 of the dial 86 from various directions, and all or part of the force is absorbed by the ball joint structure described with reference to FIG. 130 (a), and the force is absorbed by the transmission gear 842. Is not directly transmitted. Further, when a downward force is applied to the operation unit 860 of the dial 86, it is applied to the transmission gear 842 as an upward load. In this case, if the volume gear 843 is located directly above the transmission gear 842, the force not absorbed by the ball joint structure is 100% applied to the volume gear 843 as an upward load. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), if the volume gear 843 is located outside the position directly above the transmission gear 842, the load applied to the volume gear 843 is less than 100%, and damage to the volume gear 843 is reduced. can do.

FIG. 131 is a diagram schematically showing a connection structure between the dial 86 and the handle base 82. In FIG. 131, the left side of the figure is the front side and the right side is the rear side.

FIG. 131 shows a handle cover 89, a dial 86, and a handle base 82. In FIG. 131, the two operation convex portions 863 and 864 provided in the operation unit 860 are not shown. On the other hand, the rib 860r provided on the rear surface 860b of the operation unit 860 described in FIG. 129 (b) is shown.

As described above, the handle base 82 is formed with a dial guide groove 822a into which the dial 86 can be fitted and slidable over the entire circumference at the front end portion of the handle base 82. In FIG. 131, the line representing the groove is not shown, but the dial guide groove 822a and the rear end portion 86E of the dial 86 that fits into the dial guide groove 822a are located in the circumferential direction. The gap S1 is secured. Further, the rib 860r provided on the dial 86 projects rearward as described above. A gap S2 in the front-rear direction is secured between the rib 860r and the front end edge 82f of the handle base 82.

FIG. 131 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which a downward load is applied to the dial 86. The front side of the dial 86 shown in FIG. 131 (b) is tilted downward. The dial 86 can be tilted in this way due to the ball joint structure described with reference to FIG. 130 (a), and the gap S1 in the circumferential direction and the gap S2 in the front-rear direction shown in FIG. 131 (a) are secured. It depends on what is being done. Since the front side of the dial 86 is allowed to tilt downward, a downward load can be released to the handle base 82 side, and damage to the handle unit HU can be reduced. Further, since the gap S1 in the circumferential direction and the gap S2 in the front-rear direction are secured, it becomes difficult for the dial 86 and the handle base 82 to come into contact with each other, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the dial 86 and the handle base 82 come into contact with each other and are damaged. Further, when the downward load is released to the handle base 82 side, the worn portion of the dial 86 can be suppressed to the protruding tip portion of the rib 860r.

In the example described above, the dial 86 side is the socket portion 8651 and the transmission gear 842 side is the ball portion 8421. However, in the ball joint structure, the dial 86 side is the ball portion and the transmission gear 842 side is the ball portion. It may be configured as a socket portion.

According to the above description
"A game table equipped with a handle unit [for example, a handle unit HU].
The handle unit is
A rotatable dial [eg, dial 86] and
A volume [for example, volume gear 843] whose firing intensity of the game ball can be changed by rotating the dial.
And have
The load applied to the dial by the player is difficult to be transmitted to the volume.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

In the conventional handle unit in which the volume is directly connected to the dial, an accident has occurred in which the volume is damaged. Upon investigating the cause of this, it was found that a load (for example, a load that strongly presses downward) is applied to the dial by the player, and the volume is damaged by the load. The handle unit is reusable, and according to the game table, damage to the volume can be reduced, so that the handle unit can be easily reused.

It should be noted that the embodiment may have a structure that reduces the load transmitted to the volume by the operation of the dial performed by the player. As this mechanism, the ball joint structure described with reference to FIG. 129 (a) may be used, and the structure is such that the gap S1 in the circumferential direction and the gap S2 in the front-rear direction are secured as shown in FIG. 131 (a). You may.

again,
"The handle unit has a transmission means [for example, a transmission gear 842] that rotates when the dial rotates and transmits the rotation amount of the dial to the volume.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The load of the dial is not directly transmitted to the volume through the transmission means, and damage to the volume can be reduced.

The transmission means may be a rotary gear meshed with the volume.

Further, the amount of rotation is a concept including the rotation angle.

again,
"The handle unit is provided at a position where the volume is deviated from directly above the transmission means [for example, a position deviated to the right by about 45 degrees from directly above the transmission gear 842 as shown in FIG. 130 (b)]. Was done,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

It is premised that the volume and the transmission means must be firmly connected so that the amount of rotation of the dial can be transmitted. On the other hand, if the load applied to the dial by the player is 100% transmitted to the volume, the volume may be damaged. For example, when a downward load is applied to the dial, the transmission means is applied as an upward load. In this case, if the volume is located directly above the transmission means, an upward load is applied to the volume 100%, but if the volume is located outside the transmission means, the volume is located directly above the transmission means. It takes less than 100%, and damage to the volume can be reduced.

again,
"The handle unit has a ball joint structure in which a portion of the dial connected to the transmission means [for example, a socket portion 8651] and a portion of the transmission means connected to the dial [for example, a ball portion 8421] are formed. For example, it is connected by the ball joint structure shown in FIG. 130 (a)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The ball joint structure makes it difficult for the load applied to the dial by the player to be transmitted to the transmission means, and as a result, the load is also difficult to be transmitted to the volume, and damage to the volume can be reduced. can.

The portion of the transmission means connected to the dial is formed of a curved surface (spherical surface), and the portion of the dial connected to the transmission means is formed of a curved surface (spherical surface) corresponding to the curved surface. It may be.

again,
"The handle unit has a fixedly arranged handle base [for example, a handle base 82].
The dial is rotatable on the front side of the handle base and has a gap [for example, a circumferential gap S1 and a front-rear gap S2 shown in FIG. 131 (a)] with the handle base. It is a thing
The dial can be tilted with respect to the transmission means by the amount of the gap when a load is applied by the player [for example, the dial 86 shown in FIG. 131 (b)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, when a load is applied to the dial, the dial is configured so that the load can be released to the handle base side by the gap. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the handle base collides with the dial and both are damaged. As described above, according to this game table, when a load is applied in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the dial, the load of the dial is released to the handle base side to reduce damage to the handle unit. can.

again,
"The dial has ribs protruding toward the handle base at a plurality of points in the circumferential direction.
The gap is secured between the protruding tip of the rib and the handle base.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

When the load of the dial is released to the handle base side, the wear portion of the dial can be suppressed to the protruding tip portion of the rib.

Subsequently, the glass frame unit will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 85, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening of the front frame door 106, but a glass frame unit can be used instead of the transparent plate member 118. .. This glass frame unit is arranged in front of the game board 200 (see FIG. 87).

132 (a) is a view (front view) of the glass frame unit viewed from the front side (player side), and FIG. 132 (b) is a view (rear view) of the glass frame unit viewed from the rear side. be.

The glass frame unit GU shown in FIG. 131 has a front transparent plate member FG, a rear transparent plate member BG, and a frame member FR. The front transparent plate member FG is a plate member made of glass or resin and whose entire surface is transparent. The rear transparent plate member BG is also a plate member made of glass or resin and whose entire surface is transparent. The frame member FR matches the entire circumference of the pair of leg portions FR1 provided on the lower edge portion, the three fixing portions FR2 fixed to the front frame door 106 (see FIG. 87), and the front transparent plate member FG. It has a front frame portion FRF, an overhanging portion FRL overhanging to the left when viewed from the front side (front view), and a rear frame portion FRB that matches the entire circumference of the rear transparent plate member BG. The front transparent plate member FG is fitted inside the front frame portion FRF, and the rear transparent plate member BG is fitted inside the rear frame portion FRB. This glass frame unit GU is attached to the front frame door 106 from the back side with the front frame door 106 open. The attachment of the glass frame unit GU to the front frame door 106 will be described later.

FIG. 133 (a) is a view (front view) of the front transparent plate member FG as viewed from the front side (player side), and FIG. 13 (b) is a view of the rear transparent plate member BG in the same figure (a). It is a view (front view) seen from the front side (player side) like the front side transparent plate member FG of.

As shown in FIG. 133, the outer peripheral shape is different between the front transparent plate member FG and the rear transparent plate member BG. Specifically, the front transparent plate member FG and the rear transparent plate member BG have the same shape of the right half when viewed from the front side (front view), but the shape of the left half is different. That is, the rear transparent plate member BG has a curved shape (arc-shaped shape) on the entire left side, while the front transparent plate member FG has a substantially linear shape (strictly speaking, a gentle curved shape) on the left side end. ) Is a notched shape. The shape of this notched portion is the same as the shape of the overhanging portion FRL of the frame member FR. From the above, the rear transparent plate member BG is larger than the front transparent plate member FG, and the difference in shape between the two is the difference in shape at the left end portion.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a state in which the game board is viewed through the glass frame unit GU.

The glass frame unit GU shown in FIG. 134 is in a state of being attached to a front frame door 106 (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 134, the entire game area 124 of the game board 200 is visible through the glass frame unit GU. The game area 124 is located on the back side of the front transparent plate member FG and further on the back side of the rear transparent plate member BG, and is a region where the rear transparent plate member BG and the front transparent plate member FG overlap. It is located on the back side. The game area 124 referred to here is an area that does not include the guide area 201a between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204, and the game ball beyond the guide area 201a can roll. That is, it refers to a region where the game ball launched by the launching device 110 (see FIG. 85) can flow down beyond the return ball prevention piece 203. The front transparent plate member FG can see the entire game area 124 in front view, and the rear transparent plate member BG can also see the entire game area 124 in front view.

The rear transparent plate member BG has an outer shape corresponding to the shape of the outer rail 202, and the region inside the outer rail 202 can be visually recognized. On the other hand, the front transparent plate member FG has a shape in which the left end portion is cut out as described above, and this cutout portion corresponds to a portion that overlaps a part of the guide region 201a from the front side. Therefore, the rear transparent plate member BG overlaps the entire guide region 201a from the front side, and overlaps the game ball launched by the launching device 110 and rolling the guide region 201a along the outer rail 202 from the front side. However, it can be said that the front transparent plate member FG overlaps only a part of the guide region 201a from the front side, and is launched by the launching device 110 to be a game ball that rolls in the guide region 201a along the outer rail 202. It may not overlap from the front side. As described above, the rear transparent plate member BG has a wider area that overlaps the guide region 201a from the front side than the front transparent plate member FG.

The portion of the rear transparent plate member BG having no front transparent plate member FG on the front side (hereinafter, this portion is referred to as a wrap-free left end portion BGL) is covered by an overhanging portion FRL of the frame member FR. In order to make the behavior of the game ball visible in all areas of the guide area 201a, the overhanging portion FRL should be transparent, and members such as staging means should not be arranged in front of this lap-free left end portion BGL. It should be. The overhanging portion FRL in FIG. 134 is shown as being transparent. On the other hand, when giving priority to the degree of freedom in arranging members such as staging means, it is not necessary to make the overhanging portion FRL transparent. Since there is no front transparent plate member FG in front of the lapless left end portion BGL in the rear transparent plate member BG, a light emitting effect means such as an LED can be provided on the front side of the wrapless left end portion BGL. A display effect means such as a liquid crystal display device may be provided, or a movable effect means may be provided.

Next, a method of attaching the glass frame unit GU to the front frame door 106 will be described.

First, the front frame door 106 is opened, and the glass frame unit GU is attached to the front frame door 106 from the back side of the front frame door 106. At this time, the pair of legs FR1 are fitted into the lower edge of the front frame door 106 with the glass frame unit GU tilted slightly toward you and tilted. Next, the glass frame unit GU, which had been tilted a little, is pushed in so as to return to its original position.

FIG. 135 is a cross-sectional view showing the structure around the lapless left end portion BGL in the rear transparent plate member BG. This cross-sectional view is a view when the glass frame unit GU is cross-sectionald in the horizontal direction, and the front side of the paper surface is on the upper side. Further, in FIG. 135, the lower side in the figure is the front side, the upper side is the rear side, and the vertical direction in the figure is the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 100. Further, in FIG. 135, the left side of the figure is the outside and the right side is the inside. The left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100 coincides with the left-right direction in the figure.

In FIG. 135, the front transparent plate member FG is shown by hatching of diagonal lines inclined to the lower right, and the rear transparent plate member BG is shown by hatching of diagonal lines inclined to the lower left. Further, the frame member FR is shown by cross-hatching. Further, a light emitting effect means is arranged in front of the lap-free left end portion BGL, and in FIG. 135, a member LP having a U-shaped cross section, which is a part of the light emitting effect means, is shown by hatching vertical stripes. ing. The member LP having a U-shaped cross section is a member fixed to the front frame door 106 before the glass frame unit GU is attached to the front frame door 106.

FIG. 135 shows a state in which the front transparent plate member FG is fitted inside the front frame portion FRF and a state in which the rear transparent plate member BG is fitted inside the rear frame portion FRB. The frame member FR includes a front support portion FRS1 that supports the front transparent plate member FG fitted inside the front frame portion FRF from the rear side, and a rear transparent plate member BG fitted inside the rear frame portion FRB. The rear side support FRS2 that supports the above side from the front side is provided respectively. The front transparent plate member FG is positioned by the front frame portion FRF and the front support portion FRS1, and the rear frame portion FRB is positioned by the rear frame portion FRB and the rear support portion FRS2.

When the glass frame unit GU is attached to the front frame door 106, pushing the glass frame unit GU that has been tilted slightly so as to return it to the original position means pushing the glass frame unit GU in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 135. At this time, the glass frame unit GU is guided by the member LP having a U-shaped cross section and fits in a predetermined position of the front frame door 106. That is, first, of the frame member FR, the side portion FR3 extending in the front-rear direction between the front side support portion FRS1 and the rear side support FRS2 contacts the outer wall LPIo of the inner portion LPI of the member LP having a U-shaped cross section. Then, you will be guided to this outer wall LPIo. Next, the rear frame portion FRB of the frame member FR comes into contact with the inner wall LPOi of the outer portion LPO of the member LP having a U-shaped cross section, and is guided to the inner wall LPOi. By guiding the frame member FR in two stages in this way, the glass frame unit GU is positioned in the left-right direction. That is, the frame member FR is used for positioning the glass frame unit GU in the left-right direction. Further, the overhanging portion FRL of the frame member FR abuts on the rear end LPIb of the inner portion LPI of the member LP having a U-shaped cross section, and the glass frame unit GU is positioned in the front-rear direction. That is, the frame member FR is also used for positioning the glass frame unit GU in the front-rear direction.

After the glass frame unit GU is positioned in this way, the glass frame unit GU is fixed to the front frame door 106 by passing bolts (not shown) through the bolt holes FR21 of the three fixing portions FR2 shown in FIG. 132.

Further, as shown in FIG. 135, the distance GS between the front transparent plate member FG and the rear transparent plate member BG is based on the total length of the thickness FGW of the front transparent plate member FG and the thickness BGW of the rear transparent plate member BG. Is also wide. Even if you try to perform a fraudulent act of operating a game ball using a magnet, this configuration increases the thickness of the glass frame unit GU, making it difficult for the magnetic force of the magnet to reach the game ball, preventing fraudulent activity. be able to.

Further, as described above, since there is no front transparent plate member FG in front of the lapless left end portion BGL in the rear transparent plate member BG, the space on the front side of the wrapless left end portion BGL is used as the installation space for the staging means. When used, the thickness of the staging means can be increased by the wider the interval GS. In particular, the end of the front frame door 106 on the hinge portion 112 (see FIG. 85) side needs to avoid interference with the island equipment when the front frame door 106 is opened, and it is necessary to suppress the protrusion to the front side. However, by using the space on the front side of the lapless left end portion BGL as the installation space for the staging means, it is possible to suppress the protrusion of the staging means to the front side.

The rear transparent plate member BG may be provided with an opening (hole). Since the rear transparent plate member BG is provided with an opening, the shape of the front transparent plate member FG and the shape of the rear transparent plate member BG are different. Further, a movable staging means is arranged on the rear side (back side) of the rear transparent plate member BG, and a part or all of the movable staging means is placed on the front side of the rear transparent plate member BG through the opening. It may be movable. By doing this, it is possible to produce a large amount of use in the front-back direction. Further, the position where a part or all of the movable staging means is moved to the front side may be a position behind the front transparent plate member FG. That is, the movable staging means may be movable between the rear transparent plate member BG and the front transparent plate member FG. Further, the front transparent plate member FG and the rear transparent plate member BG have a parallel or substantially parallel positional relationship, but may have a non-parallel positional relationship. For example, the upper part of the front transparent plate member FG may be inclined to the front side or may be inclined to the rear side with respect to the vertical or substantially vertical rear transparent plate member BG. Alternatively, conversely, the upper portion of the rear transparent plate member BG may be inclined to the front side or the rear side with respect to the vertical or substantially vertical front transparent plate member FG. By doing so, the shape of the glass frame unit GU itself in the front-rear direction is emphasized.

According to the above description
"A game board [for example, a game board 200] having a game area [for example, a game area 124 that does not include the guide area 201a and can roll a game ball beyond the guide area 201a].
A glass frame unit [for example, glass] arranged in front of the game board and having a first transparent member [for example, a front transparent plate member FG] and a second transparent member [for example, a rear transparent plate member BG]. Frame unit GU] and
It is a game table equipped with
The first transparent member is located on the front side of the second transparent member.
The first transparent member is capable of visually recognizing the game area from the front view.
The second transparent member is capable of visually recognizing the game area from the front view.
At least a part [for example, the shape of the left end portion] is different between the shape of the first transparent member and the shape of the second transparent member.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

Since the shape of the first transparent member and the shape of the second transparent member are at least partially different, a portion where the first transparent member and the second transparent member do not overlap in the front-rear direction is formed. , It becomes possible to arrange other game members in this place, and the degree of freedom in designing the game table is improved.

again,
"A gap [for example, the gap GS shown in FIG. 135] is provided between the first transparent member and the second transparent member.
The interval is wider than the combined length of the thickness of the first transparent member [for example, the thickness FGW shown in FIG. 135] and the thickness of the second transparent member [for example, the thickness BGW shown in FIG. 135].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even if an attempt is made to perform a fraudulent act of operating a game ball using a magnet, the thickness of the glass frame unit makes it difficult for the magnetic force of the magnet to reach the game ball, and the fraudulent act can be prevented.

again,
"With a pair of launch rails [eg, outer rail 202 and inner rail 204],
The pair of launch rails guide the launched game balls toward the game area between the rails of the pair of launch rails [for example, the guide area 201a].
The second transparent member has a wider area of overlap from the front side between the rails than the first transparent member.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

A space on the front side of the second transparent member between the rails is vacant, and the degree of freedom in designing this space is improved.

The first transparent member may not overlap between the rails from the front side, and the second transparent member may overlap between the rails from the front side.

again,
A staging means capable of performing a staging [for example, a light emitting staging means having a member LP having a U-shaped cross section] is provided.
The staging means does not overlap the first transparent member from the front side, but
In the staging means, at least a part [for example, a member LP having a U-shaped cross section] overlaps a part of the second transparent member from the front side.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, in the staging means, the second transparent member may have a wider overlapping region from the front side than the first transparent member.

According to this game table, the degree of freedom in arranging the staging means can be increased. That is, the staging means is arranged in front of the second transparent member and in a place where the first transparent member is not present, and the front region is not obstructed by the first transparent member. Even if it is a prominent staging means, the degree of freedom of arrangement can be increased.

The effect may be a light emission effect, a display effect, or a movable effect.

again,
"A game door to which the glass frame unit is attached [for example, a front frame door 106] is provided.
A part of the outer peripheral edge of the first transparent member [for example, the right half of the outer peripheral shape in front view] and a part of the outer peripheral edge of the second transparent member [for example, the outer peripheral shape The right half of our, when viewed from the front] has the same shape,
Other part of the outer peripheral edge of the first transparent member (hereinafter referred to as "first part") [for example, the leftmost part of the outer peripheral shape in front view] and the second transparent part. The other part of the outer peripheral edge of the member (hereinafter referred to as "second part") [for example, the left end part without wrap BGL] has a different shape.
In the glass frame unit, the frame portion [for example, the side portion FR3 and the rear side frame portion FRB of the frame member FR] arranged between the first portion and the second portion is the glass frame unit. Is used for positioning in the left-right direction when the is attached to the game door.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the glass frame unit can be easily attached to the game door.

The first portion may have a straight line or a substantially linear shape, and the second portion may have a curved shape.

again,
"The glass frame unit is also used for positioning the frame portion [for example, the overhanging portion FRL of the frame member FR] in the front-rear direction when the glass frame unit is attached to the game door.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The game table also makes it easy to attach the glass frame unit to the game door.

The second transparent member may be provided with an opening. Further, the staging means is provided behind the second transparent member, and the staging means has a front end from a position behind the second transparent member through the opening and the second transparent member. May also be movable to a position in front of it. Further, the first transparent member and the second transparent member may be non-parallel.

FIG. 136 is a schematic view of the front frame door 106 and the door with a ball storage tray 108 as viewed from the back side. In FIG. 136, the front side of the paper surface is the rear side, and the back side of the paper surface is the front side.

The above-mentioned glass frame unit GU is fixed to the front frame door 106 shown in FIG. 136. Further, a part of the effect button 136 is shown on the front side (in the figure, the back side of the paper surface) of the door 108 with the ball storage plate located below the front frame door 106. The front frame door 106 and the door with a ball storage tray 108 may be integrated into a game door.

A ball storage dish 126 is shown in the upper part of the door 108 with a ball storage dish shown in FIG. 136, but since the ball storage dish 126 is provided on the front side, it is shown by a dotted line. Further, the ball storage dish 126 is shown on the right side, but this is because it is viewed from the back side, and is arranged on the left side in the front view. This ball storage dish 126 corresponds to a so-called upper dish. Also shown in FIG. 136 is a lower plate 128, which was not shown in FIG. 85. Since the lower plate 128 is also provided on the front side, it is shown by a dotted line. The lower plate 128 is also shown on the right side, but this is also because it is viewed from the back side, and it is arranged on the left side when viewed from the front.

A ball guide passage PAS for guiding the game ball to the launching device 110 (see FIG. 85) is connected to the ball storage dish 126. FIG. 136 shows a portion of the ball guide passage PAS provided on the door 108 with a ball storage plate, and also shows how the game ball B is flowing down. However, in reality, it is covered with a member constituting the ball guide passage PAS, and the inside of the ball guide passage PAS is invisible except for a certain portion described later. The ball guide passage PAS is also provided in the main body 104 (see FIG. 85) to which the launching device 110 is attached. That is, in the ball guide passage PAS, the part on the ball storage plate 126 side is provided on the door 108 with the ball storage plate, and the part on the launcher 110 side is provided on the main body side 104, and the door with the ball storage plate is provided. When the 108 is closed with respect to the main body 104, the portion on the ball storage dish 126 side and the portion on the launcher 110 side are connected to form one ball guide passage PAS. As shown in FIG. 136, a folded portion PAS1 is provided in a portion of the ball guide passage PAS provided on the door 108 with a ball storage dish. The game ball that has flowed down diagonally downward to the left from the ball storage dish 126 changes the flow direction diagonally downward to the right at this folding portion PAS1. After that, it reaches the branch port PAS2. At the branch port PAS2, the ball pulling passage BRC branches from the ball guiding passage PAS, and this ball pulling passage BRC is connected to the lower plate 128.

FIG. 137 is a side view schematically showing the ball guide passage PAS and the ball removal passage BRC. In FIG. 137, the right side of the figure is the front side and the left side is the rear side.

The branch port PAS2 (see FIG. 137 (c)) is provided with a movable lid PAS3 (see FIGS. 137 (a) and FIG. (B)) that opens and closes the branch port PAS2. When the ball removal button 130 shown in FIG. 85 is pressed, the movable lid PAS3 changes from a closed state to an open state, and the game balls stored in the ball storage plate 126 are discharged to the lower plate 128. FIGS. 137 (a) and FIG. 137 (b) show the movable lid PAS3 in the closed state, and the branch port PAS2 is closed by the movable lid PAS3. Further, the movable lid PAS3 in the closed state constitutes a part of the bottom wall of the ball guide passage PAS. Further, FIG. 137 (a) also shows a ball stop piece BSP. This ball stop piece BSP is a member that appears and disappears in the middle of the ball guide passage PAS. In both FIG. 137 and FIG. 136 above, the ball stop piece BSP is shown in gray. Further, in FIG. 136, the operating arm BSA connected to the ball stop piece BSP is also shown in gray. At the end of the actuating arm BSA, a protrusion BSA1 that engages with a push-in portion (not shown) provided in the main body portion 104 is provided. The actuating arm BSA shown in FIG. 136 is urged to the right by a spring (not shown). In the state where the actuating arm BSA is urged to the right, the ball stop piece BSP is located in the middle of the ball guide passage PAS, and the game ball is blocked by the ball stop piece BSP. In both FIGS. 136 and 137 (a), the state in which the ball stop piece BSP is located in the middle of the ball guide passage PAS is shown, and the game ball B is placed on the movable lid PAS3 by the ball stop piece BSP. It is blocked. FIG. 137 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the door 108 with a ball storage dish is opened. The ball guide passage PAS cannot pass the game ball when the door 108 with the ball storage plate is open.

When the door 108 with the ball storage dish is closed, the ball stop piece BSP has the protrusion BSA1 of the actuating arm BSA pushed by the pushing portion of the main body 104 against the rightward urging by a spring (not shown). It moves to the left (see the arrow shown in FIG. 136), and the ball stop piece BSP moves to a position off the ball guide passage PAS. FIGS. 137 (b) and FIG. 137 (c) show that the ball stop piece BSP has moved to a position away from the ball guide passage PAS, and FIGS. 137 (b) and FIG. It is a figure which shows the state which the door 108 with a ball storage dish is closed. The game ball B shown in FIG. 137 (b) flows down on the movable lid PAS3 in the closed state and heads for the launching device 110 along the ball guide passage PAS. As described above, the ball guide passage PAS allows the game ball to pass through when the door 108 with the ball storage plate is closed. On the other hand, in FIG. 137 (c), when the ball removal button 130 is pressed, the movable lid PAS3 is opened, and the game ball B passes through the branch port PAS2 from the middle of the ball guide passage PAS to remove the ball. Follow the passage BRC to the lower plate 128.

Next, the maintenance door body will be described. Although the maintenance door body is not shown in FIG. 136, FIG. 138 (a) is a schematic view of the door 108 with a ball storage tray showing the maintenance door body. FIG. 138 (a) is also a view of the door 108 with a ball storage plate viewed from the back side, with the front side of the paper surface being the rear side and the back side of the paper surface being the front side.

A maintenance hatch 1081 is provided on the back surface 108a of the door 108 with the ball storage plate at a portion including the folded portion PAS1 of the ball guide passage PAS. The maintenance door body MD has a window portion MD1, a rotation shaft MD2, and a locking mechanism MD3, and the window portion MD1 is rotatable around the rotation shaft MD2. The window MD1 covers the maintenance hatch 1081 so as to be openable and closable. When the window portion MD1 is closed (the state in which the maintenance hatch 1081 is closed), the window portion MD1 becomes a member constituting a portion including the folded portion PAS1 of the ball guide passage PAS. The rotation shaft MD2 is arranged between the upper and lower bearing portions 1082 provided on the back surface 108a of the door 108 with a ball storage dish. That is, the rotation shaft MD2 extends vertically on the right side of the maintenance hatch 1081.

In FIG. 138 (a), the parts that are actually visible are shown by dotted lines, and the maintenance door body MD is shown by solid lines. The window portion MD1 has transparency as a whole. The transparency may be transparent or translucent (the same applies in the present specification). From this window portion MD1, the portion of the ball guide passage PAS including the folded portion PAS1 can be visually recognized. It should be noted that the window portion MD1 may have transparency only in a part thereof, not in the whole. Alternatively, the window portion MD1 may be made opaque, and the window portion MD1 may be provided with a slit or a notch so that the portion of the ball guide passage PAS including the folded portion PAS1 can be visually recognized from the slit or the notch. good.

The locking mechanism MD3 is provided on the side (left side) opposite to the side on which the rotation shaft MD2 is provided, and is a mechanism for holding the window portion MD1 in a closed state. The locking mechanism MD3 is composed of a fitting portion MD31 and a spring portion MD32 provided between the fitting portion MD31 and the window portion MD1. The fitting portion MD31 shown in FIG. 138 (a) is fitted to the fitted portion 1083 provided on the back surface 108a of the door 108 with a ball storage dish, and the window portion MD1 is held in a closed state. In this locking mechanism MD3, the fitting portion MD31 fitted to the fitted portion 1083 can be removed by one finger operation (one-touch operation).

FIG. 138 (b) is a diagram showing a flow of removing the fitting portion MD31 fitted to the fitted portion 1083 by the operation of one finger. FIG. 138 is a view of the fitting portion MD31 viewed from directly above, with the lower side of the figure being the rear side (back side) and the upper side being the front side.

In the figure shown at the left end, the fitting portion MD31 is fitted to the fitted portion 1083. In this state, the index finger HF is attached to the left end piece MD311 of the fitting portion MD31.

Then, while pushing the left end piece MD311 with the index finger HF, pull it toward you. Then, as shown in the central figure, the spring portion MD32 bends, the left end piece MD311 tilts, and the fitting to the fitted portion 1083 begins to be disengaged.

If the left end piece 311 is continuously pulled toward you with the index finger HF as it is, the rotation of the window portion MD1 starts with the rotation shaft MD2 as the center of rotation, and the fitting portion MD31 is completely fitted as shown in the figure shown at the right end. It becomes possible to open the window portion MD1.

In this way, if the window MD1 can be opened with one finger, the window MD1 can be opened even when a cleaning tool such as a waste cloth or a cotton swab and a flashlight are held in both hands, and the maintainability is improved.

FIG. 139 is a schematic view showing a state in which the window portion MD1 is opened by 90 degrees or more.

In FIG. 139, the rotation shaft MD2 is shown, but the window portion MD1 opened by 90 degrees or more and the locking mechanism MD3 are not shown. Although not shown, in the state where the window portion MD1 is open (the state in which the maintenance hatch 1081 is released), the window portion MD1 does not constitute a portion including the folded portion PAS1 of the ball guide passage PAS.

By opening the window portion MD1, a finger can be inserted from the maintenance hatch 1081 to maintain the folded portion PAS1 and its peripheral portion in the ball guide passage PAS. For example, it is possible to easily wipe and clean the ball guide passage PAS and remove foreign substances such as dust. Since the folded-back portion PAS1 is a place where dirt is particularly likely to accumulate, it is preferable that the cleaning work can be easily performed.

Further, in FIG. 139, the game ball B blocked by the ball stop piece BSP (not shown here) stays up to the folded portion PAS1. The ball guide passage PAS is provided with a first rib PAS4 and a second rib PAS5 that make it difficult for the game ball B staying from the maintenance hatch 1081 to spill in the state where the window portion MD1 is open. That is, the first rib PAS4 covers a part of the passage path of the game ball of the folded portion PAS1 from the rear side (the front side of the paper in the figure), extends in the vertical direction, and protrudes upward toward the passage path side. Has a protrusion. The second rib PAS 5 covers the lower part of the passage path of the game ball heading diagonally downward to the right from the rear side (the front side of the paper in the figure), and is provided along the ball guide passage PAS. When opening the window MD1, the ball removal button 130 shown in FIG. 85 can be pressed to discharge the game ball B staying in the ball guide passage PAS to the lower plate 128, but the user is accustomed to the cleaning work. Even if an unattended game clerk accidentally opens the window MD1 without noticing the stagnation of the game ball B, the game ball B is less likely to spill from the maintenance hatch 1081, and maintainability is improved.

Further, the maintenance hatch 1081 blocked by the window portion MD1 is located on the upstream side of the movable lid PAS3 that opens and closes the branch port PAS2, and blocks the game ball with the door 108 with the ball storage plate open. It is located upstream of the ball stop piece BSP. Even when the window MD1 is closed, the game ball B staying in the ball guide passage PAS can be confirmed, and if necessary, the game ball B staying in the ball guide passage PAS can be checked with the ball removal button 130. By pressing, the movable lid PAS3 can be moved and discharged from the ball removal passage BRC.

The window MD1 was openable and closable with respect to the maintenance hatch 1081, but may be removable with respect to the maintenance hatch 1081.

Further, although the window portion MD1 is configured to open horizontally, it may open to the left or open to the right. Further, the window portion MD1 may have a vertically open (upper or lower open) configuration. In particular, by providing the rotation shaft MD2 extending in the horizontal direction above the maintenance hatch 1081 and opening it upward, the window portion MD1 closes the maintenance hatch 1081 by its own weight. If the door 108 with the ball storage plate is closed without closing the window MD1, the maintenance door body MD may be sandwiched between the door 108 with the ball storage plate and the main body 104 and may be damaged. If the window portion MD1 is opened upward, the window portion MD1 will not be forgotten to be closed, and when the door 108 with the ball storage tray is completely closed, the fitting portion MD31 will be pushed by the main body portion 104 and the fitting portion MD31 will be attached to the fitted portion 1083. Fit. Further, in the case of upward opening, when the window portion MD1 rotates upward to a certain angle (for example, 90 degrees or more and 180 degrees or less), the opened window portion MD1 is lightly locked and the open state is maintained. It may be configured to be. The term "lightly locked" as used herein means that the lock is released when the door 108 with the ball storage dish is moved to close it. This structure may be adopted in a side-opening configuration.

Further, although the window portion MD1 is merely a plate member, it may be a structure integrated with a ball feeding device. The ball feeding device referred to here is a device that feeds the flowing game balls one by one by operating the ball feeding member to the launching standby position of the launching device 110. More specifically, the case is provided with a rectifying path for rectifying the flowing game ball and a ball feeding member that operates once in response to one firing operation in the launching device 110. The structure in which the case is fixed to the window MD1 is configured such that the rectifying path is connected in the middle of the ball guide passage PAS in the closed state (the state in which the maintenance hatch 1081 is closed).

Further, the maintenance hatch 1081 is provided on the door 108 with the ball storage tray, and the window portion MD1 covers the maintenance hatch 1081 so as to be openable and closable. However, the maintenance hatch 1081 is provided on the main body portion 104. May be. Even in this embodiment, the window MD1 covers the maintenance hatch 1081 provided on the main body 104 so as to be openable and closable, and a part of the ball guide passage PAS provided on the main body 104 is the window. It becomes visible from MD1. Further, as described above, the maintenance hatch 1081 provided on the main body portion 104 may be covered with a structure in which the window portion MD1 and the ball feeding device are integrated so as to be openable and closable.

According to the above description
"A ball plate that can store game balls [for example, a ball storage plate 126],
A launching means capable of launching a game ball [for example, launching device 110],
A game table provided with a ball passage [for example, a ball guide passage PAS] that connects the ball plate to the launching means.
A structure [eg, window MD1] that can change from one state of the first state [for example, closed state] and the second state [for example, open state] to the other state is provided.
In the first state, the structure constitutes a certain part of the ball passage [for example, a part including the folded part PAS1 (a part provided with the maintenance hatch 1081)].
The structure does not constitute the certain part in the second state.
The structure is such that a part of the spherical passage is visible in the first state [for example, the whole is transparent].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

That is, the ball passage is partially visible by the structure in the first state. For example, the structure is provided with a notch or a through hole, and the ball passage is partially visible by the notch or the through hole in the structure in the first state. It may be anything.
-According to this game table, even if the structure is in the first state, it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of dirt accumulated in the ball passage, and the maintainability is good.

The launching means may launch the gaming ball supplied through the ball passage toward the gaming area.

again,
"The structure can be changed from the first state to the second state by the operation of one finger [for example, FIG. 138 (b)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The structure can be opened even with a cleaning tool such as a waste cloth or cotton swab and a flashlight in both hands, improving maintainability.

again,
"A game door that can be opened and closed [for example, a door 108 with a ball storage plate] provided with the ball plate.
Ball-stopping means [for example, ball-stopping piece BSP],
Equipped with
The ball passage [for example, the ball guide passage PAS] allows the game ball to pass through when the game door is closed [for example, FIG. 137 (b)].
The ball stopping means blocks the game ball at a position in the middle of the ball passage in a state where the game door is open [for example, FIG. 137 (a)].
The certain part is a part on the upstream side in the passing direction of the game ball from the intermediate position.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to confirm the game ball staying in the ball passage before cleaning the structure in the second state.

again,
"A ball removal passage [for example, a ball removal passage BRC] branched from a branch port [for example, branch port PAS2] provided in the middle of the ball passage.
Movable means [for example, movable lid PAS3] and
Equipped with
The movable means opens and closes the branch port by moving.
The certain part is a part on the upstream side in the passing direction of the game ball from the branch opening.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the structure is in the first state, the game ball staying in the ball passage can be confirmed, and if necessary, the game ball staying in the ball passage can be confirmed. , The movable means can be moved and discharged from the ball removal passage.

Regarding the positional relationship between the intermediate position and the branch opening, the intermediate position may be on the upstream side in the passing direction of the game ball, or the branch opening may be on the upstream side in the passing direction of the game ball. good.

again,
"The ball passage [for example, the ball guide passage PAS] is a place of the certain part [for example, when the structure [for example, the window MD1] is in the second state [for example, an open state]. For example, a rib [for example, the first rib PAS4, the second rib PAS5] that makes it difficult for the game ball to spill is formed from the place where the maintenance hatch 1081 is provided.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even if a game clerk who is not accustomed to cleaning work accidentally changes the structure to the second state without noticing the retention of the game ball, the game ball does not easily spill from a certain part and is easy to maintain. Is improved.

again,
"The ball passage is provided with a folded portion [for example, the folded portion PAS1].
The certain part is a part of the ball passage including the folded part.
The structure [for example, the window portion MD1] makes the folded portion visible in the first state [for example, the closed state].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The folded-back portion is a place where dirt is likely to accumulate, and even if the structure is in the first state, the folded-back portion is visible, so that maintainability is improved.

again,
"The structure [for example, the window MD1] is at least partially transparent.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even if the structure is in the first state, it becomes easy to confirm the presence or absence of dirt (dirt on a part of the ball passage) in the back of the structure.

The structure may be entirely transparent or only a part thereof may be transparent. If the structure has transparency as a whole, the state of the certain portion can be easily confirmed. Further, having the above-mentioned transparency may be transparent or translucent.

Next, an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described.

FIG. 140 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 100h shown in FIG. 140, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 101h to the gaming area 102h is discharged from the gaming area 102h and can be supplied to the launching means 101h again. Further, a display means 103h for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 102h on the front of the game table. The ball storage dish 126, which is shown in 85 and can be contacted by the player, is not provided. The ball guide passage PAS described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139 can be applied to a passage for sending a circulating game ball to the launcher.

As described above, the pachinko machine 100h shown in FIG. 140 is used by enclosing a ball and circulating the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine. The enclosed ball is used as a launching ball and the ball is discharged. May be performed by credit.

The actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, etc. described above, the constituent requirement can be changed to another embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, and the like. And various examples may be applied. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, etc. Even if it is applied to various examples, it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

100 Pachinko machine 102 Outer frame 104 Main body 106 Front frame Door 108 Ball storage plate Door 110 Launcher 118 Transparent plate member 124 Game area 126 Ball storage plate 126 Ball storage plate 130 Ball removal button 134 Ball launch handle 136 Direction button 140 Rental operation Button 152 Payout device 190 Operation key unit 191 Up button 192 Down button 200 Game board 201 Game board 206 Direction lamp 207 Sub liquid crystal display device 208 Decorative symbol display device 210 Ordinary symbol display device 212 1st special symbol display device 214 2nd special figure Display device 226, 227 General winning opening 226U General winning opening ball passage unit 226Ur Internal ball passage IN entrance 226A 1st general winning opening 226B 2nd general winning opening 228 Normal figure starting port 23 Attacker unit 230 1st special drawing starting port 232 2nd special figure Start port 234 1st variable winning opening, variable winning opening 2341 Door member 235 2nd variable winning opening 2351 Door member RR Rolling passage FR Fall passage JJ Ball bounce prevention ridge UJ2 Lower extension 238, 239 Game nail 240, 241,242,243,244 Out port 23 Starting chucker BU ball passage unit 2451 Back ball passage for out port 2261 Back ball passage for general winning opening JR confluence back ball passage LED, LED', SLED, FLED light emitting diode 25'Attacker unit 26Z Electric distribution zone 26Z1 Zone ball path 26r1 Deceleration rib 26r3 Ball trajectory change rib 261 1st ball direction change part 263 3rd ball direction change part 2650 Zone entrance ball delay part 2651 1st upstream ball delay part 2652 No. 1 Downstream ball delay part 2681 1st ball passage 28 Rotating body unit 27U, 28U Directional movable body unit 27U4, 28U4 Light emitting board 27U1,28U1 Three-dimensional film decorative body 27U1S, 28U1S Three-dimensional part 27U1F, 28U1F Peripheral part 27U2, 28U2 Double-sided tape 27U3 Optical plate 28U5 Mounting base member HU Handle unit 82 Handle base 842 Transmission gear 8421 Ball part 843 Volume gear 86 Dial 8651 Socket part GU Glass frame unit FG Front transparent plate member FGW Thickness BG Rear transparent plate member BGW Thickness BGL No wrap left end part GS Spacing FR Frame member FRL Overhanging part LP Cross-section U-shaped member PAS Ball guide passage PAS1 Folded part PAS2 Branch port PAS3 Movable lid BSP Ball stop piece BRC Ball removal passage MD Maintenance door MD1 Window MD2 Rotating shaft MD3 Locking mechanism 1081 Maintenance hatch 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 1st sub control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
500 2nd sub control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 Memory 7 1st effect movable body 71 Light emitting part 8 2nd effect movable body 81 Upper arm part 82 Forearm part 821 First finger (thumb)
822 Second finger (index finger)
823 3rd finger (middle finger)
824 4th finger (ring finger)
825 5th finger (pinkie)
h11, h12 Hold icon h0 Variable icon LT1 to LT5 Reach title ZT Zone title MC Music selection display MD Music selection decision display LH1 Left-handed first display LH2 Left-handed second display RH1 Right-handed first display RH2 Right-handed second display

Claims (7)

A light emitting board on which a light emitting element is mounted and a light emitting board
A ball passage unit in which a ball passage through which a game ball passes is formed, and
It is a game table equipped with
The light emitting substrate is fixed to the ball passage unit.
A game table featuring that. The game console according to claim 1.
The light emitting substrate is fixed to the front side of the ball passage unit.
A game table featuring that. The game console according to claim 1 or 2.
Equipped with a first entrance provided in the game area,
The ball passage unit is formed with a ball passage through which a game ball that has entered the first entry port passes.
A game table featuring that. The game console according to claim 3.
Equipped with a second entrance provided in the game area,
The ball passage unit is formed with a first ball passage through which a game ball that has entered the first entry port passes.
The ball passage unit is formed with a second ball passage through which a game ball that has entered the second entrance is passed.
The ball passage unit is formed by forming the first ball passage and the second ball passage in parallel.
The light emitting substrate is fixed to the ball passage unit in a state of being in contact with the portion of the first ball passage and the portion of the second ball passage in the ball passage unit.
A game table featuring that. The game console according to claim 4.
The ball passage unit has a third ball passage formed therein.
The third ball passage is for a game ball that has passed through the first ball passage.
The third ball passage also passes a game ball that has passed through the second ball passage.
A game table featuring that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
Equipped with a winning opening unit with a winning opening
The winning opening unit is arranged in front of the light emitting substrate.
A game table featuring that. The game console according to claim 5.
Equipped with a variable winning opening
The third ball passage is for the game ball that has won a prize to the variable winning opening.
A game table featuring that.

Images